LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 


(rl  KT    OK 


Deceive  J 
^Accessions  No. 


AN  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD 


AN    INDUCTIVE 


LATIIST    METHO 


BY 

WILLIAM   R.  HARPER,  Pn.D, 

PROFESSOK    IN    YALK    UXIVEKSITV 
AND 

ISAAC    B.  BURGESS,  A.M. 

INSTRUCTOR  IN  PUBLIC   LATIN  SCHOOL.    BOSTON,   MASS. 


/VV   0*™* 

\Sf.-r^<,. 

..  'J.*_*_  K^?^^ 

NEW    YORK     •  :  •    CINCINNATI    •  I  •    CHICAGO 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


FROM  THE  PRESS  OF 
IVISON,  BLAKEMA.V  &  COMPANY. 


Copyright,  1888, 
BY  JivisoN,  BLAKEMAN,  AND  COMPANY 


/'  /ta>£ 

H  V*' 

*< 


PREFACE. 


THERE  is  clearly  no  demand  for  a  new  Introductory  Latin  book, 
unless  it  is  one  which  differs  essentially  from  those  already  in  use. 
The  score  or  more  of  methods"  which  have  appeared  in  this  country 
are  constructed  practically  according  to  the  same  idea.  Though  many 
of  them  are  scholarly  and  progressive,  all  are  merely  companions  to 
the  grammar,  and  not  guides  to  the  language.  The  existence  of  so 
many  "  methods  "  indicates  a  feeling  that,  thus  far,  an  entirely  satis- 
factory introductory  book  has  not  been  found.  If  anything  addi- 
tional were  needed  to  justify  the  existence  of  this  feeling,  it  would 
be  found  in  the  lack  of  interest  which  characterizes  the  average 
student  of  Latin,  and  in  the  confessedly  small  results  accomplished  in 
college. 

The  method  presented  in  this  book  claims  to  overcome  both  of 
these  difficulties.  It  will  arouse  enthusiasm  ;  it  will  increase  results. 
It  is  not  supposed  that  this  claim  will  be  accepted  until  the  merits 
of  the  method  have  been  tested  in  the  class-room  ;  but  the  following 
outline  of  the  plan  of  the  work  which  it  advocates  may,  perhaps, 
show  the  value  of  the  principles  on  which  the  claim  is  based. 

1.  A  sentence  or  part  of  a  sentence  of  the  original  text  (in 
later  work,  even  a  section)  is  placed  before  the  pupil.  The  pronun- 
ciation and  exact  translation  of  each  word  are  furnished  him.  By  the 
aid  which  the  teacher  gives  him  in  advance,  and  with  the  help  given 
in  the  book,  lie  thoroughly  masters  the  words  and  phrases  of  this 


vi  PREFACE. 

sentence  or  section.  His  knowledge  is  tested  by  requiring  him  to 
recite  or  write  the  Latin  sentence,  with  only  the  translation  before 
his  eye. 

2.  In   connection  with  this  mastery  of  the  words  and  phrases  of 
the  sentence  assigned,  the  pupil  reads  and  digests  the  contents  of  the 
"  Notes  "  on    these  words.      This  study  accomplishes   two    things  : 
first,  the  careful  examination  of  each  remark,  with  its  application  to 
the  work  in   hand,  aids  in  fixing   more  firmly  in  mind  the  word 
sought  to  be  mastered  ;  second,  grammatical  material  is  being  col- 
lected from  the  very  beginning  of  his  work. 

3.  The  "Text"  and  "Notes  "  having  been  learned,  the -next  step 
is  one  of  a  more  general  character.     Out  of  the  material  which  has 
thus  far  been  mastered,  those  principles  which  are  of  most  impor- 
tance, and  which  the  pupil  himself  will  be  most  likely  to  recognize, 
are  pointed  out  under  the  head  of  "  Observations."    The  pupil  may  be 
brought  to  see  these  points  for  himself  before   having  his  attention 
called  to  them  in  the  "  Lesson." 

4.  The  grammatical  material   obtained  in  the  "  Lesson  "  is  now 
systematized  and   arranged  with  references  to  the  two  leading  gram- 
mars.    This  not  only  furnishes  a  review  of  what  already  has  been 
done,  but  also   enables  the  pupil  to  see  the  connection  of  each  new 
fact  or  principle  with  the  others  to  which  it  stands  related. 

5.  The  words   of  the  sentence  or  section  are  now  separated  from 
their  context  and  placed  in  alphabetical  order.     Thus  separated,  they 
form  the  basis  of  additional  study.     In  some  cases  words  similar  in 
form  and  meaning  to  familiar  English  words  are  inserted  in  order  to 
allow  greater  variety  in  the  exercise. 

6.  In  order  to  prevent  the  memorizing  of  the  Latin  text  without  a 
clear  idea  of  the  force  of  each  word,  to  impress  more  firmly  on  the 
mind  the  words  and  phrases  of  the  text,  and  to  drill  the  pupil  in 
prose  composition,  —  "  Exercises,"  Latin  into  English  and  English 
into  Latin,  are  given.     These  are  always  based  upon  the  sentence  or 
section  which  furnishes  the  basis  of  the  "  Lesson."     Prose  composi- 
tion taught  in  this  manner  ceases  to  be  dreaded  by  the  pupil,  and 
becomes,  indeed,  a  source  of  delight. 


PREFACE.  Vll 

7.  Once  more  the  leading  points  of  the  entire  lesson,  whether 
suggested  in  the  "  Notes,"  the  "  Observations,"  or  the  "  Grammar 
Lesson,"  come  up  for  consideration  under  the  head  of  "  Topics  for 
Study."  Upon  each  topic  the  student  is  expected  to  make  a  state- 
ment of  what  he  knows  (not  of  what  has  been  said  in  the  book).  If 
his  statement  is  not  sufficiently  full,  it  will  be  criticised  by  the 
class. 

From  this  outline  the  idea  of  the  Method  will  be  apparent.  It 
proposes  :  first,  to  gain  an  accurate  and  thorough  knowledge  of  some 
of  the  facts  of  the  language  ;  second,  to  learn  from  these  facts  the 
principles  which  they  illustrate,  and  by  which  they  are  regulated , 
third,  to  apply  these  principles  in  the  further  progress  of  the  work. 
A  few  words  in  explanation  of  this  statement  are  needed  : 

1.  The  method  employed  is  inductive,  and  yet  a  slight  departure  is 
made  at  times  to  allow  a   more  complete  treatment  of  a  subject,  in 
order  to  elucidate  some  detail  of  which  an  example  has  not  occurred. 

2.  The  term   "facts,"   as  used,  includes  data  from   every  source. 
Special  emphasis  is  laid  upon  the  collecting  of  facts  from  the  living 
page  of  the  original  text;  but  paradigms  and  vocabularies  are  also 
to  be  used  for  this  purpose. 

3.  It  is  not  to  be  supposed  that  a  long  time  must  elapse  before  the 
beginner  is  ready  to  take  hold  of  principles.     As  a  matter  of  fact,  he 
is  taught  important  principles,  and  that,  too,  inductively,  during  the 
first  hour's  work.     The   three  processes   are  all  the  while  going  on 
together.      He   is   increasing   the   store  of   facts   at   his    command, 
learning  from  the   facts   thus  acquired  new  principles,  and  applying 
these  principles  to  the  new  forms  continually  coming  to  his  notice. 

4.  The  memorizing  of  the  facts  of  a  language,  before  a  knowl- 
edge  of  the   principles    has    been  acquired,  is,  indeed,  a   piece    of 
drudgery,  and  yet  not  so  great  as  is  the  memorizing  of  grammar  with- 
out a  knowledge  of  the  facts.     Nor  will  it  long  remain  drudgery ; 
for  very  soon  the  student  begins  to  see  analogies,  to  compare  this 
word  with  that,  and  in  short  to  make  his  own  grammar. 

The  Lessons  cover  Chapters  1-20  of  Book  I.  of  Caesar's  Commen- 
taries on  the  Gallic  War,  and  include  a  formal  study  of  almost  every 


viii  PREFACE. 

portion  of  the  grammar.  Special  attention  is  given  to  review,  lessons 
for  the  purpose  being  frequently  inserted.  Some  additional  items  of 
interest  to  teachers  will  be  found  elsewhere. 

Professor  Lewis  Stuart,  Ph.D.,  of  Alma  College,  Alma,  Mich.,  and 
Professor  George  H.  Horswell,  Ph.D.,  of  the  North-Western  Univer- 
sity, Evanston,  111.,  were  at  first  associated  in  the  work  of  preparing 
the  book  ;  but  ill-health  and  the  pressing  duties  of  their  positions 
compelled  them  to  withdraw.  The  material  of  Appendix  C,  viz. 
the  Latin  Word-Lists,  has  been  kindly  furnished  by  Professor 
Horswell. 

The  sheets,  as  well  as  a  part  of  the  manuscript,  have  been  read  by 
Professor  Charles  Chandler,  Denison  University,  Granville,  Ohio.  It 
is  not  to  be  understood  that  Professor  Chandler  is  responsible  for 
all  the  statements  contained  in  the  book ;  the  authors,  however, 
desire  hereby  to  acknowledge  the  great  value  of  his  contributions 
to  the  work.  Many  valuable  hints  have  been  received  also  from 
Professor  William  E.  Waters,  Ph.D.,  Cincinnati,  Ohio,  and  from  Pro- 
fessor F.  J.  Miller,  M.A.,  Worcester,  Mass. 

It  is  hardly  to  be  expected  that  the  first  edition  of  a  book  con- 
structed upon  a  plan  so  different  from  any  heretofore  employed  will 
be  found  perfect  in  execution.  For  suggestions,  corrections,  and 
criticisms,  proper  acknowledgment  will  be  made.  It  is  hoped  that 
this  book  may  receive  from  instructors  of  Latin  as  kindly  a  reception 
as  has  been  accorded  by  instructors  of  Hebrew  to  the  Inductive 
Hebrew  Method. 

WILLIAM  R.   HARPER, 
ISAAC  B.  BURGESS. 

AUGUST  18,  1888. 


SUGGESTIONS  TO  TEACHERS. 


1.  Use  twenty  minutes  of  every  hour  in  explaining  to  the  class  the  new 
points  of  the  advance-lesson  ;  and  in  no  case  ask  a.  class  to  prepare  a  lesson 
which  has  not  thus  been  explained. 

2.  Do  not  fail  to  require  the  pupil  so  to  master  the  text  that,  with  the  Eng- 
lish translation  before  his  eye,  he  can  repeat  or  write  the  original  with  accu- 
racy and  without  hesitation  ;  and   with  every  advance-lesson  let  the  text  of 
the  ten  or  twelve  preceding  lessons  be  reviewed. 

3.  Let  every  point  referred  to  in  the  "  Notes  "  be  called  up  in  one  form  or 
another  in  the  class-room. 

4.  In  teaching  the  "Observations,"  let  the  words  or  phrases  which  serve  as 
the  basis  of  the  "Observations"  be  written  upon  the  board. 

5.  Insist  upon  the  thorough  mastery  of  the  "  \rocabularies, "  not  only  from 
the  Latin  into  English,  but  also  from  the  English  into  Latin. 

6.  In  the  translation  of  the   English  sentences  into  Latin,  the  following 
order  is  suggested:    (1)  The  pupil  will  write  the  exercise  in  a  blank-book  ; 
(2)  He  will  copy  it  upon  the  blackboard  ;    (3)  The  instructor  will  read  and 
correct  the  work  on  the  board,  the  pupil  at  the  same  time  incorporating  the 
corrections  in  his  blank  book  ;    (4)  The  instructor  will  examine  the  book  and 
mark  all  words  which  contain  an  error  ;  (5)  The  pupil  will  take  the  book  and 
correct  all  words  so  marked.     To  carry  out  this  plan  two  blank  books  are 
required. 

7.  The  Review  lessons  are  very  important,  and  should  be  dwelt  upon  until 
thoroughly  mastered. 

8.  Much  time  can  be  saved  and  much  good  accomplished  by  having  the 
class  do  a  portion  of  the  work  in  concert.     This  is  especially  helpful  in  repro- 
ducing the  original  text  from  the  English  translation  and  in  reviewing  the 
"English-Latin  Exercises." 

9.  It  is  unnecessary,  indeed  harmful,  to  tell  the  pupil  everything  that  may 
be  said  concerning  a  word  or  form,  when  it  first  occurs.     Nor  should  one  feel 
obliged,  when  a  general  statement  is  made  concerning  a  given  point,  to  indi- 
cate all  the  exceptions  which  exist. 

10.  Require  the  mastery  of  the  paradigms,  but  not  merely  that  thej^-may 
be  recited  by  rote.     The  pupil  should  study  and  compare  them,  with^a  view 
to  ascertaining  the  principles  in  accordance  with  which  they  are  constructed. 
As  paradigms  are  commonly  studied,  they  work  more  injury  than  benefit. 

11.  Introduce  conversation  in  Latin  upon  the  text  if  possible  ;  it  relieves 
the  monotony  of  a  recitation  ;   it  fixes  the  text  more  firmly  in  mind  ;   it 
teaches  the  pupil   to  think  in  the  language  which  he  is  studying.     Every 
teacher  knowaithe  common  stock  of  interrogative  words  and  phrases,  or  can 
get  them  from 'a  grammar. 

12.  It  is  not  supposed  that  an  ordinary  class  will  learn  one  lesson  a  day. 
If  the  seventy  lessons  can  be  covered  in  one  hundred  to  one  hundred  and  forty 
recitations,  the  progress  should  be  regarded  as  satisfactory. 


TABLE     OF     CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

PREFACE v 

SUGGESTIONS  TO  TEACHERS ix 

LESSONS  I.-LXIX 7 

GRAMMATICAL  INDEX 249 

TEXT  OF  C.KSAR,  B.  G.  I.  1-29 256 

LITERAL  AND  FREE  TRANSLATION 271 

APPENDIX  A.     METHOD  OF  READING  LATIN 279 

APPENDIX  B.     NOTES  ox  B.  G.  I.  21-29 .281 

APPENDIX  C.     WORD-LISTS 287 

LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS .,....,.  290 

VOCABULARY  :  — 

LATIN-ENGLISH .  291 

ENGLISU-LATIN    .     .     .     .         .     .                        .  312 


/4r' tt  T  T7  T?  T< 

H  y  IN  1  Y  Js  *  ••  *•'•  ^  * 

\>v    /^ 

_ 

INDUCTIVE    LATIN    METHOD. 


LESSON    I. 

NOTE.  —  In  studying  the  "Text"    and   "Notes,"  the  pupil  will  observe  the 
following  suggestions  :  — 

(1)  Take  up  first  the  word  Gal-H-a,  and  notice  the  number  of  syllables,  the 
marks  of  quantity  over  the  vowels,  and  the  meaning.     After  reading  carefully  what 
is  said  about  the  word  in  Note  1  (a)  (b)  (c)  (d),  pronounce  it  aloud  several  times, 
each  time  associating  the  meaning  with  the  sound. 

(2)  Treat  in  the  same  manner  the  remaining  words  of  the  lesson,  but  in  no  case 
take  up  a  new  word  until  the  word  preceding  it  has  been  thoroughly  mastered. 

(3)  Having  mastered  the  words  separately,  study  the  sentence  as  a  whole,  pro- 
nouncing and  writing  out  the  Latin  with  only  the  English  translation  (p.  271)  before 
the  eye. 

(4)  Understand  from  the  beginning  that  every  word  and  sentence  of  the  Latin 
text  is  to  be  mastered.     Nothing  short  of  absolute  mastery  will  answer  the  purpose. 


1.     TEXT. 

Gal-ll-a      est      5-mrrfs      dl-vl-sa      In      par-tes      tres. 
Gaul          is     as-a-whole    divided     into        parts       three. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  G&1-1I-&,  Gaul;  cf.  Galatia,  Gael,  Gaelic:  (a)  vowel  sounds, 
3.  as  in  Cuba  correctly  pronounced,  I  as  in  cigar;1  (b)  vowels  un- 
marked, or  marked  thus,  %.,  are  short,  —  marked  thus,  a,  are  long ; 
(c)  accent  the  first  syllable;  (d)  the  ending  -3.  indicates  the  feminine 
singular. 

1  It  would  be  confusing  to  explain  two  methods  of  pronunciation  in  the  same 
notes.  The  teacher  who  prefers  the  English  method  will  omit  these  notes  on  pro- 
nunciation and  substitute  others  adapted  to  that  method. 


8  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  gst,  is;  cf.  est  (French),  ist  (German),  is:  (a)  6  as  in  met; 
(b)  -t,  the  ending  of  the  third  person  singular  of  the  verb,  means  he, 
she,  or  it.     Est  (he,  she,  or  it)  is ;  Gallia  est,  Gaul  is. 

3.  S-mnis,  all.  as-a-whole ;  cf.  omni-present   omni-bus  (for  all)  : 
(a)  6  =  0  in  obey;  (b)  accent  the  first  syllable. 

4.  di-vi-sa,  divided:  (a)  i  =  i  in  caprice ;  the  long  vowels  are 
identical  with  the  short  vowels  in  quality,  the  only  difference  being 
that  the  short  vowels  are  less  prolonged  in  pronunciation  ;  (b)  v  =  w 
in  we;  (c)  a  is  always  like  ss  in  hiss,  never  like  z;  (d)  accent  the 
second  syllable,  divisa;   (e)  the  feminine  singular  ending  is  -a;  cf. 
Gallia ;   (/)  est  divisa,  is  divided;  omnis  GalliS  est  divisa,  all 
Gaul  is   divided;    GalliS   est   omnis   divisa,    Gaul  is  as-a-whole 
divided. 

5.  in,  into;  cf.  in  (Eng.  and  Germ.),  en  (French). 

6.  par-tes,  parts:  (a]  e  =  ey  in  they ;  (b)  the  ending  -es  indicates 
the  plural ;  cf.  the  Eng.  hero,  heroes. 

7.  tres,  three;  cf.  tre-ble,  tri-pod,  and  three:  (a)  -gs  is  seen  here 
as  well  as  in  partes  above ;  (b)  here  also  it  indicates  the  plural. 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Yowcl  sounds  in  this  lesson  ;  a,  e,  i,  o,  e,  I,  as  in  art,  met,  cigar, 
obey,  they,  caprice. 

2.  The  consonants,   except  v,  are  sounded  as  in  English ;  but  a 
never  has  the  sound  of  z.     v  as  w  in  we,  B  as  ss  in  hiss. 

3.  Words  of  two  syllables  take  the  accent  on  the  first,   6mnis, 
partes. 

4.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  syllable 
next  to  the  last  (that  is,  on  the  penult),  if  it  is  long,  divisa;  other- 
wise on  the  syllable  before  the  penult  (that  is,  on  the  antepenult), 
Gallia.     A  vowel  before  another  vowel  is  short. 

5.  The  ending  -a  indicates  the  feminine  singular,  Gallia,  divisS. 

6.  The  ending  -es  indicates  the  plural,  partes,  tres. 

7.  The  ending  -t  of  the  verb  indicates  the  third  person  singular. 

8.  All  the  Latin  words  in  this  lesson  have  related  words  in  English. 

9.  Names  of  objects  without  sex  are  neuter  in  English,  but  in  Latiu 
they  are  often  classed  as  masculine  or  feminine. 


LESSON  I.  9 

4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Pronunciation, 

Roman  method  .  A.  &  G.  16.  H.  5,  6,  7. 

English  method    A.  &  G.  17,  entire.  H.  9, 10, 11, 12, 13. 

2.  Accent    .     .     .     .'  A.  &  GK  19,  a,  &  H.  17,  18. 

3.  Number       .     .     .  A.  &  G.  31.  H.  44. 

4.  Gender  .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  28,  a,  c,  and  note.  H.  41  and  foot-note. 

5.     VOCABULARY   A. 

1.  di-vi-s£,  fern,  sing.,  divided.  5.  6-mni3,  masc.  and  fein.  sing.,  all, 

2.  Sst,  (he,  she,  it),  is.  every,  as-a-w hole ;  plur.  6mnes. 

3.  Gai-li-a,  fern,  sing.,    Gaul.  6.  pSr-tes,  fern,  plur.,  parts. 

4.  In,  prep.,  into,  sometimes  in.  1.  tres,  three. 

6.     VOCABULARY    B.1 

1.  AquitaniS,2  Aquiiania.  4.  Alpes,  the  5  Alps. 

2.  Helvetia,3  Switzerland.  5.  clientgs,  clients. 

3.  proviucia,4  province.  6.  legiones,4  legions. 

7.  montgs,  mountains. 

8.  omngs,  a//. 

9.  possSssiones,4  possessions. 
10. 

11.  et, 

7.   EXERCISES. 

1.  Translate:  (a)  Gallia  est  cllvlsa.     (J)  Omnis  GalliS  est  dlvisS. 
(c)  Gallia  est  omnis  divis£.     (d)  Omnis  Gallia  in  partes  tres  divisa 
est.     (e)  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres. 

2.  (a)    Tres    legiones.      (b)    Alpes    montes.      (c)    Possessiongs 

1  In  this  vocabulary  the  words  ending  in  -a  are  of  course  feminine ;  those  end- 
ing in  -es  are  plural. 

2  qu  =  English  qu  in  quite. 

8  This  word  is  not  used  by  Csesar. 

4  C,  g,  B,  and  t,  are  always  pronounced  as  in  cat,  go,  so,  and  to. 

6  The  Latin  has  no  article.  . 


10  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

omnes.  (d)  Clientea  quattuor.  (e)  In  quattuor  partes.  (f)  Gal- 
liS.  est  provinciS.  (y)  ProvinciS.  est  dlvisS.  (h)  Oranis  Helvetia  in 
quattuor  partes  divisS  est.  (£)  AquituuiS.  est  dlvisS. 

3.  Translate :   (a)  Gaul  is  as-a-whole  divided,     (b)  All  Gaul  is 
divided  into  parts,     (c)  Gaul  is  as-a-whole  divided  into  three  parts. 
(d)  Gaul  as-a-whole  is  divided  into  three  parts,     (e)  As-a-whole  Gaul 
is  divided  into  three  parts. 

4.  (a)   Three  clients,      (b)   All    the  legions,      (c)  All  Helvetia.1 
(d)  The  province  as-a-whole  is  divided,      (e)  Helvetia  is  as-a-whole 
divided  into  four  parts. 

8.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Feminine  ending.  2.  Plural  ending.  3.  The  word  for  all, 
sing  and  plur.  4.  Place  of  accent  in  words  of  two  syllables.  5.  In 
words  of  more  than  two  syllables.  6.  Sound  of  v,  s.  7.  Penult. 
8.  Antepenult.  9.  Eelated  words.  10.  Difference  in  pronunciation 
between  short  arid  Ions;  vowels. 


LESSON   II. 

1.    TEXT. 

Read  again  the  suggestions  given  in  connection  with  Lesson  I.  for  taking  up 
the  text. 

Gallia      est        omnis        divisa        in       partes     tres ; 

qua-rum        u-nam        In-co-lunt         Bel-gee,         a-H-am 
of-which  one  inhabit          the-Belgse,        another 

A-qui-ta-ni. 

the-Aquitani. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.    qua-rttm,  of  which  ;   (a)  qu  =  kw  =  qu  in  quite  ;    (b)  &  =  a 
in  father  ;  (c)  ti  =  00  in  book  ;  (d)  accent  on  the  first  syllable. 

1  The  student  should  pronounce  proper  names  in  the  Eng.  exercises  as  Eng. 
words  and  not  as  Lat.  words. 


LESSON  II.  11 

2.  u-iiam,  one;  cf.  unit,  unite,  one:  (d)  ii  =  oo  in  moon:  (b)  for 
£  see  Gallia  I.  N.  1  (a)1;  (e)  accent  on  the  h'rst  syllable;  cf.  dmnis, 
partes,  quorum,  uiiam ;   (d)  -am  indicates  the  £ein.  sing,  as  clirect 
object;  (e)  cf.  the  following  sentences  :  —  f^^-^U^L^(^  £__  fe^^d  £$* 

"OnZ.  (pars)  est  Aquitania,  one  part  is  Aquitania. 

Unani   (par tern)  incolunt  Aqultani,  the  Aquitdni  inhabit  one 
part. 

(f)  -S,  it  will  be  seen,  indicates  the  fern.  sing,  as  subject,  that  is,  fern, 
sing,  nominative  case ;  while  -am  indicates  fern.  sing,  as  object,  that  is,       / 
fern.  sing,  objective  case,  or,  as  it  is  called  in  Latin,  accusative^case ;  ^ 
so,  Galliam,  divisam.  &^J^  <*U^  V^JL~  ^aO^t^U^^ 

3.  In-c6-liint,  they  inhabit:    (a)  for  vowels  I,  6,  u,  see  above; 
(b)  accent  on  the  antepenult;  why?  cf.  Galli&,  divisa ;   (c)  -nt,  the 
ending  of  the  third  person   plural,   they;    incolunt,   they   inhabit; 
Belgae  incolunt,  the  Belgce  inhabit.  $£4*%^  &9~i>**-S^  < 

4.  Bel-gae,  the  Belgce :  (a)  for  6  see  above;  (b)  g  is  always  hard 
like  g  in  go,  never  as  in  gem ;   (c)  ae  =  i  in  kite ;  (e?)  the  ending 
indicates  the  feminine  plural  as  subject,  **.  e.  the  feminine  plural  nomi- 
native ;    provincial,  a  province,  provinciae,  provinces;    (e)  Belgae 
although  having  a  feminine  ending  is  masculine,  because  it  denotes 
male  beings.     A.  &  G.  29  ;   H.  42,  I.  1. 

5.  ci-11-eim,  another,   other;    cf.  alien,   alias,   alibi:    (d)  for  the 
vowels  &,  I,  see  above ;   (b)  accent  on   the  antepenu  t ;    cf.  Gallia, 
incolunt,  aliam;    (c)  -am  indicates  the   fern.  sing,  accusative;    cf. 
unam,  aliam. 

6.  A-qui-ta-ni,  the  Aquitani:   (d)  qu  =  qu  in  quite;   cf.  qua- 
rum  ;    (b)  place  of  the  accent  ?  why  ? 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  New  vowels,  u,  5,  u  =  oo  in  book,  a  in  father,  oo  in   moon; 
consonants,  g  pronounced  as  in  go,  qu  as  in  quite ;  the  diphthong  ae 
=  i  in  kite. 

2.  Personal  endings,  3d  sing,  -t,  3d  plur.  -nt. 

3.  The  nominative  is  the  case  of  the  subject,  GalliS,  Belgae. 

4.  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object,  unam,  aliam. 

1  I.  N.  1  (a)  =  Lesson  I.,  Note  1,  division  (a). 


12  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

5.    The  ending  -a  indicates  fern.  sing,  noui.,  GalliS,  divisa. 
6    The  ending  -am  indicates  fern.  sing,  accus.,  imam,  aliain. 

7.  The  ending  -ae  indicates  fern.  plur.  nom.,  provinciae  ;  but  cf. 
Belgae,  which  is  masculine  by  meaning. 

8.  Examine  the  nom.  plur.  in  Belgae,  Aquitani,  and  partgs,  and 
note  that  in  Latin  there  are  different  declensions,  i.  e.  the  same  case 
is  formed  with  different  endings  in  different  words ;  cf.  wars,  boxes, 
oxen. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Quantity  of  vowels     .     .   A.  &  G.  18,  a,  b,  c.  H.  16,  notes  1,  2,  3, 

4,  foot-note  3. 

2.  Quantity  of  syllables       .  A.  &  G.  18,  d,  e.       H.  16,  I.  II.  III. 

3.  Nominative  case    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  31,  a.  H.  365,  I. 

4.  Accusative  case      .      .     .  A.  &  G.  31,  d.  H.  365,  III.  432. 

5.  Gender A.  &  G.  29.  H.  42. 

5.  VOCABULARY   A. 

1.  a-ll-a,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  other,      5.    ESl-gae,  the  Belgce. 

another.  6.  In-c6-lunt,  they  inhabit. 

2.  a-H-am,  accus.  sing.  fern.  7.  quse,  nom.  plur.  fern.,  which. 

3.  a-ll-se,  nom.  plur.  fern.  8.  qua-rttm, plur.  fern.,  of-which. 

4.  A-quI-ta-ni,nom.plur.  maso.,  9.  u  na,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  one. 

the  Aquitani.  10.    u-nam,  accus.  sing.  fern. 

6.  VOCABULARY    B. 

NOM.    SING.    FKM.  ACCUS.    SING.    FEM.  N()M.    PLUR.    FEM. 

Nouns. 

1.  Gallia,1  Gaul  Gall] am. 

2.  Helvetia,  Switzerland.  Helveti&m. 

3.  provmcia,  province.  provinciam.          provinciae,  provinces. 

4.  via,  way.  viam.  vise,  ways. 

1  The  marks  over  the  vowels  indicate  the  quantity  of  the  vowels,  not  the  quan- 
tity of  the  syllables  in  which  they  stand.  The  first  syllable  of  GalliS  is,  of 
course,  long.  H.  p.  4,  foot-note  4. 


LESSON   II. 


13 


5.  all's,  other. 

6.  divisS,  divided. 

7.  un£,  one. 

NOM.    PLUR.    MASC. 

8.  Aquitani,  the  Aquitani. 

9.  Roman!,  the  Romans. 
10.  Tiguiiui,  the  Tigurini. 


13.   incoliint,  ^ey  inhabit. 


aliSm. 
dlviSeiin. 

unSm. 


aliw. 
dlvlsae. 


NOM.  PLUR.  MASC. 

11.  Tolosates,  the  Tolosates. 

12.  Verbigeni,  the  Verbigeni. 

Verbs. 

14.    mittunt,  they  send. 


7.    EXERCISES. 

In  the  case  of  the  following  words  and  phrases,  (1)  pronounce,  noting  every 
letter  the  sound  of  which  in  Latin  is  different  from  its  usual  sound  in  English,  also 
the  force  of  significant  endings ;  (2)  translate  ;  (3)  give  the  principle  of  accent  for 
each  Latin  word. 

1.  (a)  Quarum  Una",     (b)  In  partes  tres.     (c)  Belgae  imam  (par- 
tern)  incolunt.     (d)  Aquitani  aliam  (partem)  incolunt.     (e)  Belgas 
et  Aquitani  Galliam  incolunt. 

2.  (a)  In  Helvetiam.      (b)  In  Aquitaniam.     (c)  UnS  pars,      (c?) 
Tr5s  paries,     (e)  UnS  via.     (/)  Tres  vise,     (g)  Tolosates  provin- 
ciam  incolunt.     (h)  Quattuor  legiones  in  Galliam  Roman!  mittnnt. 

(1)  Tiguiini   et  Verbigeni    Helvetiam    incolunt.     (j)   Helvetia  est 
omnis   divisS  in  pnrtes  quattuor,   quarum  unam  incolunt  Tigurini, 
aliam  Verbigeni. 

In  the  case  of  the  following  phrases  and  sentences,  (1)  translate  into  Latin ; 

(2)  note  the  significant  endings. 

3.  (a)  Into  three  parts,  of  which  the  Belgse  inhabit  one.     (&)  Into 
three  parts,  of  which  the  Aquitani  inhabit  another,     (c)  One  (part) 
the  Aquitani  inhabit.     (d~)  Another  (part)  the  Belgae  inhabit,     (e) 
The  Belgse  and  the  Aquitani  inhabit  parts. 

4.  (a)  One  province,      (b)   Three    provinces,     (c)    Into  another 
road,     (d)  Three  other  roads,      (e)  The  Tolosates  inhabit  the  moun- 
tains.    (/)  The  Romans  send  three  legions  into  the  province. 


14  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON    III. 
1.    TEXT. 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres ;  quarum  unam 
incolunt  Belgse,  aliam  Aquitani,1 

ter-tl-am,  qui        I-pso-rum  Hn- 

tlie  third  (part,  those  inhabit)     who     of  themselves     in  the 

gua      Cel-tae,     no-stra    Gal-ll    ap-pel-lan-tur. 
language   Kelts,       in  ours     Gauls         are  called. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  tSr-tl-am,  the  third ;  cf.  tertiary:  (a)  t  always  has  the  sound 
of  t  in  tin,  never  that  of  sh  as  in  action;  (b)  place  of  accent?  (c)  this 
word  is  the  object  of  incdlunt,  and  agrees  with  the  Latin  word  mean- 
ing part,  both  of  which  are  supplied  in  thought  from  the  preceding 
clauses ;  (d)  -a-m  indicates  accus.  sing,  fern.,  the  a  generally  indicating 
fern,  gender  and  the  -m  accus.  sing. ;  cf.  unam,  aliam. 

2.  qui,  who:   (a)  the  ending  I  here  indicates  nom.  plur.  masc., 
cf.  Aquitani;   (b)  subject  of  appellautur. 

3.  i-ps5-rum,    of  themselves,    their    own :    (a)   6  =  0    in    note ; 
(b)  place  of  accent  ?  (c)  the  ending  -6-rum  indicates  here  the  genitive 
case,  plur.  masc.;  cf.  qu-a-rum,  which  is  gen.  plur.  fern.     How  is  the 
masc.  distinguished  from  the  fern,  ending  in  these  words  ?     (d)  Aqui- 
tani, qui,  ipsorum  have  the   same  endings  in  the  nom.  and  also 
the  gen.  plur.  masc.     What,  then,  is  the  nom.  plur.  masc.  of  ipso- 
rum ?     What  means  of  the  Aquitani,   of  whom  or  whose  ?   (e)  ip- 
sorum is  joined  in  translation  with  lingua,  in  their  own  language, 
(f)  What  English  case  does  the  Latin  genitive  somewhat  resemble  ? 

1  From  the  first,  the  review  should  be  translated  at  hearing,  and  should  be  pr<K 
nounced  with  only  the  English  translation  before  the  eye. 


LESSON   III.  15 

4.  Hn-gua,   in    the   language;    cf.   language,   lingual.,   linguist: 

(a)  gu  before  a  vowel  =  gw  ;  cf.  qu  in  quite  ;  (b)  g  is  always  bard  in 
pronunciation;  cf.  Belgae   II.  N.  4;    (c)  pronounced  in  two  syllables, 
since  u  is  not  here  a  vowel;  (d)  the  ending  -a  indicates  fern,  sing., 
answering  the  question,  wherein?  whereby?  i.e.  ablative  case.      How 
does  lingua  differ  from  lingua    in    ending?    lingua,  the  language, 
lingua,  in  the  language  ;  the  difference  in  meaning  is  indicated  by  -a 
and  -a;  the  former  is  nom.,  the  latter  is  called  ablative. 

5.  Cel-tae,  Kelts :    (a)  c  =  k,  never  s ;   (b)  ae  =  i  in  kite ;  cf. 
Belgce ;    (c)  -ae   indicates   nom.   plur.  and  usually  belongs   to   fern, 
nouns,  but  (d)  Celtse  and  Belgae  are  masc.  because  the  names  of 
males ;  names  of  males  are  always  masc.  in  Lat.  as  in  Eng. 

6.  nS-stra,  in  ours,  cf.  nostrum,  i.  e.  our  remedy,  pater  noster, 
our  father ;  (a)  the  ending  a  indicates  ablative  (note  the  translation, 
in  ou?*s),  sing,  fern.,  cf.  lingua  ;    (b)  with  nostra,  lingua  is  to  be 
supplied. 

7.  Gal-li,  Gauls:  (a)  I  indicates  nom.  plur.  maso. ;  cf.  Aquitani, 
qui ;    (b)  Gallia,    Gatil,  the   country,  Galll,    Gauls,  the  people  in- 
habiting it. 

8.  ap-pgl-lan-tur,    (they]   are  called,'  cf.  appella-ntur,  es-t,  he, 
she,  or  it  is,  iiicolu-nt,  they  inhabit;  hence  (a)  appella-t,  he,  she, 
or  it  calls,   appella-nt,    they   call,   appella-ntur,   they   are  called; 

(b)  appellat  means,   he  calls  by  name,  cf.   appellation.      Another 
meaning  of  the  Eng.  word  call? 

3.     OBSERVATIONS.1 

1.  The  ending  -a  indicates  nom.  sing.  fern. ;  -a  indicates  ablative 
sing.  fern. 

2.  The  endings  -a,  -am,  -a,  are  all  sing.  fern. ;  what  cases? 

3.  The  endings  -ae,  -I,  -§3,  are  all  plur. ;  what  cases? 

4.  The  endings  -arum,  genitive  plur.  fern.;  -orum,  genitive  plur. 
masc. 

5.  The  endings  of  verb :  in   active  voice,  -t,  he,  she,  or  it,  -nt, 
they ;  in  passive  voice,  -ntur,  they. 

1  In  reciting  the  observations,  the  pupil  should  give  examples  of  the  principles 
stated,  from  the  text. 


16  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


4.     VOCABULARY   A. 

In  the  study  of  this  vocabulary,  let  the  instructor  call  for  the  various  forms  of 
each  word  which  the  pupil  should  be  expected  to  know. 

1.  ap-pgl-lan-tttr,  they  are  called  (by  name). 

2.  C61-tae,  noin.  plur.  masc.,  the  Kelts. 

3.  G&l-li,  noin.  plur.  masc.,  the  Gauls. 

4.  i-psi,  norn.  plur.  masc.,  themselves. 

5.  lln-gua,  noin.  sing,  fein.,  the  tongue,  language. 

6.  n5-stra,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  our. 

7.  qui,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  who. 

8.  tgr-ti-&,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  third. 


5.  VOCABULARY  B. 

9.  Ggr-ma-ni,  Germanorum,  the  Germans. 

10.  Grse-ci,  Graecorum,  the  Greeks. 

11.  Hgl-le-nes,  the  Hellenes. 

12.  ml-li-tes  (cf.  military,  militia},  soldiers. 

13.  Ro-ma-ni,  Romanorum,  the  Romans. 

14.  su-pg-ran-tflr  (cf.  superior,  superb),  they  are  overcome. 

15.  tgr-ra  (cf.  terra  firma,  terrestrial,  subterranean),  the  earth,  a 
country. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

(1.)  Pronounce.  (2.)  Translate.  (3)  Name  the  case  of  each  noun  or 
adjective. 

1.  (a)  Nostra"  lingua".  (5)  Nostrae  linguae,  (c)  Nostrt  lingua. 
(d)  Ipsorum  lingua.  (e)  Ipsorum  lingua.  (/)  Unam  (pnrtem) 
incolunt  Belgae.  (g)  Aliam  (partem)  inoolimt  Aqmtani.  (h)  Ter- 
tiam  (partem)  incolnnt  Celtae.  ({)  Gal  IT  ipsorum  lingua  Celtae  ap- 
pellantur.  (j)  Celtge,  qui  nostra  lingua  Galli  appellantur,  tertiam 
(partem)  incolunt. 


LESSON   III.  17 

2.  (a)   Chungs   German!   superantur.      (b)   MilitSs    Romanorum 
superantur.      (c)   Galli  provinciam   nostram  incolunt.      (d)  Grsecl 
ipsorum  lingua  Hellengs  appellantur.      (e)  Tertiam   (£artem)  inco- 
lunt qui  Romanorum  lingua  Galli  appellantur.      (/)   Unam  terrain 
incolunt  Galli,  aliam  German!,  tertiam  qui  ipsorum  lingua  Hellenes, 
nostra  Grace!  appellantur. 

3.  (a)  The  Gauls  are  called  Kelts,     (b)  The  Gauls,  who  in  their 
own  language  are  called   Kelts,   inhabit  the  third   (part),     (c)  The 
Kelts,   who    in    our   language   are    called  Gauls,    inhabit    one   part. 
(d)  The  Aquitani  and  the  Belgfje  are  called  Gauls,     (e)   Gaul  is  as 
a  whole  divided  into  three  parts,  one  of  which  the  Belgoe  inhabit, 
another  the  Aquitani,  the  third  (those)  who  in  their  own  language  are 
called  Kelts,  in  ours  Gauls. 

4.  (a)  Three  legions  are  overcome,     (b)  Gaul  is  the  country  of 
the  Gauls,     (c)  They  send  their  own  possessions  into  another  part. 
(d)  The  Belgae  and  the  Aquitani  inhabit  three  parts,     (e)   (There) 
is  one  way  into  the  divided  province. 


7.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  Eng.  prepositions  equivalent  to  the  endings  -rum  and  -5,  as 
used  in  this  lesson.  2.  The  Eng.  pronouns,  equivalent  to  endings  -t, 
-nt,  and  -ntur  in  verb.  3.  The  different  Lat.  cases  and  their  uses. 
4.  Feminine  endings.  5.  Words  to  be  supplied  in  thought  in  the 
text  of  this  lesson.  6.  Pronunciation  of  consonants  t,  gu,  g,  and  c ; 
of  vowel  6  and  diphthong  se. 


18  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

LESSON    IV. 
1.     TEXT. 

HI    6-mnes     Hn-gua,     in-stl-tu-tis,   le-gl-bus,  In-ter 
These       all     in  language,     customs,  laws,      among 

se         dlf-fe-runt. 

themselves       differ. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  Hi,  these:  (a)  I  indicates  nom.  plur.  masc. ;  cf.  Aquitani,  qui, 
Galli.      (b)   The  Lat.  for  of  these  (sometimes  equivalent  to  their)  ? 
cf.  ipsSrum,  quorum    III.  N.  3. 

2.  S-mngs,  all:  (a)  for  6  see  I.  x.  3.     (b)  for  s  see  I.  N.  4  (c). 
(c)  5s  indicates  plur.;  cf.  partSa,  trgs.      (d)  cf.  omnis,  nom.  sing.; 
GalliS.  omnis,  all  Gaul,  sing. ;  hi  omnes,  all  these,  plur. 

3.  Hn-gua,   in  language:    (a)  a   indicates    fern.   sing.  abl.  case; 
cf.  lingua    III.  N.  4,  and  observe  that  the  ablative;  lingua  modifies 
the    verb    like    an    adverb  ;     ipsorum    lingua    appellantur,    they 
are  called  in  (or  by)  their  own  language ;   lingua  differunt,  they 
differ  in  language.     The  ablative  is  the  case  of  adverbial  relations. 
H.  365,  VI. ;   (b)  since  lingua  tells  in   what  respect  these  differ  it 
is  called  the  abl.  of  respect,  or,  by  some,  the  abl.  of  specification. 
(c)  lingua,  language,  as  subject,  nom.  sing. 

linguam,  language,  as  object,  acrus.  sing. 
linsua,  language,  in  adverbial  uses,  abl.  sing, 
linguae,  languages,  as  subject,  nom.  plnr. 

4.  in-stl-tu-tis,  in  customs,  cf.  institute,  institution:  (a)  place  of 
accent?     (b)  abl.  plur.  of  respect ;  cf.  lingua  3  (b). 

5.  le-gi-btts,    in   laws,    cf.    legal,    legislate.      (a)    g   as   in    go. 
(b)  place  of  accent?  why?     (c)  abl.  plur.  of  respect,     (d)  What  is 
the  difference  between  the  use  of  lingua,  Institutis,  legibus,  in  tin's 
sentence  and  that  of  lingua  in  III.  ?  see  3  (a),  (b).     (e)  though  insti- 


LESSON   IV.  19 

tut-Is  and  15g-Ibus  are  both  abl.  plur.,  one  ends  in  -is  and  the  other 
in  -Ibtis,  see  II.  Ob.  8. 

6.  In-tSr,  between,  among,  cf.  interval,  interview,  intervene. 

7.  se,  themselves;  cf.  suicide:  (a)  accus.  plur.  with  the  preposi- 
tion inter,  like  the  Eiig.  objective  with  preposition  ;  cf.  in  partes. 

8.  dlf-f6-runt,  they  differ ;  cf.  differ,  different :  (a)  -nt  ending  of 
the  3d  plur.,  they  ;  cf.  inc6iu-nt ;   (b)  made  up  of  two  words,  viz. 
dis,  apart,  and  ferunt,  they  bear;   cf.  in-c61unt  arid  appellantur 
for  ad-pellantur.     Such  words  are  called  compound. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  preposition  in   when   it   means   into  and   the  preposition 
inter,  between,  among,  require  the  accusative  after  them. 

2.  The  ablative  of  respect  or  specification  is  used  without  a  prepo- 
sition to  denote  that  in  respect  to  which  a  statement  is  true. 

3.  Abl.  endings  :  in  sing.,  -a ;  in  plur.,  -is,  -ibus. 

4.  Nom.  plur.  endings,  -se,  -I,  -es. 

5.  The  endings  -se,  -a-rum,  plur.  fern.;  -I,  -6-rum,  plur.  masc. 

6.  The  ending  -is  in  uoin.  sing,  becomes  -es  in  nom.  and  accus. 
plur. 

4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Use  of  the  abl.  case  in  general     A.  &  G.  242.  H.  365,  VI. 

2.  Abl.  of  respect  or  specification    A.  &  G.  253.  H.  424. 

3.  Inter A.  &  G.  196, /.  153.    H.  433,  I. 

5.    VOCABULARY    A. 

1.  dif-fS-runt,  they  bear  apart,  differ. 

2.  hi,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  these. 

8.   In-stl-tii-tis,  abl.  plur.  customs,  institutions. 

4.  In-t8r,  prep,  with  accus.,  between,  among. 

5.  16-gI-btts,  abl.  plur.  laws  ;  ISgSs,  nom.  plur. 

6.  8-mnIs,  adj.  in  nom.  sing.,  all,  every  ;  6mnes,  nom.  plur. 

7.  ae",  accus.  plur.,  themselves. 


20  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


6.  VOCABULARY  B. 

1.  co-pl-a,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  plenty ;  in  plur.  forces,  troops;  cf. 
Eng.  copious,  cornucopia  (horn  of  plenty). 

2.  Sx-tra,  prep,  with  accus.,  beyond,  cf.  Eng.  extra. 

3.  Lln-g6-nes,  nom.  and  accus.  plur.,  the  Lingones. 

4.  na-tu-ra,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  nature,  disposition. 

5.  Sg-qua-nl,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  the  Sequani. 

7.     EXERCISES. 

Translate,  point  out  the  abl.  of  respect,  and  name  the  case  of  every  noun  used. 

1.  (a)  Omnes   lingua   inter    se  difterunt.     (b)  Hi   legibus   inter 
se   dift'eruiit.       (c)    Roinanl   in    montes   qnattuor   legiones   mittunt. 
(d)  Legiones  Romanorum  in  Alpes  mittuntur.     (e)  Tres  partes  inter 
se  differunt. 

2.  (a)  Terra  Belgarum  et  Celtarum  est  extra  provinciam.     (b)  Via 
inter  montes  et  provinciam  est.     (c)   Copiae  Sequanorum  Lingones 
superant.     (d)  Galli  et  Germain  natura  inter  se  difterunt.     (e)  Sequa- 
ni et  Lingones  ipsorum    lingua  Celtae  appellantur.      (/)   Hi  omnes 
Galliam  incolunt  et  nostra  lingua  Galli  appellantur. 

3.  (a)  Their  country    (the   country   of  these)   is   Gaul,     (b)   All 
these  differ  from  one  another  in  language,      (c)   The  soldiers  of  the 
Belgse  are  overcome,     (d)  The  Celtse  and  the  Belgae,  who  inhabit 
Gaul,  differ  from  one  another  in  laws. 

4.  (a)    Aquitania   is    beyond    our    province.       (b)    The    Greeks 
(Graecl)  and  Eomans  differ  from  one  another  in  disposition,    (c)  The 
clients  are  sending  (their)  possessions,     (d)  They  send  all  the  soldiers 
into  the  country  of  the  Sequani  who  dwell  beyond  the  Alps. 

8.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  following  endings  of  nouns  and  adjectives:  -&,  -a,  -ae, 
-a-rum,  -6-rum,  -is,  -ibus,  -a-m,  -es,  -i.  2.  The  arrangement  of 
these  endings  by  genders.  3.  By  cases.  4.  The  use  of  the  abl. 
case.  5.  Corresponding  cases  in  Eng.  and  Lat.  6.  Difference  in 
form  and  use  of  act.  and  pass,  voices.  7.  Pronunciation  of  o,  B,  and 


LESSON  V.  21 

g.  8.  The  analysis  (i.  e.  the  separation  into  component  parts)  of  the 
endings  -arum,  -orum,  -am,  and  the  explanation  of  the  force  of  each 
part.  9.  The  method  of  marking  quantity  in  the  last  Latin  exercise. 


LESSON    V. 

1.    TEXT. 

Gal-los       Sb        A-qui-ta-nis      Ga-rum-na      flu-men, 

The  Gauls   from      the  Aquitani     the  Garumna        river, 

a       Bel-gis       Ma-tro-na      et      Se-qua-na     dl-vl-dlt. J 
from  the  Belgae   the  Matrona   and      the  Seine      divide (s). 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  Gal-los,  the    Gauls:  (a)  -6-s  indicates  accus.  plur.  masc. ;  all 
nouns  and  adjectives  having  the  nom.  plur.  ending  -I  have  -6-s  in  the 
accus.   plur.,    e.  g.   qui,    quos  ;    Aquitaiii,    Aquitanos ;    hi,   hSs ; 
(b)  the  object  of  dividit ;   (c)  corresponding  to  the  masc.  endings 
-6-rum,  -6s,  are  the  feminine  endings  -a-rum,  -a-s. 

2.  ab,  from ;  cf.  absolve:  prep,  with  the  abl.  case. 

3.  A-quI-ta-nis,  the  Aquitani;  -is  indicates  abl.  plur.;  cf.  insti- 
tutls   IV.  N.  4.     All  nouns  and  adjectives  with  the  ending  -i  in  nom. 
plur.  have  the  ending  -is  in  abl.  plur.;  cf.  III.  N.  3  (c). 

4.  Ga-rtim-na,  the  name  of  a  river:   (a)  what  case?  (5)   subject 
of  dividit;    (c)  -S  in  the  nom.  sing,  usually  indicates  fern,  gender, 
but  Garumna,  like  most  names  of  rivers,  is  masc.  by  meaning;  cf. 
Celtce    III.  N.  5  (d). 

5.  flu-mSn,  that  which  flows,  the  river;   cf.  fluid:    (a)   nom. 
sing.,  neuter  gender;   (b)  the  word  flumen  refers  to  the  same  thing 
as  Garumna,  and  describes  it  like  an  adj.,  just  as  the  word  river 
describes  Garumna  in  the  phrase  the  Garumna,  a  river,  or  the  river 
Garumna. 

1  The  pupil  should  not  lose  sight  of  the  suggestions  made  in  the  first  lesson, 
touching  the  order  and  plan  of  study. 


22  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

6.  a,  from ;  cf.  avert :   same  word  as  ab  ;  cf.  2  ;   before  a  word 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  the  form  ab  must  be  used ;  before  a  con- 
sonant, except  h,  a  is  generally  used. 

7.  B61-gi3,  the  Belgce :  (a)  abl.  plur.,  from  noin.  plur.  Belgae ;  cf. 
II.  N.  4;    (b)  the  ending  is  -is,  as  in  Aquitanis,   which  has  noin. 
plur.  ending  -I. 

8.  di-vi-dit,  he,  she,  or  it  divides ;  cf.  divisa    I.  N.  4 :    (a)  -t 
indicates  3d  person  sing.,  cf.  est ;    (b)  the  verb  though  having  two 
subjects   connected   by  et  (and)  is   sing.,   because  the   two  rivers, 
Matrona  and  Seine,  are  thought  of  as  forming  a  single  boundary. 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  ending  -6-s,  a^cus.  plur.  masc. ;  -5-s,  accus.  plur.  fem. 

2.  The  ending  -is,  abl.  plur.  masc.  and  fem. 

3.  The  abl.  is  used  with  prep. 

4.  Two  or  more  sing,  subjects  may  take  a  verb  in  the  sing,  when 
they  form  a  unit  in  sense. 

5.  The  prep,  a  or  ab  is  used  with  the  ablative.     Ab  stands  before 
a  vowel  or  h,  a  before  a  consonant. 

6.  The  ending  -en  in  the  nom.  sing,  is  neuter. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Two  or  more  subjects  with  a  sing,  verb  H.  463,  II.  3. 

2.  Gender  of  names  of  rivers    .     .     A.  &  G.  29,  a.     H.  42,  I.  2. 

3.  Abl.  with  prep A.  &  G.  260.       H.  432. 

5.  VOCABULARY  A. 

1.  a,  ab,  prpp.  with  abl.,y*rom,  by. 

2.  di-vi-dit.  he,  she,  or  it  divides  ;  dividunt,  they  divide  ;  dlvi- 
duntur,  they  are  divided  or  being  divided. 

3.  flu  m6n,  nom.  sing,  neut.,  a  river. 

4.  Ga-riim-na,  nom.  sing,  masc.,  the  Garumna. 

5.  Ma  tr6  na,  nom.  sing,  masc.,  the  Matrona. 

6.  Se-qua-na,  nom.  sing,  fem.,  the  Seine.     H.  43,  1. 


LESSON  V.  23 


6.    VOCABULARY    B. 

1.  contendit,  he  strives,  hastens. 

2.  Helvetia,  the  country  of  the  Helvetii,  now  Switzerland. 

3.  Helvetii,  nom.  plur.  inasc.,  the  Helvetii. 

4.  legati,  nora.  plur.  masc.,  lieutenants,  ambassadors. 

5.  Orgetorix,  uom.  sing,  masc.,  a  Helvetian  chief. 

6.  Rhodanus,  nom.  sing,  masc.,  the  Rhone. 

7.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)   Aqmtanos  a  Gallis  Garumna  flumen  dividit.      (b)    Gallos 
a  Belgis   Matrona  et   Sequana   dividit.       (e)   Flumen    est   Garumna 
inter  Gallos  et  Aqultands.      (d)  Belgas  a  GermanTs  Rhenus  dividit. 
(e)   Helvetii,  quos  a  provincia  montes  dividunt,  Helvetian!  incolunt. 

2.  (a)    Una   in    Sequanos    via    est.       (b)    Sequani   ab    Helvetiis 
dividuntur.     (c)   Legati  ab   Helvetiis  contendunt.     (d)  Provinciam 
nostram  ab  Helvetiis  Rhodanus  flumen  dividit.     (e)  Legatos  in  Ger- 
manos  Helvetii  mittunt. 

3.  (a)  The  Garumna  river  separates  the  Gauls  from  the  Aquitani. 

(b)  Orgetorix  hastens  into   the   country  of  the  Sequani.      (c)  All 
these  differ  from  one  another,     (d)  All  these  are  called  Kelts  in  their 
own  language,     (e)  The  legions  are  sent  between  the  mountains  and 
the  Helvetii. 

4.  (a)  The  Romans   overcome   the  soldiers  whom   the  Aquitani 
send.      (b)    The  languages  of  the    Gauls   differ  from  one  another. 

(c)  The  Kelts  differ  from  the  Aquitani  in   language,   customs,  arid 
laws.      (d)  Ambassadors,  whose  country  is  Gaul,  hasten  into  Hel- 
vetia,    (e)  The  river  Rhine  separates  the  Gauls  from  the  Germans. 

8.    TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Analysis  of  the  endings  -6s  and  -as  and  force  of  each  part. 
2.  New  nom.  ending.  3.  Agreement  of  verb  and  subject.  4.  Plnr. 
ending  of  masc.  nouns.  5.  Similarity  of  masc.  and  fern,  nouns  in  the 
plur.  6.  Cases  with  prep.  7.  Use  of  prefix  a  or  ab  in  Eng. 
8.  Gender  by  meaning  rather  than  ending  in  Lat.  9.  The  new  gen- 
der in  this  lesson.  10.  Position  of  a  and  ab. 


24  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON    VI. 
1.    TEXT. 

Ho-rum       6-mnT-um       for-tls-sl-mi    sunt        Bel-gae, 

Of   these         (of)  all          the  bravest       are      the  Belgae, 

prop-ter-e-a  quod          a  cul-tu  at-que 

on  account  of  this    because    from    the  civilization    and  also 

hu-ma-nl-ta-te     pro-vln-cl-se   16n-gls-sl-me    ab-sunt. 
the  refinement     of  the  province     very  far     they  are  distant. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  Ho-rttm,  of  these;  cf.  3  :   (a)  case  and  gender?  cf.  hi  IV.  N.  1 ; 
ipsorum  III.  N.  3.    (b)  To  what  persons  previously  mentioned  in  the 
narrative  does  horum  refer? 

2.  6-mni-um,  of  all ;  cf.  Gallia  omnis  I.  N.  3;  GalliS.  divis5. 
I.  N.  4  ;   partes  tres  I.  N.  6  and  7  ;  hi  omnes  IV.  N.  1  and  2  : 
(a)  gen.  plur.;    (b)  omnis   agrees   with   Gallia,   divisa  agrees   with 
Gallia,  tres  agrees  with  partes,  omnes  agrees  with  hi,  and  omnium 
agrees  with  horum,  in  case,  number,  and  gender. 

3.  f6r-tis-si-mi,  the  bravest,'  (a)  -I  indicates  noin.  plur.  masc.;  cf. 
hi,  qui,  Galli ;   (b)  -issimi,  like  English  -est  in  brav-est,  is  the  end- 
ing of  the  superlative  degree  of  the  adj.;  positive,  fortis,  cf.  omnis  ; 

(c)  horum  1,  is    joined    in    translation   with  this   word,    thus,   the 
bravest  of  these  ;  i.  e.,  horum  depends  upon  (hangs  from)  fortissimi; 

(d)  these,  horum,   denotes   the   whole  (the  whole  of  the  Gauls)  of 
which  the   bravest,    fortissimi,    are    only    a    part ;    cf.  quarum  II., 
which  denotes  the  whole,  while  unam  (partem),  on  which  it  depends, 
denotes  a  part ;    kSrum  and  quarum  are  called  partitive  genitives, 
or,  by  some,  perhaps  more  correctly,  genitives  of  the  whole  ;   (e)  cf. 
ipsorum  lingua  III.,  where  the  genitive  has  exactly  the  force  of  an 
Eng.  possessive,  in  their  own  language  ;  (jQ  agrees  with  Belgee,  the 
subject  of  sunt;  cf.  2  (b). 


LESSON  VI.  25 

4.  sunt,  they  are  :  (a)  full  form,  es-unt ;  cf.  es-t,  incol-unt,  Eng. 
'tis  for  ^  is;   (b)  many  words  have  a  clearly  distinguishable  part 
which  remains  unchanged,  while  the  endings  change ;  cf.  appella-t, 
appella-nt,  appella-ntur,  linguS,  lingua,  lingua-rum,  lingua-s.     In 
some  cases  this  common  base,  called  the  stem,  has  been  modified  or 
obscured ;  cf.  es-t,  sunt  (for  es-unt). 

5.  pr6p-t6r-6-a  qu6d  :   propterea,  adverb,  on  account  of  this  ; 
quod,  conjunction,  because.     Both  words  together  may  be  translated 
because. 

6.  a,  from;  cf.  a  and  Sb,  V.  N.  2  and  6. 

7.  cul-tu,  culture,  civilization,  abl.  sing.  masc. 

8.  St-qug,  and  also:  a  conjunction,  stronger  than  et,  emphasizes 
the  word  or  phrase  following  it. 

9.  hu-ma-nl-ta-tg,  the  humanity,  rejinement :  abl.  sing,  fern.,  used 
with  a  like  cultu. 

10.  pro-vin-ci-ce,  of  the  province:  (a)  nom.  sing.  fern,  piovin- 
ciS. ;  cf.  Gallia,  linguS ;    (b)  -3e  indicates  nom.  plur.  fern.,  and  also, 
as  here,  the  gen.  sing.  fern,   (c)  Is  it  a  possessive  or  partitive  gen.? 
cf.  N.  3  (d)  (e). 

11.  ISn-gis-si-me,  farthest,  very  far:  (a)  -e  is  ending  of  adverb  ; 
(b)  -issimus  indicates  nom.  sing.  masc.  of  the  superlative  of  the  adj. ; 
-issime,  superlative  of  the  adverb,     (c)   Give  the  superlative  of  the 
adverb  meaning  bravely?  cf.  3  ;   (d)  this  superlative  may  mean  either 
most  bravely  or  very  bravely  ;  cf.  farthest,  very  far. 

12.  ab-siint,  they  are  away  or  distant,  ;  cf.  absent :  ab,  away,  and 
sunt,  they  are  ;  cf.  4  :  b3  is  pronounced  like  ps. 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Ending  -se  indicates  gen.  sing,  fern.,  as  well  as  norn.  plur.  fern. 

2.  The  ending  of  the  adverb  is  -e,  usually  long. 

3.  Ending  -issime  indicates  superlative  degree  of  adverb. 

4.  Endings  -i-um,  gen.  plur.;  -u  and  -e,  abl.  sing. 

5.  "The  gen.  is  put  with  words  which  denote  a>part  of  a  thing, 
in  order    to    designate   the    whole    which    is-  divided   (the  partitive 

gen.)-" 

6.  The  name  of  the  person  or  thing  to  whom  something  belongs  is 
often  put  in  the  gen.,  which  then  has  the  force  of  the  Eng.  possessive. 


26  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

7.  The  Lat.  adj.,  including  the  participle,  agrees  in  case,  number, 
and  gender,  with  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs. 

8.  In  Lat.  all  inflected  words  (i.  e.  all  words  which  change  their 
form  when  they  change  their  use)   have  a  common  base  called  the 
stem,  to  which  the  inflectional  endings  are  added. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Genitive  case  .     .     .     A.  &  G.  p.  146,  note,  H.  393,  394,  395. 

without  classification, 
and  213. 

2.  Possessive  genitive    .     A.  &  G.  214  and  foot-    H.  396,  I. 

note. 

3.  Partitive  genitive       .     A.  &  G.  216.  H.  397. 

4.  Agreement  of  adjectives  A.  &  G.  186.  H.  438. 

5.  The  stem  ....      A.  &  G.  20  and  21.  H.  46,  1  and  3. 

5.  VOCABULARY    A. 

1.  &b-sttnt,  (they)  are  away  or  distant;  ab-6st.  he,  she,  or  it  it 

away. 

2.  5t-quS,  and,  and  also. 

3.  cttl-tu,  abl.  sing.,  culture,  civilization. 

4.  f5r-tis  si-mi,  nom.  plur.  masc.  superlative,  bravest. 

5.  hu-ma  ni  ta  tg,  abl.  sing,  fern.,  refinement. 

6.  16n-gi3  si  me,  adv.,  farthest,  very  far. 

7.  6-mni  ttm,  gen.  plur.,  of  all. 

8.  pr6p  tgr  S-a,  adv.,ybr  this  reason. 

9.  pro-vm-ci-a,  a  province. 
10.  qu6d,  conj.,  because. 

6.  VOCABULARY   B. 

1.  al  tls  si  mi,  nom  plur.  masc.  superlative,  highest. 

2.  fi  1113,  nom.  sing,  masc.,  the  end. 

3.  fi  nes,  nom.  plur.,  limits,  confines,  territory. 

4.  GS  na-va  or  Gg-nii-a,    nom.   sing,  fern.,    Geneva,  a  town  in 

Switzerland. 

5.  no-bi  Ha,  nom.  sing.,  well-known,  noble  by  birth. 

6.  pgr,  prep,  with  accus.,  through. 


LESSON  VI.  21 


7.    EXERCISES. 

Translate,  distinguish  the  possessive  from  the  partitive  gen.,  and  give  the  agree- 
ment of  every  adjective. 

1.  (a)  Hi  omnes  fortes  sunt.     (b)  Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt 
Belgse.       (c)  Fortissimi    sunt    propterea    quod    longissime    absunt. 
(d)  Ab  kumanitate  provincise  absunt.     (e)  Gallorum  omnium  fortis- 
simi sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod  a  cultu  longissime  absunt. 

2.  (a)  Hi  montes  sunt  altissimi.     (b)  Helvetiorum  omnium  nobil- 
lissimus  est  Orgetorix.    (c)  Copiae  provincise  fortes  sunt.     (d)  Nostrse 
copise  a  Germairis  longe  absunt.      (e)  Per  fines  Sequanorum  in  Hel- 
vetiam  legiones  contendunt.     (f)  Montes  qui  ab  Romanis  Helvetios 
dlvidunt,  Alpes  sunt. 

3.  (a)  From  the  refinement  and  also  from  the  civilization  of  the 
province,     (b)  The  ambassadors  are   the   most   noble   of  the   Gauls. 
(c)  They  are  very  far  distant  from  the  province,     (d)  The  three  parts 
of  Gau!  differ  from  one  another,     (e)  Three  parts,  of  which  the  Belgse 
inhabit  one. 

4.  (a)  Four   soldiers,  of   whom   these    are    the    tallest  (highest). 

(b)  They    send    all    their   own   possessions    beyond    the    province. 

(c)  The    Helvetii    hasten   through    the    territory    of    the    Germans. 

(d)  The  clients  of  the  Sequani  are  sent,     (e)  The  Sequani  surpass 
(overcome)  the  Belgae  in  civilization 

8.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  gen.  case.  2.  The  possessive  gen.  3.  The  gen.  of  the 
whole.  4.  The  difference  between  the  two.  5.  Agreement  of  adj, 
6.  The  stem  of  fern,  nouns  and  adj.  learned  thus  far.  7.  Of  masc. 
8.  Of  verbs  like  appellat.  9.  Of  sunt.  10.  The  ending  of  adverb. 
11.  The  formation  of  the  superlative.  12.  Two  translations  of  the 
superlative.  13.  Difference  between  adj.  and  adv.  in  form  (or 
spelling)  ;  in  meaning.  14.  New  endings,  -u,  -e,  -i-um.  15.  Two 
uses  of  the  ending  -ee.  16.  Difference  between  abl.  and  gen. 


28  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON   VII. 
1.    TEXT. 

Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod 
a  cultu  atque  humanitate  provincise  longissime  absunt, 

ml-m-me-que  ad  e-os  mer-ca-to-res   sse-pe   com-me-ant 
least  also       to  them       merchants        often     go-to-and-fro 

at-que          e-a  quae     ad    ef-fe-ml-nan-dos  a-nl-mos 

and   those  (things)  which   to  enervate  minds 

per-tl-nent         Im-por-tant ; 

(they)  tend     (they)  bring  in  ; 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  mi-ni-me-qug,  least  also  ;  cf.  Eng.  minimum :    (a)   -e  in  mi- 
nime  indicates  ending  of  adv.;  cf.  longissime  VI.;   (b}  -qug,  conj., 
and,  also,  always  attached  to  some  other  word,  and  called  enclitic, 
*'.  e.  leaning  upon  ;   (c)  joins  the  word  to   which  it  is  attached  so 
closely  to  that  which  precedes  as  to  form  with  it  one  idea;    cf.  et 
(Matrona  et  Sequana  V.),  which  joins  less  closely  things  equally 
important,  and  atque  (cultu  atque  humanitate  VI.),  which  throws 
the  emphasis  on  what  follows. 

2.  ad,  to    near  :  prep.,  with  the  accus. ;  cf  in,  inter,  extra,  per. 

3.  8-6s,  these,  them:  (a)  -6-s  indicates  accus.  plur.  masc.,  cf.  Gal- 
16s  V. ;   (b)  a  pron.,  having  for  its  antecedent  Belgee  ;   (e)  both  eos 
and  Belgas  are  3d  plur.  masc. ;  cf  quarum  II.  and  its  antecedent 
partes  I. ;    both  are  3d  plur.  fern.     In  what  respects  does  the  pron. 
agree  with  its  antecedent  ?     In  what  respect  does  it  not  agree  ? 

4.  mgr-ca  to  res,  merchants  ;  cf.  merchandise,  commerce:  (a)  -es 
indicates  nom.  or  accus.  plur.;   (b)  here  nom.,  subject  of  commeant. 


LESSON   VII.  29 

5.    sae-pS,  often:  -g  here  indicates  an  adv. 

6  c6m-mg  ant,  they  go-to-and-fro,  visit:  (a)  cf.  mercatores 
commeant,  Orgetorix  commeat ;  in  what  respects  does  the  verb 
agree  with  its  subject  ?  (b)  What  is  the  stem  of  this  tense  of  the 
verb?  VI.  N.  4. 

7.  S  a,  those  (things] :  (a)  accus.  plur.  neut.,  direct  object  of  im- 
portant ;  (b)  the  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  neut.  always  end  in  -%.. 

8.  quee,   which :  (a)  nom.  plur.  neut.  (irregular  ending),  subject 
of  pertinent;   (b)   antecedent  is  ea ;   (c)  cf.  qui,  nom.  plur.  masc., 
who ;  quos,  accus.  plur.   masc.,  whom;  quarum,  gen.  plur.  fern.,  of 
which. 

9.  6f  fe  mi-nan-dos    (in    connection    with    ad    and   animos),    to 
enervate  or  weaken  minds  ;  cf.  effeminate  ;   (a)  -6-s  indicates  accus. 
plur.  masc. ;   (b)  a  participle  in  agreement  with  animos  ;  cf.  Gallia 
divisa. 

10.  a  nl  mos,  minds,  feelings,  courage,  accus.   plur.   masc..  after 
prep.  ad. 

11.  p£r  ti  iie'nt,  they  stretch  out,  pertain,  tend;   cf.    Eng.  perti- 
nent, impertinent  ;    cf.  pertine-t,  it  tends,  pertine-nt ;  commea-t, 
commea-nt ;   dividi-t,  dividu  nt. 

12.  im-p6r-tant,  they  bring  in;  cf.  import,  important:   (a)  com- 
pounded of  in  (changed  to  im  before  p)  into  or  in,  and  portant,  they 
bring,  carry;  (b)  subject  is  mercatores;   (c)  stands  at  the  end  of 
the  clause  to  which  it  belongs ;  cf.,  as  to  position,  pertinent,  com- 
meant, absunt  VI.,   dividit   V.,    differunt  IV.,   appellantur  III., 
incolunt   II.,   est   L,   sunt  VI. ;    (d)  incolunt  is  followed  by  its 
subject,  and  is  made  emphatic  by  being  placed  first;  while  (e)  the 
verb    meaning   to   be   in   Lat.   does    not   follow  the  usual  rule  as  to 
position. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Et  simply    connects,   -que    is   an    enclitic  and   connects   more 
closely  than  et,  atque  gives  prominence  to  what  follows. 

2.  The  ending  -3.  is  the  ending  of  all  neut.  nouns  and  adj.  in  nom. 
and  accus.  plur.,  as  well  as  of  nom.  sing.  fern. 


30  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  There  are  three  classes  of  verbs  as  to  the  formation  of  present 
tense  indicative  mode ;  one  with  a  before  the  personal  ending,  one 
with  e  and  one  witli  i  in  3d  sing,  and  u  in  3d  plur. 

4.  In  composition  n  before  p  is  changed  to  m  ;  d  before  p,  to  p  ; 
and  a  before  f,  to  f. 

5.  The  prep,  in,  inter,  ad,  take  the  accus.,  a  or  ab  the  abl. 

6.  The  pron.  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  person,  number,  and 
gender,  but  not  in  case. 

7.  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number  and  person. 

8.  In  genera],  the  verb  stands  at  the  end  of  its  clause,  but  the  verb 
meaning  to  be  (est,  sunt)  does  not  follow  this  rule. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Enclitics    .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  19,  c.  H.  18,  2,  1). 

2.  Et,  -que,  atque  .      .  A.  &  G.  156,  a.  II.  554,  2. 

3.  Agreement  of  pron.  A.  &  G.  198.  H.  445. 

4.  Agreement  of  verb    .  A.  &  G.  204.  H.  460. 

5.  Position  of  verb  .      .  A.  &  G.  343,  344,  «.  H.  560,  561,  I.,  II. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  a-ni-mi  (cf.  Galli),  nom.  plur.  masc.,  souls,  minds,  feelings. 

2.  c6m-mg-ant,  they  go  back  and  forth,  visit. 

3.  gf-fe-mi  nat,  he,  she,  or  it  makes  effeminate,  enervates. 

4.  I-i  or  6-1,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  they  ;  cf.  6a,  nom.  and  accus.  plur. 

neut.,  and  Sos,  accus.  plur.  masc. 

5.  Im  p8r-tant,  they  bring  in,  import. 

6.  mgr  ca-to  res,  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  masc.,  merchants. 

7.  mi  nl  me,  adv.,  superlative  degree,  least,  by  no  means. 

8.  pSr-ti  ngnt,  they  stretch  out,  tend,  pertain. 

9.  -qug,  conj.,  and ;  enclitic. 

10.  qui,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  who;  quae,  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  neut., 

which;  quartim,  gen.  plur.  fern.,  of  which. 

11.  sse-pg,  adv.,  often;  minime  Scepg,  by  no  means  often,  i.  c. 

very  seldom. 


LESSON   VII.  31 


6.    EXERCISES. 

(1)  Translate,  (2)  explain  significant  endings,  (3)  give  the  number,  gender,  and 
antec.  of  the  pron.  so  far  as  you  can. 

1.  (a)  Minime  ad   ecs  mercatores   ssepe   com  meant,      (b)  Ad  eos 
mercatores    ea   quae    ad    effemiuandos    ariimos    pertinent    important. 

(c)  Animi  eorum  qui  a  cultu  proviucise    lougissime  absunt  minirne 
etfemiuantur.     (d)  Ad  eos  quorum  terrain   tinmen  dividit  mercatores 
mittunt. 

2.  (a)  Provincia  Romanorum  ad  Galliam  pertinet.     (b)  Roman!  ad 
Gallos  saepe  comrneant.      (c)  Belgae  et  Celtfe  partes  Gallise  incolunt. 

(d)  Horum    omnium    linguae,    Instituta,1    leges    inter    se   differunt. 

(e)  Nobilissimi   Belgarum   propterea    quod   eorum   fines   longissime 
absunt,  humanitate  ab  Sequanis  difterunt. 

3.  (a)  Tlie  merchants  very   seldom    bring   in  those  things  which 
tend  to  weaken  courage,     (b)  Those  (things)  which  tend  to  enervate 
minds  are  very  far  distant  from   the   Belgae.      (c)  Those   who  are 
called   Belgre   overcome    the  Aquitani.      (d)  The   merchants   hasten 
from  our  province  into  the  territory  of  the  Tigurini. 

4.  (a)  The  Belgre    differ   from    the   Eomans  in    civilization  and 
refinement,      (b)   The  merchants  often   go  to  and  fro  to  the  Celtse. 
(c)  The  Belgse  are  the  bravest  of  all  the  Gauls,      (d)  Those  (things) 
which  merchants  send  to  the  Sequani  are  very  seldom  brought  to  the 


Belgae. 


7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 


1.  Two  uses  of  the  endings  -5,  -ae,  -e  or  -g.  2.  Three  classes 
of  verbs.  3.  Agreement  of  verb.  4.  Position  of  verb.  5.  Antec. 
and  agreement  of  pron.  6.  List  of  pron.  in  first  seven  lessons.2 
7.  Enclitics.  8.  Three  words  meaning  and,  with  difference. 
9.  Changes  in  spelling  in  compounds.  10.  Pour  accus.  plur.  end- 
ings. 11.  The  various  forms  which  have  occurred  of  that  pron.  the 
plur.  neut.  of  which  is  ea. 

1  Nom.  plur.  neut.,  rf.  ea. 

2  The  instructor  should  aid  the  pupil  in  this  work  of  classifying  his  material. 
Blank -books,  properly  ruled,  should  be  used.     It  is  of  extreme  importance  that, 
from  the  beginning,  the  pupil  should  be  encouraged  to  do  independent  work. 


32  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON    VIII. 
1.    TEXT. 

pro-xT-mi-que  sunt       Ger-ma-nis,     qui    trans   Rhe-num 
nearest  also    they  are  to-the-Germans,  who  across  the  Khine 

In-co-lunt,  qul-bus-cum    con-tl-nen-ter   bel-lum    ge-runt. 
dwell,         with  whom       continually         war      they  wage. 

2     NOTES. 

1.  pr6  xl  mi-quS,  nearest  also  ;  cf.  minimeque,  and  proximate, 
proximo :   (a)  case,  number,  gender  ?    (b)  What  part  of  speech,  and 
with  what  does  it  agree?  (c)  irregular  superlative;  (d)  force  of -que? 

2.  Ggr-ma-nis,  to  the  Germans:   (a)  -is  indicates  here  the  case 
of  the  indirect  object   in  the  plural;   (b)  this  case  is  called  the  da- 
tive;    (c)    in   the    Eng.   expressions   nearest  the    Germans,  like  his 
father,  he  gave  the  boy  a  book  —  Germans,  father,  and  boy  are  in  the 
dative  case;    (d)  the  ending  -is  is  also  used  for  the  abl.  plur. ;  cf. 
ab  Aquitanis  V.  x.  3. 

3.  Rhe-num,  the  Rhine:  (a)  -u-m  indicates  accus.  sing.  masc.  or 
neut.  •  cf.  un-a-m,  accus.  sing,  fem.,   II.  N.  2;    (b)  after  the  prep, 
trans  ;   cf.  in,  inter,  ad. 

4.  qui-bfis-cftxn,   with   whom ;    two   words,    quibus    and    cum : 

(a)  cum,  prep,  with  abl.;  cf.  a  or  ab ;   (b)  joined  to  the  end  of  qui- 
bus and  some  other  pronouns,  though  it  usually  has  the  same  position 
as  a  or  ab  ;    (c)  quibus,  abl.  plur.  masc. ;  cf.  legibus  IV.  ;  quarum 
II.  N.  1;   qui  III.  N.  2;   quae  VII.  N.  8;    (d)  antecedent? 

5.  c6ii-tl-ngn-tgr,  adv.,  continually;  cf.  per-ti-nent  VII.  N.  11; 
-t6r  (as  well  as  -6  or  -g)  is  an  ending  of  adverbs. 

6.  bgl-ltim,    war;    cf.   bellicose:    (a)   -ti  m,   accus.    sing,   neut.; 

(b)  why  accus.  ?    (c)  in   all   neut.  nouns  and   adj.   the  nom.  is  like 
accus.  in  both  sing,  and   plur.;    cf.  ea   VII.  x.  7;    (d)  nom.  and 


LESSON  VIII.  33 

accus,  plur.  bella ;  cf.  ea ;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  bellis ;  cf.  institutls, 
from  nom.  sing',  institutum. 

7.    ge-rtint,  they  carry  on,  wage  ;  cf.  belligerent,  from  bellum  and 
stem  of  gerunt ;  gerit,  he  wages,  cf.  dividit  V. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  the  indirect  object. 

2.  The  ending  -is  is  that  of  dat.  and  abl.  plur. 

3.  The  preps,  in,  inter,  ad,  trans,  take  the  accus. ;  a  or  ab  and 
cum  take  the  abl. 

4.  With  the  abl.  of  qui,  who,  cum  is  attached  to  the  end  of  the 
word. 

5.  The  ending  -u-m  is  that  of  the  accus.  sing.  masc.  and  neut. ; 
-a-m,  that  of  the  amis.  sing.  fein. 

6.  Endings  of  adverbs,  -e,  -e,  and  -ter. 

7.  Neut.  endings  :    nom.  and  accus.  sing.,  -u-m ;  nom.  and  accus. 
pltir.,  -a;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  -la. 

8.  The  nom.  is  used  as  the  subject,  the  gen.  as  an  adj.,  the  dat.  as 
the  indirect  object,  the  accus.  as  the  direct  object,  and  the  abl.  as  an 
adv. 

9.  All  the  above  cases,  except  the  abl.,  are  found  in  Eng.,  though 
they  are  not  always  called  by  these  names. 

10.  Having  arranged,  in  the  order  of  cases  used  in  Obs.  8,  all  the 
forms  of  nouns  and  adjs.  which  have  the  nom.  sing,  in  -a,  like  Gallia, 
observe  that :   (a)  all  these  forms  contain  a  except  the  abl.  plur.,  and 

(b)  here  the  absence  is  only  apparent,  as  -Is  is  contracted  from  a-is ; 

(c)  the  stem  (cf.  VI.  N.  4  (b) )  ends  in  a,  and  for  this  reason  these 
words  are  called  a  nouns  or  adj. ;   (d)  they  belong  to  what  is  called 
the  first  declension;    (e)  they  are  all  fern,  except  where  masc.  by 
meaning;  cf.  II.  N.  4  (e),  V.  N.  4  (c). 

4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Declension     .     .      A.  &  G.  20,  26.  H.  46. 

2.  First  declension       A.  &  G.  35,  stella.  H.  48,  mensa. 

3.  Dative  case    .     .     A.  &  G.  224  and  read  note.  H.  382,  383. 


34  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


5.  VOCABULARY  A. 

1.  bSl-lftm,  nom.  and  accus.  sing,  neut.,  war. 

2.  c6n-t!-ngn-t6r,  adv.,  continually. 

3.  ciiin,  prep,  with  abl.,  with. 

4.  gg-rtint,  they  carry  on,  wage. 

5.  pr6-xi-mi,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  the  nearest. 

6.  Rhg-niim,  accus.  sing,  masc.,  the  Rhine. 

7.  trans,  prep,  with  accus.,  across. 

6.  VOCABULARY  B. 

Collect  from  all  preceding  vocabularies  the  a  nouns  and  adj.  which  they  contain. 

1.  bona,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  good,  goodly. 

2.  frumentum,  nom.  and  accus.  sing,  neut.,  grain. 

3.  magna,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  great,  large. 

7.    EXERCISES. 

(1)  Translate;  (2)  explain  significant  endings;  (3)  give  the  case  of  every  noun 
and  adj. 

1.  (a)  Belgse  fortissim!  sunt  propterea  quod  proximi  sunt  Germa- 
nls,  quibuscum  continenter  bellum  gerunt.     (ft)  Galli  cum  Germanis 
continental*   bellum   gcrunt.       (c)   Helvetil   proximi    sunt    Sequanis. 

(d)  Germam  trans  Rhcnum  incolunt. 

2.  (a)  Belgse  et  Celtse  Galliam  incolunt.     (b)  Gallia  est  dlvlsa  in 
partes  tres  quftrum  una  Aqultania  est.      (c)   Copise   Celtarum   sunt 
proximse    Helvetils.       (d)   Una    via    est    per   provinciam    nostram. 

(e)  Instituta  provinciae   inter   se  difFerunt.       (f)   Tlumen  a  Belgis 
Celtas  dlvidit. 

3.  (a)  Parts  of  a  divided  province,     (b)  They  hasten  across  the 
country  of  the  Belgae.       (c)  The  road  is   nearest  to  the   Sequani. 
(d)  All  the  Germans  differ  from  the  Gauls  in  culture  and  courage. 

4.  (a)  Switzerland  is  called  a  goodly  land.     (£)  The  Belgse  in- 
habit a  large  country,     (c)  He  goes  back  and  forth  across  the  Matrona 
and  the  Seine,      (d)  The  Germans  send  ambassadors  to  (ad)  the 
Celtse. 


LESSON  IX.  35 


8.     TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  New  endings  :  -is  as  dat.,  -u-m,  -ter.  2.  Two  or  more  uses  of 
endings  -Is,  -u-m,  -e,  -ae,  -a.  3.  Various  forms  of  the  pronoun  qui, 
all  genders,  plur.  4.  Neuter  nouns.  5.  Cases  in  Eng.  and  Lat. 
6.  Formation  of  cases  from  the  stem  in  -a  nouns.  7.  Gender  of  -a 
nouns.  8.  Parts  of  speech  having  -a  stems.  9.  The  use  of  the  dat. 
10.  Declension  in  Eng.  11.  Position  of  cum. 


LESSON   IX. 

1.  TEXT. 

Qua        de      cau-sa       Hel-ve-tl-i     quo-que      re-11-quos 
"Which     from     cause       the  Helvetii         also          the-rest-of 

Gal-los    vlr-tu-te  prae-ce-dunt,  quod  fe-re  quo-ti-dl-a-ms 
the  Gauls   in  valor       surpass,    because  almost     (in)  daily 

proe-11-is     cum     Ger-ma-nis     con-ten-dunt,    cum      aut 
battles       with    the  Germans      they  contend,   when    either 

su-is  fi-nl-bus         e-6s          pro-hl-bent,      aut 

from  their  own      boundaries       them      they  keep  away,     or 

I-psi        In   e-o-rum     fi-nl-bus     bel-liim   ge-runt. 
themselves    in      their       boundaries      war          wage. 

2.  NOTES. 

1.    Qua,  which:  (a)  abl.  sing,  fern.,  1st  deol.;    (b)  here  an  adj. 
agreeing  with  causa ;   (c)  cf.  qui,  quarum,  quae,  quibus ;   (d~)  when 


36  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

it  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  as  here,  it  may  be  translated 
like  ea,  this,  for  this  reason. 

2.  de,  from,  for  ;  prep,  with  abl.,  cf.  a,  ab,  cum. 

3.  cau-sa,    cause,    reason :    (a)    diphthong    au  —  ow    in    how ; 
(b)  case?   (c)  stein  and  decl.  complete? 

4.  qu6-qug,  conj.,  also,  likewise:    (a)  follows  the  emphatic  word 
of  the  clause,  Helvetii ;    (b)   Helvetii  quoque,  the  Helcetii  also  ; 
atque  Helvetii,  and  also  the  Helvetii. 

5.  rg-li-quos,  adj.,  the-rest-of ;  cf.  relique,  relic:  (a)  rase,  num- 
ber, gender,  and  why  ?  cf.  VI.  N.  2  (b),  and  Obs.  7  ;  Gallos,  V.  N.  1 
(a) ;    (b)  of,  in  the  translation  the-rest-of,  is  part    of  the  meaning  of 
reliquos,  and  not  the  translation  of  a  gen. 

6.  vir-tu  tg,   in   valor ,    cf.    virtue :    (a)  case  ?    cf.  humanitate 
VI.  N.  9;    (b)  why  ?  cf.  lingua  IV.  N.  3  (b). 

7.  prce-ce-dttnt,  they  go  before,  surpass ;  cf.  precede,  precedent: 
prae,  before,  and  ceiunt,  they  go. 

8.  qu6  ti-dl-a  ms,  daily,  adj.  in  agreement  with  prceliis. 

9.  prce-H-is,  in  or  by  battles:    (a)  diphthong  ce  ==  oi  in   coin; 
(b)  nom.   sing,   prcelium,   cf.   bellum   VIII.    N.   6;    (c}  abl.   plur. 
neut.,  cf.  institutes  IV. 

10-    ciim,  prep.,  with  ;  here  in  its  usual  position  ;  cf.  quibuscum, 
VI [[.  N.  4  (b). 

11.  Ggr-ma  ms,    the    Germans:    (a)    abl.    plnr.    masc. ;     (b)    cf. 
proximi    Germanis    VIII.,    where   Germanis    is   dat.    plnr.    mase., 
though  having  the  same  form  as  here. 

12.  ciim,  conj.,  when:  (a)  also  written  quum  ;   (5)  not  to  be  con- 
founded with  prep.  ciim. 

13.  aut,  or,  either:  (a)  for  diphthong  au,  sec  caus£  3;   (b)  where 
aut  is  repeated  in  the  same  sentence,  as  here,  the  first  aut  is  trans- 
lated either,  the  other  or  others  or. 

14.  stt  is,  their  or  their  own:   (a)  possessive  adj.  limiting  fini- 
bus  ;   (b)  cf.  the  corresponding  reflexive  se  IV.  N.  7. 

15.  fT-ni-btis,  from   boundaries ;    cf.   confines,  finite :    (a)   abl. 
plur.  masc.,  cf.  legibus,  quibus  ;  (b)  the  nom.  sing,  is  finis,  end, 
limit ;  cf.  omnis  I.;  (c)  the  abl.  here  denotes  removal  or  separation, 
and  is  used  with  the  verb  prohibent,  which  means  they  keep  away ; 


LESSON  IX.  3T 

(d)  the  prep,  is  usually  expressed  with  the  aid.  of  separation  ;  cf.  ab 
Aquitanis  V.,  a  cultu  VI.,  but  with  prohibent  it  is  often  omitted. 

16.  6  63,  them  ;  cf.  e  6s  VII.  N.  3.     What  is  its  antec.? 

17.  pro  hi  bent,  they  keep  away;  cf.  prohibit:  (a)  contrast  pro- 
hibent, prohibet,  pertinent  VII.,  and  appellat,  appellantur,  im- 
portant ;    (b)  what  difference  of  stem  ending  ? 

18.  in,  with  abl.,  means  in  ;  with  abl.,  it  denotes  rest  in  a  place  ; 
with  aceus.,  motion    toward  a   place;  cf.  in  partes  I.,  into  parts ; 
and  in  flnibus,  in  territory. 

19.  6  6 -rum,  of  those,  of  them,  their:   (a)  gen.   plur.   niasc. ;   cf. 
ipsorum   III.,  horum  VI.  ;    (b)    suis   14,   and    eorum   both   mean 
their ;   but  suis  refers  to  Helvetii,  the  subject  of  the  clause  in  which 
it  stands,  while  eorum  refers  to  Germanis. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  relative  pronoun  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  may  be 
freely  translated  by  the  corresponding  demonstrative,  i.  e.  this  cause 
for  which  cause,  these  things  for  which  things,  these  for  who,  etc. 

2.  The  abl.  regularly  expresses  separation,  generally  with  but  often 
without  a  prep. 

3.  With  in,  the  accus.  is  used  to  express  motion  toward  a  place ; 
the  abl.,  position  in  a  place. 

4.  The  relative,  like  which  in  Eng.,  is  often  an  adj. 

5.  a,  ab,  cum,  de,  take  the  abl. 

6.  quoque,  conj.,  immediately  follows  the  emphatic  word  of  its 
clause. 

7.  Diphthongs  au  =  ow  in  how,  ce  =  oi  in  coin. 

8.  cum  is  a  conj.  meaning  when,  as  well  as  a  prep,  meaning  with. 

9.  sui,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  their,  and  se  must  refer  to  the  subject  of 
some  verb  in  the  sentence,  but  eorum,  of  them,  their,  need  not  so 
refer. 

4.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.    Ablative  of  separation    A.  &  G.  243  and  a.        H.  413  and  N.  3. 
-2     Sui  A.  &  G.  196,  197.  H.  448,  449. 


38  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

Hereafter,  if  uo  case  is  given  after  a  noun,  adj.,  or  pron.,  it  is  iu  the  nom.  sing. 

1.  aut,  conj.,  or ;  aut  .  .  .  aut,  either  .  .  .  or. 

2.  cau-s5,  fern.,  cause,  reason. 

3.  de,  prep,  with  M.,  from,  down  from,  concerning ,  for. 

4.  fS  re,  adv.,  almost. 

5.  prae-c§-duiit,  they  precede,  surpass. 

6.  prce  II  ttm,  neut.,  battle. 

7.  pr6  hi  bgnt,  they  keep  away,  prevent. 

8.  qu6-qu£,  conj.,  also. 

9.  qu6-ti-di-a  niim,  adj.,  neut.,  daily. 

10.  rg-li-qui,  adj.,  nom.  plnr.  masc.,  the  rest  of. 

11.  stt-5,  i'eui.,  stt-tim,  neut.,  adj.,  his,  her,  its,  their. 

12.  vlr-tu-tg,  abl.  sing.  fern,    virtue,  valor;  vlrtutgs,  nom.  and 

accus.  plur. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Belgne  cum  Germanis  continenter  bellum  gerunt.     (b)  Hel- 
vetii  cum  GerinanTs  fere  quotldianis  projliis  contendunt.      (c)  Proxi- 
mi  sunt    Germanis  quibuscum   fere   quotldianis  prceliis  contendunt. 
(d)  Helvetii  aut  suls  finibus  Germanos  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  Germa- 
norum  finibus  bellum  geruiit. 

2.  (a)  Gallorum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  quod  prosliis  cum  Germa- 
nis saepe  contendunt.     (5)  Mini  me  cum  Belgis  Aquitani  proeliis  con- 
tendunt.     (c)  Romani  cum  GallTs  saepissime  bellum  gcrunt.     (d)  Ad 
Ehenum  flnesque  Germanorum  Helvetii  contendunt. 

3.  (a)  The  Romans  keep  the  Germans  from  the  territory  of  the 
Sequani.      (b)  The  Helvetii  are  overcome  in  battles,      (c)  Wars  are 
waged  in  the  territory  of  the  Germans,  who  dwell  across  the  Rhine. 

(d)  When   the   brave   Romans   keep   the   Gauls  from  their   country. 

(e)  The  large  river  divides  their  province  into  parts. 

4.  (a)  The  Tolosates  are  in  the  province.      (b)   These  excel  the 
rest  of  the  Belgre  in  valor,     (c)  Gaul  is  their  province,      (d)  They 


LESSON   X. 


39 


send  soldiers  into  their  province,  (e)  The  Belgic  are  very  far  distant 
from  the  civilization  of  the  province,  and  for  this  reason  (Lat.  idiom, 
for  which  reason)  excel  the  Celtae  in  valor. 

7.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  The  abl.  endings  in  this  lesson.  2.  The  uses  of  the  abl.  in  this 
lesson.  3.  Two  meanings  of  cum.  4.  Two  meanings  of  in. 
5.  Difference  in  meaning  between  bellum  and  prcelium.  6.  Usual 
position  of  verb  in  clause;  of  sunt ;  position  of  cum,  prep.;  of 
quoque  ;  of -que  ;  of  relative  pronoun.  7.  Antecedent  of  each  pron. 
in  lesson.  8.  Difference  in  use  of  suis  and  eorum.  9.  Verb  stems 
ending  in  -e  ;  in  -a.  10.  Masc.,  fern.,  and  neut.  words  in  the  lesson. 


LESSON   X. 


1.    TEXT. 

E-5-rum      u-na       pars,      quam       Gal-los       cb-tl-ne-re 
Of  these        one         part,       which      the  Gauls  to  hold 


die-turn  est, 
it  has  been  said, 


In-I-t!-um 
beginning 


ca-plt 

takes 


a 

from 


flu-ml-ne 
the  river 


Rh6-da-no;  con-tl-ne-tur  Ga-ru-mna        flu-ml-ne, 

Ehone ;  it  is  bounded     by  the  Garumna  river, 

6-ce-a-no,  fi-nl-bus  Bel-ga-rum ; 

by  the  ocean,  by  the  territory     of  the  Belgae  ; 


at-tln-glt 

it  reaches 


e-tl-am  ab  Se-qua-nis         et         Hel-ve-tl-Is 

also          on-the-side-of      the  Sequani       and       the  Helvetii 


flu-men     Rhe-num  ;      ver-git 
the  river      Rhine  ;         it  slopes 


ad      sep-ten-trl-o-nes. 

toward  tne  north. 


40  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  E-6-rttm,  of  these :  (a)  Possessive  or  partitive  genitive?  VI.  N. 
3  (c)  (d)  (e)  ;  (b)   the  these  here  referred  to   means  all  the  inhab- 
itants of  Gaul;  (c)  decline  in  plur.  masc.,  fein.,  and  neut. 

2.  pSrs,  part:  (a)  nom.  sing,  fein.;   (b)  cf.  abl.  sing,  parte,  like 
virtute  ;  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  partgs  I. ;  gen.  plur.  partium,  like 
omnium  ;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  partibus,  like  finibus ;  the  nom.  sing, 
is  formed  by  adding  a,  and  t  of  the  stem  is  dropped  before  it :  pars 
=  par(t)s  ;    (c)  cf.  stein  ornni-,  nom.   sing,  omnis  ;    stem  humani- 
tat-,  nom.  humanita(t)s  ;   stem  virtut-,  nom.  virtu(t)s  ;    (d)  subject 
of  capit,  continetur,  attingit,  vergit. 

3.  quam,  which :    (a)   accus.  sing.  fern. ;   cf.  abl.  sing.  fein.   qua 
IX.,  gen.  plur.  fein.  quarum   II.;    (b)  obj.   of  obtinere;   (c)  antec. 
and  why?  VII.  N.  3. 

4.  6b-ti-ne-r6,  to  hold,  occupy,  possess:  (a)  compounded  of  ob, 
against,  and  tengre,  to  hold,  to  hold  against  (all  comers] ;  cf.  per- 
tinent ;    (b)   -re,   the  sign  of  the  pivs.   infinitive  act.;  cf.  obtine-t, 
obtine-nt  ;  importa-nt,  importa  re. 

5.  die-turn,  said,   or  having  been  said;    cf.  dictation,  diction,' 

(a)  with  est  translated  it  is  said,  or  it  has  been  said ;  (b)  nom.  sing. 
neut.,  cf.   bellum  ;    (c)  pass,  participle,  cf.  divisa   I.;    (d)  quam 
Gallos  obtinere   dictum  est,  which   it   has   been   said  the    Gauls 
occupy;  (e)  the  Gallos  here  referred  to  are  the  Celtae  III. 

6.  111  it-I-um,  beginning;  cf.  initiative;  accus.  sing,  neut.,  cf. 
bellum  VI I L 

7.  c&  pit,  it  takes  ;  cf.  capture,  and  dividit  V. 

8.  flu-mi-ng,  the  river:  (a)   abl.  sing,  nent.,  cf.  virtute;   (b)  cf. 
nom.  sing,  flumen  V.,  and  note  change  in  vowel ;   (c)  cf.  flumina, 
nom.   and    accus.   plur.,   rivers,    cf.   ea ;    fluminum,   cf.   omnium ; 
fluminibus,  cf  finibus;    (d)  why  abl.?   IX.  N.  15. 

9.  RhS  da-no,  the  Rhone:  (a)  abl.  sing,  masc.,  distinguished  by 
-6,  cf.  abl.  sing.  fern,   causa ;    also  abl.  sing,  virtute,   cultu  VI. ; 

(b)  explains  flumine,  and  refers  to  the  same  thing;  is  therefore  in  the 
same  case;    cf.  flumen    V.    N.    5   (b).      Such  a  word   is   called  an 
appositive. 


LESSON   X.  41 

10.  c6n-ti-ne-tiir,  it  is  held  together,   bounded ;  cf.   Eng.  conti- 
nent, noun  and  adj. :    (a)  compounded  of  con,  together,  and  tenere, 
to  hold;  cf.  pertinent  VII.  N.  11;  obtinere  4;   (b)  3d  sing,  pass., 
ending  -tur  ;    (c)  cf.  dividi-t,  pertine-iit,   appella-ntur,   appella-t, 
appella-tur,   dividi-tur,  differu-nt,  dividu-ntur,  and  note  that  the 
ending  is  the  same  for  the  same  voice,  person,  and  number,  while  the 
stem  is  different  in  different  verbs. 

11.  GS-rtt-mna,  by  (i.  e.  by  means  of]  the   Garumna :  (a)   the 
prep,  expressed  in  the  translation   does  not  appear  in   the  Lat.;  cf. 
lingua    HI.,    lingua    IV.,    provinciae    VI.,    finibus    IX.  ;     (b)    ex- 
presses the  means  by  which  one  part  is  bounded,  and  is  ealled  an 
abl.  of  means  or  instrument ;  lingua'  III.  and  prceliis   IX.,  though 
translated  by  in  are  really  examples  of  the  same  use  of  abl. 

12.  5-cS-S-no,  by  the  ocean  :   (a)  abl.  sing.  mase.  0f  means,  like 
Garumna,  and  finibus  following  ;    (b)  abl.  sing.  masc.  of  animos, 
eorum?    (c)  position  of  accent,  and  why? 

13.  at-tin-git,  it  touches  upon,  it  reaches  to :  (a)  compounded  of 
ad,  to,  and  taiigit  (he,  she,   it)  touches  ;   cf.  tact,  contact;    (b)  d 
before  t  changed  to  t,  cf.  appellaiitur  I  If.;    (c)  a  of  tangit  changed 
to  i,  cf.  tenere  and  obtinere,  flumen  and  flumiiie. 

14.  %b,from}  on  the  side  of;  occasionally  indicates  position  rather 
than  separation. 

15.  Rhe-num,   Rhine:    (a)   the  ending  -u-m  indicates  here  the 
accus.    sing,    masc.;    (b)    in   apposition    with    flumen,    which    is   the 
object  of  attingit. 

16.  sgp-tgii-tri-o-nes,  the  constellation  of  the  Great  Bear  (''the 
Great  Dipper"),  which  is  in  the  northern  part  of  the  heavens,  the 
north:   (a)  accus.  plur.  masc.  ending -5s ;  cf.  partes  I.  N.  6;  mer- 
catores  VII.;    (b)  sing,  in  sense,  though  plur.  in  form. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  An  appositive  agrees  in  case  with  the  noun  which  it  explains. 

2.  Means  or  instrument  is  expressed  by  the  abl.  without  a  prep. 

3.  An  ending  in  Lat.  often  expresses  an  idea  which  requires  a  prep, 
in  Eng. 


42  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

4.  Noun   endings:    -B,   noin.   sing.;    -6,   abl.   sing,   masc.;    -u-m, 
accus.  sing.  masc. 

5.  Verb  endings  :  -t,  he,  she,  or  it,  act.;  -tur,  he,  she,  or  it,  pass.; 
-nt,  they,  act.;  -ntur,  they,  pass.;  -re,  ending  of  pres.  intinitive  act. 

6.  The  letter  t  is  dropped  before  a,  d  before  t  is  changed  to  t,  a 
and  e  are  often  changed  to  i  when  a  word  is  lengthened. 

7.  Many  stems  ending  in  t  and  i  form  the  nom.  by  adding  B. 

8.  Ob    in    composition    means    against,    in   the   wry   of;    con, 
together,  or  simply  strengthens  the  meaning  of  the  word  with  which  it 
is  compounded. 

4.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Abl.  of  means    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  248.  H.  420. 

2.  Apposition    .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  183,  184.  H.  363. 

3.  Change  of  a  or  e  to  i  .  A.  &  G.  10,  b.  H.  22,  1. 

4.  Assimilation       .      .      .  A.  &  G.  11, /.  3.  H.  344,  5,  ad. 

5.  Omission  of  t  before  B  A.  &  G.  44.  H.  36,  2. 


5.  VOCABULARY  A. 

1.  aVtlu-gttnt,  they  touch  upon,  reach. 

2.  cS-pit,  he,  she,  or  it  takes. 

3.  c6n-ti-n§nt,  they  hold  together,  bound. 

4.  dic-ttim,  neut.,  said,  or  having  been  said. 

5.  8-tI  am,  even,  also. 

6.  I-ni-ti-ttm,  neut.,  beginning. 

7.  8b-ti-n8nt,  they  hold  against  (all  comers],  occupy,  possess. 

8.  Sb-tl-ne-rS,  to  possess. 

9.  O-cS-a-iium,  accus.  sing,  masc.,  the  ocean  ;  Oceano,  abl.  sing. 

10.  pars,  fern.,  part;  nom.  plur.,  partes. 

11.  sSp-tgn-tri-6-nes,  the  Great  J3ear,  the  north. 

12.  vgr-gttnt,  they  slope,  verge,  are  situated. 

6.  VOCABULARY  B. 

1.  amid,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  friends. 

2.  carri,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  carts,  wagons. 


LESSON   X.  43 

3.  influit,  it  flows,  or  flows  into. 

4.  numerum,  accus.  sing,  inasc.,  a  number. 

5.  pagi,  uoin.  plur.  mase.,  cantons,  districts. 

7.    EXERCISES 

(1)  Translate;   (2)  select  and  classii'y  all  the  abl.  in  these  exercises  ;   (3)  name 
all  the  appositives. 

1.  (a)  Una  pars,  ad  quara  Gallos  commeare  dictum  est,  vergit  ad 
septentriones.       (b)  Alia    pars,   quani    iiicolunt    Aquitani,   continetur 
Garumna    flurnine,    (Jceano,    Pyrenseis    montibus.       (c)   Tertia    pars, 
quam    Belgae    obtinent,   a   Morinls    et    Menapils    Oceanum   attingit. 
(d)  Una  Galliae  pars  initium  capit  a  flumine  Rhodano.     (e)  Britannia 
Oceauo  continetur. 

2.  (a)  Legati  riobiles  ad  Sequanos  mittuntur.     (b)  Magnum  carro- 
rum   numerum    importat.       (c)  Flumiua   sunt  qua3    per   fines    Gal- 
lorum  in  Khodanuin  influiiut.     (d)  Helvetia  omnis  in  quattuor  pagos 
divisa  est. 

3.  (a)   One   part    of   Gaul    reaches    the   river    Rhine.       (b)   The 
Garumna  river  divides  the  Gauls  from  the  Aquitani.     (c)  A  good  way 
into  the  province  is  very  fur  distant,    (rf)  Orgetorix  surpasses  in  valor 
the  rest  of  the  soldiers  who  are  in  Helvetia. 

4.  (a)  Those  things  which  are  brought  in  enervate  the  minds  of 
the  Gauls,     (b)  The  Hsedui  are  called  friends,     (c)  The  Belga3  keep 
the  Germans  from  their  territory,     (d)  The  bravest  of  all  the  Gauls 
are  overcome  in  war. 

8.    TOPICS  FOR  STUDY. 

1.  The  abl.  of  means.  2.  Difference  between  abl.  of  means  and 
abl.  of  respect.  3.  When  the  prep,  is  expressed  with  abl.  4.  When 
omitted.  5.  New  endings  :  -tur,  -re,  -s,  -5,  -u-m  as  accus.  masc. 
6.  Uses  of  endings  -u-m  and  -a.  7.  Change  of  vowels  in  words. 
8.  Change  or  omission  of  consonants.  9.  Distinguish  endings  -t, 
-ntur,  -nt,  -tur.  10.  Force  of  ob  and  con  in  composition. 
11.  Translation  of  the  infinitive  with  a  verb  of  saying.  12.  Dis- 
tinguish -u-m  and  -a-m ;  also  -u-m,  -um,  and  -rum.  13.  Four  end- 
ings of  abl.  in  sing.,  two  in  plur. 


44  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


LESSON  XI. 

Beginning  with  this  lesson,  only  long  vowels  are  marked.     Unmarked  vowels 
should  be  treated  as  short.     Diphthongs  are  long. 

1.    TEXT. 

Bel-gae  ab  ex-tre-mis         Gal-li-ae         fi-ni-bus 

The  Belgse       from       the  remotest       of  Gaul       boundaries 

o-ri-un-tur,          per-ti-nent     ad     in-fe-ri-6-rem     par-tern 
take  their  rise,      they  extend     to          the  lower  part 

flu-min-is     Rhe-ni,    spec-tant     in     sep-ten-tri-o-nem    et 
of  the  river    Ehine,      they  look    into          the  north          and 

o-ri-en-tem       so-lem.          A-qui-ta-ni-a      a       Ga-ru-mna 
the  rising  sun.  Aquitania      from  the  Garumua 

flu-mi-ne  ad   Py-re-nse-os     mon-tes       et    e-am   par-tern 
river  to   the  Pyrenean  mountains    and    that  part 

O-ce-a-m        quae      est      ad       His-pa-ni-am      per-ti-net, 
of  the  ocean    which      is     near  Spain  extends, 

spec-tat    in-ter   oc-ca-sum     so  lis       et  sep-ten-tri-o-nes. 
it  looks  between  the  setting  of  the  sun  and     the  north. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  Gal-li-ae,    of   Gaul:    gen.   sing,   fern.,    cf.   provincise   VI.    N. 
10  (b). 

2.  o-ri-un-tur,  they  rise,  begin  ;  cf.  orient :  (a)  third  plur.,  pass, 
form,  cf.  appellantur ;    (b)  this  verb   is   puss,  in  form,  but  act.  in 
meaning. 

3.  par-tern,  part :  (a)  accus.  sing,  fern.,  after  ad.     (b)  What  is  the 


LESSON   XL  45 

case  ending  ?    cf.  pars  X.   N.  2  •    (c)  limited  by  iiiferlorem,  which 
has  tlie  s;nne  ending:. 

4.  flu-mi-nis,  of  the  river:  (a)  gen.  sing.  neut.     (b)  What  is  the 
case  ending-?  cf.  flumine  X.  N.  8  (b)  (c). 

5.  Rhe-ni,  of  the  Rhine:  (ec)  -I  is  here  the  ending  of  the  gen. 
sing,  in  a  so. ;   (b)  distinguish  -I,  the  ending  of  the  nom.  plur.  masc. ; 
cf.  Galll  [[[.hi  IV.;   (c)  case,  and  why? 

6.  o-ri-en-tem,  rising  :    (a)  participle,  cf.  divisa  I.,  dictum  X. ; 
(b)  from   verb  oriuntur  2  ;    (c)  for  ending  -em  cf.  partem  3,  and 
septentrionem,  solem  ;    (d)  for  nom.  sing,  orieiis,  cf.  pars  X.  N. 
2  (b)  (c). 

7.  e-am,  that:    (a)  here  an  adj.  limiting  partem,   which  is  used 
with  prep,  ad;  cf.  qua  IX.  N.  3 ;   (b)  cf.  quam,  and  ea,  eos,  eorum. 

8.  quee,   which:    (a)    nom.  sing.  fern,  (irregular  ending);    (b)  a 
masc.  or  fern.  pron.  in  Lat.  may  be  translated  which  or  it  when  the 
antee.  in  Eng.  is  neut.;    (c)  carefully  distinguish  the  neut.  quoe  VII. 
N.  8;   (d)  antec.  ?     How  do  you  know  it  ? 

9.  so-lis,   of  the  sun:    (a)  for  ending  cf.  flumiiiis  4;    (b)  cf. 
solem  ;   (c)  possessive  or  partitive  ? 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  New  endings  :  -em  of  uccus.  sing. ;  -I  and  -is,  gen.  sing. 

2.  Masc.  and  fern,  words  which  have  the  gen.  sing,  -is  have  the 
accus.  sing,  -em;  soils,  solem,  and  the  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  -es ; 
partem,  partes,  mercatoies. 

3.  Select  the  neuter  nouns  and  adjs.  from  the  text  and  vocabularies 
of  the  lessons,  and  note  that  all   but   flumen   have   the   nom.  and 
accus.    sing,  in  -um,  the  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  in  -a,  and  the  abl. 
plur.  in  -is. 

4.  Distinguish  carefully  ending  -I,  gen.  sing,  and  nom.  plur.  masc. ; 
-a,  nom.  sing.  fern,  and  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  neut. ;  -ae,  gen.  sing, 
fern,  and  nom.  plur.  fern. ;  -e  abl.  sing.,  and  -e  or  -e  adv. ;  -Is  abl. 
plur.,  and  -is  gen.  sing. 

5.  Some  verbs  are  pass,  in  form  but  act.  in  meaning. 

6.  The  form  quee  is  both  the  nom.  sing.  fern,  and  the  nom.  and 
accus.  plur.  neut.  of  the  rel.  pron. 


46  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

4.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 
1.    Neut.  2d  clecl.,  A.  &  G.  38,  bellum  ;  H.  51,  templum. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  ex-tre-ml,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  extreme,  the  end  of;  cf.  reliqui. 

the  rest  of. 

2.  Hi-spa-ni-a,  fein.,  Spain. 

3.  m-fe-ri-6-rem,    accus.  sing.,  lower. 

4.  oc-ca-sum,  accus.  sing,  masc.,  the  falling,  setting. 

5.  o-ri-ans,  adj.,  rising ;   accus.  sing,  orieiitem ;  oriuntur,  they 

rise. 
f>.    Fy-re-iiae-i,  adj.,  nom.  plur.  masc.,  Pyrenean,  of  the  Pyrenees. 

7.  so-lis,  gen.  sing,  masc.,  of  the  sun;  accus.  sing.,  solem. 

8.  spec-taut,  they  look,  face. 

6.   EXERCISES. 

1.  («)  Belgae  ab  extremis  Galliae  flnibus  oriuntur.     (b)  Belgse  ad 
inferiorem  partem  fluiniiiis  Rheiti  pertinent,      (c)  BelgrB  in  septentri- 
onein  ct  orientem  solem  spectant.     (d)  Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine 
ad  Pyreusuos  monies  pertinet.     (e)  Aquitania  ad  earn  partem  Occam 
qiuu  est  ad  Hispfmiam  pertinet.      (f)  Aquitania  inter  occiisum  solis 
et  septentriones  spectat. 

2.  (a)  Quotidifino  prrulio  coutendit.      (b)  Bellis  magnis  German! 
Gallos  superaut.     (c)  Pyreiuei  moutes  sunt  altissiml.     (c?)  Via  per 
extremes   fines   est.      (e)  Suos  fines   dividunt.       (/)  Eorum  pages 
capit. 

3.  (a)  The    Nervii    keep    the    Germans    from    their   boundaries. 

(b)  Aquitania    is    bounded    by    the    Garumna   river  and   the   ocean. 

(c)  One  part  of  the  river  is  near  Spain,     (d)  The  Belgae  touch  upon 
the  part  which  the  Gauls  occupy. 

4.  (a)  They  wage  great  wars,     (b)  The  good  soldiers  of  the  Ro- 
mans surpass  the  Gauls  in  war.      (c)  The  customs  which  the  Romans 
bring  in  are  good,     (d)  The  land  which  is  called  Gaul  slopes  toward 
the  north. 


LESSON   XII.  47 


7.    TOPICS  FOR  STUDY. 

1.  Agreement  of  pron.  2.  Agreement  of  adj.  3.  Agreement  of 
verb.  4.  Three  gen.  sing,  endings.  5.  Three  accns.  sing,  end- 
ings. 6.  Three  gen.  plur.  endings.  7.  Three  accus.  plur.  endings. 
8.  Peculiarities  of  neut.  nouns.  9.  Why  ab  extremis  finibus,  but 
a  Garumna?  10.  Contrast  the  Roman  and  the  Eng.  way  of  express- 
ing the  points  of  the  compass. 


LESSON  XII. 

REVIEW. 

This  lesson  is  a  review  of  all  that  have  preceded  it.  Nothing  is  so  necessary,  in 
the  acquisition  of  a  language,  as  constant  and  thorough  review.  One  should  carry 
forward  with  him  at  least  nine-tenths  of  what  he  has  learned.  The  preceding 
lessons  contain  in  all  one  hundred  and  forty-seven  different  words,  together  with  a 
large  number  of  grammatical  forms.  Many  of  the  most  important  principles  of  the 
language  have  been  considered.  Others  might  have  been  brought  forward,  but  it 
has  been  deemed  wise  to  hold  them  in  reserve.  It  is  understood  that  the  student 
will  in  no  case  proceed  to  take  up  Lesson  XIII.  until  this  lesson,  with  all  that 
it  includes,  is  learned.  Let  every  word,  every  phrase,  every  principle,  be  mastered 
absolutely. 

1.   TEXT.  — OESAR'S  "GALLIC   WAR,"    BK.   I.   CHAP.  1. 

In  the  review  of  the  text  which  has  thus  far  been  taken,  pursue  the 
following  order  of  work  :  — 

1.  Pronounce  aloud  the  Lat.  text  repeatedly. 

2.  With  only  the  Eng.  translation  before  the  eye,  pronounce  the 
Lat.,  until  this  can  be  done  rapidly  and  without  hesitation. 

3.  With  only  the  Eng.  translation  before  the  eye,   write  out  the 
Lat. ;  compare  the  result  with  the  printed  Lat.  text ;  note  and  correct 
mistakes. 

4.  Write  out,  under  the  following  heads,  a  grammatical  analysis 
of  the  material  of  the  text  thus  far  studied  :  (1)  noun  forms,  classify- 
ing separately  in  both   sing,  and   plur.,   (a)  nom.  forms,    (b)  gen. 


48  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

forms,  (c)  dat.  forms,  (d)  accus.  forms;   (2)  verb  forms,  classifying 
separately  in  both  sing,  and  plur.,  (a)  act.  forms,  (b)  pass,  forms. 

5.  Go  through  the  text  and  select  those  forms  and  phrases  which, 
perhaps,  still  remain  unmastered.  Read  again  the  notes  given  upon 
them  in  previous  lessons.  Do  not  leave  them  before  they  have  been 
conquered. 

2.    GRAMMAR   LESSON.1 

1.  Pronun.,  Roman  method     A.  &  G.  16.  H.  5,  6,  7. 

2.  Pronun.,  Eng.  method      .   A.  &  G.  17.  H.  9, 10, 11, 12,13. 

3.  Division  into  syllables      .  A.  &  G.  14,  a,  b.  H.  8,  1,  2,  3. 

4.  Quantity  of  vowels      .     .  A.  &  G.  18,  a,  b,  H.  16,  notes  1,  2,  3, 

c.  4,  foot-note  3. 

5.  Quantity  of  syllables   .     .  A.  &  G.  18,  d,  e.  H.  16,  I.  II.  II [. 

6  Accent A.  &  G.  19,  a,  b.  IT.  17,  18. 

7  Gender A.  &  G.  28,  a,  c,  IT.   41,    and    foot- 

and  N.  note. 

8  Gender  of  names  of  rivers   A.  &  G.  29.  H.  42  entire. 
9.    Number A.  &  G.  31.           II.  44. 

10.  Enclitics A.  &  G.  19,  e.      H.  18,  2,  1). 

11.  Change  of  a  or  e  to  i  .     .  A.  &  G.  10,  b.       H.  22  and  1. 

12.  Assimilation       .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  10,  /,  3.  H.  344,  5,  read  ad. 

13.  Omission  oft  before  B      .  A.  &  G.  44.  H.  36,  2. 

14.  Position  of  cum  with  rel- 

ative      A.  &  G.  104,  e.  H.  187,  2. 

15.  Use  of  a  and  ab H.  434,  N.  2. 

1G.    Position   of  verb    in  sen- 
tence     A.  &  G.  343,  H.  560,  561,  I.  II. 

344,  a. 

17.  Et,  -que,  atque      .      .     .   A.  &  G.  156,  a.  H.  554,  2. 

18.  Meaning  of  reliqui      .      .   A.  &  G.  193.  H.  440,  2,  N.  1. 

19.  Inter A.  &  G.  196,  /,  H.  433,  I. 

153. 

20.  In,  with  accus.  or  abl.       .  A.  &  G.  152,  c.     IT.  435,  N.  1. 

2L   Adv.  in  -e  and  -ter     .     .A.  &  G.  81 :  b,       H.  304,  If.  2,  IV. 

84,  d. 

1  In  taking  up  this  "  Grammar  Lesson "  the  student  should  look  up  all  the 
references  which  he  cannot  already  give  in  substance.  The  heading  of  each  refer- 
ence  shows  what  the  student  is  expected  to  learn  from  it. 


LESSON  XT  I.  49 

22.  Compound  verbs  (ad,  con, 

ob) A.  &  G.  170,  a.    H.  344,  5. 

23.  Personal  endings  of  third 

person A.  &  G.  116.         H.  247. 

24.  Agreement  of  verb .     .     .   A.  &  G.  204.         H.  460. 

25.  Two  or  more  subjects  with 

sing,  verb H.  463,  II.  3. 

26.  Sterns A.  &  G.  20,  21.    H.  46,  1,  3. 

27.  Declension A.  &  G.  20,  26.    H.  46. 

28.  Stemofsunt     .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  119,  foot- H.  204,  foot-note  2. 

note. 

29.  Stella,  mensa  ....  A.  &  G.  35.  H.  48. 

30.  Absence  of  a  in  abl.  plnr. 

of  -a  nouns H.  48,  foot-note  3. 

31.  Bellum,  templum       .     .  A.  &  G.  38.  H.  51. 

32.  General  view  of  cases  .     .  A.  &  G.  31,  a,  b,   H.  365,  I.  II.  III. 

c,  d,  e,  f.  IV.  V.  VI. 

33.  Agreement  of  adj.  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  186.        H.  438. 

34.  Agreement  of  appositive  .  A.  &  G.  183, 184.  H.  363. 

35.  Agreement  of  pron.      .      .  A.  &  G.  198.          H.  445. 

36.  Antecedent  of  BUI  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  196, 197.  H.  448,  449. 

37.  Translation  of  the  relative 

at  the   beginning  of  a 

sentence A.  &  G.  201,  e.     H.  453. 

38.  Use  of  the  gen A.  &  G.  p.   146,  H.  393,  394,  395. 

N.,  213. 

39.  Possessive  gen A.  &  G.  214  and  II.  396,  I. 

foot-note. 

40.  Partjtivegen A.  &  G.  216.         H.  397. 

41.  Accns.  and  abl.  with  prep.  A.  &  G.  31,  d,       H.  432,  433. 

260. 

42.  Accus.  as  object      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  31,  d.      H.  365,  III. 

43.  Abl.  of  separation  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  243,  a,  b.  H.  413,  N.  3. 

44.  Abl.  of  respect  .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  253.         H.  424. 

45.  Abl.  of  means    .     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  248.         H.  420. 

46.  Useofdat A.  &  G. 224;  read  H.  382,  383. 

note. 


50 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.     WORD    REVIEW.     A. 

Classified  alphabetical  list  of  all  the  words  occurring  in  Chapter  I.  of  the  text  of 
Caesar's  "  Gallic  War." 


1.    VERBS 

absunt 

dictum  est 

obtinere 

appellantur 

differunt 

oriuntur 

attingit 

dividit 

prrtinet,  pertinent 

cap  it 

est,  sunt 

praecedunt 

commeant 

gcrunt 

prohibent 

contendunt 

important 

spectat,  spectant 

continetur 

incolunt 

vergit 

2.    A  STEMS. 

Nouns. 

Adj. 

Pron. 

Aquitania 

aliam 

earn 

Belg-se,  -arum,  -is 

divisa 

nostra 

causa 

nostra 

qu-a?,  -am,  -a,  -arum 

Celtse 

tcrtiam 

Galli-a,  -aj 

una 

Garumn-a,  -a 

HispFuiiam 

lingua 

Matron  a 

prGvineise 

Sequaua 

LESSON   XII. 


51 


3.    MASC.  WORDS  having  gen.  ending  -I,  arous.  -u-m,  abl.  -6.     Nora.  plur.  -I,  gen. 
plur.  -6-ruin,  dat.  and  abl.  -Is,  accus.  -6-s. 


Nouns. 

At/j. 

Pron. 

animos 

effeminandos 

e-os,  e-orum 

Aqultau-i,  -Is 
Germauis 
Gall-I,  -os 
Helveti-I,  -Is 

extremis 
fortissimi 
proximl 
Pyrenseos 

hi,  horum 
ips-I,  -orum 
qul 

SUIS 

Ocean-I,  -o 
Khen-u-m,  -I 

rcliquos 

suis 

Khodano 

Sequanis 

4.     NEUT.  NOUNS,  PRON., 

AND  ADJ. 

bellum 
dictum 

iuitium 
mstitutis 

quotldianis 
flumen,  fliimin-is,  -e 

ea 

prreliis 

5.    WORDS  having  gen.  sing,  in  -is,  gen.  plur.  in  -urn,  and  abl.  plur.  in  -ibus. 


finibus 

ilumen,  fluminis,  -e 
humanitate 
legibus 
mercatores 

6 
cultu 


Nouns. 

montes 

pars,  part-em,  -es 

septentrion-em,  -es 

sol-is,  -em 

virtute 


Adj. 

Inferiorem 

omnis,  omnes,  omnium 

orientem 

tres 


UNCLASSIFIED  NOUNS  AND  PRON. 
occasum  quibus 


7.    ADV. 

8.    PKEP. 

9.    CONJ 

. 

contiuenter 
fere 

a,  ab 
ad 

atque 
aut 

longissime 
mini  me 

cum 
de 

cum 
et 

ssepe 

in 

etiam 

inter 

propterea 

quod 

trans 

-que 
quod 

quoque 

52 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


4.     WORD    REVIEW.     B, 

Alphabetical  list  of  words  used  in  the  exercises,  but  not  found  in  the  text.  In 
nouns  and  adj.,  the  nom.  plur.  masc.  is  given  unless  otherwise  stated;  hi  verbs, 
the  present  indicative  act.  3d  plur. 


altissimi 

aimci 

Aquitania,  nom.  sing. 

boni 

earn 

clientes 

co  pi  a?,  fern. 

extra,  prep. 

frumentum,  nom.  sing. 

Genava  or  Gciuia,  nom. 

sing. 
German! 
Graecl 
Hellenes 


Helvetia,  nom.  sing. 

Helvetii 

lufluunt 

legati 

legiones 

Lingones 

magnl 

mllites 

in  it  tun  t 

montes 

natura,  nom.  sing. 

nobiles 

numeii 

Orgetorix,  nom.  sing. 


pagl 

per,  prep. 
possessiones,  fern. 
quattuor,     indeclinable 

adj. 

Khodani,  gen.  sing. 
Roman! 
SequanI 
snperant 
terra,  nom.  sing. 
Tiguilul 
Tolosfites 
Verbigeni 
via,  nom.  sing. 


5.    SENTENCE    REVIEW. 

1.  Gaul  is  as  a  whole  divided  into  three  parts,  one  of  which  the 
Celtae  inhabit,  another  the  Belga3,  the  third  the  Aqnitani. 

2.  The  Aquitani,  the  BelgaB,  the  Celtae  inhabit  the  three  parts  of 
Gaul 

3.  The  Gauls  who  inhabit  the  third  part  are  called  in  their  own 
language  Celta?. 

4.  The  Celtte,  who  in  the  language  of  the  Romans  are  called  Gauls, 
differ  in  customs  from  the  Aquitani  and  the  Belgaa. 

5.  The  Gauls  and  Germans  differ  from  one  another  in  temperament. 

6.  The  Aquitani,  the  Belgae,  the  Celtee,  differ  from  one  another  in 
language  and  laws. 

7.  The  Pyrenean  mountains  separate  Spain  from  Gaul. 

8.  The  Matrona  and  the  Seine  separate  the  Gauls  from  the  Belgse. 


LESSON   XII.  53 

3.  The  Belgae  are  bravest,  because  they  are  farthest  away  from 
civilization  and  refinement. 

10.  Civilization  and  refinement  tend  to  weaken  the  courage  of  the 
Belgse. 

11.  Merchants   often  visit  the  Gauls,  and  bring  in  those  (things) 
which  tend  to  weaken  (their)  courage. 

12.  The  Belgse  are  nearest  to  the  Germans,  with  whom  they  contend 
in  almost  daily  battles. 

13.  The  Belgre  surpass  the  Gauls  and  the  Aquitani  in  valor. 

14.  The  Heivetii  likewise  are  the  bravest  oi  all  the  Gauls,  because 
they   wage  war  continually  with  the  Germans,  who  live  across  the 
Rhine. 

15.  For  this  cause  the  Heivetii  contend  with  the  Germans,  when 
either  the  Heivetii  keep  the  Germans  from  Helvetian  territory,  or 
themselves  wage  war  in  the  territory  of  the  Germans. 

16.  One  part  of  these,  which  it  has  been  said  the  Gauls  hold,  slopes 
toward  the  north. 

17.  Another  part,   which  the  Belgse  inhabit,  looks  into  the  north 
and  the  rising  sun. 

18.  The  third  part,  which  is  called  Aquitania,  looks  between  the 
setting  of  the  sun  and  the  north. 

19.  Aquitania    is    bounded    by  the    Garumna   river,    the   Pyrenean 
mountains,  and  that  part  of  the  ocean  which  is  next  to  Spain. 

20.  The  Belgae  begin  from  the  remotest   bounds  of  Gaul,  and  ex- 
tend to  the  lower  part  of  the  river  Rhine. 

21.  The  Celtae  begin  at  the  Garnmna  river,  and  on-the-side-of  the 
Heivetii  reach  the  river  Rhine. 

22.  The  Gauls  are  bounded  by  the  Garumna  river,  the  ocean,  (and) 
the  territory  of  the  Belgae. 

23.  One  part,  which  the  Celts  inhabit,  takes  (its)  beginning  from  the 
river  Rhone. 

24.  The  Belgae  extend  from  the  Rhine  to  the  ocean. 

25.  Our  province,  in  which  it  has  been  said  the  Tolosates  dwell,  ex- 
tends to  Aquitania. 


'<-J' 


fi'tnnTET 


54  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON    XIII. 
1.    TEXT. 

Apud       Helvetios      longe       nobilissimus       fuit      et 
Among    the  Helvetii    by  far    the  highest-born    was    and 

ditissimus  Orgetorix.       Is,         M.      Messala  et  M. 

the  richest     Orgetorix.       He,  Marcus  Messala  and  Marcus 

Pisone        consulibus,  regm  cupiditate 

Piso          (being)  consuls,      of  the  royal  power       by  a  desire 

inductus       conjurationem         nobilitatis          fecit         et 
being  led          a  conspiracy        of  the  nobility       made      and 

civitati  persuasit       ut        de        finibus       suis 

upon  the  citizens      prevailed      that     from     territory     their 

cum    omnibus    copifs  exirent. 

with         all  forces    they  might  go  out. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  longe,  adv.,  by  far.     (a)  What  shows  that  it  is  an  adv.?    cf. 
VI.  N.  11  (a)  (b)  (c).    (b)  What  is  its  superlative?    (c)  What  does  it 
modify  ?     . 

2.  nobilissimus,    highest-born,    most  famous :     (a)    nom.    sing, 
masc. ;  cf.  ditissimus.  inductus  following  ;   (b)  nom.  sing,  formed  by 
adding  -a  to  the  stein  nobilissimo-,  and  weakening  o  to  u ;  cf.  X.  N. 
2,  13  (c);  A.  &  G.  10  b;  H.  22,  1,  2  ;  (c)  in  the  accus.  sing,  -m  is 
added  and  o  weakened  to  u ;  cf.  Rhenu-m  for  Rheno-m ;  in  the  nom. 
piur.  -i  is  contracted  from  o-i,  and  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  -is  is  con- 


LESSON  XIII.  55 

tracted  from  o-is ;  cf.  VIIT.  N.  10;  (d)  since  the  stems  of  nouns  and 
adj.  of  this  class  end  in  -o  they  are  called  -o  nouns  and  adj.  They 
belong;  to  the  2d  decl. ;  cf.  Galli,  Gallos,  Aquitanis,  Rhenum, 
Oceano;  (e)  neuters  in  -urn  are  also  -o  steins,  u  being-  weakened 
from  o,  and  -a  of  the  norn.  and  accus.  plur.  being  for  o-a ;  (jT)  -issi- 
mus,  ending  of  the  superlative  ;  cf.  fortissimi  VI.  N.  3  (b). 

3.  fuit,  he  was:  (a)  perfect  tense  of  eat,  equivalent  to  a  simple 
past;  (6)  cf.  est,  sunt,  and  note  that  the  stem  changes  from  es-  to  fu-. 

4.  is,  he:  (a)  norn.  sing.  masc. ;  cf.  eos,  ea,  eorum.   (b)  What  is 
its  antec.  ? 

5.  M.  Messala  et  M.  Pis  one  consulibus,  Marcus  Messala  and 
Marcus    Piso    (being)    consuls,    or  in    the    consulship    of  Marcus 
Messala  and  Marcus  Piso :  (a)  M.  in  a  Roman  proper  name  always 
stands  for  some  case  of  Marcus,  Eng.  Mark,    (b)  In  what  case  are  all 
these  words  ?  (c)  the  phrase  is  unconnected  grammatically  with  the 
rest  of  the  sentence  ;  (d)  the  consul  was  a  Roman  magistrate,  some- 
thing like  an  American  president ;  the  year  of  an  event  was  indicated 
by  naming  the  consuls  of  that  year. 

6.  regni.  of  the  royal  power ;  cf.  regnant :  (a)  gen.  sing,  iieut., 
declined  like  bellum  XI.  Obs.  3;   (b)   cf.  gen.  sing.  masc.  Ocean! 
XI. 

7.  inductus,  having  been  led  into,  induced:    (a)  participle,  de- 
clined  like   an   adj.;   cf.  divisa,  dictum,    (b)   What  does   it  limit? 
(c)  How  does  the  preceding  noun  cupiditate  modify  it  ? 

8.  conjurationem,  a  conspiracy:  accus.  sing,  fern.;  cf.  partem, 
solem  XI. 

9.  nobilitatis,  of  the,  nobility :  (a)  gen.  sing.  fern. ;  cf.  fluminis, 
soils,   (b)  Upon  what  does  it  depend? 

10.  fecit,  he  made,  pf.  ind. ;  cf.  facit,  he  makes;  so  capit  X., 
he  takes  or  it  takes,  cepit,  he  took. 

11.  civitati,  upon  the  citizens :  (a)  the  nom.  sing  is  civitas,  stem 
civitat-;  cf.  pars  X.   N.  2,   (b)  civitas  means  strictly  citizenship, 
then  the  state  itself,  sometimes  the  body-politic,  citizens  ;  (c)  -I  is  the 
ending  of  the  dat.  sing. ;   (d)  all  nouns  with  stems  ending  in  a  conso- 
nant belong  to  what  is  called  the  3d  decl.  ;    cf.  humaiiitate,  pars, 
partem,  soils,  legibus. 


56  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

12.  persuasit,    he    prevailed    upon,    persuaded:     (a)    pf.    ind. ; 
(b)  used  with  dat.  case  civitati. 

13.  ut,  that,  conj. ;  introduces  the  verb  exirent. 

14.  suis,  their,    (a)  What  does  it  limit  ?  VI.  N.  2.    (b)  What  is  its 
antec.  ? 

15.  exirent,  they  might  go  out  ;  persuasit  ut  exirent,  he  per- 
suaded in  order  that  they  might  go  out,  i.  e.  exirent  tells  the  ob- 
ject or  purpose  of  his  persuasion. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  In   Lat.  as  in  En  jr.,  a  noun  may  be  introduced  into  a  sentence 
without   any   grammatical    connection    with  it.       It   is   then    said   to 
be  used   independently  or  absolutely.     Absolute  means  loosed  from 
(the  rest  of  the  sentence)  ;  see  Welsh's  "Lessons  in  English  Gram- 
mar," pp.  154,  155.    In  Lat.  the  abl.  is  frequently  used  absolutely. 

2.  persuadere,  to  persuade,  is  followed  by  the  dat.  of  the  person 
who  is  persuaded. 

3.  The  ending  -u-s  is  th.it  of  the  nom.  sing.  masc. ;   -i  that  of  the 
dat.  sing.  3d  dccl.,  as  well  as  of  the  gpn.  sing,  in  all  -o  stems,  and 
of  the  nom.  plur.  in  masc.  -o  stems. 

4.  All  masc.  nouns  ending  in  -u-s  in  nom.  sing,  and  I  in  nom. 
plur,  are  -o  stems.     The  o  of  the  stem  is  sometimes  weakened  to  u, 
and  sometimes  disappears  by  contraction  with  the  real  suffix1  of  the 
case. 

5.  All  stems  ending  in  a  consonant  are  of  the  3d  decl. ;   and  have 
in  masc.  and  fern,  nouns  the  following  endings:   sing.  —  gen.  -is,  dat. 
-I,  accus.  -em,  abi.  -e ;  plur.  —  nom.  and  accus.  -gs,  gen.  -um,  dat. 
and  abl.  -ibus. 

6-    Every  Lat.  adj.  with  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  ending  -us  has  also 
complete  fern.  decl.  like  mensa,  and  complete  neut.  decl.  like  bellum. 

7.  The  participle,  though  expressing  action  like  a  verb,  is  an  adj.  in 
decl.  and  agreement. 

8.  The  Lat.  pf.  tense  is  often  translated  like  a  simple  past. 

1  /.  e.  the  ending  as  distinguished  from  the  stem. 


LESSON   XIII.  5T 


4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  2d  or  o  dec].;  nouns  in 

-us       ...  .  A.  &  G.  38,  servus;  H.   51,   servus,    2, 

ulso  N.  near  hot-       1),  2),  3). 
torn  of  p.  16. 

2.  Adj.    of    1st    and    2d 

dec! A.  &  G.  81,  bonus,  H.     148,      bonus, 

bona,  bonum.  bona,    bonum. 

3.  Dental    stems    of    the 

3d  decl.  A.  &  G.  54,  aetas.      H.  56,  I.;  58,  setas, 

and  virtus. 

4.  Abl.  absolute  .  A.  &  G.  255  and  a.    H.  431  and  1,  4. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

Let  the  pupil  give  the  stems  of  the  following  words,  and  the  gen.  sing,  of  the 
nouns,  adj.,  and  partic.,  so  far  as  he  should  be  expected  to  know  them. 

1.  apud,  prep,  with  accus.,  among. 

2.  civitas,  fern.,  citizenship,  a  state,  the  body-politic. 

3.  conjui  atioiiem,  accus.  sin»\   fein.    (from  con  and  jurare,   to 

swear,  take  oath),  a  swearing  together,  a  conspiracy. 

4.  consules,  inasr.,  consuls  ;  cf.  N.  5  (d). 

5.  cupiditas,  fern.,  desire,  cupidity. 

G.  ditissimus,  ditissima,  ditissimum,  richest. 

7.  exire,  to  go  out ;  cf.  obtinere  X.  4  (5). 

8.  facit,  he  makes  or  does  ;  fecit,  he  made. 

9.  est,  he  is  ;  fuit,  he  was  or  has  been. 

10.  inductus,  inducta,  inductum,  led  into,  induced. 

1 1.  is,  that  one,  he. 

12.  nobilitas,  nobility ;  cf.  nobilis,  high-lorn. 

13.  ut  or  utl,  conj.,  that,  in  order  that,  so  that ;  if  followed  by  the 

inch,  as  or  when. 

14.  persuadet,  he  persuades  ;    persuadere,  to  persuade  ;  persma- 

sit,  he  persuaded  or  has  persuaded. 

15.  regnum,  neut.,  royal  power,  kingdom. 


58  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

Decline  and  describe  each  dental  stem  of  the  3d  decl. 

1.  (a)  Helvetiorum   omnium   longe    uobilissimus  fuit   Orgetorix. 
(b)  Orgetorix,   M.  Messala  et   M.  Pisone  consulibus,  conjurationem 
nobilitatis  fecit,      (c)  Orgetorix  Helvetiis  persuasit  ut  cle  finibus  suis 
exirent.      (d)   Helvetii  virtute  induct!  belluiu  gerunt. 

2.  (a)    Marcus    fuit    consul.       (b)    Civitas    inducta   humanitatis 
cupiditate,  ea  quse  animos  effeminant  importat.     (c)  Aquitania  spectat 
inter  occasum  solis  et  septentriones.      (d)   Belga3  pertinent  ad  luferi- 
orem   partem  fluminis  Kheni.      (e)   Hclvetii   montibus  et   fluminibus 
continentur. 

3.  (a)   Orgetorix  is  by  far  the  richest,      (b)   In  the  consulship  of 
Marcus  the  nobility  makes  a  conspiracy,     (c)  These  (men)  being  in- 
fluenced by  a  desire  for  war  send  soldiers  into  Aquitania.      (d)  That 
(man)  persuades  a  large  part  of  the  state. 

4.  (a)  The  possessions  of  the  merchants  are  imported,      (b)  The 
large  state  is   nearest    to    the   province.       (c)  The  Eomans  are  far 
distant  from  the  Bulgie.      (d)  The  river  Rhine,  which  (qui)  separates 
the  Gauls  from  the  Germans,  rises  in  the  Alps  mountains. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  endings  of  the  o  decl.  masc.  and  neut.  2.  Masc.  and  fern, 
endings  of  the  3d  decl.  3.  Different  uses  of  the  ending  -I.  4.  All 
the  -o  stems  in  text  thus  far.  5.  All  the  1st  and  2d  decl.  adj. 
6.  Analysis  of  endings  -us,  -um,  -i,  -Is.  7.  The  use  of  the  participle. 
8.  The  absolute  case.  9.  The  meaning  of  the  pf.  tense.  10.  Changes 
in  the  stem  of  pres.  to  find  the  stem  of  pf.  tense.  11.  Case  with 
persuadere.  12.  The  decl.  of  civitas  magna,  Belgee  fortissimi, 
bellum  reliquum  together.1 

1  The  instructor  should  give  the  pupil  constant  practice  in  declining  nouns  and 
adj.  together,  using  very  frequently  nouns  and  adj.  of  different  decl.,  e.  g.  civitas 
magna. 


LESSON  XIV.  59 

LESSON   XIV. 

1.    TEXT. 

Perfacile   esse,    cum     virtute  omnibus     prsestarent, 
Very  easy  to  be,  since   in  valor       all      they  stood  before, 

totius       Gallise  imperio  potiri.  Id 

of  entire       Gaul      the  supreme  power      to  obtain.          This 

hoc  facilius         els        persuasit,          quod 

on  this  account     more  easily    them    he  persuaded,    because 

undique  loci  natura  Helvetii 

on  all  sides       of  the  place       by  the  nature        the  Helvetii 

continentur : 
are  hemmed  in : 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  perfacile,  adj.,  very  easy ;  per,  intensive  prefix,  very,  and 
facile,  easy;  cf.  Eng.  facile,  facility:  (a)  accus.  neut.  sing. ;  the 
form  of  the  nom.  sing,  is  the  same;  (£)  nom.  sing.  masc.  perfacilis, 
accus.  facilem,  nom.  plur.  faciles,  gen.  plur.  facilium  ;  cf.  omnis  I., 
omnes  IV.,  omnium  VI.;  (e)  of  the  3d  decl.  in  masc.,  fern.,  and 
neut.,  but  the  masc.  and  fern,  are  alike  in  all  cases  both  sing,  and 
plur.;  stem  f  acili- ;  (d)  -i  stems  are  distinguished  from  consonant 
stems  by  the  i  before  the  ending  -um  of  gen.  plur.  (cf.  omnium  and 
virtutum),  and  in  neut.  by  the  i  before  the  ending -a  of  nom.  and 
accus.  plur.,  e.  g.  omnia ;  (e)  in  -i  stems  the  -i  frequently  disappears 
in  the  nom.  sing.,  generally  before  the  accus.  ending  -em,  very  often 
in  the  abl.,  always  before  the  nom.  plur.  ending  -es,  and  often  before 
the  accus.  plur.  ending  -5s. 


60  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  esse,  to  be:   (a)  pres.  inf.  of  est,  sunt ;    (b)  follows  a  verb 
of  saying  suggested  by  persuasit  in  preceding  sentence ;  cf.  Gallos 
obtinere  dictum  est  X.  ;    (c)  perfacile  esse,  (saying}  it  to  be  very 
easy,  is   better  translated  (saying}  that  it  was  very  easy ;   (d)  the 
exact  words  of  Orgetorix  were  perfacile  est,  it  is  very  easy. 

3.  cum,  since :   (a}   conj.  followed  by  verb  praestarent ;   (b)  cf. 
cum,  conj.,  ivhen  IX.  ;  and  cum,  prep.,  with,  cum  Germanis  IX. 

4.  omnibus,  all:   (a)   dat.    plur.    with  praestarent;   (b}  here  a 
noun,  though  usually  an  adj. 

5.  praestarent,  they  stood  before :  (a)  prse  in  composition  means 
before ;   (b}  cf.   ex-I-re-nt  and  prae-sta-re-nt ;   in  what  respects  are 
they  alike  ? 

6.  totius,  of  the  whole  of,  entire  ;   cf.  total :   (a)  -Jus,  irregular 
gen.  ending  ;   (b)  cf.  reliquus,  the  rest  of;  extremus,  the  end  of; 
(c)  i  in  ending  is  long  by  exception  before  another  vowel.     A.  &  G. 
18,  a  ;  H.  16,  II.  ;   (d)  limits  Galliae. 

7.  imperio,  supreme  power,  supremacy  ;  cf.  imperial,  emperor  ; 
abl.  sing,  after  potlri,  with  practically  the  same  force  as  the  accus. 

8.  potlri,  to  obtain,  get  possession  of:  (a}  -ri,  ending  of  pres. 
inf.  pass.  ;  cf.  -re  ending  of  pres.  inf.  act.  ;   obtinere  X.,   to  hold ; 
obtine-ri,  to  be  held ;   (b)   pass,  in  form  but  act.   in  meaning  ;  cf. 
oriuntur  Xf. 

9.  id,  that  thing,  it  ;  cf.  Eng.  i.  e.  for  id  est,  that  is  ;  (a}  accus. 
sing,  neut.;  direct  object  of  persuasit  ;   (b)  demonstrative  pron.,  often 
used  as  personal ;  cf.  is,  he  XL  IE.  ;  eorum.  their  IX.  ;   (c}  aritec.  ? 

10.  hoc,   (on   account  of)   this ;   cf.   hi   IV.,   horum   VI. ;    abl. 
sing.  neut. 

11.  facilius,  more  easily  ;  adv.  in  comp.  degree,  modifying  per- 
suasit ;  ending  -ius. 

12.  els,   them:  (a)  cf.   eos,  ea  VII.,  eorum    IX,,  earn  XL,  is 
XIII.,  id  9,  and  give  the  case,  number,  and  gender  of  each  ;   (b)  dat. 
plur.  masc.,  indir.   obj.  of  persuasit,  id  being  the  direct ;   he  per- 
suaded it  to  them,,  or  better,  he  persuaded  them  of  it ;  (c)  antec.  ? 

13.  loci,  of  the  place  ;  cf.  local:  (a)  gen.  sing,  masc.,  cf.  Rheni 
XL;   (6)  nom.  sing,  and  stem? 

14.  natura.  by  the  nature,  character  ;  why  abl.  ?  X.  X.  11. 


LESSON   XIV.  61 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Many  nouns  and  adj.  of  the  3d  decl.  have  stems  ending  in  -i, 
which  appears  in  gen.   plur.,  but  which  often  disappears   in   other 
cases. 

2.  The  nom,  sing,  ending  -e  is  often  found  in  neut.  of  the  3d  decl. 

3.  Many  adj.  of  the  3d  decl.  have  the  norn.  sing.  masc.  and  fern, 
ending  -is,  neut.  -e. 

4.  The  prefix  per  in  adj.  means  very,  and  often  has  the  force  of 
the  superlative  ending. 

5.  Distinguish  cum,   prep.,   with ;    cum,   conj.,   when,    but   fre- 
quently because,  since. 

6.  Several  common  adj.  and   pron.  have  -lus  irregularly  in  gen. 
sing.     The  i  is  long  by  exception. 

7.  The  ending  -ri  is  that  of  the  pres.  inf.  pass. ;  -re,  of  pres.  inf.  act. 

8.  The  demonstrative  pron.  is,  masc.,  ea,  fern.  (cf.  earn),  id,  neut. 
may  become  a  personal  pron.  or  an  adj. 

9.  After  a  verb  of  saying,  when  the  words  of  another  are  adapted 
to  the  sentence  in  which  they  stand,  i.  e.  indirectly  quoted,  the  Lat. 
uses  the  inf.  where  the  Eng.  uses  the  ind. 

10.  The  abl.  is  used  after  potiri  with  the  force  of  an  obj. 

11.  Persuadere  takes  the  accus.  of  the  thing  as  dir.  obj.,  the  dat. 
of  the  person  as  indir.  obj. 

4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Third  decl.  -i  stems,  nouns 

and  adj A.  &  G.  52,  H.  62,  hostis  ;  63, 

turris,  nubes,       mare ;  154.  trist- 
mare;  84, lev-       is,  -e. 
is,  -e. 

2.  Use  of  demonstrative   as 

personal  pron.  or  adj.  .  A.  &  G.  195.         H.  438,  1. 

3.  Force  of  per  in  composi- 

tion       A.  &  G.  93,  d.      H.  170,  1. 

4.  The   inf.  after  a  verb   of 

saying A.  &  G.  335.  336.  H.  522,  535,  I. 


62  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  cum,  conj.,  when,  since. 

2.  esse,  to  be,  pres.  inf.  ;  cf.  est,  sunt,  fuit. 

3.  facilis    masc.   and   fern.,   facile    neut.,  easy ;  perfacil-is,  -e, 

very  easy. 

4.  facile,  adv.,  easily  ;  facilius,  conip.,  more  easily. 

5.  hoc,  abl.  sing.  masc.  and  neut.,  this  ;  cf  hi,  horum. 

6.  imperium,  neut.,  supreme  power. 

7.  is,  ea,  id,  dera.  prou.,  this,  that ;  he,  she,  it. 

8.  locus,  masc.,  a  place  ;  loca,  nom.  plur.  (as  if  from  nom.  sing. 

locum). 

9.  potitur,  he  obtains ;    potiuntur  (cf.  oriuntur),  they  obtain  t 

potiri,  to  obtain  ;  takes  abl. 

10.  praestare,  to  stand  before,  to  excel. 

11.  totus,  tobius  gen.,  the  whole,  the  whole  of,  entire. 

12.  undique,  adv.,  from  all  sides,  on  all  sides. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

Decline  all  -i  stems. 

1.  (a)  Perfacile    est    totlus    GalliaB    imperio    potiii.      (b)  Virtute 
omnibus    Helvetii    prsestant.     (c)  Dictum   est   Helvetios  totius  Gal- 
liae  imperio  pothi.     (d)  Una  pars,  qnam  Gallos  obtinere  dictum  est, 
initium  capit  a  flumine  Rliodano.     (e)  Dicit  (he  says)  mercatores  fm- 
mentuni  importarc. 

2.  (a)  Cum  proximls   civitatibns  bellum   gerit.      (b)  Regnnm  in 
civitate  sua  obtinet.     (c)  Clientes  sunt  fortissimi.     (d)  Provincia  a 
montibus  oritur  et  ad  flumen  pertinet. 

3.  (a)  He  persuades  them  of  this  easily  on  this  account,     (b)  He 
persuaded  his  friend  to  go  out  by  another  way.     (c)  It  was  easy  to 
keep  the  Sequani  from  the  territory  of  the  Helvetii.      (d)  The  high- 
born Orgetorix,  influenced  by  his  desire  for  the  rest  of  Gaul,  obtains 
soldiers. 

4.  (a)  They  send  ambassadors  to  all  the  states,      (b)  The  Helvetii 
are  hemmed   in   by  rivers  and  mountains,      (c)  The   nearest   states 
differ  from  the  most  remote  (states),      (d)  In  the  consulship  of  Pom- 
peius  and  Crassus,  the  Romans  obtain  a  great  part  of  Gaul. 


LESSON  XV. 


t>3 


7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Force  of  per  in  composition  of  adj.  2.  -i  steins.  3.  3d  decl. 
adj.  4.  Different  meanings  of  cum.  5.  The  development  of  the 
causal  force  of  cum  from  the  temporal.  6.  The  ending  -lus. 

7.  Difference  between   act.   and    pass.   inf.  in  form    and    meaning. 

8.  Difference  in  meaning  between  regiium  and  imperium.     9.  The 
pron.  is  in  all  genders  ;  forms  and  use.     10.  Pour  uses  of  -e  final. 
11.   Cases  with  persuadere  and  potiri.      12.  The  indirect  quotation 
and  the  way  of  expressing  it  in  Lat.     13.   Uses  of  the  dat.  in  lessons 
thus  far.      14.  The  decl.   together  of  amicus   tristis,   frumentum 
omne,  pars  magna. 


LESSON    XV. 
1.    TEXT. 

una    ex     parte       flumine       Rheno     latissimo     atque 

one     on      side     by  the  river    Rhine     very  broad      and 

altissimo,  qui  agrum  Helvetium  a 

very  deep,         which        the  country"        Helvetian         from 

Germanis  dividit ;  altera  ex          parte 

the  Germans         divides  ;          the  second          on  side 

monte  Jura    altissimo,        qui       est        inter 

by  the  mountain     Jura     very  high,      which      is      between 

Sequanos  et  Helvetios ;  tertia 

the  Sequani         and         the  Helvetii;      on  the  third  (side) 

lacu  Lemanno        et  flumine         Rhodano, 

by  the  lake         Geneva         and         by  the  river       Rhone, 

qui       prSvinciam     nostram      ab       Helvetiis       dividit. 
which       province  our        from    the  Helvetii     divides. 


64  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  ex,  prep.,  out  of,  from  (within):  (a)  followed  by  abl.;   cf.  a, 
ab,  cum,  de,  and  in  when  it  means  in;  (b)  cf.  meaning  with  that  of 
§.  or  ab,  from  a  position  on  or  by  the  side  of;  (c)  here  to  be  trans- 
lated on  ;  cf.  ab  Sequanis  X.  N.  14. 

2.  flumine,  by  the  river :  (a)  for  nom.  sing,  and  gender  see  V.  N. 
5  (a);  (b)  stem,  flumen  ;  for  weakening  of  vowel,  see  X.  N.  13  (c), 
and  A.  &  G.  10,  b;  H.  22,  1.    (c)  What  is  accus.  sing.;  nom.  and 
accus.  plur.  ?  (d)  used  with  contiuentur,  in  preceding  lesson  ;  (e)  why 
abl.  ? 

3.  altissimo,   very   deep :    (a)  degree,   case   and   why  ?    (b)  nom. 
sing,  masc.,  fern.,  and  neut.?    (c)  the  positive  degree,  alt-us,  -a,  -um, 
means  strictly  nourished,  grown  (great),  and   may  refer  to  growth 
either  up  or  down,  hence  either  high  or  deep  ;  cf.  exalt,  adult,  old, 
alderman;   (d)  how  different  in  form  and  meaning  from  latissimo  ? 

4.  qui,  which:  (a)  nom.  sing,  masc.;  cf.  the  same  form  as  nom. 
plur.  masc.  VIII. ;   (b)  antec.  ?    (c)  Why  is  it  correct  to  translate  the 
masc.  qui  by  the  neut.  which? 

5.  agrum,  field,  territory;  cf.  agriculture,  acre:  (a)  accus.  sing. 
masc. ;  cf.  Rhenum  X.  N.  15  (a)  ;   (b)  why  accus.?    (c)  What  would 
you  expect  as  nom.  sing.  ?  (d)  stem? 

6.  Helvetium,  Helvetian :  (a)  adj.  limiting  agrum ;   (b)  cf.  Hel- 
vetii,   the   Helvetii  or   Helvetians,   and   note  that  the   name  of  the 
people  and  the  adj.  meaning  belonging  to  that  people  have  the  same 
stem,  Helvetic- ;  cf.  the  Americans,  and  the  adj.  American.    This  is 
not  always  so  in  Lat. ;  cf.  the  Turks,  Turkish. 

7.  altera,  adj.,  the  other,  the  second:   (a)  one  of  two,  the  other 
of  two,   while   ali-us,    -a,    -ud     (cf.  aliam  II.)  means  one   of  any 
number ;  thus  in  Eng.  an  alternate  is  a  second  man  appointed  as  a 
substitute,  while  a  man  may  have  half  a  dozen  aliases  ;  (b)  abl.  sing, 
fern.,  limiting  parte  ;   (c)  note  the  position  of  the  following  prep,  ex, 
between  the  adj.  and  its  noun.    Monosyllabic  (one  syllable)  prep,  very 
often  have  this  position;  cf.  qua  de  causa  IX.,  una  ex  parte  above. 

8.  monte,  by  the  mountain  :  (a)  abl.  sing. ;  why  ?  (b)  nom.  sing. 
mons  ;  for  formation,  see  X.  N.  2  ;     (c)  stem  strictly  monti-,  gen. 
plur.  montium,  but  i  is  dropped  in  all  the  cases  of  the  sing.,  as  in  nom. 


LESSON   XV.  65 

9.  tertia,    third:     (a}    abl.    sing.,   limiting    parte   in   ex  parte 
understood  ;  cf.  altera  ex  parte  above,  and,  for  omission  of  noun, 
unam  II.  2,  nostra  III.  N.  6.     (b)  Decline  it  in  all  genders. 

10.  lacu,  by  the  lake:  (a)  abl.  sing.  masc.  ;   (b)  why  abl.  ?  (c)  cf. 
cultu  VI.,  una,  Rheno,  parte  above.     In  what  respect  are  all  these 


abl.  sing,  alike  ? 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 


1.  The  prep,  ex  means  strictly  out  of  a  position  in  a  thing,  a  or 
ab,  away  from  a  position  on  or  by   a  thing,  though  both  are  often 
translated  simply  from. 

2.  Many  neut.  of  the  3d  decl.  end  in  -en. 

3.  Altus  means  high  or  deep  ;  latus,  wide. 

4.  The   name   of  the   people   of  a  nation  and   the  adj.  meaning 
belonging  to  that  nation   are  often  the  same  in  form  in  Lat.,  just 
as  they  are  in  Eug. 

5.  Altera  means  one  of  two  ;  alia,  one  of  any  number. 

6.  A  monosyllabic  prep,  often  stands  between  an  adj.  and  its  noun. 

7.  Nouns  and  adj.  in  -ns  and  -rs  are  of  the  3d  decl.,  and  have  i 
steins ;  but  are  often  classed  as  consonant  stems,  since  the  i  appears 
only  in  the  gen.  and  (sometimes)  the  accus.  plur. 

8.  All  the  abl.  sing,  thus  far  end  in  a  vowel. 

9.  The  four  rules  for  agreement  in  Lat.  are  as  follow :     (a)  A 
finite  verb  agrees  in  person  and  number  with  its  subject,     (b)   An  ap- 
positive  agrees  in  case  with  the  noun  which  it  limits,     (c)  An  adj. 
agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  the  noun  which  it  limits. 
(d)  A  pron.  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  its  antec.1 

4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  3d  decl.  neut.  in  -en  .  A.&  G.  49,nomen.   H.  60,  carmen. 

2.  3d  decl.  nouns  in  -ns 

and  -rs      .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  44,  54,  1,    H.  64,  cliens,  urbs, 
urbs.  foot-note    1,   also 

1,  1),  2),  2,  1). 

1  The  importance  of  these  simple  rules  cannot  be  over-estimated,  for  no  Lat.  sen- 
tence can  be  properly  constructed  without  using  at  least  one  of  them. 

5 


66  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  A  or  ab  and  ex     .     .  A.  &  G.  153.  JL  434,  I. 

4.  Altera  and  alia     .     .  A.  &  G.  203,  a,  b.    H.  459. 

5.  Position    of   monosyl- 

labic prep.     .     .      .  A.  &  G.  345,  a.        H.  565,  3. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  agrum,  accus.  sing,  masc.,  field,  territory. 

2.  ali-us,  -a,  -ud,   adj.  or  pron.,  one  of  any  number,  another. 

3.  altera,  fern.,  alterum,  neut.,   adj.   or  pron.,  one  of  two,  the 

other. 

4.  alt-us,  -a,  -um,  high  or  deep. 

5.  ex,  prep,  with  abl.,  out  of,  from, 

6.  Helveti-us,  -a,  -um,  Helvetian,  of  the  Helvetii. 

7.  Jura,  a  mountain  chain  extending  from  the  Khone  to  the  Rhine, 

(for  gender  see  A.  &  G.  29  ;  H.  42,  I.  2). 

8.  lacu,  abl.  sing,  masc.,  a  lake. 

9.  Jat-us,  -a,  -um,  wide,  broad. 

10.  Lemannus,  masc.,  the  name  of  a  lake,  Leman  or  Geneva. 

11.  mons,  mentis  gen.,  masc.,  a  mountain. 

12.  Rhenus,  masc.,  the  Rhine. 

13.  Rhodanus,  masc.,  the  Rhone. 


6.    EXERCISES. 

Find  in  these  exercises  every  illustration  of  the  rules  for  agreement  which  they 
contain. 

1.  (a)  Una  ex  parte  Helvetii  continentur  fltimine  Rheno,  altera  ex 
parte  monte  Jura,  tertia  ex  parte  lacu  Lemanno  et  flumine  Rhodano. 
(b)  Flumen  Rhenus  agrum  Helvetium  a  Gerrnanis  dividit ;  m5ns  Jura 
est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios  ;  lacu  Lemanno  iiostra  provincia  ab 
Helvetiis  divlsa  est.     (c)  Rhenus  flumen  est  latissimus  atque  altissi- 
mus.     (d^)  Natura  loci  Helvetii  a  reliquis  Gallis  divisi  sunt. 

2.  (a)  Germanos  ab  agro  Helvetic  flumen  Rhenus  dividit.    (b)  Co- 
piae  Ariovisti  a  Romanis  non  longe  absunt.      (c)  Trium  partium  Gal- 
liae  unam  incolunt  Belgae.     (c£)  Orgetorix  Helvetiis  persuadet,  quod 


LESSON  XV.  67 

undique  fluminibus,  montibus,  lacu  continentur.     (e)  Milites  civitatis 
cum  uobilitate  proelils  contendunt. 

3.  (a)  The  Helvetii  are  hemmed  in  by  a  broad  and  deep  river. 
(5)  The   very  high   mount    Jura   is   between   the   Sequani  and   the 
Helvetii.      (c)  Our   province   extends    from   the   Alps  to  the  river 
Rhone,     (d)  The  Helvetii  begin  at  the  province  and  face  north-east. 

4.  (a)  Of  all  these  mountains  the  highest  is  Jura,     (b)  Gauls  and 
Germans  differ  from  one  another  in  valor,      (c)   To  gain  the  supreme 
power  of  the  whole  of  Spain  is  very  easy,      (d)   The  Rhine  takes  its 
beginning  in  the  Alps  mountains  and  flows  toward  the  north  into  the 
ocean. 


7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  3d  decl.  nouns  in  -en,  -ns,  and  -rs.  2.  Difference  between 
ab  and  ex,  altus  and  latus,  alia  and  altera.  3.  The  relative 
strength  of  vowels.  4.  Development  of  the  meaning  of  altus. 

5.  Difference  between  Eng.  and  Lat.  in  method  of  determining  gender. 

6.  Position  of  monosyllabic  prep.      7.    The  form  of  the  abl.  sing. 
8.  Relative  number  of  abl.  and  dat.  in  lessons  thus  far.     9.  Examples 
illustrating  rules  for  agreement  in   text  of  this   lesson.       10.  Decl. 
together  of  flumen  latum,  mons  altus,  mons  Jura,  bellum  omne. 


68  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


LESSON    XVI. 

1.     TEXT. 

His  rebus  fiebat  ut        et 

On  account  of  these     things    it  came  to  pass     that    both 

minus        late  vagarentur  et       minus      facile 

less        widely       they  wandered         and         less         easily 

fmitimis  bellum         inferre  possent, 

(upon  their)  neighbors      war       to  bear  into    they  were  able, 

qua         ex         parte         homines          bellandi         cupidi 
which        in        respect  men  of  warring        fond 

magno        dolore      adficiebantur. 
with  great       grief         were  affected. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  His,  these:  (a)  abl.  plur.  fern. ;  cf.  and  give  cases  of  hi  IV., 
horum  VI.,  hoc  XIV. ;   (b)  the  form  is  the  same  as  here  in  the  masc. 
and  neut.  plur.  abl.,  and  in  all  genders  of  the  dat.  plur.  ;  cf.  insti- 
tutis,  abl.  neut.,   IV.,  Aquitanis,  abl.  masc.,  V.,  copiis,  abl.  fern., 
X1IL,  Germanis,  dat.  masc.,  VIII.     (c)   What  is   the  form  of  the 
regular  nom.  plur.  fern. ;  gen.  plur.  fern.  ;  accus.  plur.  masc.  and  fern.? 
(d)  here  an  adj.  limiting  rebus  ;  cf.  qua  IX.,  earn  XI. 

2.  rebus,  because  of  things  ;  cf.  Eng.  rebus  (by  things'):  (a)  abl. 
plur.  fern.;    (b)  stem  re-,  ending -bus  ;  cf  omni-bus  XIV.;    (c}  abl. 
of  cause,  since  it  gives  the  cause  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  follow- 
ing verb  fiebat ;  cf.  hoc  XIV.,  which  gives  the  cause  of  persuasit. 

3.  fiebat,  it  was  being  done,  it  was  coming  to  pass:  (a)  force  of 
pers.  ending  -t  ?  (5)  -ba-,  tense  sign  of  the  imperfect  ind. ;  importa-t, 


LESSON  XVI.  69 

he  is  importing;  importa-ba-t,  he  was  importing;  (c)  the  word 
"  imperfect "  when  used  to  designate  this  tense  means  that  the  action 
or  state  was  going  on  (i.  e.  was  not  perfect  or  complete)  in  past  time. 

4.  minus,  adv.,  less ;  cf.  Eng.  minus,  minority :    (a)   irregular 
comp. ;  (b)  cf.  sup.  minime,  least,  VII.  1. 

5.  late,  widely,'  cf.  latitude:   (a)  latius,  comp.,  more  widely; 
cf.  facilius  XIV.  11;  (b)  sup.  latissime,  most  widely;  cf.  longis- 
sime  VI.  11 ;    (c)  cf.  masc.  forms  of  adj.  latus,  latior  (cf.  Inferior- 
em  XL),  latissimus.   (d)  How  may  we  form  the  adv.  from  the  masc. 
form  of  the  adj.  in  each  degree?     Comp.  the  adv.  formed  from  altus. 

6.  vagareiitur,  they  wandered,  or,  more  accurately,  were  wander- 
ing about;  cf.  vagrant:  (a)  cf.  exirent  XII L,  preestarent  XIV.,— 
all  have  the  sign  -re-,  the  sign  of  the  impf.  tense,  subjunctive  mode ; 

(b)  stem?   personal  ending?   (c)  pass,  in  form,  act.  in  meaning;  cf. 
oriuntur  XL,  potiri  XIV. 

7.  finitimia,  neighbors;   (a)  dat.  plur.   masc.;   (b)  used  with  in- 
ferre  in  conjunction  with  accus.  bellum ;  cf.  omnibus  prae-starent 
XIV. 

8.  mferre,  to  bear  into,  to  wage  upon  ;  cf.  differunt  IV.,  and 
infer :  (a)  -re,  ending  of  pres.  inf.  act.  ;  cf.  obtinere  X.  ;    (b)  com- 
pounded of  prep,  in  (into,  upon),  and  ferre  (to  bear)  ;  cf.  prse-sta- 
rent  XIV.  5  (a). 

9.  possent,  they  were  able,  could ;  cf.  possible  ;  impf.  subjv.,  and 
follows  ut,  that,  like  vagareiitur. 

10.  i  qua  ex  parteJ  from  which   consideration,  in  this  respect: 
(a)   note   meaning  of  parte  ;    (b)  for  arrangement,  cf.  XV.  7   (c)  ; 

(c)  qua  is  here  an  adj. ;    cf.  qua  de  causa  IX. 

11.  homines,  men  ;  cf.  homicide;  nom.  plur.  masc.;  cf.  merca- 
tores  VII. 

12.  bellandi,  of  warring ;   cf.  bellum,  war:    (a)   verbal  noun, 
from  bellare,  to  war ;  this  noun,  corresponding  in  many  of  its  uses 
to  the  verbal  noun   in   -ing,   is   called   the   gerund ;    (5)  gen.   sing, 
depending  upon  cupidi. 

13.  cupidi,  desirous,  fond:  (a)  nom.  plur.  masc.,  limiting  homi- 
nes;    (b)  distinguish  -I,  the  ending  of  nom.  plur.,  from  -i  of  gen. 
sing.,  cf.  bellandi ;  -I  of  dat.  sing.,  cf.  clvitati  XIII. ;  I  of  abl.  sing., 


70  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

omni,  marl;  and  I  of  pres.  inf.  pass.,  cf.  poti-ri  XIV.;  (c)  cf.  the 
name  of  the  quality,  cupidi-tas,  and  Eng,  ending  -ty  in  cupidi-ty ; 
(d)  in  the  quality  word  or  abstract  noun,  -o  of  adj.  stem  cupido- 
is  weakened  to  i. 

14.  dolore,    by    sorrow;    cf.    dolorous:     (a)    case,    and    why? 

(b)  What  do  you  know  about  its  gender  from  the  ending  of  magno? 

(c)  cf.  mercator-es   VIE.,  inferior-em   XE. ;    the  nom.  sing,  in   all 
these  cases  ends  in  -or. 

15.  adficiebantur,  they  were  affected  or  were  being  affected:^- 
(a)  force  of  -ba-?  (b)  act.  or  pass.  ?   How  does  the  ending  show  ? 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  tense  sign  -ba-  is  that  of  impf.  ind.,  both  voices ;  -re-,  that 
of  impf.  subjv.,  both  voices. 

2.  Stems  in  -§  end  in  abl.  plur.  in  -bus  like  stems  in  -i. 

3.  The  imperfect  tense  (so  called)  represents  the  action  as  going  on 
in  past  time. 

4.  The  Eng.  very  often  allows  a  simple  past  tense  where  the  Lat. 
requires  an  imperfect.  « 

5.  Adj.  having  the  endings  -us  masc.  positive,   -ior  comp.,  and 
-issimus  sup.,  generally  form  the  corresponding  adverbs  by  changing 
these  endings  to  -e  positive,  -ius  comp.,  and  -issime  sup. 

6.  The  Lat.  has  a  verbal  noun  corresponding  in  some  respects  to 
the  Eng.  verbal  noun  in  -ing.     This  verbal  is  called  the  gerund,  and 
is  of  the  2d  decl. 

7.  The  name  of  the  quality  is  sometimes  formed  by  adding  the 
ending  -tas  to  the  stem  or  weakened  stem  of  the  adj. 

8.  Nouns  in  -or  are  of  the  3d  decl.,  and  their  stems  generally 
end  in  -or. 

9.  The  abl.  is  used  without  a  prep.,  to  express  the  cause  of  the 
action. 

10.  The  dat.  is  used  with  many  verbs  compounded  with  prep. 

1  The  teacher  who  wishes  his  pupils  to  appreciate  the  extreme  nicety  of  the  Lat. 
use  of  tenses,  foreign  as  it  is  to  our  Eug.  usage,  must  insist  from  the  first  on  the 
exact  value  of  the  impf.  teuse. 


LESSON   XVI.  71 


4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  3d    dec],    nouns    and 

adj.  in  -or  .  .  .  A.  &  G.  49,  con-  H.  60,  sol,  pastor; 
sul;  86,  melior,  154,tristior,  masc. 
masc.  and  fein.  and  fern. 

2.  Comparison     of     adj. 

and  adv A.  &  G  81,  b,  89,  92.  H.  162,  306. 

3.  The  gerund  .      .      .      .  A.  &  G.  114,  a.          H.  200,  II. 

4.  The  irapf.  tense      .     .  A.  &  G.  115,  a,  2,  b.  H.  468. 

5.  Nouns  in  -tas  ;  forma- 

tion and  meaning    .  A.  &  G.  163,  e.          H.  325. 

6.  The  abl.  of  cause    ,     .  A.  &  G.  245.  H.  413,  416. 

7.  The    clat.    with    com- 

pounds ;  in,  pra?     .  A.  &  G.  228.  H.  386  and  1. 

5.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  adficiebant,  they  were  doing  to  (somebody},  they  were  affect- 

ing;  compounded  of  ad.  to,  and  faciebant,  they  were  doing  ; 
adfecit,  he  affected;  cf.  fecit  XIII.  N.  10. 

2.  bellare,  to  war,  wage  war. 

3.  cupid-us.  -a,  -um,  desirous,  fond. 

4.  dolor,  masc.,  pain,  grief. 

5.  flebat,  it  was  being  made,  it  was  being  done,  it  was  happen- 

ing;  used  as  pass,  of  simple  verb  faciebat,  but  not  of  its 
compounds  with  prep.  The  vowel  I  in  fiebat  is  long  by  ex- 
ception before  e. 

6.  finitim-us,  -a,  -um.  adj.  (from  fines,  borders,  boundaries),  bor- 

dering upon,  neighboring;  in  plur.  masc.  usually  a  noun 
meaning  neighbors. 

7.  homines,  men. 

8.  inferre,  to  bear  into  or  upon,  to  wage  upon. 

9.  late,  adv.,  widely. 

10.  minus,  adv.  in  comp.,  less  ;  miiiime,  sup.,  least. 

11.  posse  (compound  of  esse,  to  be),  to  be  able. 

12.  rebus,  abl.  plur.  fern.,  things. 

13.  vagarl,  to  wander  (pass,  in  form,  act.  in  meaning). 


72  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


6,     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Fiebat  ut  Helvetii  minus  late  vagarentur.      (b)   Flebat  ut 
mercatores  frumentum  importarent.     (c)  His  rebus  fiebat  ut  homines 
bellandi  cupiilT  minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  Inferre  possent.     (d)  Qua 
ex  causa  Helvetii  magno  dolore  adficiebantur. 

2.  (a)   Qua  de  causa  Helvetii  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt. 
(b)   Casticus  regnum  in  sua  civitiite  obtinebat.      (c)   His  causis  Ger- 
man!  prcelio    contendebant.       (d)   Initium    prcelii    Ariovistus   facit. 

(e)  Instituta  eorum  qui  in  els  finibus  incolebant  inter  se  difl'erebant. 

(f)  Bella  cum  Germanis  sunt  magnn. 

3.  (a)   On  account  of  these   things  the   Helvetii  used  to  wander 
less  widely,      (b)   He  easily  persuaded  them  that  they  were  able  to  ob- 
tain the  country  of  the  rest  of  the  Gauls,      (c)   Orgetorix  goes  back 
and  forth  through  the  kingdoms  of  Gaul,      (d)   It  came  to  pass  that, 
since  they  surpassed  all  in  valor,  they  went  out  of  their  territory. 

4.  (a)   The  Germans  contend  with  the  Helvetii  in  daily  battles. 
(b)  That  (man)  is  good,     (c)  It  has  been  said  that  the  Belgae  are  far 
distant  from   the   refinement  of  the   Romans,      (d)  These  men,   in- 
fluenced by  the  desire  for  good  fields,  were  waging  war  upon  the 
Sequani.     (e)  The  sun  is  higher. 


7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

I.  Three   modes,  three  tenses,  two   tense   signs,  and  two   voices. 

2.  All    the    forms    which    the    pupil    should    know    of  importare. 

3.  Different  kinds  of  abl.,  with  an  example  of  each  kind.      4.  The 
meaning  and  form  of  the  gerund.     5.  The  impf.  tense.     6.  Differ- 
ence between  form  of  adj.  and  that  of  adv.  in  each  degree.     7.  Dat. 
with  compound  verbs.      8.  Five  uses  of  the  ending  -I.      9.  Nouns 
in  -tas,  and  Eng.  derivatives.     10.  Decl.  of  nouns  in  -or.     11.  Com- 
parison between  Eng,  and  Lat.  use  of  tenses. 


LESSON  XVII.  73 

LESSON    XVII. 

1.     TEXT. 

Pro  multitadine  autem     hominum, 

in  proportion-to    the-great-number     moreover      of  men, 

et  pro  gloria         belli      atque    fortitudinis, 

and  in-proportion-to  the  glory    of  war      and       of  bravery, 

angustos  se  fines        habere      arbitrabantur, 

narrow       themselves      territory     to  have        they  thought, 

qui          in     longitQdinem   milia      passuum      ducenta 
which    in  (into)      length     thousands    of  paces    two-hundred 

et       quadraginta,         in         latitudinem      centum       et 
and  forty,         in  (into)         width         a  hundred     and 

octoginta     patebant. 
eighty         extended. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  pro,  prep,  witli  abl.,  for,  in  proportion  to,  considering ;  cf.  & 
or  ab  V.,  in  meaning  in,  de,  cum  IX.,  ex  XV. 

2.  angustos,  narrow:  (a)  case,  number,  and  gender?  (b)  agrees 
with  what  ?  (c)  decl.  in  all  genders. 

3.  se,  themselves,  they :  (a)  accus.  plur.  mase.  ;  cf.  inter  se  IV, 
N.  7  ;   (b)  the  subj.  of  habgre  ;  cf.  Gallos  obtinere  X. 

4.  habere,  to  have;   cf.  prohibent  IX.   (pro  and  habent,  they 
hold  in  front,  check)   and  habit:  (a)  mode  and  tense?  correspond- 
ing pass,  form  ?     (b)  cf.  habg-re,  obting-re,  conting-tur,  with  com- 


74  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

mea-nt,  specta-t,  praesta-rent,  and  state  how  the  two  classes  of 
verbs  represented  are  distinguished ;  (c)  se  habere  arbitrabantur, 
they  thought  themselves  to  have,  or,  better,  they  thought  that  they  had  ; 
the  thought  in  their  minds  was,  we  have  ;  cf.  XIV.  N.  2  (&)  (c). 

5.  arbitrabantur,  they  were  judging,  they  thought ;  cf.  arbitrate: 
(a)   stem,  tense  sign,  personal  ending  ?    (&)    pass,  in  form,  act.  in 
meaning  ;  such  verbs  are  called  deponent ;  cf.  oriuntur  XL,  potlri 
XIV.,  vagarentur  XVI. 

6.  qui,  which:   (a)  antec.  ?  How  do  you  know  it?   (b)  subj.  of 
what  ? 

7.  milia,  noun,   thousands;   cf.  million,  mile:    (a)  accus.  plur. 
neut.,  decl.  like  plur.  of  facile  XIV.  N.  1  (d)  ;    (b)  accus.  of  extent  of 
space,  like  Eng.  objective  in  same  use. 

8.  passuum,  of  paces  ;  cf.  pass,  pace:  (a)  -um  is  the  ending  of 
the  gen.  plur. ;   (b)  partitive  gen.,  depending  upon  milia ;  cf.  VI.  N.  3 

(c)  (d);   (c)  stem,  passu-;  cf.  cultu  VI.,  lacu  XV.,  occasu-m  XL  ; 

(d)  cf.  the  following  words  having  vowel  steins  :  provincia-m,  an- 
gusto-s,   omni-um,   re-bus  ;    and    the    following    having    consonant 
stems  :    cupiditat-e,  conjuration-em,  flumin-e,  dolor-e,  homin-um. 
All  the  consonant  stems  are  of  what  decl.? 

9.  ducenta,  adj.,  two  hundred:  (a)  accus.  plur.  neut.,  agreeing 
with  milia ;   (b)  found  only  in  plur. ;  ducentl,  ducentae,  ducenta, 
uorn. 

10.  quadraginta,  forty  ;  cf.  quadragesima,  the  first  Sunday  in 
Lent;  centum,  a  hundred,  cf.  cent,  centennial;  octoginta,  eighty, 
cf.  octogenarian.     All  are  indecl.  numeral  adj.  limiting  milia. 

11.  latitudinem,  width;  cf.  latus,  wide,  and  latitude,  also  mul- 
ti-tudin-e,  forti-tudin-is,  longi-tudin-em.   (a)  What  similarity  of  form 
have  the  three  words  last  given?    (b}  in  latitudinem  means  strictly 
into  width,  though  translated  properly  in  width  ;  cf.  ab  Sequanis 
X.  N.  14. 

12.  patebant.  they  were  lying  open,  extending;  cf.  Eng.  patent: 
(a)  analyze  and  classify  the  form ;  see  4  (b) ;   (b)  cf.}  as  to  exact  mean- 
ing, with  pertinent  VII.  N.  11. 


LESSON   XVII.  75 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  All  nouns  and  adj.  may  be  divided  into  -a,  -o,  -i,  -u,  -g,  and 
consonant  stems.     Consonant  stems  are  all  of  the  3d  decl. 

2.  Many  consonant  steins  of  the  3d  decl.  end  in  -tudin-. 

3.  One  class  of  verbs  is  distinguished  by  the  final  -a  of  the  pres. 
stem,  another  by  the  final  -e.1     These  letters  are  called  the  characteris- 
tics of  these  classes  of  verbs. 

4.  Verbs  w.hich  have  the  meaning  of  the  act.  with  the  form  of  the 
pass,  are  called  deponent. 

5.  a  or  ab,  cum,  de,  e  or  ex,  in  meaning  in,  pro,  and  a  few 
other  less  common  prep.,  take  the  abl.  case. 

6.  The  principal  verb  of  an  indirect  quotation,  from  either  the 
speech  or  the  thought  of  another,  is  in  the  inf.  mode.     This  mode  is 
then  translated  like  an  hid.,  and  has  an  accus.  for  its  subj. 

7.  Extent  of  space  is  expressed  by  the  accus. 

8.  The  partitive  gen.  depends  upon  superlatives,  nouns  of  number, 
and  other  nouns  denoting  a  part  of  a  thing. 

9.  Where  the  Eng.  uses  a  prep,  denoting  position  in  a  place,  the 
Lat.  frequently  uses  a  prep,  denoting  motion  to  or  from  a  place. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Characteristics  of  decl.  A.  &  G.  32.  H.  47. 

2.  Prep,  with  the  abl.      .  A.  &  G.  152,  b,  c.  H.  434,  435. 

3.  Subj.  of  the  inf.      .     .  A.  &  G.  240  /  II.  523,  I. 

4.  Accus.  of  extent     .     .  A.  &  G.  240,  e.  H.  379. 

5.  Words  used  with  par- 

titive gen.       .     .      .  A.  &  G.  216,  a,  1,    H.  397,  1,  2,  3. 
2,  3. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  angust-us,  -a,  -um,  narrow. 

2.  arbitrarl,  dep.,  to  judge,  think. 

1  The  vowels  3.  and  e  are  changed  to  a  and  e  wherever  they  come  before  nt  or 
final  -t. 


76  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  autem,  conj.,  but,  moreover. 

4.  centum,  iudecl.  numeral  adj.,  one  hundred. 

5.  ducent-I,  -ae,  -a,  numeral  adj.,  two  hundred. 

6.  fortitudinis  (derived  from  fortis,  brave),  of  bravery. 
1.  gloria,  f/lory. 

8.  habere,  to  Jiave,  hold. 

9.  latitudinis,  of  width. 

10.  longitudinis,  of  length. 

11.  mille  (in  sing,  usually  an  indecl.  adj. ;  in  plur.  a  noun  decl.  like 

mare),  a  thousand. 

12.  multitudiiiis,  of  a  great  number,  multitude. 

13.  octogiuta,  indecl.  adj.,  eighty. 

14.  passuum,  gen.  plur.,  of  paces  (the  Roman  mile  was  a  thousand 

paces,  and  the  lloman  (double)  pace  was  a  little  less  than  five 
feet). 

15.  patere,  to  lie  open,  extend. 

16.  pro,  prop,  with  abl.,  in  front  of,  in  behalf  of,  instead  of,  for, 

in  proportion  to. 

17.  quadraginta,  indecl.  &<\].,  forty. 


6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Pro  multitudine  hominum  angustos  fines  Helveti!  habebant. 
(b)  Pro  gloria  atque  fortitudine  Helvetii  angustos  esse  suos  fines  arbi- 
trantur.     (c)  Fines  angustos  Helvetii  Iiabent,  qtii  in  latitudinem  rnilia 
passuum   centum    et  octoginta  patent.       (d)  Quod  Helvetii   lacu    et 
fluminibus  et   montibus  continebantur,   fiebat   ut   minus  late   vagari 
possent. 

2.  (a)  Magnum  hominum  numerum  habebat.      (6)   Magnam  fru- 
menti  copiam   Hsedui  mittebant.       (c)  lleliquas   copias   Helvetiorum 
Roman!  superant.      (d)   Cum  reliqua  Gallia  Roman!  Haeduos  supera- 
bant.      (e)   Gallum  animum  bonum  habere  dictum  est.     (f)  Eorum 
fines  Sequan!  attirigebarit. 

3.  (a)  The  territory  of  the  Helvetii  is  narrow,     (b)   The  Helvetian 
country  extended  two  hundred  and  forty  miles  in  length,     (c)  The 
Celtae  hold  a  third  part  of  Gaul,      (d)   He  was  holding  the  supreme 
power  of  the  state. 


LESSON  XVII.  77 

4.  (a)  The  mountain  was  sloping  to  the  river,  (b)  The  soldiers 
are  warring,  (c)  All  the  clients,  of  whom  he  had  a  great  number. 
(d)  The  Romans  used-to-call  (were  calling)  the  Celtae  Gauls  (accus.). 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  All  the  forms  of  habere  which  the  pupil  may  now  be 
expected  to  know.  2.  The  verb  characteristics  -a  and  -e.  3.  The 
meaning  of  word  "deponent."  4.  Connection  of  the  various  meanings 
of  pro  with  the  first  meaning,  in  front  of.  5.  Analysis  of  spectare, 
spectabat,  spectarent.  6.  The  verbs  which  stand  at  the  end  of 
their  clauses  in  the  last  five  lessons.  7.  The  five  dec!.  8.  The  list 
of  prep,  which  take  the  abl.  9.  A  use  of  the  inf.  where  the  Eng. 
uses  the  ind.  10.  How  to  express  extent,  or  answer  question  "how 
far."  11.  Words  in  the  text  thus  far  on  which  the  partitive  gen.  de- 
pends. 12.  Difference  in  use  of  prep,  in  Eng.  and  Lat.  with  respect 
to  rest  or  motion.  13.  Two  translations  for  the  inf.  according  to 
connection.  14.  Nouns  and  adj.  with  nom.  plur.  ending  -i-a. 
15.  Likeness  in  form  between  quadraginta  and  octoginta. 


78  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD, 

LESSON    XVIII. 
1.    TEXT. 

His  rebus     adducti,    et      auctoritate     Orgetorigis 

By  these  things         led,       and  by  the  advice  of  Orgetorix 

permoti,         constituerunt  ea  quse        ad 

deeply  moved,   they  determined    those  things       which       to 

proficiscendum  pertinerent  comparare,     jumentorum 

departure  pertained     to  prepare,  of  beasts  of  burden 

et     carrorum       quam       maximum  numerum  coemere,1 
and    of  carts    as  much  as  the  greatest     number     to  buy  up, 

sementes        quam          maximas        facere,  ut 

sowings       as  much  as     the  greatest     to  make,  in  order  that 

in       itinere  copia       frumenti         suppeteret. 

on  the  journey      plenty        of  grain     might  be  on  hand. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  adducti,  having  been  led,  being  led,  led :   (a)  pf.  pass,  partic. ; 
cf.  divisa  I.,  dictum  X.,  inductus  XIII. ;    (b)  agrees  as  an  adj.  with 
the  subj.  of  constituerunt ;   (c]  rase,  number,  gender  ? 

2.  Orgetorigis,  of  Orgetorix :    (a)   stem   Orgetorig- ;    (J)  forms 
the  nom.  sing,  by  adding  -s  ;  cf.  omni-,  omnis  ;  part-,  par(t)s  ;  civi- 
tat-,  civita(t)s  ;   inducto-,  inductus.      (c)  gs  always  appears  as  x; 
hence  the  nom.  sing,  is  Orgetorix;  cf.  legibus  IV.,  nom.  sing.  leg-s» 
lex. 

1  The  two  dots  (diaeresis)  over  the  e  indicate  that  it  does  not  unite  with  the 
preceding  O  to  form  a  diphthong. 


LESSON   XVIII.  79 

3.  permoti,  deeply  moved,  influenced:  (a)  cf.  adducti  1;  (b)  per 
in  composition  has  the  force  of  old  Eng.  throughly,  or,  as  we  now  say, 
thoroughly  ;  cf.  perfacile  XIV.  N.  1. 

4.  constituerunt,  they  determined;    (a)   pf.   ind.  act.    3d  plur. ; 
cf.  pf.  ind.  act.  3d  sing1,  fecit,  persuasj.t  XIII. ;    (b)  fecerunt,  they 
made;  persuaserunt,  they  persuaded- 

5.  ea  quae;  cf.  ea  quse  VI  f.  N.  7,  8. 

6.  proficiscendum,    the    setting    out,    departure ;    accus.    of   the 
gerund;    cf.  bellandi  XVI.  N.  12,  Obs.  6. 

7.  pertinereiit,  they  were  pertaining,  pertained;    cf.  pertinet, 
pertinent  XL  ;    (a)  mode  and  tense  ?    cf.  vagarentur  XVI.   N.  6  ; 
(b)   stem? 

8.  comparare,  to  prepare  ;   used  after  constituerunt,  they  deter- 
mined to  prepare  ;  cf.  inferre  possent  XVI. 

9.  quam,  adv.  how,  as;  with  the  sup.  degree  it  is  best  translated  JDOS- 
sible;  thus,  quam  maximum  numerum,  the  greatest  possible  number. 

10.  maximum,  greatest;    cf.  Eng.  maximum;   irregular  sup.  of 
magnus. 

11.  coemere,  to  buy  up  :    (a)  completes  the  meaning  of  consti- 
tuerunt,   like   comparare   8  and   facere    following ;    (b)    cf.    com- 
para-re.  habe-re,  coeme-re,  and  poti-ri,  and  note  that  the  stems  end 
respectively  in  -a,  -e,  -e,  and  -I.     These  verbs  represent  four  different 
classes  of  verbs  as  to  inflection,      (c)  In  -e  verbs,  in  the  pres.  ind.,  -e 
is  varied  to  i  in  3d  sing,  and  to  u  in  3d  plur.  ;  cf.  dividit  V.,  gerunt 
VIII. ;    (d)  the  pers.  ending  -t,  -nt,  -tur,  -ntur,  the  tense  signs  -ba- 
and  -re-,  and  the  inf    ending  -re,  are  the  same  for  all  verbs  ;    cf.  ad- 
ficie-ba-ntur,   arbitra-ba-ntur,   pate-ba-nt,   appella-ntur,   contine- 
ntur,  praesta-re-nt,  pertine  re-nt,  and  the  above  inf. 

12.  itinere,    the  journey ;    cf.    itinerant :    (a)    abl.   sing.  neut.  ; 

(b)  with  in   meaning   in   or  on.     When    does   in   take   the   accus.  ? 

(c)  stem  itiiier-,  abl.  ending  -e ;  -ere  is  not  in  this  instance  an  inf. 
ending. 

13.  suppeteret,  it  might  be  on  hand:   (a)  mode,  tense,  number, 
and  person  ?     (b)  its  subject  is  copia  ;    (c)  denotes  state  or  condition 
rather  than  an  act;    (d)  the  clause  ut  .  .  .  suppeteret  gives   the 
purpose  of  the  Helvetii  in  making  their  plantings  of  grain  as  large  as 
possible ;  so   ut  .  .  .  exirent  XIII.  gives  the  purpose  of  persu&sit. 


80  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  following  stems  form  the  noin.  sing,  by  adding -s :  very 
many  rnasc.  in  -o,  most  masc.  and  fern,  in  -i,  -d,  -t,  -c,  -g,  and  others 
to  be  learned  later. 

2.  In  stems  in  -c  or  -g,  the  B  unites  with  c  or  g  to  form  x,  which 
is  a  double  consonant  equal  to  cs  or  gs. 

3.  The  pf.  pass,  partic.  is  declined  like  adj.  of  the  1st  and  2d  decl. 

4.  The  ending  -erunt  is  that  of  the  pf.  ind.  act.  3d  plur. 

5.  Verbs  are  divided  into  four  systems  of  inflection,  or  four  conju- 
gations, distinguished  from  one  another  by  the  final  or  characteristic 
vowel  of  the  pres.  stem.     The  pres.  stem  may  always  be  found  by 
dropping  -re  of  the  pres.  inf. 

6.  The  characteristic  of  the  1st  conjug.  is  a,  of  the  2d  g,  of  the 
3d  e,  and  of  the  4th  I. 

7.  All  conjug.  are  alike  in  the  ending  of  the  pres.  inf.  act.,  in  the 
endings  of  the  3d  pers.  both  act.  and  pass.,  and  in   the  tense  signs 
of  the  impf.  ind.  and  of  the  impf.  subjv. 

8.  The  stem  characteristic  of  the  3d  conj.  is  changed  to  i  in  the 
pres.  ind.  3d  sing.,  to  u  in  the  pres.  ind.  3d  plur. 

9.  Quam  with  the  sup.  denotes  the  highest  degree  possible. 

10.  Ut,  that,  so  that,  is  used  with  the  subjv.  to  denote  purpose. 

11.  The  inf.  is  used    (without   a   subj.)   with  many  verbs  which 
imply  another   action    to   complete    their    meaning.     This    is    called 
the  complementary  inf. 


4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  3d  decl.  stems  in -c  and -g  A.  &  G.  44,  46,  rex  H.  59,  and  1,  1;, 

and  dux.  3)  ;  3,  II.  N.  2. 

2.  The  characteristics  of  the 

four  conjug.     .      .      .  A.  &  G.  122  and  a.     H.  201. 

3.  Quam  with  sup.  degree    A.  &  G.  93,  b.  H.  170,  2. 

4.  Subjunctive   of  purpose 

with  ut  .  .  A.  &  G.  317.  H.  497  and  IL    • 


LESSON   XVIII.  81 

5.  Complementary  inf.  .     .  A.  &  G.  271.  H.  533. 

6.  The   nature  and    use  of 

the  partic A.  &  G.  25,  e;  289,  H.  2CO,  IV.  and 

186.  foot-note;  438,  1. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  adducere,  to  lead  to,  to  draw  to,  to  induce. 

2.  auctoritas,  fern.,  advice,  authority,  influence. 

3.  carrus,  carri  gen.,  a  cart. 

4.  coemere  (can  and  emere),  to  purchase  together,  to  buy  up. 

5.  comparare  (con,  here  intensive,  and  parare),  to  prepare  with 
zeal,  to  make  ready. 

6.  constituere,  to  set  together,  arrange,  determine. 

7.  itinere,  abl.  slug.,  Journey,  route,  march. 

8.  jumeiitum,  nent.,  a  yoke  animal,  beast  of  burden. 

9.  maxim-us,  -a, -um,  greatest,  irregular  sup.  of  magii-us,  -a,  -um. 

10.  permovere,  to  move  thoroughly  or  deeply,  to  influence  strongly  ; 
permot-us,    -a,   -um,   pf.    pass,    partic.,   having   been  moved,   being 
moved,  moved  deeply. 

11.  proficiscendum,  accus.  sing-.,  gerund  of  proficisci,  to  set  out 
(pro  and  facere,  to  make  forward,  to  make  headway),   a  setting 
out,  departure. 

12.  quam,  adv.,  how,  as,   with  sup.  denotes  the   highest   possible 
degree. 

13.  sementis,  sementis  gen.,  sing,  fern.,  a  sowing ,  planting . 

14.  suppetere  (sub  and  petere),  to  be  on  hand,  in  store. 


6.     EXERCISES. 

In  the  following  exercises,  wherever  a  noun  is  qualified  by  an  adjective,  decl. 
both  together  completely. 

1.  (a]  Helvetil  his  rebus  perrnoti  constituerunt  de  flnibus  suls 
exire.  (b)  Helvetil  constituerunt  jumenta  et  oarros  coemere,  sementes 
magnas  facere,  copiam  frumenti  comparare.  (e)  Homines  bellandi 


82  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

cupidi   cum  fmitimis  bellum  gerebant.     (d)  Ea  quae  ad  bellandum 
pertinerent  comparabant. 

2.  (CL)   Quam  maximus  numerus  carrorum  comparatur.     (&)  Dic- 
tum  est   Sequanos   ad   Helvetios  jumenta   bona  mittere.      (c)    Quod 
Helvetii   fortissinii   fuerunt,  prceliis   cum  reliquls   Gallis   contendere 
coiistituerunt.     (d)  Orgetorix  els  persuasit  ut  quam  maximos  carros 
importarent,  ut  cum  copia  frumeiitl  exirent. 

3.  (a)  The  Helvetian  state  is  nearest  to  Mount  Jura,      (b)  It  came 
to  pass,  because  of  the   influence  of  Orgetorix,  that  the  Helvetii  pos- 
sessed a  very  great  supply  of  grain,     (c)  It  was  very  easy,  since  they 
surpassed  all  in  courage,  to  wage  wars  upon  their  neighbors,      (c?)  The 
Gauls,  whom  they  have  determined  to  overcome,  are  not-at-all  (least) 
hemmed  in  by  the  character  of  the  country. 

4.  (a)  The  highest  mountains  are  nearest  the  province.     (&)  The 
very  wide  river  divides  the  Gauls  from  the  Germans,      (c)  The  great- 
est wars  were  being  waged  in  Gaul,     (d)  He  contends  with  all  the 
forces  of  the  Romans. 


7.    TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  equivalent  of  x.  2.  The  nom.  sing,  ending  -B.  3.  Force 
of  per  in  composition.  4.  The  endings  -i-t,  -gru-nt.  5.  Char- 
acteristic vowels  -a,  -§,  -e,  -I  in  verbs.  6.  Pres.  ind.  of  3d  conjug. 
7.  -t,  -nt,  -tur,  -ntur,  -ba-,  -re-,  -re.  8.  Difference  between  partic. 
and  other  adj.  9.  The  pf.  pass,  partic.  10.  Meaning  of  complement- 
ary. 11.  Difference  between  Eng.  and  Lat.  ways  of  expressing 
purpose. 


LESSON  XIX.  83 

LESSON    XIX. 

1.     TEXT. 

(Constituerunt)  cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et 
amicitiam  confirmare.  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas  bien- 
nium  sibi  satis  esse  duxerunt,  in  tertium  annum  pro- 
fectionem  lege  confirmant.  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas 
Orgetorix  deligitur.  Is  sibi  legationem  ad  civitates  sus- 
cepit. 

To  the  Teacher.  The  literal  translation  will  no  longer  be  given  in  connec- 
tion with  the  lesson.  The  pupil  henceforth  should  be  taught  to  translate  the  text 
for  himself.  But  let  the  teacher  see  to  it  that  the  text  is  mastered  in  the  order  of 
the  original,  and  not  by  finding  first  predicate,  then  subject,  etc.  A  plan  by  which 
this  object  may  be  attained  is  suggested  in  Appendix  A,  to  which  teachers  are  re- 
ferred. The  notes  of  this  lesson  and  of  those  which  follow  are  adapted  to  the  plan 
there  suggested.  (See  p.  279,  Appendix  A.) 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  pacem,  peace;    cf.  pacify,  pacific:  («)  stein  pSc-y    (6)  norn. 
formed  by  adding  -o  to  stem  ;  pac-s  =  pax ;    cf.  Orgetorix  XVIII. 
N.  2. 

2.  amicitiam,  friendship ,-  cf  amicable :  a  quality  word  or  abstract 
noun  formed  by  the  addition  of  -tia  to  the  weakened  stem  of  amicus, 
as   cupiditas   is  formed   by  adding  -tas   to   the   weakened   stem  of 
cupidus. 

3.  eas,  these ;  accus.  plur.  fern. ;  cf.  eos,  accus.  plur.  masc.,  VII., 
and  earn,  amis.  sing,  fum.,  IX. 

4.  res,  things  ;  accus.  plur.  fern.;  cf.  rebus  XV L 

5.  conficiendas,   to  be  accomplished,  completed:1    (a)  a  partic. 

1  The  writer  is  aware  that  the  translation  of  the  gerundive  here  given  may  be 
fairly  questioned,  but  thinks  it  better  to  give  an  explanation  to  the  beginner  which 
will  be  modified  later  than  to  give  no  explanation  at  all,  —  the  alternative  often 
adopted  in  books  for  beginners. 


84  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

limiting  res  ;  (I)  pass.,  cf.  adducti  XVIII. ;  (c)  ad  eas  res  confi 
ciendas,  though  meaning  literally  to  or  for  these  things  to  be  accom- 
plished, may  be  translated  to  accomplish  these  things,'  cf.  ad 
effeminandos  animos  VII. ;  (d )  this  partic.  is  declined  like  an  adj. 
of  the  1st  and  2d  decl.  ;  («)  it  ends  in  the  noin.  sing,  in  -ndus,  -nda, 
-ndum. 

6.  sibi, /or  them;  irrrg.  dat.  plur.,  cf.  se,  accus.  plur.,  XVII. 

7.  satis,   enough,   sufficient ;    here  an   indecl.  adj.  limiting  bien- 
nium. 

8.  duxgrunt,  they  led,  they  drew,  they  tltouyht ;  cf.  Eng.  expres- 
sions to  draw  an  inference,  a  train  of  thought:  (d)  pf.   ind.  act.  3d 
plur. ;  cf.  constituerunt  XVIII.;   (b)  for  biemiium  satis  esse  duxe- 
runt,  cf.  XIV.  N.  2,  Obs.  9;  XVII/Obs.  6. 

9.  in  tertium  annum,  for  the  third  year ;  ad  and  in  with  accus. 
often  have  the  meaning  for,  especially  in  expressions  of  time. 

10.  lege  :   (a)  abl.  sing.,  meaning  law;  (b)  used  without  a  prep.; 
(c)  four  ablatives  used  without  a  prep,  have  already  been  met :   legi- 
bus   IV.,    respect  ;    finibus  IX.,    separation  ;    rebus   XVI.,    cause ; 
Garumna   X.,   means;    (d)    with    confirmant,   the  last   word   in  the 
sentence,  the  abl.  of  means  seems  the  most  appropriate  for  lege. 

11.  deligitur,  he  is  chosen  ;  pres.  ind.  pass.  3d  sing. ;  cf.  dividit 
V.,  continetur  X. 

12.  suscepit,  he  undertook,  took  upon:  (a)  compounded  of  subs 
for  sub,  under,  from  under  (as  one  places  his  arms  in  lifting),  and 
capere,  to  take;  cf.  capit  X.;   (b)  pf.  ind.  act.  3d  sing.;  cf.  fecit 
XIII. ;   (c)  takes  dir.  obj.  legatioiiem,  and  indir.  sibi ;   the  latter,  be- 
cause compounded  with  sub  ;  cf.  omnibus  praestarent  XIV.;  (o?)  sibi 
here  means  himself,  though  earlier  in  this  same  lesson  it  means  them- 
selves or  them.     The  reason  is  this :  The  pronoun  of  which  sibi  is  a 
case,  always  refers  to  some  subj.  in  the  sentence,  generally  to  the  subj. 
of  the  clause  in  which  it  stands  ;  hence  it  gets  its  number,  gender,  and 
person  from  the  subj.  which  is  its  antecedent ;  the  former  sibi  refer- 
ring to  the  subj.  of  confirmant,  a  plur.   verb,  was  plur. ;  this  sibi, 
referring  to  is,  the  subj.  of  the  sing,  verb  suscepit,  is  sing. 


LESSON   XIX.  85 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Endings  of  names  of  qualities  ;  -tas,  -tia. 

2.  There  is  in  Lat.  a  pass,  partic.  referring  to  the  future.     It  ends 
in  -ndus,  -nda,  -ndum  in  the  nom.  sing.,  and  is  of  the  1st  and  2d 
decl.     This  partic.  is  called  the  gerundive. 

3.  The  dat.  is  used  as  the  indir.  obj.  of  many  verbs  compounded 
with  prae,  sub,  and  some  other  prep. 

4.  Be,  sibi  always  refer  to  some  subj.  in  the  sentence,  generally  to 
that  of  the  clause  in  which  they  stand.     They  have  the  same  forms  in 
the  sing,  and  the  plur.     The  corresponding  adj.  pron.  suus,  sua,  suum 
also  refers  to  the  subj.     These  are  called  reflexive  (bending  back)  pron. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  gerundive;  form 

and  meaning    .     .     A.  &  G.  113,  d.  H.  248,  543. 

2.  Dat.  with  compound 

verbs      .     .     .     .     A.  &  G.  228.  H.  386. 

3.  The  reflexives  ;  form 

and  use  .     .     .     .     A.  &  G.  98,  c,  196, 197.    II.  184,  448,  449. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  amlcitia,  friendship  ;  cf.  amicus,  friend. 

2.  aiinus,  anni  gen.,  a  year. 

3.  biennium  (bis  and  annus),  the  space  of  two  years. 

4.  coiificere  (con  and  facere),  to  accomplish,  complete. 

5.  confirmare,  to  strengthen,  establish,  encourage,  affirm. 

6.  deligere,  to  choose  from,  select. 
1.  dii^ere,  to  lead,  draw,  consider. 

8.  legationem,    accus.    sing,    fern.,   embassy;    cf.   Iggatus,    artt, 

bassador. 

9.  pax,  fern.,  pads,  gen.,  peace. 

10.  profectioiiem,  accus.  sing,  fern.,  a  setting  out^  departure /  cf, 

proficiscendum  XVIII. 

11.  satis,  adv.  or  adj.,  sufficiently,  enough. 


86  INDUCTIVE   LATIN    METHOD. 

12.  sui,  gen.  sing,  or  plur.,  of  himself  ,  herself,  itself,  themselves. 

13.  su-us,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adj.  pron.,  his,  hers,  its,  their. 

14.  suscipere   (sub  and  capere),  to  take  from  under,  to  take  up 

or  upon,  to  undertake. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Cum  Hseduis  reliquisque  civitatibus  Helvetii  pacem  confir- 
maiit.     (b)  Ad  eas  res  couficiendas  Helvetii  Orgetorigem,  qui  apud  eos 
longe  uobilissimus  fuit,  deligunt.     (c)  Ea  qiue  ad  effeminaudos  animos 
pertinent  important,      (rf)  Ea  qtiae  ad  proticiscendum  pertinent  impor- 
tantur.     (e)  Homines  cupidos  bellandi  magnus  dolor  adficiebat. 

2.  (a)  Ducnnt,  duxerunt,  diicebant.      (It)  Els  persuasit  ut  omries 
copias   ducerent.      (c)  Ad   omnes  res    comparandas   cjuattuor   annos 
Helvetiis  satis  esse  ducit.     (d)  Virtute  suis  finitiinis  pnestabant. 

3.  (a)  They  establish  friendship  with  the  state  nearest  the  Rhine. 
(b)  These  men  took  upon   themselves  an  embassy,     (c)  They  estab- 
lished (were  establishing)  peace  with  their  neighbors,  so  that  they  might 
have  friends  on  their  inarch,     (c?)  A  part  of  Gaul  is  separated  from 
the  Helvetii  by  the  river  Rhone. 

4.  (a)  Orgetorix  led  his  own  clients  to  the  war.      (b)  The  Helvetii, 
because   they   thought   their  boundaries  were  narrow,  determined  to 
possess  very  broad  fields,      (c)  Orgetorix,  influenced  by  the  desire  for 
kingly  power,  was  making  ready  his  departure. 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  nom.  sing,  endings  -ndus,  -nda,  -ndum.  2.  Force  of  sub 
and  con  in  compound  verbs.  3.  Two  uses  of  the  dat.  4.  Two  pass, 
partic.  5.  Peculiarities  of  the  reflexive  substantive.  6.  Of  the  reflex- 
ive adj.  7.  Four  uses  of  the  abl.  without  a  prep.  8.  Reason  for  dis- 
cussing the  second  sibi  of  text  in  connection  with  suscepit  instead  of 
separately ;  see  N.  12.  9.  How  the  word  is,  standing  where  it  does, 
helps  us  about  the  meaning  of  the  next  word,  sibi.  10.  Vowel 
changes  'when  words  are  compounded. 


LESSON  XX.  87 

LESSON    XX. 
1.    TEXT. 

In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Castico,  Catamantalcedis  filio, 
Sequano,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  Sequanls  multos  annos 
obtinuerat,  et  a  senatu  populi  Roman!  amicus  appellatus 
erat,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occuparet,  quod  pater 
ante  habuerat. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  cujus,  of  whom,  whose:   («)  j  =  y  in  year;   (b)  gen.  sing. 
masc.  of  the  rel.  pron.  qui ;  in  like  manner  the  gen.  sing,  of  is  XtX. 
is  ejus,  and  of  hi  IV.  is  hujus  ;    (c)  i  between  two  vowels,  or  i  at 
the  beginning  of  a  word,  before  a,  e,  o,  or  u,  becomes  a  consonant,  and 
is  conventionally  written  j  j1  the  ending  in  this  case  is  really  the  same 
as  in  totius  XIV  ;    (d)  antec.  ? 

2.  pater,  father  ;  cf.  paternal ;  nom.  sing. 

3.  obtinuerat,  he  had  held:   (a]  analysis:   obtinu-  pf.  stem  (the 
basis  of   all  tenses  of   act.   voice  which    denote    perfect  or  complete 
action)  ;  cf.  pres.  stem  obtine,  in  obtine-re  X. ;  -era-,  tense  sign  of 
pluperfect    ind.    act.;     cf.    Eng.    had;    -t,    pers.    ending    3d    sing.; 
(b)   when  this  verb  is  reached  in  order,  the  pupil  will  see  that  pater 
must  be  its  subj.  and  regnum  its  obj.,  and  that  the  accus.,  multos 
annos,  limits  the  verb  like  an  adverb,  telling  how  long  he  had  held 
the  kingdom.     Such  an  accus.  is  called  an  accus.  of  duration  of  time, 
cf.  milia  XV [f.  N.  7  (£). 

4.  appellatus  erat,  he  had  been  called:   (a)  pluperfect  ind.  pass., 
3d   sing.  ;    (b)  cf.  the   plpf.    ind.  act.,    3d   sing.,  and   note  that   both 
forms  end  in  erat,  but  that  the  pass,  consists  of  two  words  :  erat,  the 
impf.  ind.  of  est,  fuit,  esse,  and  appellatus,  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  of 

1  The  teacher  should  consult  on  this  point  Koby's  Lat.  Grammar,  Book  I.,  137- 
139,  or  Harper's  Lat.  Dictionary  under  j. 


88  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

appellare.  (c)  On  reaching  this  verb  the  pupil  will  see  that  the 
meaning  of  a  senatu  is  by  the  senate,  and  not  from  the  senate  as 
previous  uses  of  a  would  lead  him  to  translate  it  ;  seiiatu  is  an  abl, 
of  agent;  see  Gram.  Less.  How  does  it  differ  from  the  abl.  of 
means?  (d)  amicus  (the  preceding  word)  is  nom.,  like  the  subject 
pater,  refers  to  the  same  person  as  pater,  and  is  part  of  the  pred- 
icate ;  cf.  qui  Galli  appellantur  III. 

5.  occuparet,  that  he  might  seize,  or,  better,  to  seize ;   (a)  iinpf. 
subjv.  act.  3d  sing.,  1st  or  a  conjug.  ;  cf.  impf.  subjv.  act.  3d  sing.,  3d 
or  e  conjng.,  in  suppeteret  XVIII.,  and  read  XVIII.  N.  11  with  Obs. 
5,  6,  7  ;   (b)  the  clause  ut  .  .  .  occuparet  is  in  the  accus.,  obj.  of 
persuadet,  just  as  id  is  accus.,  obj.  of  persuasit,  in  XIV.       (c)  How 
does   it  dutenm no   the  case  of  regnum  (after  ut)  and  the    meaning 
of  sua? 

6.  quod,  which  :  (a)  rel.  pron.,  accus.  sing.  neut. ;  (b)  distinguish 
from  quod,  conj.,  because,  IX.;   (c)  antec.  ? 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

In  this  and  succeeding  lessons  only  Ihosc   subjects   will   be  treated  under  the 
"  Observations"  which  are  not  covered  by  the  "  Grammar  Lesson." 

1.  Initial  i  before  a,  e,  o,  u,  or  i  between  two  vowels,  becomes 
a  consonant,  is  usually  written  j,  and  is  pronounced  like  y  in  year. 

2.  The  pf.  stem,  upon  which  as  a  base  all  tenses   of   completed 
action  are  formed,  may  be  found  as  a  rule  in  the  2d  conjug.,  and  often 
in  the  1st  and  3d,  by  changing  the  final  vowel  of  the  pres.  stem  to  u. 

3.  The  plpf.  iiul.  act.  has  the  tense  sign  -era-  in  all  conjng..  and  the 
plpf.  ind.  pass,  is  made  up  of  two  words,  viz.  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  and 
the  impf.  ind.  of  the  verb  esse. 

4.  Two  new  forms  of  qui:  cujus,  the  gen.  sing,  all  genders,  and 
quod  the  nom.  and  accus.  sing.  neut. 


4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  The  accus.  of  duration 

of  time     ....     A.  &  G.  240,  e.  H.  379. 

2.  The  abl.  of  agent  .     .     A.  &  G.  246.  H.  415,  I. 


LESSON  XX.  89 

3.  The  predicate  noun  or 

adj A.   &   G.   183,   184,      H.  362,  363. 

185. 

4.  The  obj.  clause  of  pur- 

pose     A.  &  G.  331  and  a.        H.  498  and  II. 

5.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  ante,  adv.  and  prep.,  before. 

2.  Catamantaloedes,  Catamantaloedis  gen.,  a  Gallic  name. 

3.  filius,  son. 

4.  mult-us,  -a  -uni,  much ;  plur.  many. 

5.  occupai'e,  to  seize,  to  take  possession  of. 

6.  pater  father. 

7.  populus,  people. 

8.  senatu,  abl.  sing,  masr.,  a  body  of  old  men,  a  senate. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Hsedui  a  senatu  populi  Rdmani  amicl  appellantur.    (b)  Pater 
Castici  regnum  multos  annds  obtinebat.     (c)  In  suo  itinere  Sequano 
nobili  persuasit.      (c?)  Multa  regna  quse  ab  hoininibus   nobilissimis 
occupata  erant  in  Gallia  erant. 

2.  (a)  Cresar  duxit  Orgetorigera  C'astic5  persuadere.     (b)  Casticus 
auctoritate  Orgetorigis  addnetus  regnum  occnpare  constituit.      (c)  Hi 
homines  qui  suis  flnibus  Germanos  prohibuerant  fortissimi  fuerurit. 
(d)  Ab  Orgetorige  Casticus  inductus  erat  ut  regnum  occuparet. 

3.  (a)  It  came  to  pass  that  the  kingly  power  was  seized  by  Casti- 
cus.     (b)  Orgetorix  had  had  many  friends,     (c)  The  friends  of  Orget- 
orix  were  many,     (d)  Orgetorix  persuaded  his  friends  to  seize  the 
kingly  power    in    their  states,      (e)   The  country  of   the  Sequani  is 
bounded  by  the  great  Rhone  river. 

4.  (a)  They    determined    to    wage    war   upon   the   nearest   states. 
(b)  Rivers  rise  in  the  mountains  and  flow  into  the   ocean,     (c)  Peace 
and  friendship  are  established  by  the  Helvetii.      (d)  Orgetorix  had 
the  largest  possible  number  of  friends,  so  that  through  them  he  might 
seize  the  royal  power  of  Gaul. 


90  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  use  of  the  pf.  stem.  2.  The  difference  between  the  plpf. 
act.  and  plpf.  pass.  3.  Likeness  and  difference  of  pred.  noun  and  ap- 
positive.  4.  Likeness  between  accus.  of  time  and  accus.  of  space. 
5.  Difference  between  abl.  of  agent  and  abl.  of  means.  6.  The  use  of 
a  clause  as  a  noun  in  Eng.  and  Lat.  7.  Difference  between  the  inf. 
to  go  in  the  sentences  he  was  able  to  go  and  he  made  ready  to  go. 


LESSON  XXI. 
1.     TEXT. 

Itemque  Dumnorigi  Hseduo,  fratri  Divitiaci,  qui  eo 
tempore  principatum  in  civitate  obtinebat  ac  maxime 
plebi  acceptus  erat,  ut  idem  conaretur  persuadet,  eique 
filiam  suam  in  matrimonium  dat. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  fratri,  the  brother:  (a)  dat.  sing,  from  nom.  frater;    cf.  pater 
XX. ;   (b)  stem  fratr- ;  the  e  of  the  nom.  is  developed  in  the  effort  to 
pronounce  this  stem  ;    (c)  why  dat.  ? 

2.  eo  tempore,  at  that  time  ;  the  time  at  which  an  action  occurs 
is  expressed  by  the  abl.  without  a  prep. 

3.  acceptus,  a  pf.  pass,  partic.,  but  having  here  the  meaning  ac- 
ceptable rather  than  accepted  ;  (a]  cf.  divisa  I.,  dictum  X.,  inductus 
XIII.,  permoti  XVII L,  appellatus  XX.,  and  note  that  the  nom.  sing, 
ends  in  -us,  -a,  -um,  added  to  a  stem  ending  in  -t  or  sometimes  -B. 
This  is  called  the  supine  stem  of  the  verb;  (b)  the  preceding  word 
plebi  is  a  dat.  completing  the  meaning  of  acceptus  ;  cf.  VIII.  N.  2  (c)  ; 
(c)  What  is  the  nom.  sing,  of  plebi?  cf.  XVIII.  Obs.  1. 


LESSON  XXI.  91 

4.  idem,  the  same  (thing)  ;    accus.  neut.  sing.,  obj.  of  deponent 
verb  conaretur. 

5.  el,  to  him:  (a)  dat.  sing,  masc.  of  is  XIX. ;  so  cui  1  from  qui; 

(b)  indir.  obj.  of  dat ;   (c)  antec.  ? 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Collect  from  the  text  all  the  forms  which  have  been  used  of  is, 
ea,  id,  and  qui,  quae,  quod,  and  note  :    (a)  that  these  forms  are  gen- 
erally of  the  1st  and  2d  (led. ;   (b)  that  the  following  have  the  endings 
of  the  3d  decl.  :    is,  ei,   cui,  quibus,  and  quern  accns.   sing.  masc. 
(not  yet   used)  ;    (c)  the  following  have   peculiar   endings  :    qui  as 
nom.  sing,  masc.,  quee  as  nom.  sing.  fern,  and  nom.  and  accus.  plur. 
neut.,  id,  quod,  ejus,  cujus. 

2.  As  these  pron.  are  difficult  and  yet  the  most  frequently  used  in 
the  language,  the  following  points  must  be  thoroughly  mastered :    (a) 
in  both,  the  gen.  sing.,  the  dat.  sing.,  and  the  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  have 
but  one  form  for  all  genders;   (b)  quae,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  is  the  same 
in  form  as  the  nom.  plur.  fern,  and  the  norn.  and  accus.  plur.  neut. ; 

(c)  qui,  nom.  sing,  masc.,  is  the  same  in  form  as  nom.  plur.  masc. ; 
(c?)  quam,  accus.  sing,  fern.,  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  adv.  quam. 

4.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  is,  ea,  id,  and 

qui,  quce,  quod  .  .  A.  &  G.  101,  103.  H.  186,  IV.,  187. 

2.  The  supine  stein  .  .  .  A.  &  G.  125.  H.  256  and  1. 

3.  Abl.  of  time    .      .  .  .  A.  &  G.  256.  H.  429. 

4.  Dat.  with  adj.      .  .  .  A.  &  G.  234.  H.  391. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

The  pupil  should  be  prepared  with  Eug.  words  related  to  those  in  Vocabularies. 

1.  ac,  another  form  for  atque,  cf.  VI.  N.  8;  it  is  used  only  before 

consonants. 

2.  accept-us,  -a,  -um,  pf.  pass,  partic.  (from  accipere),  accepted, 

acceptable. 

1  To  be  pronounced  as  a  monosyllable. 


92  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  conari,  dep.,  to  try. 

4.  dare,1  to  give. 

5.  Dumnorix,  -igis,2  a  man's  name. 

6.  filia,  daughter. 

7.  f rater,  -tris,  brother. 

8.  Hseduus,  a  ffceduan,  one  of  the  Hcedui. 

9.  idem,  noiri.  and  aecus.  sing,  neut.,  the  same  (thing). 

10.  item,  adv.,  likewise,  also. 

11.  matrimonium,  marriage. 

12.  maxime,  very  greatly,  most,  especially  ;  cf.  maxim- us,  -a,  -um. 

13.  plebs,  -bis,  plebeians,  common  people. 

14.  principatum,  accus.  sing-,  masc.,  leadership. 

15.  tempore,  abl.  sing,  neut.,  time. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Divitiacus  et  Dumnorix  fratres  fuerunt.     (b)  Orgetorix  Hel- 
vetius  Dumnorigi  Hsedno  persuasit.     (c)   Hoc  tempore  Divitiacus  in 
civitate   principatum  obtinuit.      (c?)   Id  hoc  facilius  persuasit  quod 
undique  loci  natura  Helvetii  rontinentur. 

2.  (a)  Pat  11  persuasit  ut  arnico  nobili  filiam  in  matrimonium  daret. 
(b)  Imperio  Gallise  terti5  anno  potiii  constituerant  et  tres  annos  eas 
res  cornparabant.     (c)  Dumnorix   eujus   f  rater  erat  Divitiacus,  regni 
cupiditate  inductus  principatum  in  sua  civitate  esse  satis  sibi  minime 
arbitrabatur. 

3.  (a)  He  persuaded  them  to  try  the  same  thing,     (b)  The  father 
of  Casticus  held   the   leadership  many  years  in  the  territory  of  the 
Sequani.      (c]    Dumnorix  had  led  in  marriage  out  of  that  state  the 
daughter  of  Orgetorix.       (d)  At  that  time  Casticus  was  a  friend  of 
the  Helvetii. 

4.  (a)  The  Sequani  send  ambassadors  to  Dumnorix  the  Hseduan. 
(b)  The  men  with  whom  Orgetorix  had  made  a  conspiracy  were  de- 
sirous of  warring,     (c)  Those  men  who  were  seizing  the  kingly  power 
in  Gaul  took  the  leadership  upon  themselves.      (d)  Dumnorix  was 
called  friend  by  Orgetorix. 

1  The  -a  of  the  pres.  stem  of  dare  is  short  by  exception. 

2  The  final  letters  of  the  s;en. 


LESSON   XXII.  93 


7.     TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  formation  and  meaning'  of  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  ?  2.  Like- 
ness in  decl.  of  is  and  qui.  3.  Number  of  times  eaeh  is  used  in 
text  thus  far.  4.  Stems  of  the  nouns  in  this  lesson.  5.  Datives  in 
this  lesson.  6.  Difference  between  accus.  and  abl.  of  time.  7.  Uses 
of  abl.  without  a  prep.  8.  Three  steins  of  Lat.  verb. 


LESSON    XXII. 
1.    TEXT. 

Perfacile  factii  esse  illis  probat  conata  perficere,  prop- 
terea  quod  ipse  suae  civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  esset ; 
non  esse  dubium  qum  totius  Gallise  plurimum  Helvetil 
possent. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  factu,  in  doing  or  to  do  ;  a  verbal  noun  used  as  an  abl.  of  re- 
spect or  specification  with  perfacile  ;   it  is  called  a  supine,  and  the 
supine  stem,  which  is  the  base  of  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  and  other  forms, 
is  found  by  cutting  off  the  final  vowel. 

2.  probat,  he  proves:  (a)  a  verb  of  saying,  using  that  term  in  its 
widest  sense,  hence  followed  by  the   inf.    esse   in    indir.    discourse ; 

(b)  the  preceding  illis  is   a  dat.  used  with  it;  he  proves  to  them; 
cf.  el  dat,  he  gives  to  him,  XX L 

3.  perficere,  to  accomplish:  (a)  from  per  and  facere  ;  cf.  X.  N. 
13  (a)   (c)  ;   (b)  the  simple  subj.  of  esse  ;  the  neut.  peifacile  is  a 
pred.  adj.  agreeing  with  it;    (c)  cf  bellandl  XVI.  N.  12  ;  factu  1. 

4.  ipse,  himself:  (a)  the  intensive  pronoun;  (b)  nom.  sing,  masc., 
limiting  and  thus  rendering  emphatic  the  subj.  of  the  following  verb; 

(c)  declined  like  is,  ea,  id,  with  exception  of  form  ipsurn,  nom.  and 
accus.  sing.  neut. ;  illis,  above,  has  nom.  sing.  masc.  ill-e  like  ips-e, 
and  in  the  other  cases,  the  endings  of  is,  ea,  id. 


94  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

5.  obtenturus,    about    to  possess :    (a)    future    act.    partic. ;    (b) 
formed  on  the  supine  stem  by  the  addition  of  -urus  ;  cf.   pf.   pass, 
partic.  XXI.   N.  3  (a),  and  pres.  stern  in  obtine-re  X.,  pf.  stem  in 
obtinu-erat  XX.;    (c)   nom.  sing,  masc.,  agreeing-  with  the  subj.  of 
following  verb. 

6.  esset,  he  ivas :  (a)  impf.  subjv.  3d  sing,     (b)  What  is  the  stem? 
(c)   What  is  impf.  ind.  3d  sing.? 

7.  possent,  were  powerful:  (a)  impf.   subjv.   3d  plnr. ;   cf.  XVI. 
N.  9  ;   (b)  following  quin,  just  as  in  XVI.  it  follows  ut ;    (c)  modified 
by  the  adv.  plurimum,  most,   upon   which  totius  Galliae  depends  ; 
translate,  the  Helvetii  were  most  powerful  of  all  Gaul. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  endings  -urus,  -ura,  -urum  are  added  to  the  supine  stem  to 
form  the  future  active  partic. ;  -us,  -a,  -um,  to  the  same  stem  to  form 
the  pf.  pass,  partic. 

2.  Verbs  having  a  as  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  often  weaken 
this  a  to  i  when  compounded  with  prep. 

3.  Verbs  of  giving  and  saying  take  a  dat.  of  the  person  to  whom 
the  thing  is  given  or  said. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  ille  and  ipse    .     .  A.  &  G.  101.          H.  186,  HI.  V. 

2.  The  supine,  gerund  and  inf. ; 

form  and  use     .     .      .      .  A.  &  G.  112,  d;     H.  200,1.  II.  III., 

114,  «,  b.  538,  547. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

j.    conatum,  in  form  a  pf.  pass,  partic.  of  the  verb  conari,  a  thing 
attempted,1  an  attempt,  an  undertaking. 

2.  dubi-us,  -a,  -um,  doubtful. 

3.  ille,  ilia,  illud,  that,  used  of  what  is  remote  in  contrast  to  what 

is  near. 

4.  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  intensive  or  emphatic  pron.,  self. 

1  The  ]>f.  pnrtic.  in  dep.  verbs  is  sometimes  pass,  in  sense. 


LESSON   XXII.  95 

5.  non,  adv.,  not. 

6.  perficere,  to  accomplish,  finish. 

7.  plurim-us,  -a,  -um,  irreg    sup.  of  multus  (the  corresponding 

adv.  has  the  form  of  the  110111.  sing',  iieut.  positive  and  sup.), 
very  much,  most. 

8.  probare,   to  test,  prove,  approve. 

9.  quin,  conj.,  that,  bat  that,  that  not. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Perfacile  factu  est  totius  Gallise  imperio  potlrl.     (b)  Perfacile 
factu  erat  conata  perficere.      (c)  Orgetorix  Castico  et  Dumnorigi  pro- 
bat  perfacile  esse  ea  facere.     (d)  Ipse  suac  civitatis  imperium  obtentu- 
rus  est.     (c)  Non  dubiiun  fuit,  quin  Helvetii  reliquos  Gallos  superare 
possent,  cum  virtute  omnibus  prsestarent. 

2.  («)  Non  erat  dubium,  quin  Belgre  ab  humanitfite  provinciae  lon- 
gissime  abessent.     (b)  Dictum  est  Orgetorigem  in  sua  clvitate  imperium 
obtentururn  esse.      (c)  Qua  de  causa  Helvetii  ipsi  bellum  gerere  consti- 
ttierunt.     (o?)  His  rebus  induct!  conjuration  em  nobilitatis  facturi  sunt. 

3.  (a)  He  is  about  to  hold  the  supreme  power  in  the  Helvetian 
state,      (b)  There  was  no  doubt  that   Orgetorix   was   most  powerful 
among   the   Helvetii.      (c)   Orgetorix  persuaded  Casticus   and  Dum- 
norix  that  they  could  accomplish  their  undertakings,     (c?)  Dumnorix, 
whose  brother  was  a  friend  of  the  Roman  people,  was  trying  the  same 
thing. 

4.  (a)  Those   men   at  that  time  were  acceptable  to  the  common 
people,      (b)  In  order  to  influence  him,  Orgetorix  was  proving  that 
the  attempt  was  easy,      (c)    He  determined  to  persuade  the  nobility 
in  the  largest  possible  states,      (c?)  To  seize  the  whole   of  Gaul   is 
not  a  very  easy  thing  to  do. 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Difference  between  fut.  act.  and  pf.  pass,  partic.  in  meaning  and 
form.  2.  Between  ipse  and  ille.  3.  Different  words  introducing 
subjv.  thus  far.  4.  Three  verbal  nouns.  5.  The  verbal  adj.  6.  The 
three  stems  of  2d  conjug.  7-  Different  forms  of  esse  thus  far. 
8.  When  and  why  vowels  are  weakened. 


96  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON   XXIII. 

1.  TEXT. 

Se  suis  copiis  suoque  exercitu  illis  regna  conciliatu- 
rurn  confirmat.  Hac  oratione  adducti,  inter  se  fidem  et 
jusjurandum  dant,  et,  regno  occupato,  per  tres  potentissi- 
mos  ac  firmissimos  populos,  totius  Gallise  sese  potiri 
posse  sperant. 

2.  NOTES. 

1.  se.     Taking  this  word  alone,  what  cases  are  possible  for  it,  and 
what  uses  of  those  eases,  i.  e.  the  possibilities  for  this  word,  reading 
in  order? 

2.  exercitu;  copiis,  just  before,  may  from  its  form  be  either  dat. 
or  abl.,  but  the  close  connection  with  exercitu,  indicated  by  -que, 
shows  that  it  is  probably  the  same  case,  i.  e.  abl.     What  possibilities 
for  copiis  and  exercitu  ? 

3.  confirmat,  he  makes  strong  (by  words)  i.  e.  affirms :  (a)  esse 
is  to  be  supplied,  as  often,    (b)  What  does  confirmat  show  about  sg, 
suis,  and  suo?  (c)  What  is  the  only  word  in  the  sentence  with  which 
conciliaturum  can  possibly  agree  ? 

4.  Hac,  this:  (n)  abl.  sing,  fern.;   cf.  hoc,  abl.  sing,  neut.,  XIV.; 
(i)  the  pronoun  of  which  hac  is  a  form  poiuts  to  what  is  near. 

5.  occupato,  having  been  seized:    (a)  cf.  cona-t-a  XXII.,  con- 
cila-t-u-rum,  and  note  that  the  supine  stem  of  the  1st  con  jug.  is  found 
l>v  adding  -t  to  the  pres.  stem  ;   (#)  forms  with  regno  the  abl.  absolute 
construction  ;  see  XIII.  N.  5  (b)  (c),  Obs.  1. 

6.  potentissimos,  most  powerful :  (CL)  positive  potens,  of  which 
the  gen.  sing,  is  potentis ;  cf.  X.  x.  2.    (b)  the  com  p.  and  sup.  end- 
ings are  added  to  gen.  sing,  less  -is  ;  (c)  What  is  the  comp.?  cf.  XVI. 
N.  5  (c). 

7.  potiri,  to  get  possession  of:  (a)  followed  by  the  gen.  Gallise ; 
cf.   its    more    common   use   with  the  abl.,   XIV. ;    (b)   complement- 
ary inf.  with  posse;  cf.  inferre  possent  XVI.,  and  XVIII.  Obs.  11. 


LESSON   XXIII.  97 

8.  posse,  are  able,  can :  (a)  compounded  of  potis,  able,  and 
esse,  to  be;  the  last  syllable  of  potis  and  first  of  esse  are  dropped, 
and  t  is  assimilated,  thus  pot(is  es)se,  potse,  posse  ;  cf.  possent 
(potis  essent)  XVI.,  potens  (potis  and  ens,  partic.,  being)  6  ; 
(b)  inf.  after  sperant,  a  verb  of  thinking;  (c)  its  subj.  is  sese, 
another  form  for  se. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  verb  to  be  is  often  omitted  in  Lat.  as  in  Eng. 

2.  The  supine  stem  of  the  1st  conjug.  may  usually  be  found  by 
adding  -t  to  the  pres.  stem. 

3.  Adj.  having  the  noin.  sing.  masc.  endings  -us  and  -is  form  the 
comp.  and  sup.  by  substituting  -ior  and  -issimus  for  these  endings, 
but  those  having  noin.  sing.  masc.  ending  -ns  form  the  comp.  and  sup. 
by  adding  -ior  and  -issimus  to  the  gen.  sing,  less  the  ending  -is. 

4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Composition  of  posse,  and 

form    in   pres.    ind.    3d 
sing,  and   plur.  and  in 

pres.  partic A.  &  G.  120,  b.    H.  290,  II.  and  N. 

1,  2. 

2.  The  abl.    and    gen.    with 

potiri A.  &  G.  249  and   H.    421,    I.  ;    410, 

a.  V.  3. 

3.  Abl.  absolute,   noun    and 

partic.;  how  translated?1  A.  &  G.  255  and  H.  431  and  1,  2. 

N. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  conciliare,  to  bring  together,  to  win  over. 

2.  exercitii,  abl.  sing,  masc.,  an  exercised  and  disciplined  body, 

an  army. 

3.  fidem,    accus.    sing,    fern.,    faith,   a    promise,    a  promise    oj 

protection,  protection. 

1  Study  very  carefully  examples  under  this  rule  iu  grammars. 

7 


98  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

4.  firm-us,  -a,  -um,Jirm,  strong. 

5.  jusjurandum  (really  two  words,  jus  and  jurandum),  an  oath. 

6.  oratione,  abl.  sing,  fern.,  a  speech,  oration. 

7.  populus,  a  people. 

8.  poteiis,  being  able,  powerful. 

9.  sperare,  to  hope,  expect. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Sibi  eorum  regua  conciliat.     (b)  Regna,  quse  Galli  multi 
obtinuerant,  ab  Orgetorige  occupantur.      (c)  Potentissimi  populi  exer- 
citu  magno  regnis  totlns  Gallic  potni  possunt.     (d)  Se  omnia  regna 
occupaturos   csse  arbitrantur.      (e)  Ills   persuasit   ut    Helvetii  et  Se. 
quani  et  Hsedm  populi  potentissimi  h'rmissiinique  essent. 

2.  (a)  Fmperio  conciliilto,  in  alias  partes  fininm  milites  raitteban- 
tur.      (b)  Efi  legatione,  quani  ille  suscepit,  tres  GalJi  nobiles  concilia- 
bantur.      (c)   Orgetorix  conjurationem  fecit,  ut  ipse  quam  maximum 
immeruin  regnorum  occuparet.      (d)  Ad  amicitiam  confirmandam  inter 
se  fidem  et  jusjuraudum  dabant. 

3.  (a)  [ntiuenced  by  these  speeches,  the  men  give  a  promise  to  one 
another,      (b)  He  was  winning  the  kingdom  for  them  with  his  army. 
(c)  By  his  speech  that  (man)  influences  the  nobility,      (d)  The  nobil- 
ity having  (first)  been  influenced,  he  persuaded  (he  common  people 
to  wage  war  with  their  neighbors. 

4.  (a)   Because  they  were  wandering    widely,  they  thought  they 
"had  very   narrow  boundaries,      (b)   Orgetorix,   by  whose  speech  the 
Sequanian  and  Hoeduan  were  influenced,  was  very  rich,      (c)   Having 
given  a  pledge   (a  promise  having  been  given),  he  proves  that  it  is 
very  easy  to  get  possession  of  all  Gaul. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

I.  Difference  in  meaning  between  ill!  and  hi.  2.  Different  mean- 
ings of  confirmare.  3.  Different  ways  of  translating  the  abl.  abso- 
lute. 4.  Two  cases  with  dare.  5.  Constructions  after  persuadere. 
6.  After  potiri.  7.  After  posse.  8.  All  forms  of  posse  which  pupil 
should  now  know.  9.  To  what  the  endings  of  comp.  and  sup.  are 
added. 


LESSON  XXIV.  99 


LESSON   XXIV. 

1.    TEXT. 

Ea  res  est  Helvetiis  per  indicium  enuntiata.  Mori- 
bus  suis  Orgetorigem  ex  vinclls  causam  dicere  coege- 
runt.  Damnatum  pcenam  sequi  oportebat,  ut  igni 
cremaretur.  Die  constituta  causae  dictionis,  Orgetorix 
ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam,  ad  hominum  milia 
decem,  undique  coegit,  et  omnes  clientes  obaeratosque 
suos,  quorum  magnum  numerum  habeBat,  eodem  con- 
duxit. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  res,  thing,  fact,  conspiracy;  (a)  nom.  sing,  fora.,  formed  by 
the  addition  of  -B  to  the  stein  re-  ;  cf.  re-bus  XVIII. ,  re-s  XIX.,  and 
XVIII.   Obs.  1.      (b)   Note   the   position   of  ea,  and    cf.  his   rebus 
XVIII.,  eas  res  XIX.,  eo  itinere  XX.,  hac  oratione  XXIII.      Wliat 
is  the  position  of  the  demonstrative  adj.  in  all  these  cases  ?     Is  this 
always  the  position  of  the  adj.?    see  Text. 

2.  coegerunt ;    see  Arocabulary  for  appropriate  meaning  :    (a)  pf. 
ind.  act.  3d  plur. ;  cf.  constituerunt  XVIII. ;   (5)  mSribus,  the  first 
word  in  the  sentence,  is  best  considered  an  abl.  of  cause;   cf.  XVI.  N. 
2   (b) ;    (c)    here    followed    by   the    accus.    (Orgetorigem)    and    inf. 
(dicere),  though  usually  verbs  of  urging  take  ut  with  the  subjv. ;  cf. 
occuparet  XX.  N.  5  (b). 

3  oportebat,  it  was  necessary ;  (a)  this  verb  is  used  only  in  3d 
sing,  and  cannot  have  the  name  of  a  person  as  its  snbj.,  i.  e.  it  is  imper- 
sonal ;  (5)  its  subj.  is  the  clause  damnatum  pcenam  sequi,  pcenam 
being  the  subj.  of  sequi ;  cf.  XX.  N.  5  (b),  XXII.  N.  3  (b)  ;  (c)  dam- 
natum, with  Orgetorigem  understood,  is  the  obj.  of  sequi.  Why 
could  not  damnatum  agree  with  poenam?  (r/)  ut  igni  cremaretur  is 
a  noun  in  apposition  with  pcenam  ;  in  what  case  then  ?  (e)  sequi  is,  in 
form,  a  pres.  inf.  pass,  of  the  3d  con  jug. ;  cf.  potiri,  4th  conjng.,  XXIII. 


100  INDUCTIVE   LATIN  METHOD. 

4.  coegit  :  (a)  note  "that  in  the  clause  of  which  this  is  the  princi- 
pal verb   the  words  are  arranged   i'1   g''°llps,  thus  :    die-constituta- 
causae-dictioiiis,     omiiem-suam-familiam,     ad-hominum-milia-de- 
cem  ;   (b)  for  die,  cf.  tempore  XX.I.  ;   the  nom.  sing,  is  dies,  cf.  res 
1;   (c)  constitute  here  limits  die  as  a  simple  attributive  adj.,  on  the 
appointed  day ;   (d)  dictionis  is   a  gen.   depending  on  die,   while 
causae  depends  on  dictionis;   stem?   cf.  profectionem,  legationem 
XIX.,    oratione    XXIII.;     (e)   for  hominum  milia,  cf.   milia  pas- 
suum  XVII.     What  kind  of  a  gen.  is  passuum?  see  VI.  N.  3  (d). 

5.  conduxit  :   (a)  pf.  ind.  act.  3d  sing.  3d  conjug. ;    (b)  pres.  inf. 
act.  conduce're  (cf.  dicgre  above),  pres.  stem   ducS-;    (V)  pf.  stem 
may  be  found  by  cutting  off  -it  in  pf.  ind.  act.  3d  sing,  (thus,  condux- 
it),  or  by  adding  -B  to  the  pres.  stem  less  characteristic  e,  thus,  dues  = 
dux;    cf.  XVIII.  N.  2,  Obs.  2;    (d)  the  supine  stem  may  be  found 
by  cutting  off  the   ending  of  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  or   supine  (thus, 
induct-us  XIII.),  or  by  adding  -t  to  the  pres.  stem  less  e  ;    (e)  cf. 
face -re  XVIII.,  fee -it  XIII.,  fact-u  XXII.,  and  note  that  the  pf. 
stem  is,  in  this  word,  formed  in  a  different  way. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Every  form  of  the  verb  must  have  as  its  base  some  one  of  the 
three  stems,  —  pres.,  pf.,  or  supine. 

2.  In  any  conjug.,  the  pres.  stem  may  be  found  by  cutting  off  -re 
of  the  pres.  inf.  act,  the  pf.  stein  by  cutting  off  -it  of  the  pf.  ind.  act. 
3d  sing.,  and  the  supine  stem  by  cutting  off  -us  of  the  nom.  sing, 
rnasc.  in  pf.  pass,  partic. 

3.  The  stems  of  the  3d  conjng.   must  in  many   cases  be  memo- 
rized.    It  is  well,  however,  to  remember  that  the  pf.  and  supine  stems 
may  often  be  found  by  one  of  two  methods  :    (a)  by  adding  to  the 
pres.  stem  less  e,  -s  for  the  pf.  stem  and  -t  for  the  supine  stem,  or  ( b) 
by  adding  -t  as  before  for  the  supine  stem  and  by  changing  the  first 
vowel  of  the  pres.  stem,  and  dropping  the  characteristic  vowel,  for  the 
pf.  stem  ;  *  with  the  last  method,  cf.  Eng.  fall,  fell,  fallen. 

1  It  is  not  asserted  here  that  the  pf.  stem  is  formed  from  the  pres.  stem.     The 
statement  simply  suggests  to  the  beginner  an  easy  and  practical  method  of  finding 


LESSON   XXIV.  101 

4.  In  the  3d  conjug.  the  pres.  inf.  pass,  ends  in  -I,  before  which  -e 
of  the  pres.  stem  is  lost. 

5.  In  the   Lat.   as  in   the   Eng.  sentence,  words  are  arranged  in 
groups,   and  should    be   closely   connected  in  thought.     When   read 
aloud,  the  words  in  the  same  group  should  be  pronounced  together, 
almost   like   one   compound   word,    thus,    die-constituta-causee  dic- 
tioiiis,  on-the-day-appointed-for-pleading-the-case. 

6.  The  demonstrative  adj.  precedes  its  noun;  other  adj.  very  often 
follow  their  nouns.1 

4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Impersonal  verbs     .  A.  &  G.  145, 146,  d.  H.  298. 

2.  Substantive  clauses    A.  &  G.  329,  29,  c.      H.  540,  II.  III.,  42,  \. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  cogere   (compounded  of  con,  together,   and    agere,   to  drire, 
lead),  coegit  pf.  ind.  act.,  coactus'2  pf.  pass,  partic.,  to  drive  together, 
to  compel. 

2.  conducere,  conduxit  pf.  ind.  act.,  conductus  pf.  pass,  partic., 
to  bring  together,  to  hire. 

3.  cremare,  to  burn. 

4.  damnare,  to  condemn. 

5.  decem,  indec.  numeral,  ten. 

6.  dictionis  (from  dicere),  a  saying ,  pleading . 

1 .    dies  (stem  die-),  masc.,  sometimes  fern.,  day,  time. 

8.  enuntiare,  to  say  out  or  openly,  make  known. 

9.  eodem,  adv.,  to  the  same  place. 

the  pf.  stem  when  the  pres.  stem  is  known.  The  introduction  of  the  verb  stem,  on 
which  no  form  of  the  verb  is  directly  based,  would  be  confusing  and  unnecessary  at 
this  point. 

1  Some  may  expect  the  statement  here  that  the  adj.  commonly  follows  its  noun. 
In  view  of  the  fact,  however,  that  in  the  first  four  chapters  of  Csesar  the  attributive 
adj.  is  used  forty-one  times  before  its  noun  and  only  nineteen  times  after,  the  state- 
ment would  be  out  of  place  here. 

'2  For  the  change  of  coagtus  to  coactus,  see  A.  &  G.  11, /  1 ;   II.  33,  1. 


102  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

10.  familia,  a  body  of  slaves,  household,  retinue. 

11.  indicium,  information. 

12.  judicium,  a  judgment,  a  trial,  a  court  of  justice. 

13.  nioribus,  abl.  plur.  masc.,  customs,  manners,  character. 

14.  obseratus,    obaerati  gen.,   one   bound  to   service  for  debt,   a 
debtor. 

15.  oportet,  impers.  verb,  it  is  necessary,  it  behooves. 

16.  pcena,  punishment,  penalty. 

17.  sequi,  pres.  inf.  of  dep.  verb,  to  follow ;    pf.   partic.  secutus, 
having  followed. 

18.  vinculum  or  vinclum,  that  which  binds,  hence,  a  rope,  chain, 
fetter. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Enuntiant  Orgetorigem  conjuration  em  facere.     (b)  Ex  vin- 
clls  euin  causain  dlcere  oportet.     (r)  Omnis  ejns  familia  ad  judicium 
conducebatur.      (d)    Moribus    Helvetiorum    damnatos    igni   cremari 
oportebat.      (e)   Orgetorix,  quod  nobilissimus  erat  et  ditissimus,  mag- 
num clientium  immerum  habebat. 

2.  (a)   Arbitratur    se   liominum   quam   maximum  numerum    con- 
ducturum  esse.       b)  Flebat  ut  illo  anno  frater  Divitiaci  principatum 
obtineret.      (c)  Fines  sunt  in   multas  partcs  divisi.      (d)  Dumnorix 
Haeduus  cui  Orgetorix  filiam  in  matrimonium  dat,  reguum  occupare 
non  potest. 

3.  (a)   There  was  no  doubt  that  Orgetorix  could  bring  together 
ten  thousand  men.      (b)   A  great  part  of  the  clients  and  debtors  of 
Orgetorix  were  many  miles  distant  from  court,      (c)  At  the  appointed 
time  the  forces  of  these  men  try  the  same  thing,      (d)  They  fix  the 
day  for  the  pleading  of  the  case. 

4.  (a)  They  hope  that  they  can  obtain  the  power  of  their  states  by 
means   of  their   army,      (b)   He   himself,    when    that  fact  was  made 
known  (that  thing  having  been  announced),  was  about  to  bring  together 
ten  thousand  soldiers,     (c)   Considering  (in  proportion  to)  his  high 
birth,  Orgetorix  thinks  that  his  power  (potentia)  is  not  great,    (d)  The 
Gauls  whom  he  persuaded  to  make  a  conspiracy  were  very  high-born. 


LESSON   XXV.  103 


7.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  Two  meanings  of  cogere.  2.  The  pf.  stem  in  2d  and  3d  con- 
jug.  3.  The  supine  stein  in  1st  and  3d  conjug.  4.  The  ending 
-t,  two  uses.  5.  Impers.  verbs.  6.  Clauses  as  nouns  in  Eng.  and 
in  Lat.  7.  The  expressions  for  ten  thousand  men,  ten  thousand, 
paces.  8.  Proper  pauses  in  reading  a  Lat.  sentence. 


LESSON    XXV. 
1.    TEXT. 

Per  eos,  ne  causam  diceret,  se  eripuit.  Cum  civitas 
ob  earn  rem  incitata  armis  jus  suum  exsequi  conaretur, 
multitudinemque  hominum  ex  agrls  magistratus  coge- 
rent,  Orgetorix  mortuus  est ;  neque  abest  suspitio,  ut 
Helvetii  arbitrantur,  quin  ipse  sibi  mortem  consciverit. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  ne  .  .  .  diceret,  that  he  might  not  plead :   (a)  subjv.  of  purpose, 
expressing  purpose  of  eripuit;   (b)  ne  introduces  a  clause  of  negative 
purpose  ;  cf.  positive  purpose  XV I II.  N.  13  (d)  ;   (c)  tense  and  analysis 
of  form  ? 

2.  jus,  the  law:   (a)   gen.  juris  ;  so  tempore  XXT.  is  from  nom. 
sing,  tempus,  and  moribus  XXIV.  is  from  nom.  sing,  mos  ;    (b}  neut. 
gender,  like  tempore  ;    (c)  in  all  of  tlies:;  words  s  of  the  stem  is  changed 
to  r  when  it  stands  between  two  vowels  ;   cf.  erat  for  es-at. 

3.  magistratus,  the  magistrates:  (Y/)  nom.  plur.  masc.  of  a  -u  stem, 
for  full  form  magistratu  es  ;   cf.  cultu  for  cultu-e  VI. ;    (b)  the  u  is 
long  here  because  it  is  a  contract  of  u  and  e  ;  in  the  nom.  sing.,  which 
is  formed  by  adding  -B  to  the  stem,  the  u  is  short. 


104  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

4.  mortuus  est,  he  died  or  is  dead :  (a)  in  form  a  pf.  ind.  pass. ; 
(b)  formed  by  the  union  of  the  pf.  pass,  parfcic.  and  the  pres.  ind.  of 
the  verb  esse ;  cf.  appellatus  erat  XX.  N.  4  (b).     (c)  Why  is  it  here 
translated  like  an  act.  ? 

5.  suspitio,  suspicion:  (a)  nom.  sing.  fern.  ;  (b]  stem  suspition- ; 
cf.  septentriones  X.,  conjurationem  Xlii.,  oratione  XXI II.,   dic- 
tionis    XXIV. ;     (c)    cf.    fortitudiiiis,    longitudinem,    latitudinem 
XVII.,  multitudinem,  above,  which  weaken  the  ending  -on  of  stem  to 
-in  before  an  additional  syllable,  but  form  nom.  in  -o,  thus,  multitude. 
What  likeness  of  form  have  the  four  words  just  mentioned?   (d)  What 
seems  to  be  the  force  of  the  nom.  sing,  ending  -tio  ?  what  of  the  end- 
ing -tudo  ? 

6.  arbitrantur  :    (0)  ind.  mode,  introduced  by  ut,  which  here  means 
as.     (b)  What  mode  follows  ut  when  it  means  that,  so  that,  or  in  order 
that? 

7.  mortem  :   (a)  nom.  sing,  mors  ;   cf.  pars  X.  N.  2,  oriens,  mons; 
(Z»)  all  the  above  words  are,  strictly  speaking,  -i  stems,  but  drop  the  -i 
as  a  rule  in  the  sing.,  and  become  practically  dental  stems. 

8.  consciverit .   (a)  pf.  subjv.  act.,  of  the  4th  conjug.  in  form  ;  (b) 
introduced  by  quin  ;  cf.  non  esse  dubium  quin  .  .  .  possent  XXI I., 
and  note  that  in  both  cases  quin  is  preceded  by  a  negative. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  so  called  4th  decl.  is  composed  of  -u  stems,  which  have  in 
general  the  suffixes  of  the  3d  decl.,  but  in  several  cases  contract  these 
suffixes  with  -u  of  the  stem.1 

2.  All  mute  stems  (see  Gram.  Less.),  and  masc.  and  fern,  -i  stems, 
-u  stems  and  -e  stems,  and  almost  all  masc.  stems  of  the  2d  decl., 
form  the  nom.  sing,  by  adding  -s  to  the  stem. 

3.  In  nouns,  the  nom.  ending  -tio  names  the  action ;  the  endings 
-tas  and  -tudo,  the  quality. 

4.  The  conj.  ut  when  followed  by  the  ind.  means  as  or  when;  fol- 
lowed by  the  subjv.,  that,  so  that,  in  order  that. 

1  See  Iloby,  300. 


LESSON   XXV. 


105 


4.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  The  mutes    .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  3. 

2.  Change  of  s  to  r    .      .  A.  &  G.  11,  a. 

3.  Quantity  of  contracts  .  A.  &  G.  18,  c. 

4.  The  4th  decl.   .     .     .  A.  &  G.  68,  manus 

and  lacus,  and 
both  notes  in  con- 
nection. 

5.  The  3d  decl. ;  muse,  in 

-os,  and  neut.  with 

gen.in-urisand-oria  A.  &  G.  48,  d;  49 
corpus,  and  50. 

6.  The   3d    decl.;     sum- 

mary of  -i  stems 


7.  The   3d   decl.;  nouns 

with  nom.  in  -o     . 

8.  Negative  purpose  . 


A.  &G.51;  53,a,b, 
54,  1. 

A.   &  G.  48,  a,  b ; 

leo  and  virgo. 
A.  &  G.  317. 


H.  3, .II.  5. 
H.  31,  1. 

H.  23  and  2;  576,  I. 
H.  116,  fructus  and 

foot-note  4. 


H.  61,  flos,  jus,  and 
corpus. 

II.  65,  1,  2,  3. 


H.    60,    leo,    virgo, 

andl.l),2),3),4. 
H.  497,  II. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  arma,  nom.  plur.  neut.,  armor,  arms. 

2.  consciscere,  cSnscivit  pf.  hid.  act.,  conscitus  pf.  pass,  partic., 

to  decree,  determine. 

3.  eripere,  eripuit  pf.  hid.  act.,  ereptus,  pf.  pass,  partic.,  to  snatch 

away. 

4.  exsequi,  to  follow  out,  follow  up,  enforce. 

5.  incitare,  to  urge  on,  incite. 

6.  jus,  neut.,  juris  gen.,  right,  law,  justice  ;  cf.  judicium  XX  TV. 

7.  magistrates,  magistrates  gen.,  a  civil  office,  a  civil  officer, 

magistrate. 

8.  mori,  rarely  moriri,  mortuus  pf.  partic.,  to  die. 

9.  mors,  fern.,  death. 

10.  ne,  corij.,  that  .  .  .  not,  not  to,  lest ;  after  words  of  fearing,  that. 

11.  neque  or  nee,  adv.  and  conj.,  and  not;  neque  .  .  .  neque, 

neither  .  .  .  nor. 


106  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

12.  ob,  prep,  with  accus.,  on  account  of;  in  composition,  in  ike 

way  of,  against. 

13.  suspitio  or  suspicio,  fern.,  suspitionis  gen.,  suspicion. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Magistratus  conjuratione  incitati  jus  civitatis  exsequi  conati 
suut.     (b)  Non   (lul)iuni  est  qum  Orgetorix   multitudinem   hominum 
coegerit.     (c)  Orgetorix  sibi  inortein  conscivit,  ne  civitas  jus  suum  ex- 
sequeretnr.      (d)  Dictum  est  civitatem  incitatam  ob  conata  nobilitatis 
rnultitudinem  hominum  cogere.     (e)  Helvetii  arbitral!  sunt  Orgetori- 
gem  incitatum  ob  cam  rein  sibi  mortem  conscisccre. 

2.  (a)   Orgetorix,    quern    esse   nobilem   dictum    est,   mortuus   est. 

(b)  Is,  quod  plebi  maxime  acceptus  erat,  maximam  conjurationem  fecit, 
(e)  Eoruin  exercitus  omnibus  exereitibus  praestabat.      (d)  Persuadet 
Gallo  cujus  pater  ft  seuatu  amicus  appcllatus  est. 

3.  (a)  A  multitude  of  men  from  the  fields  was  being  collected  by  the 
magistrates,      (b)  The  Helvetii  think  that  suspicion  is  not  wanting. 

(c)  On  account  of  the  death  of  Orgetorix,  the  nobility  did  not  try  to 
seize  the  supreme  power  of  Gaul,      (d)   Brave  men,  aroused  by  the 
attempt  of  the  nobility,  are  about  to  enforce  the  law  by  arms. 

4.  (a)  That  state  extended  a  hundred  miles  in  length,     (b)  Orget- 
orix determined  to  bring  together  the  largest  possible  number  of  men. 
(c)  The  magistrates  persuaded  the  common  people  that  it  was  fitting 
for  Orgetorix  to  plead  his  cause,      (d)  It  is  not  very  easy  to  compel 
the  richest  man  of  the  state  to  plead  his  cause. 

7.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  The  sign  of  the  pf.  subjv.  2.  The  formation  of  the  pf.  ind.  pass. ; 
the  plpf.  ind.  pass.  3.  Comparison  of  the  declension  of  magistratus 
and  Ignis.  4.  Liquid  stems.  5.  Difference  in  case  of  the  ending  -o 
and  in  quantity  of  the  ending  -o1  in  the  2d  and  3d  decl.  6.  Two  mean- 
ings of  ut.  7.  Peculiarity  of  decl.  in  monosyllables  with  nom.  sing, 
ending  -s  preceded  by  a  consonant.  8.  Eng.  derivative  endings  with 
the  same  meanings  as  -tio,  -tas,  -tudo. 

1  It  has  been  thought  best  to  mark  as  long  only  those  vowels  which  are  known 
to  b:>  long  invariably.  Final  O  in  the  3d  dec!,  is  usually  long. 


LESSON   XXVI.  107 

LESSON   XXVI. 

REVIEW  of   LESSONS   XIII.  to   XXV.  inclusive. 

The  student  who  thoroughly  masters  the  first  twenty-six  lessons  of  this  book 
may  congratulate  himself  upon  having  learned  the  most  difficult  things  about  the 
forms  of  the  language.  There  is  nothing  else  in  the  forms  of  the  language  so 
hard  as  the  3d  decl.,  the  3d  conjug.,  and  the  decl.  of  pron.,  and  nothing  more 
necessary  in  using  the  language  than  a  thorough  knowledge  of  these  three  things. 
Remember  that  you  will  pay  dearly  for  any  neglect  in  learning  the  3d  decl.,  the 
3d  conjug.,  and  the  decl.  of  prou.  Read  the  note  at  the  head  of  Lesson  XII. 

1.   TEXT.  — CESAR'S   "GALLIC   WAR,"   BK.  I.,  CHAP    2,  3,  4. 

1,  2,  3.  Follow  implicitly  the  directions  given  in  XI I.  under 
"Text,"  1,  2,  and  3. 

4.  Write  out  a  grammatical  analysis  of  the  material  of  the  text 
of  Chap.  2,  3,  and  4,  under  the  following  heads  :  (1)  noun  forms  and 
adj.  forms,  classifying   separately  in   both  sing,  and   plur.  («)  norn. 
forms,  (&)  gen.  forms,  (c)  dat.  forms,  (c?)  accus.  forms,  (e)  abl.  forms ; 
(2)  verb  forms,  classifying  according  to  the  verb  diagram  in  "  Word 
Review  "  below,  and  separating  by  hyphens  the  steins,  tense  signs, 
and  pers.  endings. 

5.  The  same  as  in  XCL 

6.  Classify  by  genders  the  3d  decl.  nouns  given  under  the  "Word 
Review,"  and,  using  the  last  two  letters  of  the  nom.  sing.,  make  a 
list  of  the  masc.,  fern.,  and  neut.  endings  of  the  3d  decl.  which  have 
been  used  thus  far. 

2.    GRAMMAR   LESSON- 

1.  Characteristics  of  decl.     .  A.  &  G.  32.  H.  47. 

2.  The  2d  or  o  decl. ;  nouns 

in  -us A.  &  G.  38,  ser-  H.  51,  servus,  also 

vus,    also    N.        2,  1),  2),  3). 
near  bottom  of 
p.  16. 


108  INDUCTIVE   LATIN  METHOD. 

3.  Adj.  of  1st  and  2d  decl.  .  A.&G.81,bon-  II.    143,    bon-us, 

us,  -a,  -um.  -a,  -um. 

4.  The  mutes A.  &  G.  3.  H.  3,  IL  5. 

5.  Change  of  s  tor     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  11,  a.  H.  31,  ]. 

6.  Quantity  of  contracts  .     .  A.  &  G.  18,  c.  H.  23  and  2  ;  576, 

I. 

7.  The  3d  dec!.;  mute  stems1  A.  &  G.   44-47  H.  55-59  inclusive. 

inclusive. 

8.  The  3d  dec!.;  liquid  stems 

and  stems  in  -a  .     .     .  A.  &  G.   48-50  H.    60,    61,    154, 
inclusive,    86,       trlsti-or,  -us. 
meli-or,  -us. 

9.  The  3d  decl.;  -i  steins     .  A.  &  G.  51-55  II.  62-65  inclusive, 

inclusive,  84.         154,  trist-is,  -e. 

10.  The   3d  dec].;    rules   for 

gender A.   &  G.  65,   a,  II.  99,  100,   1,  3, 

b,  c.  105,107,1,110, 

1,  111,  115,  2. 

11.  The  4th  decl A.  &  G.  68,  ma-       H.  116,  fructus 

nus  and  lacus,       and  foot-note  4. 

and  both  N.  in 

connection. 

12.  Dec],  of  is,  ille,  ipse,  and 

qui A.  &G.  101, 103.   H.    186,    III.   IV. 

V.,  187. 

13.  The  reflexive;    form   and 

use A.  &   G.  98,  c,  H.  184,  448,  449. 

196,  197. 

14.  The  use  of  the  demonstra- 

tive as  pers.  pron.   or 

adj A.  &  G.  195.         H.  438,  1. 

15.  Comparison    of   adj.    and 

adv A.   &   G.  81,   b,  H.  162,  306. 

89,  92. 

1  In  this  and  the  two  following  references,  the  pupil  should  learn  the  paradigms 
and  enough  of  the  fine  print  beneath  them  to  enable  him  to  give  the  stem  of  each 
noun  or  adj.,  and  the  method  of  forming  the  nom.  from  the  stem. 


LESSON  XXVI.  100 

16.  Force  of  per  in  composi- 

_tion A.  86  G.  93,  d.      II.  170,  I. 

17.  A  or  ab  and  ex     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  153.         II.  434,  I. 

18.  Altera  and  alia     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  203,  a,   H.  459. 

b. 

19.  Position   of  monosyllabic 

prep A.  &  G.  345,  a.    H.  565,  3. 

20.  Nouns  in  -tas ;  formation 

and  meaning       .     .     .  A.  &  G.  163,  e.     H.  325. 

21.  The  characteristics  of  the 

four  conjug A.  &  G.  122  and  H.  201. 

a. 

22.  The  impf.  tense      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  115,  a,  H.  468. 

2,6. 

23.  The    nature    and    use    of 

partic A.    &   G.   25,  e,   II.    200,    IV.    and 

289,  186.  foot-note  ;     438 

and   1. 

24.  The  gerundive  ;  form  and 

meaning A.  &  G.  113,  d.    H.  248,  543. 

25.  The   gerund,  supine,  and 

inf. ;  form  and  use  .     .  A.  &  G.  112,  d,  II.  200,  I.  II.  III., 

114,  a,  b.  538   547. 

23.    The  supine  stem     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  125.  H.  256  and  1. 

27.  Composition     of     posse, 

and  form  in  pres.  ind. 
3d  sing,  and  plur.,  and 

in  pres.  partic.    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  120,  b.    H.  290,  II.  and  N. 

1,  2. 

28.  Impersonal  verbs    ...   A.    &     G.    145,   H.  298. 

146,  d. 

29.  The  pretl.  noun  or  adj.     .  A.    &    G.    183,  H.  362,  363. 

184,  185. 

30.  Quam  with  sup.  degree   .   A.  &  G.  93,  b.       H.  170,  2. 

31.  Words  used  with  partitive 

gen A.  &  G.  216,  a, 

1,  2,  3,  4.          H.  397,  1,  2,  3,  4. 


110  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

3.2.    The  dat.  with  compound 

verbs A.  &  G.  228.  H.  386  and  1. 

33.  The  dat.  with  adj.  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  234.  H.  391. 

34.  Subj.  of  the  inf.      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  240,  /.  H.  523,  I. 

35.  Accus.  of  time  and  space  A.  &  G.  255,  H.  379. 

257. 

36.  Prep,  with  the  abl..     .     .  A.  &  G.  152,  b,   H.  434,  435. 

c. 

37.  The  abl.  of  cause    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  245.         H.  413,  416. 

38.  The  abl.  of  agent    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  246.         H.  415,  I. 

39.  The   abl.   and    gen.    with 

potiri A.  &  G.  249  and   II.  421,  L,  410,  V. 

a.  3. 

40.  The  abl.  of  time      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  256.         H.  429. 

41.  The  abl.  absolute    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  255  and  H.  431,  and  1,  2, 

a;  also  N.  4. 

42.  The  complementary  inf.    .  A.  &  G.  271.         H.  533. 

43.  The    inf.    after    verbs    of 

saying  and  thinking     .  A.  &  G.,  Read  N.  H.  535,  L,  1,  2,  3, 
on     p.     247,       522. 
24  8;  335,  read 
remark  ;  336. 

44.  Substantive  clauses      .     .   A.  &  G.  329,  29,  II.    540,    II.    III., 

c.  42,  N. 

45.  Purpose  clauses,  positive, 

negative,  and  object      .A.     &     G.    317,   H.    497    and    II., 
331  and  a.  498  and  II. 


3.    'WORD    REVIEW. 

Classified  alphabetical  list  of  all  the  new  words  occurring  in  Chap.   1,  2,  3,  of 
Caesar's  "  Gallic  War." 

1.    VERBS. 

The  form  given  is  the  pres.  inf.  act.  (pass,  in  form,  of  course,  in  dep.  verbs). 
accipere  adficere  bellare  cogere 

adducere  arbitral!  coemere  comparare 


LESSON   XXVI. 


Ill 


coriarf 

dan; 

incitare 

persuadere 

conciliate 

deligere 

inducere 

posse 

conducere 

ducere 

inferre 

potiri 

conficere 

enuntiare 

moil 

prae  stare 

confirmare 

eripere 

occupare 

pro  bare 

consciscere 

exlre 

oportere 

proficiscl 

constituere 

exsequi 

patere 

sequi 

cremare 

facere 

perficere 

sperare 

damnare 

habere 

permovere 

•  suscipere 

2.    NOUNS  HAVING  -A  STEMS. 

amlcitia 

familia           fllia 

gloria 

Jura           pcena 

3.    -0 

STEMS. 

Nouns. 

agrura,   accus. 

sing,     fill  us 

locus 

masc. 

Hseduus 

matrimonium 

annus 

imperium 

obseratus 

arma,      nom. 

plur.     indicium 

populus 

neut. 

judicium 

Rhenus 

bienriium 

juraentum 

Rhodanus 

conatum 

Lemannus 

vincalura  (vinclum) 

AJj.  (having  also 

fern,  stems 

in  -a). 

alius 

ditissimus, 

sup. 

Helvetius 

alter!,     nom. 

plur.     dubius 

latus 

masc. 

duceuti,   nom.  plur. 

rnaximus 

alt  us 

masc. 

multus  (plurimus) 

angustus 

fmitimus 

totus 

cupidus 

firm  us 

4.    THIRD  DECL. 
Nouns. 

auctoritas,  fern.  civitas,  fern. 

Catamantalcedes,  masc.  bij  mean-     conjuratio,  fern. 

ing  1  consul,  masc.  by  meaning 

1  Remember  that  names  of  males  are  masc.,  and  names  of  females  fern.,  without 
regard  to  endings. 


112  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

cupiditas,  fern.  mllle,  neut. 

dictio,  fern.  mons,  masc.  by  exception 

dolor,  muse.  i\\oYS,fem. 

Dumnorix.  masc.  by  meaning  inos,  muse. 

fortitiido,  fern.  multitude,  fern. 

frater,  masc.  by  meaning  nobilitas,jfem. 

homo,  \io\m\\isgen.,  sing.,  masc.  oratio,  fern. 

by  meaning  Orgetorix,  masc.  by  meaning 

itinere,  abl.  sing.,  neut.  by  excep-  pater,  masc.  by  meaning 

tion  pfix,  fern. 

jus,  juris  gen.,  sing.  neut.  plc-bs,  y«w. 

jusjurandum,  neut.  profectio,  fern. 

latitude,  yew.  suspltio,  fern. 

legatio,  fern.  tempus,  temporis  gen.,  sing,  neut 
longitude,  Jem. 

Adj. 
facil-is,  -e  potGns,  masc.,  fern.,  and  neut. 

5.  -U  STEMS. 

exercitus      lacus      magistratus      passus      piincipatus      senatus 

6.  -E  STEMS. 

dies  fides  res 

7.    INDECL.  NUMERAL  ADJ. 
centum  decem  octoginta  quadraginta 

8.  PKON. 

idem,  nom.  sing.  neut.  ille,  nom.  sing.  masc. 

9.  PHEP. 

ante  opud  ex  (e)  ob  pro 

10.  ADV. 

eodem  item  maxime  non  satis 

facile  late  minus,  comp.  quam  undique 

11.    CONJ. 
ac  (for  atqne)          antem         Tie         neque         quin         ut 


LESSON   XXVI. 


113 


« 

CO 

C3 

X 

=0 

._  ,-ij 

T3 

g 

o 

P- 

a 

H 

>_£  "¥ 

7 

"V 

en 

C5 

o  'C 

P-i  O 

O 

0 

i 

X 

^_ 

PL, 

0 

+f 

••: 

rS 

M 

V. 

.; 

S 

en 

z-t 

Tj 

ia 

o 

•  a 

o 

•  ^ 

C 

1 

C3 

tS 

'S 

3 

C3 
g 

~  to"  "^ 

. 

nV  S  3 

=J 

^^  5 

If, 
0 

1 

3    1  rf      CO      CO 

2 

•      co 

?      CO 

s 

^ 

'3     0    ~0    tj 

« 

/, 

•g 

^cj 

•4 

1  d   1  d     p     :5 

1^ 

1^ 

r^ 

.^    ^™* 

S 

T3  -T3  T3  -T3 

-73 

T3 

^3 

^  P! 

a 

-S  a) 

0 

CO 

CO 

o 

-t-3          -*J 

CO 

CO 

0  ^ 

Q 

5 

rt   ^    ;i 

a 

S 

U     i. 

— 

"fc^ 

TC 

i 

-^    ^         '        £, 

•^ 

id 

& 

'f^ 

a 

p 

c 

.^    ICU       '        I 

5 

O 
^ 

1 

K 
0 

^  ^ 

(£ 
(J 

fl 

bi 

'« 
u 

a 

13 

if 

C 

3 

-5 

-u  '-2 

II 

3 

6 

i 

K 

*-<    A 

^  lo 

> 

v 
'g 

H 

jH 

BL> 

O 

! 

i  ° 

(JONJUGAT 

INDICATI 

|| 

SUBJUNC'l 

_o 

:" 
^; 

-O 

-5 

r^ 

c/T 

c 

55 

C 

SUPINES, 

CO  ti. 
cu    O 

"j|  ^    rt 

- 

p 

- 

"- 

3J    l(U     3      3 

^0  ^  ^  ^2 

^;  J5  J5  _s 

_^ 

a 
1 

5    ^ 

111 

i^ 

CO 

^  CO 

- 

Ilo    ?    ? 

a 

S 

S  "^ 

co   a 

O 

c^ 

irf     1  '"*     rC&     I'"* 

rt 

Jj 

irt    r; 

""     ^3 

H 

<: 

S  £  S  £ 

a    cu    CD    cu 

S 

S" 

1 

1    1 

5e^ 

23 

O     o    O     i; 

o 

a 

0      0 

"^     CO 

- 

a 

^  1 

5 

CO 

£  jO 

5 

eo 

^  § 

50 

^r 

ci 

a 

a  i5 

,| 

-5 

r 

a    S 

• 

'1 

*-*  ^ 

i 

7  _/> 

^J, 

£" 

4^ 

*5        (» 

ci  id 

irt 

ed 

«    3 

P 

3   3 

S 

-E 

3 

lo 

V)      U 

u 

a    w 

~ 

^   o3  • 

IM 

!^ 

|3 

•  .     "^ 

hi  ° 

114  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


4.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Write  the  gen.  sing,  and  gen.  plur.  of  all  the  3d  decl.  nouns 
in  the  "  Word  Review."     (b)  Give  the  gender  and  write  the  gen.  sing, 
and  gen.  plur.  of  the  following  noni.  sing.  :  ars,  avis,  ovile,  egestas, 
munitio,  similitude,  mater,     (c)  Write  the  noni.   sing,  of  the  fol- 
lowing stems,  and  explain  its  formation  in  each  case  :    nee-,  palud-, 
pont-,  praetor-,  ortu-,  fulmin-,  turpitudin-,  acie-. 

2.  (Oil  Chap.  2.)     («)  The  Helvetii,  influenced  by  Orgetorix,  deter- 
mined  to  go  out  of  their  own   territory  into  the  territory   of  their 
neighbors,     (b)  Orgetorix  easily  persuaded  the  Helvetii,  since  he  was 
the  highest-born  and  richest  among  them,     (c)  The  province  which 
the  Romans  possessed  was  next  to  Helvetia,      (d)  For  this  reason  the 
Helvetii  were  wandering  very  widely,  and  were  often  able  to  wage  war 
upon  the  rest  of  the  Gauls,     (e)  Mount  Jura,  by  which  the  Sequani 
were    separated    from    the    Helvetii,   is  very   high.     (/)   High-born 
(men)  are  obtaining  that  part  of  Gaul  which   is  hemmed  in  by  the 
mountains,     (g)  The  Helvetii  do  not  think  that  Orgetorix  will  make 
(is  about  to  make)  a  conspiracy. 

3.  (On  ('hap.  3.)     (a)   Orgetorix,  having  influenced  the  common 
people  (the  common  people  having  been  influenced),  tried  to  persuade 
those  who  held  the  power  in  the  neighboring  states.     (II)  The  Hel- 
vetii made  their  plantings  as  large  as  possible  so  that  they  might  have 
a  supply  of  grain,      (c)  The  men  whose  fathers  had  held  the  kingly 
power  thought  that  it  was  easy  to  seize  it  for  themselves,     (d)  These 
(men)  were  not  able  to  seize  the  kingly  power  which  had  often  been 
seized  in  Gaul,     (e)  Orgetorix  gives  a  promise  to  Dmnnorix  and  hopes 
that  he  himself  will  accomplish  his  attempts.     (/)  The  Helvetii  pre- 
pare  all  those   things   which'  pertain  to  accomplishing  their  under- 
takings,     (g)  Peace  and  friendship  were  established  by  the  Helvetii, 
in   order  that  they  might  have  friends  on   their  march.      (Ji)  They 
think  that  by   seizing   the   kingly   power  (the   kingly  power   having 
been  seized)   they  can  be  more  powerful. 

4.  (On  Chap.  4.)     (a)  The  man  who  was  condemned  pleaded  his 
own  cause,     (b)  All  the  debtors  to  whom  Orgetorix  gives  arms  are 
trying  to  rescue  him.     (c)  Through  many  men  the  magistrates  were 
following  up  Orgetorix,  that  he  might  not  wage  war  upon  the  state. 


LESSON   XXVII.  115 

LESSON    XXVII. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G-.  I.  5,1  through  subeunda  essent. 

2.    NOTES.2 

1.  nihilo  :  -the  abl.  sing,  in  connection  with  the  comp.  minus  in- 
dicates how  much  less,  and  may  be  literally  translated,  less  by  nothing, 
freely  translated,  nevertheless. 

2.  exeant :    (a)  pres.  subjv.  act.  of  verb  exire  ;    cf.  impf.  subjv. 
act.  exlrent  XIII.;    (b)   denotes  purpose;    (c)   the    clause  ut  .  . 
exeant  is  in  apposition  with  id;  cf.  XXIV.  N.  3  (d). 

3.  praeterquam :   (a)  a  compound  word  made  up  of  praeter,  fur- 
ther, and  quam,  than  ;    (b)  id  and   erat  are  understood  after  it,  and 
the  full  sense  is  :    they  burned  all  the  grain  farther  than  (that  was) 
which,  etc. 

4.  secum  :    (a)  cum  appended  as   in  quibuscum  ;   cf.  VIII.  N.  4 
(b) ;    (b)  meaning  of  se?  why? 

5.  portaturi  :    (a)  exact  literal  meaning?   (b)  ending  and  stem  ? 
(c)  With  what  does  it  agree  ? 

6.  reditionis  :    (a)  the  nom.  is  reditio,  which  names  the  action  of 
the  verb  redire,  to  go  back;   cf.  dictio  XXIV. ;    (b)  domum  follows 
it  in  sense  and  denotes  the   direction  of  the  return  ;  without  a  prep, 
just  as  in  Eng.  translation. 

7.  sublata  :    (a)  pf.  pass,  parti  c.  of  irreg.  verb  tollere  ;   (b)  forma 
what  construction  with  spe  ?  cf.  regno  occupato  XXIII. 

8.  subeunda  :    (a)    from  verb  sublre  ;    (b)  cf,  for  form  and  use, 
XIX.  N.  5. 

1  B.  G.  I.  5  =  Bellum  Gallicunv  Book  L,  Chapter  5. 

2  Many  difficulties  not  provided  for  in  the  Notes  are  fully  met  in  the  Vocabu- 
laries, which  must,  of  course,  be  consulted  in  translating  the  Text. 


116 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


9.  essent :  (a)  for  form,  cf.  esset  XXII.  N.  6  ;  (b)  why  subjv.  ? 
(c)  paratiores  is  a  pred.  adj.  utter  it;  what  case,  then,  and  why?  cf. 
XX.  N.  4  (d)  ;  (d)  compare  paratiores,  and  decline  it  in  all  genders. 


3.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 


1..  The  abl.  of  degree  of  difference    A.  &  G.  250.     H.  423  and  N.  1. 


4.  VOCABULARY. 


In  this  and  subsequent  vocabularies  the  pf.  hid.  act.  and  pf.  pass,  partic.  of  all 
3d  conjug.  and  of  all  irreg.  verbs,  will  be  given.  The  ending  of  the  gen.  sing, 
will  also  be  given  when  the  form  of  the  nom.  leaves  the  gen.  in  doubt.  It  is  to 
be  understood  that  all  nouns  in  -us  are  of  the  2d  decl.  unless  it  is  otherwise 
stated  ;  4th  decl.  nouns  are  comparatively  few  in  Caesar.  Only  the  nom.  masc.  of 
adj.  will  be  given. 


1.  aedificium,  a  building.  10. 

2.  comburere,  combussit,  com- 

bustus,  to   burn   up,    to  con-     1 1 . 
sume.  12. 

3.  domus,-us,  (has  some  forms  of 

the  2d  decl.),  fern.,  a  house,  a     13. 
home. 

4.  duodecim  (compounded  of  duo,     11. 

two,    and    decem),    indecl., 
twelve.  15. 

5.  incendere,    incendit,   incen- 

sus,  to  set  Jire  to ;    cf.  mean- 
ing of  comburere.  16. 

6.  jam,  adv.,  at  this  time  (as  con-     17. 

trasted  with  the  past  or  fu-     18. 
hire),  already,  at  last. 

7.  nihilum,  nothing ;  nihil,  the  in-     19. 

decl.  form,  is  more  common. 

8.  oppidum,  a  stronghold,  a  toicn. 

9.  paratus  (pf.  pass,  partic.  of  pa-     20. 

rare),  prepared,  ready.  21. 


periculum,  that  which  tests,  a 
peril. 

portare,  to  carry. 

post,  prop,  with  accus.,  after, 
behind. 

prseterquam,  ufa., further  than, 
beyond,  besides. 

privatus,  belonging  to  an  indi- 
vidual, private. 

quadringenti,  adj.,  four  hun- 
dred ;  cf.  quadraginta,  in- 
decl.,  forty. 

reditio,  a  going  back,  return. 

spes,  stem  spe-,  hope. 

subire,  subiit,  subitus,  irreg., 
to  go  under  or  near,  to  undergo. 

tollere,  sustulit,  sublatus,  ir- 
reg., to  lift  up,  to  remove,  to 
destroy. 

ubi,  when,  where. 

vicus,  a  group  of  houses,  a  vil- 
lage, a  street. 


LESSON   XXVII. 


5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)    Omnia  oppida  ab  Helvetiis  inceridebantur.     (&)  Ubi  jam 
paratl  fueruut,  earns,  quos  coemerant,  multum  frumentum   portant. 
(c)  Orgetorix  11011  arbitratus  est  Hel^etios  post  suam  mortem  exlre 
couaturos  esse.     (d)  Helvetii,  aedificiis  combustis,  alios  domes  occu- 
pare  conantur.     (e)  Oppida  eorum   numero   duodecim  igiii  cremata 
erant. 

2.  (a)  All  the  grain  was  not  carried  with  them,     (ft)  (There)  were 
four  hundred  villages   in   Helvetia,      (c)  The   common    people  were 
very  ready  to  undergo  all  dangers,     (d)  The  beasts  of  burden  which 
they  had  bought  were  dragging  the  carts. 

3.  (a)   Orgetorix  was    ready   to    make  a   conspiracy.     (J)  When 
Orgetorix  had  died,  the  Helvetii  were,  nevertheless,  able  to  go  out  of 
their  territory.       (c)    They   burned  all  their   buildings,  so  that  the 
hope  of  returning  home  might  be  taken  away,      (d)  Two  years  were 
sufficient  for  preparing  all  these  things. 


6.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  Lat.  for  nevertheless.  2.  The  Lat.  meaning  ready  for. 
3.  The  best  Eng.  equivalent  for  the  abl.  absolute  in  this  lesson.  4.  The 
lit.  translation  of  the  gerundive  in  this  lesson.  5.  Verbs  used  thus 
far  which  take  a  complementary  inf.  6.  Two  words  meaning  when. 
1.  Compounds  of  sequi,  facere,  Ire,  ferre,  ducere,  and  capere  used 
thus  far  —  form  and  meaning.  8.  Difference  between  Lat.  for  forty 
and  four  hundred.  9.  The  difference  between  future  act.  and  pf. 
pass,  partic.  10.  The  comparison  of  the  adjective. 


118  INDUCTIVE   LATIN    METHOD. 


LESSON    XXVIII. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  5,  trium  mensium  to  the  end. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  jubent :    (a)  used  with  the  accus.  quemque,  and  inf.  efferre, 
they  order  each  one  to  bear  out ;  (b)  domo,  from  home  ;  used  excep- 
tionally without  a  prep.;  the  place  from  which  regularly  requires  the 
prep. ;  cf,  ex  agris  XXV.,  e  finibus  XXVII. 

2.  consilio  :  abl.  sing,  with  usl,    pf.  partic.  of  uti,  which  takes 
theabl.;  cf.  XIV.  Obs.  10. 

3.  exustis  ;   note  that  this  partic.  means  having  been  burned  up, 
while  usi,  above,  means  having  used  ;  both  end  in  -us  in  nom.  sing. 
How  do  you  explain  the  difference  of  voice  ?     Why  does  not  exustis 
agree  with  the  subj.,  as  usi  does  ? 

4.  uti  .  .  .  proficiscantur,  to  set  out :   (a)  pres.  subjv. ;  the  -e  of 
the  pres.  stem  is  changed  to  a  ;  (b)  the  snbjv.  of  purpose  may  often  be 
best  translated  by  the  inf.,  which  frequently  denotes  purpose  in  Eng. 

5.  Boios ;  nom.  plur.  ?     What  other  names  of  tribes  are  used  in 
this  lesson  ?     How  do  you  recognize  them  as  names  of  peoples  ? 

6.  oppugnarant  :     (a)    contracted    form    of    oppugnav-era-nt ; 
(b}  plpf.  ind.  act.  of  1st  conjug. ;  cf.  habuerat,  2d  conjug.,  XX.,  in- 
coluerant,  3d  conjug.,  above.      What  is  the  tense  sign  in  each  case? 
(c)  formed  on  the  pf.  stem  oppugnav-. 

7.  adsciscunt :   (a)  What  is  the  obj.  of  this  verb  ?     (b}  receptos 
agrees  with  Boios,  from  which  it  seems  to  be  widely  separated  ;  if, 
however,  the  clauses  qui  .  .  .  oppugnarant  be  read  according  to  the 
direction  in  XXIV.  Obs.  4,  and  as  a  parenthetical  statement,  it  will 
be  seen  that  the  partic.  is  closely  connected  with  its   noun ;    (c)  re- 
ceptos, though  a  partic.,   is  well  translated  as  an  independent  verb, 
thus,  they  receive  and  attach  to  themselves ;  so  uti  .  .   .  usi  .  .  .  ex- 
ustis .  .  .  proficiscantur,  to  adopt,  to  burn  up,  and  to  set  out. 


LESSON   XXVIII.  119 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  sign  of  the  pros,  subjv.  in  the  3d  con  jug.  is  -a-1. 

2.  The  pf.  stem  of  the  1st  conjug.  may  be  found  by  adding  v  to 
the  pres.  stem. 

3.  The  plpf.  ind.  act.  is,  in  all  conjug.,  formed  on  the  pf.  stem,  and 
has  the  tense  sign  -era-1. 

4.  Purpose  is  regularly  expressed  by  the  Eng.  inf.,  and  the  Lat. 
purpose  clause  may  often  be  best  translated  by  an  inf. 

4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Loss  of  -v  from  pf.  stem      A.  &  G.  128,  a.    H.  235. 

2.  The  partic.  translated  like 

an  independent  verb     .    A.    &    G.    292,    H.  549,  5. 
Rein.2 

3.  The  pf.  act.  partic.,  and 

how  to  supply  its  place    A.  &  G.  113,  c,  H.  231,  1 ;  550,  N. 

N.;  290,  d.  4. 

4.  Place  from  which  .      .      .    A.  &  G.  259, /.  H.  412,  I. 

5.  Domum  and  domo    .      .    A.  &  G.  258.  H.  412,  II.  1 ;  380, 

I.  II.  2,  1). 

6.  Construction  with  jubgre    A.  &  G.  330,  2  ;    H.  5342  and  foot- 

331,  a.  note  1  ;  535,  II. 

foot-note  1. 

7.  Special  verbs  with  the  abl.    A.  &  G.  249.         H.  421,  I. 

5.     VOCABULARY. 

Proper  names  will  not  generally  be  given  in  these  vocabularies  hereafter.     They 
may  be  readily  distinguished  by  their  form  and  use. 

1.  adsciscere,  -scivit,  -scitus,  food ;  cibaria,  neut.  plur.  as 

to  take  to  ones  self,  unite.  noun,  provisions. 

2.  cibarius,    adj.,    pertaining   to       3.  consilium,  a  plan. 

1  Remember  that  a  is  treated  as  short  before  nt  and  final  -t. 

2  Read  examples  carefully. 


120  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

4.  efferre,  extulit,    elatus,    to     11.  quemque,    accus.    sing,    masc., 

bear  out.  each  one,  every  one. 

5.  exurere,    -ussit,    -ustus,    to     12.  recipere,    -cepit,    -ceptus,    to 

burn  up.  take     back,     to     receive  ;     se 

6.  jubere,    j ussit,    jussus,    to  recipere,  to   betake  one's  self, 

order.  to  retreat. 

7.  mensis,  -is,  masc.   by  excep-     13.  socius,  an  ally. 

tioiij  a  month.  14.  transire,    transiit,    trausitus, 

8.  molere,  moluit,  molitus,  to  to  go  across. 

grind.  15.  una,  adv.,  together. 

9.  NoricuB,qft/ieNorici,Noric.         10.  uti,  usus,  to  use  ;  takes  abl. 
10.  oppugnare,  to  jight    against, 

to  storm. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Boil  ab  Helvetils  receptl  sunt.     (1}   Helvetil,  omnibus  rebus 
paratis,  proficiscuntur.      (c)  Boil  qui  in   Galliam  a  Germanifi  vagfitl 
erant  amici  appellfibantur.     (d)  Persuaserunt  f'liiitimis  ut,  vicis  incen- 
sis,  de  fiuibus  exirent. 

2.  (a)  The  Helvetii  are  about  to  carry  with  them  meal  (sufficient) 
for    three    months.       (b)    The    Tilling!    attempt    the    same    (thing-), 
(c)  They  collected  all  their  men,  so  as  to  be  able  to  wage  war  upon 
their  neighbors.       (d)  They  are  about  to  use  the  carts  which   they 
have  prepared,      (e)   They  order  all  the  soldiers  to  obtain  their  own 
provisions. 

3.  (a)  Those  who  used  to  dwell  (were  dwelling)  across  the  Rhine 
are  dwell  ing  in   Gaul.       (b)   Noreia  had  been  stormed   by  the  Boil, 
(c)   The  Boii,  after  wandering  in  many  places  and  storming  one  large 
town,  are  at  length  the  allies  of  the  Helvetii.     (d)  The  Helvetii  prove 
that  it  is  fitting  for  the  Latobrigi  to  adopt  the  same  plan. 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Difference  in  form  and  meaning  of  uti  and  uti.  2.  The  best 
translation  for  mensium.  3.  Whether  jubent  has  two  objects  or 
one.  4.  The  comparative  frequency  of  the  use  of  the  partic.  in  Eng. 
and  Lat.  5.  Why  the  word  for  home  omits  the  prep.  6.  The 
names  of  peoples  with  nom.  ending  -I  in  text  so  far  ;  with  norn.  end- 
ing -se.  1.  The  names  of  countries  and  towns  ending  in  -a. 


LESSON  XXIX.  121 


LESSON    XXIX. 

1.    TEXT. 
Csesar,  B.  G.    I.  6,  through  vado  transitur, 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  erant,  there  were  ;'  the  Eng.  expletive  there,  used  to  take  the 
place  of  a  subj.  placed  elsewhere,  has  no  corresponding  word  in  Lat. 

2.  duo;  limits  itinera,  ways  ;  peculiar  in  form;  see  Gram.  Less. 

3.  possent:    (a)   for   form,    see   XXII.    N.    7    (a),     (b)   Why   is 
itineribus  abl.  ?     (c)  May  the  translation  of  any  Lat.  word  in  this 
clause  be  properly  omitted  in  Eng.  ? 

4.  unum  ;  neut.  sing,  limiting  the  Lat.  word  for  ivay,  to  be  sup- 
plied in  thought. 

5.  qua  ;  here  an  adv.  meaning  where,  not  a  rel.  pron. 

6.  ut  .  .   .  possent,  so  that  they  could:  (a)  the  clause  expresses 
the  result  (not  purpose)   of  mons  impendebat.  the  mountain  was 
overhanging ;   (b)  the  subj.  is  perpaucl,  usually  an  adj.,  but  here  a 
noun;  cf.  XIV.  N.  4  (b). 

7.  alterum ;  for  meaning,  see  XV.  N.  7  (a). 

8.  facilius  :    (a)  neut.  comp.  of  adj.  ;  see  Gram.  Less.     What  else 
might  it  be,  so  far  as  form  is  concerned?    cf.  facilius  XIV.  N.  11; 
(b)  for  construction  of  preceding  multo,  cf.  nihilS  XXVII.  N.  1. 

9.  nonnullis   locis,   in  several  places ;    the    prep,    exceptionally 
omitted  in  Lat. ;  see  Gram.  Less. 

10.  transitur  :   (a)  many  compounds  of  Ire,  to  go,  are  used  in  the 
pass.  ;  though  the  Eng.  woidd  not  admit  it  is  gone  across,  we  may 
say  it  is  crossed ;  (b)  note  that  this  whole  lesson  may  be  well  trans- 
lated in  almost  the  exact  order  of  the  original. 


122 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.     GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Deri,  of  duo    .     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  94,  b.  H.  175. 

2.  Neut.  of  the  comp.  of  adj.   A.  &  G.  89,  86.  H.  162,  154. 

3.  Eel.    agreeing    with    re- 

peated an  tec.     .     .      .    A.  &  G.  200,  a.  H.  445,  8. 

4.  Adj.  used  substantively  .   A.  &  G.  188.  H.  441  and  1. 

5.  Prep,  omitted  with  loco 

and  locis     .      .      .      .    A.  &  G.  253.  f.  H.  425,  II.  2. 

6.  Subjv.  of  result    .     .     .   A.  &  G.  319.  H.  500,  II. 


4.  VOCABULARY. 


1.  difficilis,  difficult. 

2.  duo,  duae,  duo,  irreg.,  two. 

3.  expedire,  -pedivit,  -peditus, 

4tli  conjug.,  to  set  free  from 
(something) ;  tne  pf.  pass, 
part.ic.  is  commonly  used  like 
an  adj.  in  all  respects  and 
means  unencumbered,  -without 
bar/gctqe,  open. 

4.  fiuere,  fluxit   fluxus,  fojforr>. 

5.  impendere,  no  pi',  act.,  nor  pf. 

partic.,  intrans.,  to  overhang. 


G.  nonnullus,  not  none,  some. 

7.  nuper,  recently. 

8.  omnino,  adv.,  altogether,  in  all. 

9.  pacare,  to  pacify,  to  subdue. 

10.  perpaucus,  very  little  ;  in  plur. 

very  few. 

11.  qua,  irk»rr. 

12.  singul-i,  -ae,  -a,  one  to  each,  one 

at  a  time. 

13.  vadum,  a  ford,  a  shallow. 

14.  vix,  adv.,  with  effort,  with  diffi- 

culty, scarcely. 


5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Flumen  quod  se  trausituros  esse  sperabant,  erat  Ehodanus. 
(b}    Nostra    provincia   Khodano    flumine    ab    Helvetiis    continetur. 
(c)  Quain   maximus  numerus  carrorum  itinere  angusto  inter  flumen 
et  montem  ducebatnr.      (c?)    Allobroges,    qnibuscum   Eomani    uuper 
contenderant,  proximi  Sequanis  fuerunt. 

2.  (a)  Jura  was  the  mountain  which  was  overhanging,     (b)  The 
Helvetii  could   go   out  from  home  by  two  ways,     (c)  They  thought 
that  yonder  (ille)  mountain  was  much  higher,      (d)   Having  dragged 
their  carts  to  the  river,  they  try  to  cross  by  the  ford. 


LESSON  XXX.  123 

3.  (a)  The  Helvetii  were  much  braver  than  (quam)  the  Allobroges. 
(b)  At  that  time  it  happened  that  the  Allobroges  were  being  subdued 
by  the  Romans,  (c)  Two  states  were  very  near,  so  that  (only)  the  river, 
which  was  riot  deep,  divided  them,  (d)  Many  were  kept  out  by  few 
in  that  place. 

6.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  particulars  in  which  the  decl.  of  duo  is  peculiar.  2.  Differ- 
ence in  meaning  between  pauci  and  pauca,  used  as  nouns  in  plur. 
cases.  3.  Two  possible  meanings  for  qua,  for  facilius.  4.  Differ- 
ence in  thought  between  a  purpose  and  a  result.  5.  In  what  cases 
the  neut.  of  the  comp.  differs  from  the  masc.  6.  The  development  of 
the  last  meaning  of  vix  in  Vocal),  from  the  first.  7.  Similarity  in 
meaning  of  per-  and  -issimus  in  perpaucl  and  altissimus. 


LESSON    XXX. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  6,  extremum  oppidum  to  the  end. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  extremum  :  stands  first  in  the  sentence  for  the  sake  of  empha- 
sis ;   it  is  the  location  of  Geneva  which  the  writer  wants  to  tell  us. 

2.  bono  animo,  abl.,  with  good  mind,  of  good  disposition,  well- 
disposed  ;  the  phrase  limits  the  subj.  of  viderentur  like  a  descriptive 
adj. 

3.  paterentur,  to  permit :  (a)  subjv.  of  purpose  after  persuasu- 
ros  and  coacturos.    (b)  Is  the  verb  cogere  used  with  any  other  con- 
struction ?  XX IV.  N.  2  (d)  ;   (c)  antec.   of  the  preceding  suos  and 
eos? 

4.  dicunt,  they  appoint  ;    cf.  the  meaning  of  dicere  in  phrase 
causam  dicere  XXIV.     How  do  you   translate  the  preceding  abl. 
absolute  ? 


124  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

5.  qua  die  l  conveniant,  that  on  this  (appointed)  day  they  may 
come  together :  (a)  qua  =  ut  ea  ;  (b)  a  purpose  clause  ;   they  appoint 
a  day  that  all  may  come  together  at  one   time,  that  they  may  not 
straggle  along  at  different  times  ;  (c~)  the  sign  of  pres.  subjv.  -a-,  here 
in  4th  conjug. :  cf.  XXVIII.  N.  4. 

6.  a.  d.  v.  Kal.  Apr.  =  ante  diem  quintum  Kaleiidas  Apriles, 
a  peculiar  expression  for  dies  quintus  ante  Kalendas  Apriles,  the 
fifth  day  before  the  April  Calends :  (a)  Apriles  is  an  adj. ;   (b)  Ka- 
lendae  is  the  Lat.  for  the  first  day  of  the  month  ;   (c)  the  reckoning  is 
backward  from  the  first  day  of  the  month,  instead  of  forward  as  with 
us  ;   (d)  in  reckoning  the  time  between  two  dates,  both  extremes  are 
counted,  thus:   April  1,  March  31,  30,  29,  28;  the  fifth  day  before 
the  April  Calends  is,  therefore,  March  28,  not  March  27,  as  our  way 
of  reckoning  would  make  it. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  descriptive  abl.,  or  abl.  of  quality,  is  accompanied  by  an  adj. 
or  possessive  gen. 

2.  Dicere  may  mean  to  say  or  to  plead  or  to  appoint.    The  mean- 
ing of  a  Lat.  word  varies  with  the  context  (i.  c.  the  words  in  connec- 
tion with  it)  just  as  that  of  an  Eng.  word  varies.     No  Lat.  sentence 
can  be  even  tolerably  translated  without  attention  to  this  fact. 

3.  The  Romans  reckoned  the  days  of  the  month  backward  instead 
of  forward,  and  in  reckoning  the  time  between   two   dates   counted 
both  the  day  from  which  and  the  day  to  which. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  vis      .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  61.  H.  66. 

2.  The  effect  of  position  at 

the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence     A.  &  G.  344,  1.    H.  561,  1. 

3.  The  abl.  of  quality      .      .  A.  &  G.  251.         H.  419,  II. 

4.  Purpose     clauses     intro- 

duced by  a  relative     .  A.  &  G.  317.         H.  497,  I.2 

1  Note  that  die  is  here  fern,  and  see  Harpers'  Lat.  Diet.,  dies,  I.  B,  1  an 

2  Study  examples. 


LESSON   XXX. 


125 


5.    VOCABULARY. 


1.  Aprllis,  -is,   masc.  (probably 

from  aperire,  to  open),  the 
month  of  April ;  also  very 
frequently  an  adj. 

2.  Aulus,  a  Roman  first  or  indi- 

vidual name ;  generally  re- 
presented  in  Lat.  authors  by 
the  initial  A. 

3.  convenire,      -venit,     -veil- 

tus,  to  come  together,  to 
meet' 

4.  existimare    (ex    and    sesti- 

mare),  to  estimate.,  think. 

5.  ire,  ivit,  itum1,  to  go. 

6.  Kalendee,  arum,  the  Calends , 

day  of  a  month. 


7.  Lucius,    a    Roman   first   name, 

usually  represented  by  L. 

8.  nondum,  not  yet. 

9.  pati,   passus,    to    endure,    per- 

mit. 

10.  pons,    masc.    by    exception,    a 

bridge. 

11.  qumtus,  fifth. 

12.  ripa,  the  bank  of  a  river. 

13.  vel,    or ;    vel  .  .  .  vel,   either 

...   or. 
11.  videre,  vidit,  visus,  to  see ;  in 

pass.,  often,  ft?  s^m. 
15.  vis,  vis  gen.,  force,  violence ;  in 

plur.,  vires,  si 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Orgetorix  apud  Helvetios  viiMnagna  auctoritate  erat.    (b)  Du- 
onun  itineruin  unurn  perfacile,  alterura  multo  difficilius  erat.     (c)  AUo- 
broges  non  amici  Rornanis  sunt.     (d)  Persuadent  omul  plebi  ut  uria 
die  ad  rlpam  fluininis  conveiiiat. 

2.  (a)  The  town  Geneva  is  very  near  Lake  Geneva.     (6)  They 
came  together  on  the  thirtieth  of  March,     (c)  The  Helvetii  thought 
the   Allobroges    would   allow  them    to    go    through   their   territory. 
(d)    When   the    day    had    been    appointed,   they   collected    all   their 
soldiers. 

3.  (a)  They  determined  to  compel  the  Allobroges  to  allow  (subjv.) 
these  wagons  to  cross  the  fields,     (b)  Geneva,  which  is  very  near  the 
Helvetii,  is  very  far  distant  from  the  towns  of  the-3elgpe.     (c)  After 
trying  (partic.)  to  take  away  the  hope  of  return,  they  sent  men  to  per- 
suade their  neighbors. 


The  neut  of  the  partic.  will  be  given  when  the  masc.  is  not  used. 


126  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


7.    TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 

1.  A  new  use  of  the  abl.  2.  How  it  differs  from  the  abl.  of 
means  3.  Prom  the  abl.  of  respect.  4.  Different  ways  of  trans- 
lating the  abl.  absolute.  5.  The  leading  thought  in  each  sentence  of 
the  Text.  6.  The  noiri.  plur.  of  vis;  of  locus.  7.  Two  striking 
differences  between  Roman  and  Eng.  methods  of  reckoning  time. 
8.  Why  an  important  word  should  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence.  9.  Examples  in  Eng.  of  variation  in  the  meaning  of  a 
word  because  of  a  different  context.  10.  Analysis,  when  they  intro- 
duce purpose  clauses,  of  the  following  relatives  :  qui,  sing.,  qui,  plur., 
quo,  quam,  cujus. 


LESSON    XXXI. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  7,  through  jubet  rescind!. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  Caesari  :  (a]  dat.  case  ;  (b)  other  uses  of  the  ending  -I  ?  XVI. 
N.  13  (b)  ;   (c)  note  the  emphatic  position  ;  to  Caesar,  a  new  actor  on 
the  scene,  our  attention  is  now  directed  ;  cf.  XXX.  N.  1. 

2.  nuntiatum  esset  :   (a)  a  new  compound  tense,  the  plpf.  subjv. 
pass. ;  it  is   made  up  in  all  conjng.   of  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  and  the 
impf.  subjv.  of  verb  esse ;  cf.  XXlf.  N.  6  and  plpf.  ind.  pass.,  XX. 
N.  4  (a)  (b)  ;    (b)  const.1  of  Ceesari  ?  XXII.  Obs.  3. 

3.  iter  facere,   to  make  a  journey,  to  march   (when  used  of  an 
army)  ;  iter  (ire,  to  go)  is   the  amis.  sing,  neut..,  shortened   form  of 
stem  itiner- ;  cf.  itiner-e,  itiner-a,  itiner-ibus. 

4.  eos  .  .  .  conari ;  the  clause  is  in  apposition  with  id  preceding. 

5.  quam   maximis   potest   itineribus,  a  peculiar  shortened  ex- 
pression for  tarn  magnis  itineribus  quam  potest  maximis  itineri- 
bus, by  so  great  journeys  as  he  is  able  (to  hasten}  by  means  of  the 

1  Construction,  i.  e.  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 


LESSON   XXXI.  127 

greatest  journeys,  i.  e.,  by  the  longest  possible  stages ;  cf.  quam 
maximum  numerum  XVI II.  (where  possunt  is  omitted)  and  the 
Eng.  expression  by  easy  stages. 

6.  ad  Genuam,  to  the  vicinity  of  Geneva,  not  into  the  city  ;  ab 
urbe,  just   before,    means  from   the  vicinity  of  Rome,   not   out  of 
Rome.     What  would  out  of  Rome  be  in  Lat.  ? 

7.  toti ;   peculiar  dut.   of  totus,   the   same  for  all    genders  ;   cf. 
totius,  ipsius,  illius,  ejus,  cujus  and  XX.  N.  1;  also  ipsi,  illi,  ei, 
cui. 

8.  imperat,    takes    dat.    of    the    person,     provinciae ;    cf.    per- 
suadere. 

9.  erat  .   .   .  legio  :   (a)   cf.   order  of  words  with  that  in  erant 
.  .  .  itinera  XXIX.  ;    in  each   case  the  subj.  is   made   emphatic   by 
being  taken  out  of  its  regular  position  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause 
and  placed  at  the  end  ;   (b)  gen.  sing,  and  plur.  of  legio  ? 

10.  jubet ;  note  in  this  lesson  the  rapid  succession  of  pres.  ind., 
impressing  us  with  the  energy  and  rapidity  of  Cicsar's  movements. 
It  was  Caesar  who  said  "  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered." 

11.  rescind-!  ;  cf.  the  ending  -i  in  this  verb  and  in  proficisc-i 
with  -ri  in  cona-ri.     Where  is  each  of  these  forms  found  ? 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  p'pf.  subjv.  pass,  is  formed  in  all  .  onjug.  by  combining  the 
pf.  partic.  pass,  with  the  impf.  subjv.  of  esse. 

2.  The   3d   decl.  noun  iter  is  neut.  by  exception,  and  its  stem 
is  itiner-. 

3.  The  us3  of  quam   with   the  sup.,  where  it  may  be  translated 
possible,  involves  the  omission  of  tarn,  so,  of  the  positive  of  the  adj., 
and  sometimes  of  the  verb  posse. 

4.  The  ending  -I  occurs  as    a    dat.   sing,  ending   in  totus,   and 
several  other  1st  and  2d  decl.  adj.,  as  well  as  in  all  the  demonstrative 
pron. 

5.  Imperare,  like    persuadere,   is  followed   by  the   dat.   of   the 
person. 

6.  The  pres.  inf.  pass,  of  the  3d  conjug.  ends  in  -i,  while  that  of 
other  conjug.  ends  in    ri. 


128  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


4.     GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Meaning     of     ad     \\ith 

names  of  towns      .     .  A.  &  G.  258, /.,  H.    433,    I.,    380, 
Hem.;  259, /        II.,  1. 

2.  The  effect  of  placing  the 

subj.  at  the    end    of  a 

sentence1 A.  &  G.  344  and  H.  561,  II. 

a. 

3.  The    force    of    the   pres. 

ind.  in  narrative     .     .  A.  &  G.  276,  d.    II.  467,  III. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  Caesar,    Ceesaris,    full    name       5.  pervenire,  to  come  through,  to 

Caius     Julius     Caesar,     a  arrive. 

great  Roman,  —  writer,  gen-  6.  rescindere,  -scidit,  -scissus, 

eral,  statesman.  to  break  down. 

2.  imperare,2  to  command',  pro-  7.  ulterior,  adj.,  positive  wanting, 

vinciae   milites   imperare,  farther. 

to  give  orders  to  the  produce  8.  urbs,  a  city;  to  a  Roman,  often 

for  soldiers.  the  city  of  Rome,  just  as  "  the 

3.  maturare,  to  hasten.  city  "  means  Boston  to  one  liv- 

4.  nuntiare,  to  announce.  ing  in  the  suburbs  of  that  city. 


6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Csesaii  ntintiant  Helvetios  faciliore  itinere  exire  conaturos 
esse.  (b)  Caesar,  ut  provincia  Helvetios  prolii beret,  qnam  maximas 
copias  cogere  maturabat.  (c)  Erat  omnino  pons  unus  quo  ad  Genu- 
am  iter  facere  poterant.  (d)  Caesar,  factis  itineribns  magnis,  Gallis 
qui  provinciam  incolebant  milites  multos  imperavit.  (e)  Cum  quam 
maxima;  copise  coactae  essent,  in  provinciam  maturavit. 

1  On  emphatic  position  in  the  Eng.  sentence,  consult  Welsh's  "  Lessons  in  Eng. 
Grammar,"  Chap.  XXIX.,  Sec.  2  and  6. 

2  The  pupil  must  not  forget  that  all  verbs  with  inf.  in  -are  form  pf.  regularly 
in  -avit,  and  partic.  in  -at-us,  -a,  -um. 


LESSON  XXXI.  129 

2.  (a)  He  sets  out  from  Rome,  makes  his  way  through  the  farther 
province,  and  cornes  to  the  vicinity  of  Geneva,     (b)  After  the  bridge 
had  been  broken  down  (abl.  absolute)  by  Caesar,  the  Helvetii  could 
cross  the  Rhone  by  a  ford,     (c)  Caesar,  who  was  at  that  time  in  the 
city,  hastened  to  the  Rhone,  which  was  many  miles  away. 

3.  (a)  Caesar  tries  to  keep  out  the  Helvetii  by  breaking  down  the 
bridge,  and  levies  soldiers  upon  the  province,     (b)  Many  who  lived  in 
our  province  were  well-disposed  toward  Caesar.       (c)   The    Helvetii 
hope  to  be  able  to  seize  the  bridge,  so  that  by  this  bridge  they  may 
cross  into  the  province. 


7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1 .  The  Lat.  for  to  set  out,  to  march,  to  come,  to  go,  to  go  lack  and 
forth,  to  arrive  at.  2.  A  word  with  two  more  syllables  in  the  gen. 
than  in  the  nom.  sing.  3.  Three  translations  of  ad,  with  illustra- 
tions from  text  of  Csesar.  4.  Difference  in  construction  or  thought 
between  quemque  efferre  jubent  and  pontem  jubet  rescind!. 
5.  Comparison  of  the  Eng.  expression  to  arrive  at  and  the  Lat. 
pervenire  ad.1  6.  Similarity  in  formation  of  plpf.  iud.  pass,  and 
plpf.  subjv.  pass.  7.  The  effect  of  arrangement  in  the  sentences, 
"What  a  piece  of  work  is  man,"  "Blessed  are  the  peace-makers." 
8.  The  expanded  form  of  quam  maximum  numerum  coemunt. 

1  See  Webster's  Unabridged  Diet,  arrive  and  at. 


130  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 


LESSON    XXXII. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  7,  Ubi  dg  through  facere  liceat. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  adventu  ;  the  noin.  is  formed  by  uniting  the  root1  of  advenlre, 
and  the  ending -tus,  which  denotes  the  name  of  the  action;  cf.  redi- 
tio,  dic-tio  ;  (led.  of  adventu  ? 

2.  certiores  f  actl  sunt  ;  they  are  having  been  made  more  certain, 
they  were  made  more  certain,  they  were  informed:  (a]  fact!  sunt  is 
the  pf.   ind.    pass,    of  facere  ;    cf.    XXV.    N.   4   (a) ;    (b)    fact!  and 
certiores  are  both  pred.  adj.  agreeing  with  the  subj.  of  sunt  ;  cf.  XX. 
N.  4  (d)  ;   (c)  in  de  adventu,  modifying  this  phrase,  de  means  of  in 
sense  of  concerning. 

3.  qui  dicerent,  to  say  ;  cf.  XXX.  N.  5.     To  what  is  qui  equiv- 
alent here  ? 

4.  sibi  esse  in  animS,  it  is  to  them  in  mind,  they  have  (it)  in 
mind,  they  intend;  (a)  antec.  of  sibi?   (b)  the  dat.  Avith  esse  has 
the  force  of  a  nom.  indicating  the  person  who  has  or  possesses  a  thing, 
as  in  above  translation  they  have  (it)  in  mind. 

5.  aliud,  neut.  accus.  sing.,  limiting  iter ;  for  ending  -d,  cf.  i-d, 
quo-d,  illu-d. 

6.  propterea  quod  .   .   .  haberent ;  cf.  propterea  quod  .   .  . 
absunt  VI.,  quod  .   .    .   contendunt  IX.,   quod   .   .   .  continentur 
XIV.,    propterea   quod   .    .    .    fluit   XXIX.,  Avith    propterea    quod 

.  .  .  obtenturus  esset  XXII.,  quod  .  .  .  viderentur  XXX.  and 
the  present  instance  ;  note  that  in  the  first  four  instances  the  verb 
after  quod  is  ind.  and  the  clauses  stand  in  ordinary  narrative,  i.  e. 
in  direct  discourse,  Avhile  in  the  last  three  the  verb  is  subjv.  and  the 
clauses  stand  after  verbs  of  saying  or  thinking,  i.  e.  in  indirect  dis- 
course ;  note,  too,  that  all  these  quod  clauses  are  subordinate. 

1  The  root  is  the  basis  of  derivation  for  groups  of  words,  while  the  stem  is  the 
basis  of  inflection  for  one  word. 


LESSON   XXXIL  131 

7.  nullura :    (a)  translate  the  sentence  of  which  this  is  the  last 
word  in  the  exact  order  of  the  original,  and  cf.  Eng.  sentence,  "  Silver 
and  gold  have  I   none;"  (&)  has  -lus  in  gen.  sing.,  -I  in  dat.,  like 
totus,  unus,  altera  and  preceding  aliud  and  ullo. 

8.  rogare  ;  se  is  to  be  supplied  as  its  subj. 

9.  ut  .    .   .  liceat :   (a)   an   obj.    clause    of   purpose;    cf.  XX.   N. 
5  (b),  Gram.  Less. ;    (b)  liceat  is  an  impersonal  verb  ;   cf.  XXIV.  N. 
3  (a)  (b)  ;   (c)  subj.  of  liceat?  (d)  antec.  of  ejus  and  sibi  ?  (e)  the 
translation  of  what  the  Helvetii  actually  said,  beginning  with  rogare,  is, 
"  We  ask  that  it  be  permitted  to  us  to  do  this  with  your  consent." 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  endings  -tio  and  -tus  name  the  action.     The  name  of  the 
action  in  -tus  is  of  the  4th  decl. 

2.  An  expression  freely  translated  to  inform,  but  meaning  lit.  to 
make  more  certain,  is  found  in  Caesar.      It  is  formed  by  combining 
facere  and  certior,    an  adj.  in  the  comp.  agreeing   with  the  name 
of  the  person  who  is  informed. 

3.  The  prep,  of,  when  used  in  the  sense  of  concerning,  is  repre- 
sented in  Lat.  by  de  with  the  abl.  and  not  by  the  gen. 


4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Adj.  forming    gen.    sing. 

in  -lus,  dat.  in  -I      .     .  A.  &  G.  83  and      H.  151  and  1. 
a,  b. 

2.  The  dat.  of  the  possessor    A.  &  G.  231.  II.  387. 

3.  The  subordinate  clauses  of 

iridir.  discourse  .     .      .  A.  &  G.  336,  last      H.  524. 
clause. 

4.  Change  of  order  for  em- 

phasis      A.  &  G.  344  and  e.    H.  560,  561,  III. 


132  INDUCTIVE   LATIN  METHOD. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  adventus,   -us,    a    coming   to,       5.  nullus,  adj.  (ne,  not,  and  ullus, 

approach.  am/]i  n°t  am/,  no.  none. 

2.  certus,   sure,    certain ;    homi-       G.  princeps,    piincipis,    adj.    or 

nem  certiorem  facere,    to  noun,  chief, 

inform  a  man.  7-  rogare,  to  ask. 

3.  licet,  it  is  permitted;  ei  licet,       8.  sine,  prep,  with  abl.3  without. 

it   is  permitted    to    him,    he       9.  ullus,  adj.,  any. 

may.  10.  voluntas   (volent-,   shortened 

4.  maleficium  (male,  adv.,  badly,  stem  of  pres.  part.ic.  of  velle, 

and  facerej,  wrong-doing,  an  to  wish,  and-tas),  willingness, 

evil  deed.  will,  desire. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  («)  Ubi  Helvetica  certiorcs  do  Ctt'saris  adventu  fecerunt,  hi  lega- 
tionem  mittunt.      (b)  Nammeius  et  Yertidoctius  principes  nobilissimi 
sure  civitatis  fuerunt.     (c)  Legates,  qul  ad  Caesarem  irent,  nnsenmt. 
(G?)  Els  est  in  animo  vl  cogere  Sequanos  ut  itinere  difficiliore  eos  exlre 
patiantur. 

2.  (a)   They  determined  to  go,  they  tried  to  go,  they  could   go, 
they  hastened  to  go.     (b)  They  ordered  them  to   go,  they  compelled 
them  to  go,  they  allowed  them  to  go.      (c)  They  persuaded  them  to 
go,  they  asked  them  to  go.     (d)  They  tried  to  persuade  Caesar  not  to 
keep  them  out  of  the  province. 

3.  (a)  Cnesar,  being  informed  of  the  plans  of  the  Helvetii,  hastened 
into  his  province,     (b)  They  intend,  because  they  have  110  other  way, 
to  march    through    the  province  without  wrong-doing.       (c)    They 
ask  permission  to   do  this  with  Caesar's  good  pleasure,     (d)  After 
getting  everything  ready,  they  may  go. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  Lat.  for  to  march,  to  intend,  to  inform,  he  may.  2.  Ullus, 
nullus,  nonnullus.  3.  Two  ways  of  translating  o/'into  Lat.  4.  Two 
ways  of  translating  for.  5.  Two  ways  of  translating  have.  6.  Two 
very  common  uses  of  the  subjv.  7.  When,  as  a  rule,  to  translate  to 
by  the  complementary  inf.  8.  When  by  the  subjv.  9.  Some  excep- 
tions to  8. 


LESSON  XXXIII.  133 


LESSON   XXXIII. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  7,  Caesar,  quod  to  the  end. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  tenebat ;  cf.  XXXII.  N.  6. 

2.  missum  :  (a)  esse  understood,  as  with  the  preceding  occisum 
and  pulsum  ;  cf.  XXIII.  Obs.  1  ;   (b)  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  with  esse 
forms  the  pf.  inf.  pass.  ;  cf.  missus  est;   (c)  inf.  in  indir.  discourse, 
memoria  tenebat  being  equivalent  to  a  verb  of  thinking  ;  cf.  XVII. 
Obs.  6 ;  (d)  What  is  the  pres.  inf.  pass.  ? 

3.  putabat :   (a)  note  that  in  this  sentence  the  subj.  stands  first, 
the  pred.  last.     How  many  clauses  in  this  chapter  have  exactly  this 
order?  (b)  esse  is  understood  with  concedendum,  a  gerundive   in 
the  neut.  ;  the  clause  is  translated,  literally,  he  did  not  think  it  was 
to  be  allowed,  a  little  more  freely,  it  ought  to  be  allowed. 

4.  inimico  animo  ;  cf.  XXX.  N.  2. 

5.  faciundi :  (a)  gerundive  form  for  faciendi ;   see  Gram.  Less.; 
(b)  limiting  itineris,  which  depends  on  facultate  ;  literally,  the  oppor- 
tunity of  a  journey  to  be  made,   more  freely,   the  opportunity  oj 
leaking  a  journey  ;  cf.  XIX.  N.  5  (c). 

6.  imperaverat ;  for  form,  see  XXVIII.  N.  6. 

7.  dum  .  .  .  convenirent :    (a)  impf.  subjv.  of  4th  conjtig. ;   cf. 
pres.  subjv.  same  conjug.,  conveniant  XXX.,  and  that  of  the  3d  conjug., 
proficiscantur  XXVIII.  ;   (b)  until  they  should  come  together,  but 
just  as  accurately,  for  them  to  come  together.     In  what  respect,  then, 
is  this  clause  like  ut  ...  posset  just  before  ? 

8.  deliberandum  ;   gerund;  cf.  XVIII.  N.  6. 

9.  quid,  indefinite  pron.,  anything  ;  cf.  quemque  XXVIII. ;  note 
its  position  immediately  after  si. 

10.  ad  Id.  Apr.  =  ad  Idus  Apriles,  on  the  April  Ides  ;  the  Ides 
in  April  came  on  the  13th  ;  cf.  XXX.  N.  6.     What  is  the  usual  way 
of  expressing  the  time  at  which?  XXI.  N.  2,  XXIV.  N.  4  (b). 


134  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

11.  reverterentur,  let  them  return  ;  what  Caesar  said  to  the  legates 
was,  "  I  will  take  time  to  think  about  it ;  if  you  want  anything,  return 
on  the  Ides  of  April." 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  pf.  inf.  pass,  of  all  conjug.  is  compounded  of  the  pf.  pass, 
partic.  and  the  pros.  inf.  esse  ;  the  pf.  ind.  pass,  is   compounded  of 
the  same  partic.  and  the  pres.  ind.  of  esse. 

2.  The  substantive   form   of  the  indefinite  pron.  quis  differs  from 
the  relative  pron.  only  in  the  noin.  masc.  sing,  quis  and  the  nom.  and 
accus.  neut.  quid. 

4.     GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  The    deel.  of   the   indefi- 

nite quis,   quae,  quid  .   A.  &  G.  104.  H.  190,  188. 

2.  The  endings  -uiidus  and 

-undi H.  239. 

3.  Dum  clauses  of  purpose  .   A.  &  G.  328.  H.  519,  II.  2. 

4.  The    gerundive    meaning 

ought  or  must    .     .      .   A.  &  G.  113,  d.         H.  234. 

5.  The  unemphatie  order  of 

the  Lat.  sentence     .     .   A.  &  G.  343  and  x.    II.  559,  560. 

5.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  concedere,   -cessit,    -cessus,       0.  inimlcus      (in    negative     and 

fo  -if  it-Id.  amlcus),  unfriendly. 

2.  deliberate   (from   de   and    II-       7-  injuria,  injustice.,  wrong. 

brare,    to    weiy/i)    to    weigh  8.   intercedere,   -cessit,  -cessu- 

well,  ponder.  rus,  tor/o  between,  to  intervene. 

3.  dum,  OOTIJ.,  while,  until.  9.  jugum,  that  which  joins,  a  yoke', 

4.  facultas,  opportunity.  conquered  armies,  in  token  of 

5.  Id-us,  -uum,  fern,  by  exception,  submission,  were   often   com- 

the    Lie*,    the    13th    of    the  pelled  to  pass  under  a  yoke 

month,  except  in  March,  May,  consisting  of  a  spear  set  on  two 

July,    and    Oct.,    when   they  uprights  ;  rf.  Eng.  subjugate. 

came  on  the  15th.  10.  memoria, 


LESSON  XXXIII.  135 

11.  occidere,  -cidit,  -cisus    (ob     17-  si,  conj.,  if. 

and  ceedere,  to  cut},  to  cut     18.  spatium,  extent,  either  of  space 
down,  to  kill.  or  time. 

12.  pellere,    pepulit,    pulsus,    to     19.  sub,   prep,  with  accus.  or  abl., 

drive.  under. 

13.  putare,  to  think.  20.  sumere,    sumpsit,   sumptus, 
11.  quis,     quae,     quid,     indefinite  to  take  up,  to  assume. 

pron.,  any  one,  am/thing.  21.  tamen,  adv.,  yet,  nevertheless. 

15.  respondere,  -spondit,  -spon-  22.  temperare,  to  govern  one's  self, 

sus,  to  answer.  to  refrain. 

10.  reverti,  reversus,  dep.,  to  re-  23.  teiiere,  tenuit,  tentus,  to  hold. 

turn;    in  ths  pf.  tenses,  the  24.  velle,  voluit,  irreg.,  to  wish. 

stem  of  the  pf.  act.  form  rever- 

tit  was  used  by  Csesar. 

6.   EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Ea  facultas   quam   Helvetii  rogaverunt  non  concedenda  est. 
(b)  Romano  exercitu  ab    Helvetiis  jam  pulsd,  Csesar  cos  ire  per  pro- 
vinciam  non  patebatur.      (c)  Caesar  diem  ad  dellberandum,  ut  quam 
maximus  immerus  militum  sibi  esset,  sumpsit. 

2.  (a)  Men   of    unfriendly   disposition   are    not  likely   (about  to) 
refrain  from  wron£.     (b)  For  several  years  the  Romans  had  an  army 
in  the  province,      (c)  It  is  not  permitted  to  the  Helvetii  to  go  through 
the  province,  because  in   the  consulship  of  Lucius  Cassius  they  did 
harm. 

3.  (a)  The  province  must  not  be  seized,     (b)  Csesar  does  not  in- 
tend to  allow  the  Helvetii  to   cross  the   Rhone,     (c)  The  good  son 
may  see  the  soldiers  of  whom  he  has  becm  informed. 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  All  the  verbs  you  know  meaning  to  think.  2.  A  conj.  which 
in  some  sentences  suggests  both  time  and  purpose.  3.  The  differ- 
ence between  gerund  and  gerundive.  4.  All  the  compound  tenses 
learned  thus  far.  5.  Change  of  personal  pron.  in  Eng.  in  passing 
from  dir.  to  indir.  discourse.  6.  Difference  in  form  and  meaning  be- 
tween qui  and  quis,  quod  and  quid.  7-  Possible  meanings  for  the 
form  quae.  8.  Mittere,  mitti,  missus  est,  missus  esse.  9.  Pres. 
and  impf.  subjv.  in  3d  and  4th  conjug. 


136  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


LESSON    XXXIV. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  8,  through  prohibere  possit. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  milia  passuum  ;   cf.  XVII.  N.  7,  8  (a)  (b). 

2.  pedum  :   (a)  <ren.pl ur.  ;  stem  and  nom.  sing.  ?  XVIII.  Obs.  1; 
A.  &  G.  44,  II.  36,  2  ;  (b)  limited  by  sedecimand  depends  on  murum? 
deseribing  it  like  an  adj.;  similar  to  what  abl.  use? 

3.  perducit:   (a)  the  long  sentence  ending  here  is  not  difficult  if 
translated  in  order,  since  the  words  are  arranged  in  natural  groups  ; 
cf.  XXIV.  N.  4  (a),  Obs.  4  ;   (b)  the  verb  is  modified  by  legione  and 
militibus,  ablatives  of  means,1  by  the  phrases  a  lacii  and  ad  montem, 
by  mflia,  and  by  murum  and  fossam,  direct  obj. ;   which  of  these 
four  groups  of  modifiers  stands  nearest  the  verb?  why? 

4.  opere  :     (a)    opus,    nom.    sing.    neut. ;     cf.    tempus,    -oris ; 
(b)  why  abl.  ? 

5.  possit:    (a)   pres.    snbj.  ;    cf.   possent.    impf.    subj.,   XXIX. ; 
(b)  quo,  the  introductory  word  of  this  clause,  =  ut  eo,  that  by  this 
(means).      What  degree  of  comparison  immediately  follows  quo  in 
the  word  facilius  ? 

3.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  The     first     ten     cardinal 

numbers  .....   A.  &  G.  94.  H.  174. 

2.  3d    decl.    neut.    in    -us, 

-eris A.  &  G.  48,  d.       H.  61,  opus. 

1  Although  names  of  persons,  they  are  ablatives  of  means  rather  than  of  agent, 
because  the  persons  are  not  regarded  here  as  voluntary  agents  but  as  the  instruments 
which  Caesar  used. 


LESSON  XXXIV.  137 

3.  The      gen.     of      quality 

(especially   measure)    .  A.  &  G.  215  and  H.  396,  V.  and  N.I. 

4.  The    subjv.    of    purpose       b. 

after  quo      ....  A.  &  G.  317,  b.     H.  497,  II.  2. 

5.  The  order  of  the  modi- 

fiers of  the  verb     .     .  A.  &  G.  343.         H.  560,  567  and  3. 


4.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  altitudo,    height,    depth ;     cf.  10.  opus,  -eris,  a  work,  a  piece  of 

alt  us.  work. 

2.  castelliim,  a  small  fort,  a  castle.  11.  perducere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to 

3.  communire,  to  fortify  strongly.  lead  through. 

4.  disponere,  -posuit,  -positus,  12.  pes,  pedis,  a  foot  of  man  or 

to  place  apart,  here  and  there.  beast,    and    also    a    measure 

5.  fossa,  that  which  has  been  dug,  of  length. 

a  ditch.  13.  praesidium,  a  sitting  before,  a 

6.  interea,  adv.,  meanwhile*  guard. 

7.  invitus,  unwilling.  14.  sedecim  (sex  and  decem),  in- 

8.  murus,  a  wall.  decl.   numeral,    six  and  ten, 

9.  iiovem,  indecl.  numeral,  nine.  sixteen. 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Els  rebus  quas  secum  habebant  firmissimi  milites  Roman! 
octo  castella  communiverunt.     (b)  Lacu   Lemanno  Helvetii  contine- 
bantur.     (c)   Csesar,  lie  in  provincia  ulluin  inaleficium  facerent,  murum 
fossamque  perduxit.     (d)  Si  vi  trail  sire  couatl  erant,  mur5  fossaque 
prohibebantur. 

2.  (a)  All  the  legions  which  were  coming  together  had  not  yet 
arrived  at  the  Rhone,     (b)  The  soldiers  who  were  already  with  Caesar 
were   bringing   the    ditch   along  to    the   mountain   for   several  days. 
(G)  At   that   time  the  boundaries   of  Italy  (Italia)  were   far   distant 
from   the  Rhone,      (d]   Mount  Jura  was  overhanging,  so  that  a  very 
narrow  way  intervened  between  the  mountain  and  the  river. 

3.  (a)  Caesar  thought  it   was  not   fitting   for  the   Helvetii  to  go 
through  our  province,  the  men  of  which  were  not  yet  well  disposed. 
(b)  Ceesar,  when  they  asked  his  permission,  did  not  inform  the  Helvetii 


138  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

that  they  must  not  march  through  our  province,  (c)  Caesar  intends 
to  finish  these  works,  that  the  Helvetii  may  not  be  able  to  accomplish 
their  undertaking. 


6.    TOPICS  FOR  STUDY. 

1.  Instances  from  the  text  of  an  abl.  absolute  formed  with  a  noun 
and  a  noun,  a  noun  and  an  adj.,  a  noun  and  a  partic.  2.  A 
peculiarity  of  construction  in  militibus  perducit,  and  explanation. 
3.  Best  Eng.  expression  for  miirus  pedum  sedecim.  4.  Difference 
in  Eng.  between  may  a\\d  caw  and  their  Lat.  representatives.  5.  Decl. 
and  indecl.  cardinals  to  ten.  G.  The  adj.  case  of  the  noun.  7.  The 
adv.  case.  8.  One  use  of  the  latter  with  the  force  of  an  adj. 
9.  The  pres.  subjv.  of  esse  in  this  lesson  and  the  forms  of  esse  thus 
far  met  with.  10.  The  position  of  the  direct  obj. 


LESSON    XXXV. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  8,  Ubi  ea  to  the  end. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  dare  :  the   translation  of  Caesar's  words,  when  speaking  to  the 
legates,  is  :   "I  cannot,  consistently  with  the  custom  and  precedent 
(because  of  the  custom  and  precedent)  of  the  Roman  people,  give  to 
anv  one  the  right  of  way  through  the  province." 

2.  coiientur  ;  in  form  a  pres.  subjv.  pass,  of  the  1st  conjug. ;  cf. 
proficiscantur  XXVIII.,  conveniant  XXX. 

3  prohibiturum  :  (a)  prohibit-,  a  supine  stem  of  2d  conjug. ; 
pres.  stem,  prohibe- ;  pf.  stem,  prohibu- ;  (b)  supply  esse,  the  subj. 
of  which  is  se  in  the  preceding  clause;  (c)  Caesar's  words  when 
speaking  to  the  legates  :  "  I  shall  prevent." 


LESSON   XXXV. 


139 


4.  Helve tii  .  .  .  destiterunt  :  (a)  cf.,  for  order  and  translation 
of  this  sentence,  XXXilL  N.  3  (a),  XXXLV.  N.  3;  (b)  find  in  it  two 
abl.  of  separation,  six  abl.  of  means  ;  (c)  note  how  the  successive  adj. 
dejecti,  alii,  conati,  repulsi,  keep  the  subj.  Helvetii  in  rniud. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  sign  of  the  pres.   subjv.  is  -e-   in   the   1st  conjug.,  and 
-a-  in  the  3d  and  4th.     In  the  1st  and  3d  this  sign  takes  the  place 
of  the  final  vowel  of  the  pres.  stem,  in  the  4th  it  is  added  to  that 
stem. 

2.  The  supine  stem  of  the  2d  conjug.  may  be  found  by  weaken- 
ing the  final  vowel  of  the  pres.  stem  to  -i  and  adding  -t. 


4.  VOCABULARY. 


1.  complures,  complura  neuf., 

very  many. 

2.  conatus,    -us     (conari),     an 

attempt;    cf.    conatum    ;iud 
XXXIT.  N.  1,  Obs.  1. 

3.  concursus,      -us     (con     and 

currere,  to  run),  a  running 
tor/ ether. 

4.  dejicere,  -jecit,  -jectus,  to  cast 

down. 

5.  desistere,      destitit,      desti- 

turus,  to  stand  off",  to  desist. 

6.  exemplum,  an  example. 

7.  mterdiu,  adv.,  fit/  day. 

8.  jungere,  junxit,   junctus,    to 

join. 

9.  minimus    (irreg.   sup.   of  par- 

vus),  least,  very  small. 


10.  munltio,  a  fortifying,  a  forti- 

Ji  cat  ion. 

11.  navis,1  a  ship,  a  boat. 

12.  neeare,  to  say  .  .  .  not,  to  deny. 

13.  noctu,  adv.,  by  ninht. 

14.  iionnunquam,  not  never,  some- 

times ;  cf.  nonnullus. 

15.  ostendere,    -tendit,   -tentus, 

(obs  for  ob,  and  tendere 
to  stretch)  to  stretch  in  Jhe 
way  of,  to  show. 

10.  perrumpere,  -rupit,  -ruptus, 
to  break  through. 

17.  ratis   a  raft. 

18.  repellere,  -pulit,  -pulsus,  to 

drire  back. 

19.  telum,  a  ireapon. 

20.  venire,  venit,  ventum,  to  come. 


1  It  will  be  understood  that  nouns  in  -is  have  the  gen.  like  the  nom.  unless 
otherwise  stated.  Nouns  in  -is  with  gen.  in  -idis,  are  mostly  Greek,  and  but  few 
of  them  are  found  in  Caesar. 


140  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  («)   Naves  quibus  numcn  translre  conati  sunt,  parvae  fuerunt. 
(&)  His  omnibus  conatis  repulsis,  difficiliore  itinere  inter  montem  Ju- 
ram  et  flumcn  Rliodanum  ire  constituerunt.      (c)  Cum  perrumpere 
conarentur,  tells  a  mllitibus  Remains  repulsi  sunt.     (d)  Ripam  flu- 
ininis  muro  sedecim  pedura  communlvit. 

2.  (a)  The  Helvetii  went  into  the  territory  of  their  neighbors,  that 
they   might   roam   about   more  widely,      (b)   The  Helvetii  were  not 
able  to  break  down  the  works  of  the  Romans,      (c)   Caesar  says  that 
he  will  not  allow  the  Helvetii  by  using  (having  used)  force  to  hold 
the  bank  of  the  river. 

3.  (a)  Caesar  intends  to  keep   the  Helvetii   out  of  the  province. 
(£>)   If  Caesar  is  unwilling,  they  think  they  will  break  through  the  wall 
which  he  has  made,     (c)  The  Helvetii  were  trying  to  drive  back  the 
Romans  from  the  Avail,     (d)  In  order  to  cross  the  river,  they  use  very 
many  boats  which  they  have  seized. 


6.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  The  number  of  facts  stated  in  the  last  sentence  of  the  Text. 
2.  Difference  in  form  between  pres.  ind.  and  pres.  subjv.  of  1st, 
3d,  and  4th  con  jug.  3.  Comparative  frequency  thus  far  of  the  differ- 
ent con  jug.  4.  Difference  in  form  and  meaning  between  venit  and 
venit.  5.  The  Lat.  for  they  returned,  they  return.  6.  Two  mean- 
ings of  qua.  7.  Exact  difference  in  meaning  of  conatum  and  co- 
natus,  -us.  8.  Decline  both. 


LESSON  XXXVI.  141 


LESSON    XXXYI. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  i.  9,  through  obstrictas  volebat. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  Relinquebatur   ...    via ;    for    order,    cf.    Erant  .   .   .   duo 
XXIX.  and  erat  .  .   .  uiia  XXXI. 

2.  possent :  (a)  impf.  subjv.  after  cum,  which  is  not  the  prep,  as 
one  might  at  first  suppose  from  position  of  sponte ;  when  this  verb 
is  reached,  sponte  proves  to  be  an  abl.  of  means,  which  is  used  with- 
out a  prep. ;   (b)  note  that  his  is  drawn  out  of  its  position  within  the 
cum  clause  and  becomes  the  first  word  in  the  sentence,  because  it 
is  the  word  of  the  sentence  most  closely  connected  with  the  preced- 
ing-.1    What  is  its  antec.  in  preceding  sentence? 

3.  eo  deprecatore  :    (a)   eo  is  here  a  substantive,  not  an  adj.  ; 
(b)  const,   of  eo  deprecatore?   XIII.  N.  5   (b)  (c),  Obs.  1;   XXIII. 
N.  5  (b)  and  Sequanis  invitis,   above.     What  parts  of  speech  are 
combined  to  form  this  const.  ? 

4.  plurimum  poterat;  cf.  XXII.  N.  7  (c). 

5.  studebat;    used    with   rebus   the  dat.  of  the   thing  desired; 
cf.  and  contrast  imperare,  persuadere. 

6.  beneficio;  cf.  nom.  sing,  beneficium  with  maleficium,  matri- 
monium,  imperium,  indicium,  judicium.     In  what  respect  are  they 
alike  in  form  and  in  meaning? 

7.  volebat,   he   was   wishing:    (a)   irreg.    verb  velle,   to  wish; 
(b)  expanded  form  for  quam  plurimas  ?  XXXI.  N.  5. 

1  The  teacher  will  find  a  full  discussion  of  the  order  of  words  and  clauses  in  the 
Lat.  sentence,  abundantly  illustrated  by  examples,  in  Pott's  "  Hints  toward  Lat. 
Prose  Composition  "  (Maomillan).  The  point  here  noted  is  treated  on  pp.  91  and 
92.  On  the  whole  subject,  Thacher's  Madvig,  pp.  425-440  may  also  be  consulted. 


142  INDUCTIVE   LATIN    METHOD. 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  ending's  -tio,  -tus,  -ium  name  the  action. 

2.  The  verbs  persuadere,  imperare,  studere  take  the  dat. 

3.  Either  a  noun  and  a   noun,  a  noun  and  a  pron.,  a  noun  and  a 
partic.,  or  a  noun  and  an  ordinary  adj.  may  be  combined  to  form  the 
abl.  absolute  const. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Position  of  word  closely  con- 
nected with  preceding  or 
following  sentence  .  .  .  A.  &  G.  344,  b.  II.  569,  III.  1. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  angustiae,  -arum  (angustus),  7-  novus,  new ;   novae  res,  new 

narrowness,  straits,   a  narrow  t/iinr/s,  revolution. 

pax  ft.  8.  obstriiigere,  -strinxit,  -stric- 

2.  beiieficium    (bene,  well,   and  tus,  to  bind. 

facere)  ircll-rloi/ifj,  n  favor.  9.  propter,   prep,  with  accus.,  on 

3.  deprecator  (deprecari,  to  beg  account,  of. 

off,  to  intercede)  an  intercessor,  10.  relinquere,  -liquit,  -lictus,  to 

mediator.  leacr. 

4.  gratia,  favor  cither  shown  or  re-  11.  spontis,    sponte,   wanting    in 

ceived,  hence,  either  kindness  other  cases,  in  abl.,  with  sua,  it 

or  popularity.  means  of  one's  oivn  accord,  by 

5.  impetrare,  to  obtain  one's   re-  one*  self. 

f/itcxf.  12.  studere,  studuit,  partic.  want- 

6.  largitio,  l/iriah  yi^ing,  bribery,  ing,  to  be  eager  for,  to  desire. 

liberality. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Helvet.ii  Dumnorige  deprecatore  a  Sequanis  impetrant. 
(J)  Sequani  a  Diunnorige  induct!  eos  per  suos  fines  ire  patiuntur. 
(c)  Altera  via  Helvetii,  quod  aliam  viam  liabent  nullam,  exire 
volunt.  (d)  Sua  sponte  Sequanis  persuadere  non  possunt  ut  sibi 
eorum  voluntate  iter  facere  inter  inontem  et  flumen  liceat. 


LESSON  XXXVII.  143 

2.  (a)  If  their  neighbors  are  not  willing,  the  Helvetii  intend  to 
compel  them.     (6)  They  say  it  is  necessary  to  go  through  the  territory 
of  the  Sequani,  because  Caesar  did  not  allow  them  to  go  through  the 
province.      (c)    That  (woman),  whom   Dumnorix  had  married,    was 
the  daughter  of  Orgetorix. 

3,  (a)  They  sent  an  embassy  to  persuade  the  Sequani.      (b)  Dum- 
norix,  the  Haecliian   chief,   was   of  an    unfriendly   mind  toward  the 
Romans,  because  he  desired  revolution,      (c)  Dumnorix  asks  that  the 
Helvetii  may  cross  the  territory  of  the  Sequani.     (d)  Orgetorix,  who 
is  (now)  dead,  and  Dumnorix  were  two  very  powerful  chiefs. 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  Lat.  for  to  marry  (said  of  the  man),  to  give  in  marriage, 
revolution,  to  favor  revolution,  to  be  very  powerful,  as  many  as 
possible.  2o  He  can,  he  could,  he  may,  he  might.  3.  Difference 
between  imperare  and  impetrare.  4.  Two  nouns  plur.  in  form 
which  may  be  sing,  in  sense.  5.  List  of  verbs  used  thus  far  which 
are  followed  by  the  inf.  without  a  subj.  6.  Esse  and  posse^in  pres., 
impf.,  pf.,  plpf.  iud.  3d  sing.,  and  in  pres.  and  impf.  subjv.  7.  De- 
cline together  is  deprecator,  ea  civitas.  8.  Difference  between  the 
dat.  with  studere  and  that  with  persuadere- 


LESSON    XXXVII. 

( 

1.    TEXT. 
Csesar,  B.  G.  I.  9,  Itaque  rem  through  in  Provincia  in  10. 

2.   NOTES. 

1.  patiantur:  (a)  pres.  subjv.  in  an  obj.  clause  of  purpose;  cf. 
XX.  N.  5  ;  (b)  a  4th  conjug.  form  ;  cf.  paterentur,  impf.  subjv.  3d 
conjug.  ;  also  persuadere  but  persuasit,  facere  but  adficiebantur, 
consciscere  but  cousciverit,  conveniant  but  convenerant ;  (c)  cf. 
proficiscantur,  pres.  subjv.  3d  conjug.,  XXVIII. 


144  INDUCTIVE   LATIN    METHOD. 

2.  utl      .  .   dent :  (a)  uti  is  the  conj.,  not  the  inf. ;  (b)  the  clause 
is  the  obj.  of  perficit;    (c)  obsides  is  the  obj.  of  dent ;    (d}  mode 
and  tense  of  dent? 

3.  Sequani;    the   subj.   of  dent    drawn   forward   from  preceding 
clause. 

4.  prohibeant :    («)  pres.  subjv.  2d  conjug.  ;   for  form,  cf.  dent, 
patiantur,  proficiscantur  and  XXXV.  Obs.  1 ;   (b)  case  of  itinere, 
preceding'. 

5.  Tolosatium ;    gen.    plur. ;    cf.   same   case  in   Santoiium,  just 
before.     What  difference  in  stem  ending  is  indicated  by  these  forms  ? 
What  is  the  nom.  plur.  in  each  case  ? 

6.  civitSs  ;  the  state  of  the  Tolosates  is  here  referred  to. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Some  verbs  have  forms  of  different  conjug.     The  most  common 
of  those  already   used   are  facere,   capere,   pati,  jubere,  suadere, 
venire  and   their  compounds.      Such  verbs  are  said  to  belong  to  the 
co n jug.  indicated  by  the  pres.  inf. 

2.  The  sign  of  the  pres.  subjv.  in  the  1st  conjug.  is  -6-,  in  the  2d, 
3d,  and  4th  it  is  -£-. 


4.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  itaque,  and  so,  therefore.  fulfillment  of  an  agreement; 

2.  obses,  obsidis,  a  hostage ;  host-  if  the  agreement  was  broken, 

ages  were  human  beings  given  the  hostages  might  be  killed, 

by  one  person  or  nation  to  an-       3.  renuntiare,  to  bring  back  word, 
other,  in  order  to  guarantee  the  to  report. 


5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Helvetii,  obsidibus  datis,  sese  obstrinxerunt  ut  sine  injuria 
fines  Sequanorum  transirent.  (b)  Non  perfacile  factu  est  a  maleficio 
maximam  multitudinem.  cupidam  bellandi  prohibere.  (c)  Civitas 
quam  Ctesar  non  longe  a  Tolosatibus  abesse  dixit  a  provincia  qua- 


LESSON   XXXVIII.  145 

draginta  passuum  milia  abest.     (d)  Dumnorigis  gratia  Helvetii  im- 
petrant  ut  itinere  quod  sit  difficilius  proficiscantur. 

2.  («)  He  took  this  commission  upon  himself,  and  had  (perficere) 
the  two  states  exchange  (impf.  subjv.)  hostages.     (b)  Influenced  by  the 
desire  to  roam  about,  the  Helvetii  give  hostages  to  the  Sequani,  in 
order  that  they  may  eross  their  territory,      (c)  On  account  of  the  nar- 
rowness of  the  way,  it  was  necessary  to  draw  the  carts  one  at  a  time. 

3.  (a)  The  mountain  was  overhanging,  so  that  a  very  few  could  stop 
them,     (b)  They  used  to  give  (were  giving)  their  sons  and  daughters 
as  hostages   (appositive).     (c)  Caesar  is  informed  that  the  Helvetii 
are  about  to  make  a  journey  to  the  vicinity  of  Tolosa,  a  state  of  the 
province. 

6.     TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Deel.  of  itinere,  Santonum ;  qui,  quse,  quod.  2.  The  best 
Eng.  for  obsides  uti  inter  se  dent  perficit.  3.  For  quae  civitas. 
4.  Different  kinds  of  purpose  clauses  in  this  lesson.  5.  The  object, 
in  general,  of  giving  hostages.  6.  The  correctness  of  Caesar's  state- 
ment about  the  distance  of  the  Santones  from  the  Tolosates. 


LESSON    XXXVIII, 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  10,  Id  si  through  ire  contendit. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  id  ;  for  position,  cf.  his  XXXVI.  N.  2  (b). 

2.  fieret :  (a)  for  voice,  see  fiebat  XVI.,  Vocab. ;   (5)  mode  and 
tense  ? 

3.  cum  ;  for  position,  cf.  XV.  N.  7  (c). 

4.  futurum  :   (a)  with  esse,  to  be  supplied,  forms  the  fut.    inf. 
act.  of  esse  ;  cf.  conciliat-urum  (esse)  XXIII. ;   (b)  for  fu-,  cf.  fu-it 
XIII. 

10 


146  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

5.  maxime   frumentariis,   most  fruitful,  very  fruitful ;    a  sup. 
degree  formed   by  prefixing  the  adv.  maxime,  most  greatly,  most,  to 
the  adj.,  instead  of  by  adding1  -issimus. 

6.  ut  .   .   .  haberet  :   (a)  clause  of  result;  cf.   XXIX.  N.  6  (a); 
(b)  a  substantive  clause,  subj.  of  futurum  (ease)  ;  cf.  ut  .   .  .  vaga- 
rentur  XVI.,  which  is  a  result  clause  and  subj.  of  fiebat ;   (c)  subj. 
is  provincia,  suggested  by  the  gen.  provinciae  in  preceding  clause; 
(d)  for  case  of  locis,  cf.  XXI.  N.  3  (b)  ;   (e)  patentibus  is  here  an 
ordinary  adj.   limiting  locis,  though  in  form  a  pres.  partic. ;    nom. 
pate-ns,  lying  open,  from  patere  ;  cf.  orie-ns,  pote-ns. 

7.  praefecit :  followed   by  dir.  obj.  legatum,  and  indir.  muniti- 
6m ;   cf.  XIX.  N.  12  (c). 

8.  tres  ;    agreement  ? 

9.  coiitendit  :   (a)  On  reaching  the  end  of  the  sentence  with  this 
word,  how  may  we  decide  whether  qu5  in  the  preceding  clause  is  a 
pron.  or  an  adv.?  (b)  for  the  effect  of  rapid  succession  of  pres.  tenses 
in  this  sentence,  cf.  XXX  L  N.  10. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  fut.  act.  partic.  combined  with  esse  forms  the  fut.  inf.  act. 

2.  The  ending  of  the  pres.  act.  partic.  is  -ns. 

3.  The  stems  of  esse  are  es-  pres.,  fu-  pf.,  fut-  supine. 


4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Comparison  by  adv A.  &  G.  89,  d.       H.  170. 

2.  Substantive  clauses  of  result     .  A.  &  G.  332,  a.    H.    501,    and 

I.  1. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  bellicosus  (bellum),  warlike.        4.  educere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to 

2.  circum,     prep,     with     accus.,  lead  out. 

around,  about.  5.  frumentarius    (frumentum), 

3.  conscribere,  -scripsit,  -scri-  belonging  to  grain,  fruitful. 

ptus,  to  write  together,  enroll,       6.  hlbernus  (hiems,  winter,}  be- 
enlist.  longing  to  winter ;   hlberna, 


LESSON   XXXVIII.  147 

-orum  (with  word  for  quar-  legere,  to  choose),  to  under- 

ters,  camp,  understood),  winter  stand,  to  know. 

quarters.  10    praeficere,    -fecit,    -fectus,   to 

7.  hiemare,  to  pass  the  winter,  to  put  before,  to  set  over,  to  put 

winter.  in  command. 

8.  ibi,  there ;  cf.  ubi,  where,  when.  11.  quinque, /<;<?. 

9.  intellegere  or  -ligere,  -lexit,  12.  Titus,  a  Roman  first  name,  usu- 

lectus   (inter,   between,  and  ally  represented  by  initial  T. 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Tres  legiones  quas  circum  Aquileiam  habebat  ex  hlbernis 
eductae   sunt.     (b)  Novae  legiones  in  ea  parte  Italiae  quae   proxima 
Galliae  est  con  scribe  ndse  suut.      (c)   Legiones  Romanse,  cum  Caesar 
in  Gallia  esset,  nuinero  quattuor  hominum  milia  erant.     (d)  Futurum 
est  cum  periculo  ut  provincia  homines  inimico  animo  finitirnos  patenti- 
bus  agiis  habeat. 

2.  (a)   Caesar,  having  led  three  legions  out  of  winter  quarters,  de- 
termines to  enroll  new  legions,     (b)  It  happened  that  three  legions 
were  already   in  winter  quarters   near  Aquileia.1      (c)   The   soldiers 
of   the    legions    which    were   about   to   wage    war   were   very    brave. 
(d)   Caesar   did  not   allow   the   Gauls    to    seize   the   territory   of  the 
Eoman  people. 

3.  (a)  The    senate    had  put   Caesar  in    command   of  the  army. 
(b)   Caesar  knows  that  those  places  where  the  Tolosates  dwell  are  very 
fruitful,      (c)  For  several  days  he  was  hastening  into  Italy  by  forced 
inarches. 

7.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  Lat.  for  arms,  weapons,  lieutenant,  winter  quarters,  forced 
marches,  fortification.  '2.  To  march,  to  enroll,  to  levy  upon,  to  put 
in  command  of.  3.  Dec!,  of  is,  ea,  id.  4.  Gender  and  decl.  of 
munitio.  5.  Connection  between  derivation  of  intellegere  and 
its  meaning  to  understand.  6.  The  formation  of  pres.  and  fut.  partic. 
in  all  conjug.  7.  The  tenses  in  which  esse  is  used  as  an  auxiliary. 
8.  Three  ways  of  saying  very.  9.  Substantive  clauses  in  text  thus 
far. 

1  Pronounced  in  Eng.  Aq-we-le-yah. 


148  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON    XXXIX. 

1.     TEXT. 

Caesar,  B.  G.  T.  10,  Ibi  Centrones  through  agros  populabantur 
in  11. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  superiSribns  :   for  form  of  nom.,  cf.  XVI.  N.  5  (c). 

2.  compluribus  his  prceliis  pulsis  :   (a)  for  form  of  pulsis,  see 
pulsum    XXX  LI  I.  ;     (b)   pulsis    agrees    with    his,    witli    which    it 
forms  an  abl.  absolute;   (c)  proeliis  is  an  abl.  of  means,  limited  by 
compluribus. 

3.  die;  why  abl.?  XX L  N.  2. 

4.  septimo,  seventh;  tells   which   oue,   or  the  order,  in  a  series, 
hence  called  an  ordinal ;  cf.  the  corresponding1  cardinal  septem,  and 
the  ordinals,  primi,  Jirst,  below,  tertiam,  third,  III. ;   note  that  the 
ordinals  are  of  the  1st  and  2d  clecl. 

5.  eorum  :   (a)  antec. ?  (b)  Why  is  not  su6s  used  here? 

V 

3.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 
1.    The  first  ten  ordinals      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  94.        H.  174,  179. 

4.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  citerior,  adj.  in  comp.  (positive       4.  popular!,  to  lay  icatle. 

not    found),    nearer,    hither;  5.  primus,//-^. 

citerior    Gallia,    Gaul    this  6.  septimus,  seventh. 

side  the  Alps,  i.  e.  the  lloman  7.  superus,  superior  comp.,  su- 

or     eastern     side;    ulterior  premus   or  summus   sup., 

Gallia,  Gaul  beyond  the  Alps.  high,  higher,  highest ;  supe- 

2.  inde,  from  that  place,  thence ;  rior,     when    used    of    time, 

cf.  ibi,  there.  means  former. 

3.  Ocelum,   a  town  iu   Cisalpine       S.  traducere     or     transducere, 

Gaul.  -duxit,     -ductus,     to     lead 

across;    cf.  transire. 


LESSON   XXXIX.  149 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Mllites  quos  Caesar  conscripserat  citeriore  ex  provincia  con- 
veniebant.      (b)  Caturiges   itinere   nostras  legiones   prohibere   conati 
erant.     (c)  Caesar,  multis  occisis,  imle  reliquos  pcpulit.      (c?)   Caesar, 
quod  Helvetios  fminentarios  Haeduorum  agros  popular!  intellegebat, 
ut  eos  prohiberet,  magnis  itiueribus  traus  Alpes  contendit. 

2.  (a)  The  last  town  which  is  in  the  hither  province  is  called  Oce- 
lum.1     (&)  It  was  necessary  for  the  Helvetii  to  lay  waste  the  fields,  in 
order  that  they  might  have  a  supply  of  grain,     (c)  The  Helvetii  had 
at  length  marched  across  the  territory  of  the  Sequani,1  and  were  roam- 
ing about  in  the  fields  of  the  Hasdui. 

3.  (a)  For  many  years  the  Haedui  had  been  friends  of  the  Bomaris. 
(&)  When  these  had  been  routed  by  Caesar,  he  led  his  army  across  the 
Alps,     (c)  The  result  was  (it  came  to  pass)  that  the  Gauls  who  dwelt 
in  the  mountains  could  not  drive  back  the  Romans. 


6.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Adj.  irreg.  in  comparison  found  thus  far.  2.  The  complete 
decl.  of  superioribus.  3.  Two  riom.  possible  for  the  form  Ocelo. 
4.  The  three  stems  of  ducit,  pulsis,  pervenit.  5.  The  Lat.  for  there, 
thence,  where.  6.  The  difference  in  meaning  between  ordinals  arid 
cardinals.  7.  The  3d  sing,  and  plur.  iud.  and  subjv.  act.  and  pass, 
of  all  the  tenses  you  know  of  occupatis,  prohibere,  pulsis. 


1  In  Eng.  O-ce-]um  not  O-ce-lum,  Se-kwa-nl  not  Se-kwa-ni  ;  the  tendency  in 
Engr.  being  to  shorten  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  in  words  of  three  syllables 
accented  on  the  first.  H.  11,  3  and  1). 


150 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


LESSON   XL. 


1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  11,  Haedui,  cum  through  non  debuerint. 

The  passage  of  indir.  discourse  in  this  lesson  is  changed  to  its  direct  Lat. 
form  just  below  on  the  left  of  the  page.  On  the  right  the  indir.  form  is  given  for 
comparison  with  the  direct.  The  words  changed  iu  passing  from  the  original  to 
the  quoted  form  are  in  full-faced  type. 


The  exact  words  of  the  Hscduan  Am- 
bassadors : 

Ita  —  -  omni  tempore  de  populo 
Romano  merit!  sumus,  ut  panic 
in  conspectu  exercit.us  R6ma.nl 
agii  vastan,  liberi  nostri  in  scr- 
vitutem  abduci,  oppida  expiignarl 
non  debuerint. 


The    words  of  the    Ambassadors    as 
quoted  : 

Ita  se  onini  tem]>ore  de  populo 
Romano  meritos  esse,  ut  psene 
in  couspectu  exercitus  nostri 
agii  vastari,  liberi  eorum  in  ser- 
vitutem  abduci,  oppida  expugnarl 
non  debuerint. 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  sua,  their  own  things,  possessions  ;  cf.  XXIX.  N.  6  (b). 

2.  rogatum,  to  ask;  (a)   supine   in   -um,  denotes   purpose  after 
mittunt;  cf.  factu  XXI.  N.I;   (b)  it  is   evident  at  this   point  that 
the  preceding  cum,  which  is  followed  by  the  subjv.  possent,  denotes 
cause  as  well  as  time;  they  sent  for  aid  because  they  could  not  de- 
fend themselves,  not  simply  at  the  time  when  they  could  not  defend 
themselves.     In  XXXI.  and  XXXVI.  also,  cum  with  the  subjv.  ex- 
presses both  time  and   cause.     The   Eng.  when  in  many  sentences 
is  both  temporal  and   causal.     In  XIV.,  the  force  of  cum  with  the 
subjv.  seems  to  be  almost  wholly  causal. 

3.  omni:   (a)  -I  is  the  ending  of  abl.  sing.,  as  it  is  in  all  adj.  in 
-is,  -e  ;   (b}  omni  tempore,  at  all  times. 

4.  meritos  esse  :   (a)  for  mode  and  tense,  see  XXXIII.  N.  2  (I), 
Obs.  1;  (b)  for  stem  merit-,  see  XXXV.  N.  3  (a),  Obs.  2;   (e)  cf.  with 


LESSON   XL.  151 

the  words  of  direct  discourse,  merit!  sumus  (dep.  verb),  we  have 
deserved;  sumus,  ive  are,  is  for  es-u-mus  (cf.  es-u-nt)  ;  the  end- 
ing -mus  means  we  just  as  -nt  means  they ;  (d )  se,  the  subj.  of 
meritos  esse,  is  expressed  as  a  separate  word,  while  the  subj.  of 
merit!  sumus  is  not  so  expressed,  as  it  is  indicated  in  the  ending 
-mus. 

5.  nostri  :  (a)  gen.  sing,  limiting  exercitus  ;   (I)  Caesar,  a  Roman, 
writing  for  Roman  readers,  uses  the  word  nostr!,  our;  to  the  Ha> 
duan  ambassadors  the  army  was  not  our  army  but  the  Roman  army, 
hence  Roman!. 

6.  eorum  :   (a)  depends  on  liber!  ;    (6)  to  the  Hredui,  our  chil- 
dren not  their  children,  hence  nostri  in  the  direct  form. 

7.  debuerint:    (a)   pf.   subjv.    of   the    2d    conjug.,    stem   debu- ; 
cf.  habu-erat   XX. ;  tense  sign  -eri-,  as   in  all  conjug.,  cf.  consciv- 
eri-t  XXV.  ;    (b)  a  subjv.  of  result;  cf.  XXLX.  N.  6  (a)  •    (c)  when 
this  verb  is  translated  ought,  the  pres.  inf.,  after  it,  is  best  represented 
in  Eng.  by  the  pf.  inf. ;  thus,  our  children  ought  not  to  have  been  led 
away. 

3.     OBSERVATIONS 

1.  The  ending  is  -I  in  the  abl.  sing,  of  adj.  in  -is,  -e. 

2.  The  pers.  ending  -mus  is  that  of  the  1st  pers.  plur. 

3.  The  sign  of  the  pf.  subjv.  act.  in  all  conjug.  is  -eri-. 

4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  The  use  of  the  supine  in  -um    .  A.  &  G-.  302.         H.  546. 

2.  Cum  causal A.  &  G.  326.         H.  517. 

3.  The  subj.  of  the  inf.  in  indir. 

discourse  regularly  expressed   A.  &  G.  336,  a.    H.  530,  N.  3). 

4.  Personal  pronouns  as  subj.  often 

omitted A.  &  G.  194,  a.    H.  446. 

5.  Translation   of   pres.   inf.   after 

past  tense  of  debere  ...  A.  &  G.  238,  a,    H.  537,  1. 

and  Rein. 


152  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


5.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  abducere, -duxit,  -ductus,  to       6.  expugnare  (tojight  ouf)  to  take 

lead  aicay.  by  storm. 

2.  auxilium,  hdp,  aid.  7.  ita,  adv.,  so. 

3.  conspectus,  -us  (conspicere,       8.  liberi  (the  sing.,  meaning  child, 

to  ace)  xiyht.  not  found),  children. 

4.  debere,  debuit,  debitus  (de       9.  merer!,  meritus,  to  merit,  de- 

and  habere,  to  have  or  keep  serve,  earn, 

from  some  one)  to   owe,  to  be  10.  paene,  almost, 

bound;  debet,  he  ought.  11.  servitus,     -utis,     (servus,    a 

5.  defendere,  -fendit,  -fens as,  to  si  it  re)  servitude. 

ward  oJ/'}  to  defend.  12.  vastare    (vastus,     empty)    to 

make  empty,  to  lay  waste. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)    Agii    Hacduonim    erant    finibus    Sequanorura    proximi. 
(b)  HuHlui,  legatis   missis,  auxilium  rogaverunt.     (c)  Ob  eas  causas 
nostris  agiis  prohiberl  nori  debemus. 

2.  (a)  Almost  in   sight  of  a  brave  army,  our  children  are  being 
carried   away   into   slavery,     (b)  When    the  Helvetii  were   marching 
through  fruitful  fields,  they  did  not  refrain  from  wrong,      (c)  Since 
Cresar  was  not   very   far  distant,  the    Hsedui    sent    ambassadors    to 
him. 

3.  (a)  The  Helvetii  ought  to  have  crossed  the  territory  near  their 
route  (iter)  without  wrong-doing,     (b)  The  Haedui  have  deserved  so 
well  (have  so  deserved)  at  the  hands  of  (from)  the  Roman  people,  that 
Caesar  ought  to  have  sent  an  army  into  their  fields,      (c)  By  the  aid 
of  Caesar  they  defend  all  their  property  and  the  towns  which  have 
been  taken. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  A  new  pers.  ending.  2.  A  new  tense  sign.  3.  The  abl.  sing, 
of  adj.  in  -is.  4.  The  two  supines  and  their  uses.  5.  The  mode 
used  with  cum  causal.  6.  How  the  idea  of  cause  is  developed  from 
the  idea  of  time.  7.  Where  the  subj.  is,  in  the  sentence  eat. 

8.  Difference    between    dicit    se    rogare    and    dicit    eum    rogare. 

9.  Two  ways   of  saying  all  tilings   in   Lat.       10.  The   conjug.   and 
exact  meaning  of  the  Eng.  verb  ought. 


LESSON  XLL  153 


LESSON    XLI. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  11,  eodem  tempore  to  the  end. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  eodem,  the  same  ;  the  abl.  sing.  neut.  of  idem,  eadem,  idem, 
composed  of  is,  ea,  id  and  the  urideclined  termination  -dem  ;  cf.  idem 
XXL  N.  4. 

2.  AmbarrT,  the   name   of  a  people ;  in  apposition  with  Heedui, 
the  Hcedui  Ambarri. 

3.  Caesarem  certiorem  faciunt ;  for  pass,  form  of  the  expression, 

cf.  xxxir.  N.  2. 

4.  depopulates ;  though  a  dep.  verb,  pass,  in  sense  as  well  as  in 
form  in  this  instance. 

5.  se  .  .   .  prohibere  ;  certiorem  faciunt  is  equivalent  to  a  verb 
of  saying,  and  is  therefore  followed  by  an  inf.  with  subj.  accus. 

6.  reliqui :  partitive  gen.  of  reliquum,  which  is  here  a  neut.  noun 
meaning  the  rest ;  it  depends  upon  nihil. 

7.  statuit  :  (a)  may  from  its  form  be  either  pres.  or  pf.  ind.  ;  it  is 
probably  the  pf.  in  this  case ;   (b)  for  the  preceding  exspectandum, 
cf.  XXXIII.  N.  3 ;   (c)  sibi  is  a  dat.  of  the  agent,  used  with  the  ger- 
undive with  the  force  of  the  abl.  of  agent. 

8.  pervenirent :  (a)  impf.  subjv.  of  the  4th  conjug. ;  (b)  for  ex- 
planation of  mode,  cf.  XXXIII.  N'.  7  (b)  (c). 

3.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  The    decl.    of    Idem,    eadem, 

idem A.  &  G.  101.         H.  186,  VI. : 

p.  73,  foot- 
note 6, 


154  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  The  pass,  meaning  of   the  pf. 

panic,  in  dep.  verbs    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  135,  b.     H.  231,  2. 

3.  The  dat.  of  the  agent       .     .     .  A.  &  G.  232.         H.    388,    and 

2 ;  also  foot- 
note 3. 

4.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  consanguineus,  adj.   or   noun  bad) ;    in  plur.  goods,  posses- 

(con    and    sanguis,    blood},  sions. 

a k'ni  by  blood.  7-  faga, flitjht. 

2.  consumere,  -sumpsit,  -sump-       8.  necessarius,      necessary;      as 

tas    (con,  intensive,   10  holly ,  no  an,   a  close  friend  or  near 

and  sumere,  to  take),  to  con-  relative. 

aitme,  destroy.  9.  praeter,  prep,  with  accus.,  along 

3.  denaonstrare,  to  show.  b>/,  beyond,  except. 

4.  depopulate,  to  lay  waste.  10.  solum,  the  soil,  the  ground. 

5.  exspectare,  to  wait  for,  to  ex-  11.  statuere,  statuit,  statutus,  to 

pect.  cause  to   stand,    to   establish, 

6.  fortuna,  fortune  (either  good  or  to  decide. 


5.   EXERCISES. 

1.  («)    Quibus  rebus  deinousti'atls,   Caesar  in   agros    Hseduorum 
contendere  constituit.     (b}  Multa  milia  jumentorum  ab  Helvetiis  jam 
consumpta  erant.     (c)  H?€  res  Caesaii,  principi  Romano,  cum  Hsedul 
Romfinls  amici  sint,  non  conredendae  sunt.      (d)  Caesar,  cum  certior 
factus  esset  magnam  mnltitudinem  Helvetiorum,  oppidls  expugnatls, 
liberos  sociorum  abducere,  permotus  est. 

2.  («)  The  Helvetii  did  very  great  wrong,  because  tliey  were  un- 
friendly to  their  neighbors.      (5)  Caesar  informs  the  Haedui  that  he 
will  not  allow  the  Helvetii  to  seize  their  towns,     (c)  We  cannot  defend 
our  children  from  violence. 

3.  (a)  The  Allobroges  are  leaving  the  villages  which  they  possess 
across  the  Rhone,      (b)  The  multitude  is  not  easily  kept  out  of  the 
towns,  and  nothing  has  been  left  but  the  soil,      (c)  Caesar  says  that 
he  ought  to  drive  out  these  men  if  he  can. 


LESSON   XLIT.  155 


6.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Difference  between  idem  and  idem  in  form  and  meaning. 
2.  Analysis  of  pervemrent.  3.  The  Lat.  for  he  informed  Ctzsar, 
Ccesar  was  informed.  4.  Two  cases  which  express  agency.  5.  The 
lit.  meaning1  of  the  gerundive,  and  how  the  idea  of  necessity  comes 
from  this  meaning.  6.  Three  ways  of  expressing  necessity  in  Lat. 
7.  The  dir.  disc,  in  Eug.  for  the  indir.  disc,  of  this  lesson.  8.  The 
two  parts  of  speech  possible  for  the  form  facile.  9.  The  comparison 
of  certior,  10.  The  iioin.  sing,  of  possessiones, 


LESSON    XLII. 

REVIEW   of   LESSONS   XXVII.  to  XLI.  inclusive. 
1.   TEXT.  — CAESAR,  B.  G.  I,  5  TO  11  INCLUSIVE. 

1.  2.  3.  Follow  implicitly  the  directions  given  in  XII.,  under 
"Text,"  1,  2,  and  3. 

4.  Make  a  study  of  the  material  of  the  text  under  the  following 
heads  :  (a)  pronouns  ;  write  the  case,  number,  gender,  and  antec.  of 
every  pronoun;   (b)  3d  decl.  forms;  classify  all  3d  decl.  nouns  and 
adj.  according  to  the  ending  of  the  stem ;  (c)  verbs ;  classify  all  verb 
forms  under  their  proper  conjug.,  voice,  mode,  tense,  number  and 
person  ;    then  compare   your   result  with  the   "  Verb  Diagram "   of 
XXVL,  and  see  what  new  verb  forms  have  been  discovered  since  the 
last  Eeview. 

5.  Same  as  in  XII.1 

1  In  the  review  of  the  text,  it  will  be  well  to  assign  to  the  class,  for  Lat.  writing, 
Eng.  sentences  based  upon  each  Chapter  of  the  Review.  These  may  be  selected  from 
the  Exercises  already  given,  or,  better,  may  be  new  exercises  prepared  by  the  teacher. 
Many  of  the  sentences  in  Daniell's  "  Short  Sentences  for  Practice  in  Writing 
Latin  "  (Tvison,  Blakeinan  &  Co.)  or  Welch  and  Duffield's  "  Helvetian  war"  (Mac- 
millan)  may  be  used.  The  teacher  should  take  care,  however,  that  these  practice 
sentences  contain  only  those  forms  and  constructions  which  the  pupil  has  met  in 
the  text  of  Caesar. 


156  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


2.    GRAMMAR    LESSON- 

1.  3d  decl.  neut.  in  -UB,  gen.  -eris  A.  &  G.  48,  c?.  H.  61,  opus. 

2.  Decl.  of  vis A.  &  G.  61.  H.  66. 

3.  Adj.  which  form  gen.  sing,  in 

-lus,  dat.  in  -I A.  &  G.  83  and  H.  151  and  1. 

a,  b. 

4.  Decl.  of  duo A.  &  G.  94,  b.  H.  175. 

5.  The    first    ten     cardinals    and 

ordinals A.  &  G.  94.  H.  174,  179. 

6.  Neut.  of  the  comp.  of  adj.   .     .  A.  &  G.  89,  86.  H.  162,  154. 

7.  Comparison  by  adv A.  &  G.  89,  d.  H.  170. 

8.  The  decl.  of  idem     .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  101.  H.  186,  VI.  ; 

p.  73,  foot- 
note 6. 

9.  The  decl.  of  the  indefinite  quis  A.  &  G.  104.  H.  190,  188. 

10.  Loss  of  -v  from  pf.  stem     .     .  A.  &  G.  128,  a.  H.  235. 

11.  The  endings  -undus  and  -undi  H.  239. 

12.  The  pass,  meaning  of  pf.  partic. 

in  dep.  verbs A.  &  G.  135,  b.  H.  231,  2. 

13.  The  pf.  act.  partic.,  and  how  to 

supply  its  place    .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  113,  c,  H.     231,     1  ; 

N.;   290,  d.  550,   N.   4. 

14.  The  gerundive,  meaning  ought 

or  must A.  &  G.  113,  d.  H.  234. 

15.  Place  from  which       .     .      .     .   A.  &  G.  259,  /  H.  412,  I. 

16.  Domum  and  domo  .      .     .      .   A.  &  G.  258.  H.  412,  II.  1; 

380,   I.    II. 
2,  1). 

17.  Prep,  omitted  with   loco   and 

locis A.  &G.  258,/.  H.  425,  II.  2. 

18.  Rel.    agreeing    Avith    repeated 

antec A.  &  G.  200,  a.  H.  445,  8. 

19.  Adj.  used  substantively  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  188.  H.  441  and  1. 

20.  Meaning  of  ad  with  names  of 

towns A.  &  G.  258,/,  H.     433,     I.; 

Hem.;  259, /.         380,   II.   1. 


LESSON   XLII.  157 

21.  Pers.     pron.    as     subj.     often 

omitted A.  &  G.  194,  a.     H.  446. 

22.  The  subj.  of  the  inf.  in  iudir. 

discourse  regularly  expressed  A.  &  G.  336,  a.    H.  530,  N.  3). 

23.  The  gen.  of  quality  (especially 

measure)       .     .     .     .     .     .  A.    &     G.     215  H.     396,     V. 

and  b.  and  N.   1. 

24.  The  dat.  of  the  possessor     .      .  A.  &  G.  231.  H.  387. 

25.  The  dat.  of  the  agent     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  232.  H.  388  and  2  ; 

also      foot- 
note 3. 

26.  Theabl.of  measure  of  difference  A.  &  G.  250.        H.423andN.l. 

27.  The  abl.  with  special  verbs       .  A.  &  G.  249.         H.  421,  I. 

28.  The  abl.  of  quality     .     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  251.         H.  419,  II. 

29.  The  partic.  translated  like  an 

independent  verb  ....  A.    &    G.    292,    H.  549,  5. 

Rem. 

30.  Construction  with  jubere  .     .  A.  &  G.  330,  2;    H.    534,    and 

331,  a.  foot-note  1. 

31.  The  force  of  the  pres.  ind.  in 

narrative A.  &  G.  276,  d.    H.  467,  III. 

32.  The  use  of  the  supine  in  -urn  .  A.  &  G.  302.        H.  546. 

33.  Translation  of  pres.  inf.  after 

past  tense  of  debere  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  288,  a,    H.  537,  1. 

and  Rem. 

34.  Subjv.  of  result A.  &  G.  319.        H.  500,  II. 

35.  The  substantive  clause  of  result  A.  &  G.  332,  a.    H.  501,  I.  1. 

36.  The  purpose  clause  introduced 

by  a  rel A.  &  G.  317.  H.  497.  I. 

37.  The  subjv.  of  purpose  after  quo  A.  &  G.  317,  b.  H.  497,  II.  2. 

38.  Dum  clauses  of  purpose      .      .  A.  &  G.  328.  H.  519,  II.  2. 

39.  Cum  causal A.  &  G.  326.  H.  517. 

40.  The  subordinate  clauses  of  in- 

dir.  discourse A.  &  G.  336,  last    H.  524. 

clause. 

41.  The  unemphatic  order  of  the 

Lat.  sentence A.  &  G.  343  and    H.  559,  560. 

N. 


158  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

.  42.    Change  of  order  for  emphasis  .   A.  &  G.  344  and    H.  560,   561, 

e.  III. 

43.  The  effect    of   position   at  the 

beginning  of  sentence     .     .  A.  &  G.  344,  1.    H.  561,  I. 

44.  The  effect  of  placing  the  subj. 

at  the  end  of  sentence     .      .  A.  &  G.  344  and    H.  561,  II. 

a. 

45.  The  order  of  the  modifiers  of 

the  verb A.  &  G.  343.        H.   560,    567 

and  3. 

46.  Position   of  word  closely  con- 

nected    with     preceding    or 

following  sentence      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  344,  b. 

3.    WORD   REVIEW. 

Classified  alphabetical  list  of  all  the  new  words  occurring  in   Caesar,  B.  G.   I. 

5-11. 

1.    VERBS. 
1st  Conjug.  (-a  verbs). 

These  verbs,  unless  it  is  otherwise  stated,  bave  pf.  stem  in  -V,  the  supine  in 
-t;  thus,  para-re,  parav-it,  parat-us. 


deliberare 

impetrare 

popular! 

demonstrare 

maturare 

portare 

depopulari 

negare 

putare 

existimare 

nuntiare 

reniintiare 

expugnare 

oppugnare 

rogare 

exspectare 

pacare 

temperare 

hiemare 

parare 

vastare 

imperare 

2c?  Conjug.  (-§  verbs). 

Jubere,  respondere,  and  videre  have  pf.  and  supine  stems  like  those 
of  3d  conjug. 

debere  licet  studere 

impendere  mereri  tencre 

jubere  respondere  videre 


LESSON  XLII. 


159 


3d  Conjug.  (-e  verbs). 
Write  the  pf.  and  supine  steins  of  these  verbs. 

abducere  dejicere  intellegere 

adsciscere  desistere  intercedere 

comburere  disponere  jungere 

concedere  educere  molere 

coiisciibere  exurere  obstringere 

consumere  fluere  occidere 

defendere  incendere  ostendere 


pati 

pellere 

perducere 

pemmipere 

preeficere 

recipere 

relinquere 


repellere 

resciiidere 

revertl 

statuere 

sum  ere 

traducere 

utl 


£th  Conjug.  (-1  verbs). 

Venire  and  its  compounds  have  pf.  and  supine  stems  like  those  of  3d  conjug. 
communire        convemre        expedire        pervenire        venire 


efferre         ire 


Irregular  verbs. 
subire         tollere         transire 


velle 


angustise,  plur. 

fortuna 

fossa 


2.    NOUNS  HAVING  -A  STEMS. 

fuga 

gratia 

injuria 


Kalendse,  plur. 

memoria 

ripa 


sedificium 

Aulus 

auxilium 

beneficium 

castellum 

consilium 

exeraplum 

jugum 


3.    -O  STEMS. 

Nouns. 

liberi,  plur. 
Lucius 

presidium 
socius 

maleficium 

sol  um 

murus 
nihilum  (nihil) 
Ocelum 

spatium 
telum 

Titus 

oppidum 
periculum 

vadum 

V1CUS 

160 


INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


Adj.  (having  also  fern,  stems  in 

-a). 

bellicosus 

invitus 

primus 

certus 

minimus 

privatus 

cibarius 

necessarius 

quadringenti,  plur. 

consanguineus 

nonnullus 

quint  us 

duo 

Noricus 

septimus 

frumentariua 

novus 

singuli,  plur. 

hiberuus 

nullus 

superus 

iuimicus 

perpaucus 

ullus 

4.    THIRD  DECL. 

Nouns. 

Give  the  geu.  and  geiider  of  each. 

altitude 

munitio 

ratis 

Caesar 

11  avis 

reditio 

deprecate  r 

obses,  -sidis 

servitus,  -utis 

facultas 

opus,  -eris 

sponte,  abl.  sing. 

largitio 

pes,  -edis 

urbs 

men  sis,  masc. 

by  ex-       pous,  masc.  by  excep- 

vis 

ception. 

tion  . 

voluutas 

Adj. 

Aprilis 

complures,  plur. 

princeps 

citerior 

difficilis 

ulterior 

5.    -U  STEMS. 

adventus 

concursus             domus,  fern,  by 

Idus,  plur.,  fern. 

conatus 

conspectus                exception. 

by  exception. 

duodecim 


6.    -E  STEM. 
spes 

7.    INDECL.  NUMERAL  ADJ. 
novern  quinque 


sedecim 


8.    PRON. 
quemque,  accus.  sing. 


quis 


LESSON  XLIII. 


161 


9.  PREP. 
circum          post          praeter          propter 

10.  ADV. 

ibi  noctti 

inde  nondum 

ita  nonnunquam 

interea  nuper 

interdiu  omriino 

jam  paene 

11.  CONJ. 
dum                    itaque  si 


sine 


sub 


praeterquam 

qua 

tamen 

ubi 

Qua 

vix 


vel 


LESSON   XLIII. 

l.   TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.    I.  12,  through  flumen  transierat. 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  incredibill  lenitate ;  the  abl.  limited  by  an  adj.  modifies  the 
preceding  verb  influit  and  tells  how  the  river  Hows ;  hence  called  an 
abl.  of  manner  ;  cf.  voluntate  XXXII. 

2.  possit  :   (a)   for  form,  cf.  XXXIV.  N.  5  ;    (b)   for  const.,  cf. 
XXIX.  N.   6  (a)  ;    (c)   in    utram    partem    fluat  ;    tliis    clause   is   a 
quoted  question  and  the  subj.  of   possit;  the  thought  of  a  person 
looking  at  the  river  would  be,  "  In  utram  partem  fluit?  " 

3.  transibant :   (a)  impf.,  because  they  were  in  the  act  of  cross- 
ing ;  (b)  for  position  of  id,  the  first  word  in  the  sentence,  cf.  XXXVI. 
N.  2  (b). 

11 


162  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

4.  Caesar    certior    factus    est ;    cf.  the    similar    expressions    in 
XXXII.  and  XLL,  and  note  that  the  adj.  certior  always  agrees  with 
the  name  of  the  person  who  is  informed. 

5.  traduxisse  :   (a)  a  pf.  inf.  act.,  formed  on  the  pf.  stem  by  the 
addition  of  -isse  ;  cf.  the  pres.  inf.  act.  duce-re  ;  (b)  the  preceding 
word,    flumen,   is   governed  by  trans  with   which    ducere    is    here 
compounded. 

6.  profectus  :   (a)  from  dep.  verb  proficisci.      How,  then,  is  it 
translated?   (b)  de  vigilia,  just  before,  lit.  from  (i.  e.  beginning  in) 
the  watch,  may  be  translated  during  or  in  the  watch. 

7.  transierat ;  from  transire,  -v  of  the  pf.  stem  being  dropped. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  pf.  inf.  act.  is  formed  in  all  conjug.  by  adding  -isse  to  the 
pf.  stem. 

2.  The  pf.  of  ire  is  regularly  ivit,  but  compounds  of  Ire  usually 
drop  -v  of  the  pf.  stem. 

4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Two    accus.    after     compound 

verbs A.  &  G.  239,  b.      H.  376. 

2.  Abl.  of  manner A.  &  G.  248  and     H.  419,  III. 

Hem. 

3.  The  question  indirectly  quoted      A.    &    G.    338,      H.  523,  II.  1 ; 

334.  529,  I. 


5.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  Arar  or  Araris  (Ararim  ac-  3.  citra,  prep,  with  accus.,  on  this 

cus.,   and    Arari    abl.,     are  side  of. 

found),  the  name  of  a  Gallic  4.  explorator      (exploraro,     to 

river,  now  the  Saone.  search  out},  a  spy,  a  scout. 

2.  castra,  -orum  (the  sing,  cas-  5.  incredibilis,  not  to  be  believed, 

trum,  a  fortress,  is  not  found  incredible,  remarkable. 

in  Caesar),  a  camp.  6.  judicare,  to  judge. 


LESSON   XLIIL  163 

7.  lenitas  (lenis,  smooth},  smooth-     11.  utram,  accus.  sing,  fern.,  which 

ness,  gentleness.  '  (of  two]  ? 

8.  linter,  -tris,  fern,  by  exception,     12.  vigilia,  watchfulness,  a  watch  of 

a  boat.  the  niyht ;    the    Romans    di- 

9.  oculus,  an  eye.  vided  the  night  from  sunset 
10.  quartus,  fourth.  to  sunrise,  whatever  its  length, 

into  four  equal  watches. 


6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Decline  incredibilis  lenitas  together,  fiumen,  and   finis. 
(b)  Decline  liiitribus,  and  explain  formation  of  the  nom.      (c)  Write 
all  the  forms  that  you  know  of  posse,      (d)  Write  all  the  inf.  act. 
and  pass,  that  you  know  of  traduxisse. 

2.  (a)  Caesar  saw   a  river  which  was  of  remarkable  smoothness. 
(b)  Three  parts  of  the  Helvetian  forces  had  crossed  the  river,      (c)  The 
Helvetii  were  hastening,  that  Caesar  might  not  destroy  their  boats, 
(c?)  The  river  flows  neither  toward  the  east  nor  toward  the  west. 

3.  (a)  Caesar  could  not  judge  with  his  eyes  in  which  direction  the 
river  was  flowing.      (6)  They  inform  Caesar  that  the  remaining  fourth 
part  is  at  last  being  led  across  the  river,     (c}  Caesar  led  to  the  river 
three  legions  which  he  had  with  him. 


7.     TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  ending  -isse.  2.  The  pres.  stem  of  translre.  3.  The  pf. 
stem  of  ire,  of  translre.  4.  Difference  in  form  and  mode  of  fluit 
and  fluat.  5.  Two  kinds  of  abl.  which  are  usually  qualified  by  an  adj. 
6.  All  the  kinds  of  abl.  learned  thus  far.  7.  The  exact  literal  mean- 
ing of  the  Lat.  translated  to  inform.  8.  The  principal  clauses  of 
indir.  discourse.  9.  The  subordinate  clauses  of  indir.  discourse. 
10.  The  interrogative  clauses  of  indir.  discourse.  11.  The  position 
of  the  word  most  closely  related  to  preceding  sentence.  12.  The 
time  of  the  third  watch. 


164  INDUCTIVE   LATIN  METHOD. 


LESSON    XLIV. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  12,  Eos  impeditos  through  pcenas  persolvit. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  impeditos ;  pf.  pass,  purtic.  formed  from  the  supine  stem  of  the 
4th  co u jug.  verb  impedire. 

2.  maiidarunt  ;  for  maiidaverunt,  cf.  oppugnarant  XXVIII. 

3.  in  silvas  abdideruiit  ;   cf.  XVII.  N.  11  (b). 

4.  hie  ;  nom.  sing,  uiasc.  of  the  pron.  hi.     What  other  forms  have 
been  used  ? 

5.  exisset  ;    for  exi(v)isset  :    (a)  plpf.   subjv.  act.,  sign  -isse- ; 
cf.  plpf.  subjv.  pass,  nuiitiatum  esset  XXXI.  ;  (b)  cf.  instances  of 
the  use  of  cum  in  IX.,  XLV.,  XXV.,  XXXI.,  XXXVL,  XL.,  and  note 
that,  whenever  it  is  used  with  the  impf.  and  plpf.  tenses,  cum  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  subjv. ;    (c)  for  omission  of  prep,  with  domo,  rf.  domo 
XXVIII. 

6.  memorial  for  const.,  cf.  XXI.  N.  2. 

7.  intulerat;   for  const,  of  preceding  populo,  cf.  XIX.  N.  12  (c). 

8.  persolvit :    («)  ea,  the  subj.  of  this  verb,  refers  to  pars  in  the 
preceding  relative  clause  ;   (b)  princeps  is  here  an  adj.  limiting  ea 
(pars),  and  may  be  best  translated  by  a  clause  ;  thus,  that  part  was 
the  first  to  pay  the  penalty,   lit.   that  part  first  paid  the  penalty, 
i.  e.  before  the  other  parts,  not  before  doing  something  else. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  plpf.  subjv.  act.  has  the  sign  -isse-  in  all  conjug.,  and  is 
formed  on  the  pf.  stem  because  it  denotes  completed  action. 

2.  The  stems  of  all  four  conjug.  have  now  been  learned  from  the 
text.     These  stems  are  shown  in  representative  verbs  as  follows : 


LESSON   XLIV.  165 


Pres.  stem. 

Pf.  stem. 

Supine  stem. 

1st  conjtig. 
2d  con  jug-. 
3d  conjug-. 
4th  conjug. 

crema- 
habe- 
duce- 
impedi- 

cremav- 
habu- 
dux-  for  ducs- 
impedlv- 

cremat- 
habit- 
duct- 
impedit- 

3.  The  pres.  inf.,  the  pf.  iud.  act.,  and  the  pf.  pass,  partic.,  since 
they  are  very  commonly  found  and  invariably  show  the  three  stems  of 
the  verb,  may  properly  be  called  the  principal  parts  (or  the  parts)  of 
the  verb.1 

4.  In  Caesar  the  conj.  cum,  meaning-  when,  if  followed  by  the  impf. 
or  plpf.  tenses,  commonly  takes  the  subjv. 


4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  The  antec.  in  the  rcl.  clause      .     A.  &  G.  200,  b      H,  445,  9. 

and  N. 


5.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  abdere,  -didit,  -ditus,  to  put       7.  immortalis(inneg.,andmors), 

away,  to  hide.  undying,  immortal. 

2.  aggredi, -gressus  (ad  and  gra-       8.  impedire    -pedivit,  -peditus 

di)  to  go  towards,  to  attack.  (in,    against,    and    pea),    to 

3.  calamitas,  disaster,  calamity.  impede,  to  place  at  a  disad- 

4.  casua,  -us  (cadere,  to  fall),  a  vantage. 

falling,    accident,    misfortune,       9.  inopinans,adj.,  unexpecting,  un- 
chaiice.  aware. 

5.  concidere,  -cidit,  -cisus  (con     10.  insignis  (in,  upon,  and  signum, 

intensive,    and    ceedere,    to  a  mark},  marked,  remarkable, 

cut),  to  cut  to  pieces,  to  kill.     11.  interficere,  -fecit,  -fectus,  to 

6.  deus,  a  god.  kill. 

1  These  principal  parts,  though  not  the  same  as  those  usually  given,  will  answer 
the  purpose  equally  well.  The  1st  pers.  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind.,  which  is  usually 
included,  is  almost  never  found  in  Caesar,  and  in  many  cases  does  not  show  the  pres. 
stem. 


166  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

12.  mandare    (manus,    the   hand,     15.  silva,  a  forest. 

and  dare),  to  gioe  into  ones  16.  sive,  couj.  (si  and  vel),  or 

hand,  to  commit.  sive  .   .  .  sive,  whether  . 

13.  nam,  con].,  for.  or,  either  .  .  .  or. 

14.  persolvere,  -solvit,  -solutus, 

to  loose  thoroughly,  to  pay  in 
full. 


6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Write  all  the  forms  that  you  know  of  impedire.     (b)  Of 
mandare.     (c)  Decline  the  adj.  iuopinans,  insignia  in  all  genders. 
(d]  Decline  silva,  casus,  -us. 

2.  (a)  The  forests  in  which  the  rest  hid  themselves  were  very  near 
to  the  river,     (b)  The  part  which  was   left  was  cut  to  pieces  when 
taken  at  a  disadvantage  (partic.).      (c)  The  rest  of  the  Helvetii  were 
taken  at  a  disadvantage,  because  they  were  in  the  river,      (d)  That 
part  of  the   Helvetii   which  had  brought  signal   calamity   upon   the 
Roman  people,  was  the  first  to  pay  the  penalty. 

3.  (a)  Tigurinus  was  one  out  of  the  four  districts  into  which  the 
Helvetian  state  was  divided.     (b)  In  the  memory  of  our  fathers,  a 
Roman  army  was  defeated  and  a  Roman  consul   sent  under  the  yoke. 
(c)  Caesar  said  that  it  came  to  pass,  either  by  chance  or  the  design  of 
the  gods,  that  the  Tigurini  were  the  first  to  pay  the  penalty. 


7.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  The  stems  of  all  conjug.,  and  how  to  find  them.  2.  Likeness 
between  the  1st  and  4th  conjug.  in  formation  of  stems.  3.  Difference 
in  the  formation  of  pf.  stem  in  3d  and  4th  conjug.  4,  Difference  be- 
tween the  2d  and  4th  conjug.  in  quantity  of  i  in  supine  stem.  5.  Dif- 
ference in  characteristic  of  2d  and  3d  conjug.  6.  The  principal  parts 
of  every  verb  in  the  lesson  except  intulerat.  7.  Instances  in  which 
a  prep,  expressed  in  Eng.  is  omitted  in  Lat.  8.  In  which  the  Lat. 
uses  a  different  prep,  from  that  which  the  Eng.  translation  suggests. 
9.  All  you  know  about  the  form  cum. 


LESSON  XLV.  16T 

LESSON    XLV. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  GK  I.  12,  Qua  in  through  Helvgtiorum  fuerat  in  13. 

2.     NOTES.1 

1.  qua  in  re;  for  order,  cf.  XV.  N.  7  (c)  and  XXXVI.  N.  2  (b). 

2.  interfecerant  :  (a)  supply  this  verb  in  the  subordinate  clause, 
where  it  will  have  Tigurini  for  its  subj.  and  Cassium  for  its  obj. ; 
(b)  ejus,  referring  to  Caesar,  depends  upon  soceri;  it  is  not  an  adj. 
agreeing  with  soceri;   (c)  appositives  in  this  sentence?  (d)  antec.  and 
const,  of  quo? 

3.  curat :    (a)   poiitem    the   obj.    is    limited    by   the   gerundive 
faciendum  ;    lit.,   he  cares  for  a  bridge  to  be  made,  more  freely, 
he  has  a  bridge  built;    (b)  What  clause  gives   the  purpose  of  this 
bridge-building  ? 

4.  ipsi ;  for  meaning  and  use,  cf.  ipse  XXII.  N.  4. 

5.  ut  .   .  .  transirent ;  substantive  clause,  in  apposition  with  pre- 
ceding id,  which  is  the  obj.  of  confecerant  ;  cf.  XXIV.  N.  3  (d). 

6.  ilium :  (a)  refers  to  Caesar,  and  is  the  word  naturally  used  by 
the  Helvetii  in  thinking  of  their  enemy  ;  cf.  XXII.  ATocab.  ;   (b)  What 
is  the  dir.  disc,  for  ilium  fecisse  ?  or,  in  other  words,  what  was  the 
exact  thought  of  the  Helvetii  ? 

7.  Divico  ;  nom.  sing.,  not  abl.  sing.     What,  then,  is  its  gen.  ? 

8.  princeps;  here  a  noun  ;  for  const.,  cf.  XX.  N.  4  (d). 

3.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  gerundive  after  curare  and 

similar  verbs A.  &  G.  294,  d.    H.544,2,N.2. 

1  The  pupil  should  remember  that  many  difficulties  unprovided  for  in  the  Notes 
are  fully  met  in  the  Vocab.,  which  must,  of  course,  be  consulted  in  translating  the 
Text. 


168  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


4.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  aegerrumeoraegerrime,adv.iii       7.  dux  -cis  (ducere),  a  leader. 

sup.,  with  the  greatest  trouble.       8.  publicus,  public. 

2.  avus,  grandfather.  9.  BOGeil,  fathers-in-law. 

3.  Cassianus,   adj.,  pertaining  to  10.  repeiitinus,  sudden. 

Caseins ;     bellum    Cassia-  11.  solum,  adv.,  only;  non  sSlum 
iium,  the  war  icith  Caxxiux.  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  not  only  .  .  . 

4.  commovere,  -movit,  -m5tus,  but  also. 

to  mo oe  deeply.  12.  ulcisci,  ultus,  to  avenge,  to  pun- 

5.  consequi,  -secutus,  to  follow  i*h. 

ui),  1°  obtain.  13.  viginti,  iudccl.  numeral, 

6.  curare,  to  take  care. 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Principal  parts  of  facere,  transire,  intellegere,  mittere. 
(b)  Decline  ille,  ipse.     (c)  Decline  Divico,  princeps.     (d)  Write 
all  the  forms  you  know  of  ulcisci. 

2.  (a)  Caesar  had  married  Calpurnia,  the  daughter  of  Piso.     (b)  The 
grandfather  of  Lucius  Piso,  from  whom  he  received  his  name,  had  been 
killed  by  the  Tigurini.      (c)  Therefore  Caesar  said  he  avenged  a  private 
wrong,  when  he  cut  to  pieces  the  Tigurini.     (d)  Caesar  has  boats 
joined  together,  in  order  to  lead  his  army  across  the  river. 

3.  (a)  For  twenty  days  the  Helvetii  were  building  the  bridge  by 
which    they   crossed,     (b)   Divico,   whom    they   sent  to   Caesar,  had 
waged  war  with  the  Romans,      (c)   Caesar  intended  to  punish   those 
who  had  brought  marked  disaster  upon  the  Romans,     (d)  Cassius 
led  the  army  in  which  was  the  grandfather  of  Csesar's  father-in-law. 


6.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Two  cases  possible  for  the  form  socerl.  2.  The  gender  of 
pons.  3.  Difference  in  meaning  between  hie  and  ille.  4.  Force 
of  non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiarn,  aut  .  .  .  aut,  sive  .  .  .  slve, 
et  .  .  .  et,  ita  .  .  .  ut.  5.  Two  meanings  of  the  form  quod  in  this 
lesson.  6.  Meaning  of  Cassianus  in  this  lesson.  7.  The  Lat.  for 


LESSON  XLVI.  169 

father,  son,  daughter,  brother,  father-in-law,  grandfather,  kinsman 
(by  blood).  8.  The  abl.  of  time  in  this  lesson.  9.  The  abl.  of  place. 
10.  Difference  between  them.  11.  The  subjv.  with  cum  in  this 
lesson.  12.  The  translation  of  the  abl.  absolute  in  this  lesson. 


LESSON   XLVI. 

1.     TEXT. 
Csesar,  B.  G.  I.  13,  Is  ita  through  virtutis  Helvetiorum. 

Is  ita  cam  Csesare  egit : 


"  Si  pacem  populus  Romaiius  cum 
HelvetiTs  faciet,  in  earn  par- 
tern  ibunt  atque  ibi  erunt 

Helvetii,  ubi    eos  con- 

stitueris  atque  esse  volue- 
ris;  smbello  perseqm  perseve- 
rabis,  reminiscere  et  veteris 
iucommodi  populi  Romani,  et 
pristiuse  virtutis  Helvetiorum." 


SI  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum 
Helvetils  faceret,  in  earn  par- 
tern  ituros  atque  ibi  futures 
Helvetica,  ubi  eos  Caesar  con- 
stituisset  atque  esse  voluis- 
set;  sin  bello  persequi  perseve- 
raret,  reminisceretur  et  veteris 
iiicornmodl  populi  Romani  et 
pristiuse  virtutis  Helvetiorum.' 


2.     NOTES. 

1.  faceret :   (a)  impf.  subjv.  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  indir.  disc., 
quoted  after  a  past  or  historical  tense,  egit ;   (b)  the  direct  form  is 
faciet,  a  fut.  ind.  ;   (c)  the  tense  sign  of  the  4th  conjug.  form  faciet 
is  -e- ;   (c?)  faceret,  should  make  ;  faciet,  shall  make. 

2.  Helvetios :     (a)    subj.   of   esse   understood  with    ituros   and 
futures,  which  are  fut.  act.  partic.  agreeing  with  Helvetios  ;   (b)  the 
fut.  inf.  ituros  (esse)  stands  for  the  fut.  ind.  ibunt  in  the  dir.  disc., 
and  futures  esse  for  erunt,  the  fut.  ind.   of  the  irreg.  verb  esse  ; 
(c)  the  subj.  of  the  ind.  is  the  nom.  Helvetii. 

3   constituisset :   (a)  plpf.  subjv.,  sign  -isse- ;  cf.  XLIV.  N.  5  (a) ; 

(b)  in  the  subjv.,  because  it  is  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  indir.  disc. ; 

(c)  the  dir.  form  is  the  fut.   pf.   ind.   constitueris,  you  shall  have 


170  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

placed  them ;  (d)  the  sign  of  the  fut.  pf.  ind.  is  -eri- ;  (e)  the  pers. 
ending  of  the  2d  sing,  in  the  act.  is  -a,  thou  or  you  ;  cf.  -t,  -nt,  -mus  ; 
(/)  as  Divico  is  addressing  Caesnr,  he  would  not  use  the  Lat.  word  for 
C(zscir,  hut  the  Lat  for  thou  or  you,  which  is  expressed  sufficiently  by 
the  pers.  ending  -&. 

4.  voluisset :    (a)    in   the  same  construction    as  constituisset ; 

(b)  note  that  hotli  are  formed  on  the  pf.  stem,  which  in  constituisset 
(litters  in  form  from  the  pres.  stem  only  in  the  loss  of  the  final  -e  ; 

(c)  voluisset  is  followed  hy  (eos)  esse,  that  they  be  or  them  to  be. 

5.  perseveiaret  :  (a)  impf.  suhjv.  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  indir. 
disc. ;  (b)  it  stands  for  the  fut.  ind.  perseverabis  in  the  dir.  form  ; 
(c)  perseverabis  is  formed  on   the  pres.   stem,  because  it  denotes 
incomplete  action  ;   (d)  its  tense  sign  is  -bi- ;  this  -bi-  is  varied  to 
-bu-  in  the  3d  plur. ;  cf.  i-bu-nt  2  (b)  ;   (e)  for  use  of  2d  pers.  and 
2d  pers.  ending,  cf.  3  (e}  (/"). 

6.  reminisceretur  :    (a)  impf.  suhjv.  of  the  dep.  verb  reminisci ; 
(b}    stands    for    the    pres.   imperative,   2d  pers.   sing.,  reminiscere; 
(c)  reminisce-re  is  formed  on  the  pres.  stem  with  the  ending  -re  ; 
cf.  the  ending  of  the  pres.  inf.  act;   (d)  it  is  used  with  the  gen.  case 
in   the  words  incommodi  and  virtutis  ;  cf.  the  Eng.  expression  be 
mindful  of. 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  New  pers.  endings :  -s,  2d  pers.  act.- ;  -re,  2d  pers.  pass. 

2.  New7  tense  signs  :  -bi-,   fut.    1st  conjug.   (-bu-  in  3d   plur.)  ; 
-§-,  fut.  4th  conjug.  ;  -eri-,  fut.  pf.  all  conjug. 

3.  Examples  of  every  tense  in  both  the  ind.  and  subjv.  have  now 
been  found  in  Caesar.     The  tenses  of  the  ind.  are  the  pres.,  impf.,  fut., 
pf.,  plpf.,  and  fut.  pf. ;  the  tenses  of  the  subjv.  are  the  same,  with  the 
omission  of  the  fut.  and  the  fut.  pf. 

4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  vetus A.  &  G.  85.          H.  158. 

2.  The  3d  sing,  and  plur.  in  all 

tenses  of  the  ind.  and  subjv., 
and  the  inf.  and  partic.  of 
the  iiTeff.  verb  esse  ,  .  A.  £  G.  119.  H.  204. 


XLVI.  171 

3.  Changes  of  mode  in  indir.  disc.  xv.    &    u.    336,    H.  523,  LIT. 

339.  1,111.,  524. 

4.  Put.  time  in  the  subjv.    .     .     .  A.    &    G.    110,    H.  496,  I.  II. 

a,  286,  Hem. 
last  sentence. 

5.  Change  of  pers.  in  indir.  disc.  .          ....       H.  526. 

6.  The  gen.  with  verbs  of  remem- 

bering      A.  &  G.  219.         H.  406,  II. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  agere,   egit,    actus,   to   set  in       3.  persequi,    secutus,   to  follow 

motion,  to  drive,  to  do,  to  dis-  up,  to  pursue. 

cms-  4.  perseverare,    to    continue,    to 

2.  incommodus, inconvenient;  as  ptrxixt. 

a  noun  in  the  neut.,  an  incon-       5.  pristinus,  former, 

venience,  a  mild  term  for  mis-       6.  reminisci,  to  remember, 

fortune.  7-  sin  (si  and  n§,  not),  but  if. 

8.  vetus,  -eris,  old,  former. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Write  the  3d  sing,  of  all  ind.  and  subjv.  tenses  act.  and  pass, 
of  perseverare,  in  the  following  order  :  pres.,  iinpf.,  fut.,  pf.,  plpf., 
fut.  pf. ;  or,  in  other  words,  give  the  synopsis  of  persevgrare  in  the 
3d  sing.  act.  and  pass,      (b)  Write  the  synopsis  of  agere  in  the  3d 
plur.  subjv.     (c)  Write  five  inf.  and  three  partic.  of  constituere. 

2.  (a)  Remember  the  former  war,  in  which    the    Roman    consul 
Cassius  was  killed,     (b)  If  peace  shall  be  made  by  the  Roman  people, 
we  will  go  to  that  place  where  Caesar  shall  have  commanded  us  (nos) 
to  be.      (c)   It  is    not   fitting  (oportet)  for   Caesar   to   pursue  us. 
(d)  By  a  speech  Divico  tried  to  persuade  Caesar  not  to  follow  up  the 
Helvetii. 

3.  (a)  Divico  discusssed  this  matter  (thing)  with  Caesar,  in  order 
to  obtain  this  request,     (b)  The  Helvetii  sent  Divico  to  discuss  this 
matter,  because  they  saw  that  Csesar  was  very  powerful,      (c)  When 
Caesar  had  determined  to  cross  the  river,  he  made  a  bridge  in  one 
day. 


172 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN 


7.   TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  tenses  of  the  ind.  and  snbj.  act.  formed  on  the  pres.  stem. 
2.  The  pf.  stem.  3.  The  formation  of  the  pres.  ind.  4.  The  tense 
signs  of  the  impf..  plpf.,  fut.  pf.  ind.,  and  irapf.,  pf.,  and  plpf.  subjv.  in 
all  conjug.  5.  The  endings  of  the  pres.  and  pf.  inf.  act.  in  all  conjug. 
G.  The  formation  of  the  fut.  act.  and  pf.  pass.  inf.  in  all  conjug. 
7.  The  formation  of  the  fut.  act.  and  pf.  pass,  pnrtic.  in  all  con- 
jug.  8.  Peculiarities  of  conjng.  in  the  verb  esse.  9.  The  kind  of 
clauses  which  take  the  inf.  in  indir.  disc.  10.  Special  verbs  which 
take  the  gen.,  the  dat.,  the  abl.  11.  Why  the  fut.  ind.  is  not  changed 
in  indir.  disc,  to  the  fut.  subjv. 


LESSON    XLVII. 


1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  13,  Quod  improvise  through  insidiis  nlterentur. 


"Quod  improvise  liuum  paguin  ad- 
ortus  es,  cum  ii,  qui  iluinen 
transierant,  sins  auxilium  ferrc 
11611  posseut,  ne  ob  earn  rein  aut 
tuae  magiiopere  virtuti  tribu- 
eris,  aut  nos  despexeris ; 
nos  ita  a  patribus  majoribusque 
nostrls  didicimus,ut  magis  vir- 
tute  quam  dolo  contendamus 
aut  insidiis  nitamur." 


'  Quod  improviso  unum  pagum  ad- 
ortus  esset,  cum  ii,  qtii  flumen 
trSnsissent,  suis  auxilium  ferre 
non  posseut,  ne  ob  earn  rem  aut 
suee  magnopere  virtuti  tribu- 
eret,  aut  ipsos  despiceret ; 
se  ita  a  patribus  majoribusque 
suis  didicisse,  ut  magis  vir- 
tute  quam  dolo  contenderent 
aut  insidiis  nlterentur.' 


2.    NOTES. 


1.  adortus  esset :  (a)  plpf.  subjv.  of  a  dep.  verb  ;  for  form, 
cf.  XXXI.  N.  2;  (b)  in  the  subjv.  only  because  a  subordinate  clause 
of  indir.  disc.;  cf.  adortus  es  the  direct  form  and  XXXII.  N.  6; 


LESSON   XLVIL  173 

(c)  in  the  2d  pers.,  because  Divico  is  addressing  Caesar ;  ea  is  the 
2d  pers.  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind.  of  esse;  (d)  adortus  es,  the  pf.  is 
changed  to  the  plpf.  adortus  esset,  because  the  latter  is  quoted  after 
the  past  tense  egit ;  thus  in  Eng.  we  would  say,  Do  not  despise  us 
because  you  have  attacked  a  canton,  but.  He  said  not  to  despise  us 
because  he  had  attacked  a  canton. 

2.  traiisissent ;  simply  changed  to  the  subjv.  from  transierant, 
because  in  a  subordinate  clause. 

3.  possent  :    (a)  in  the  subjv.  in  both  dir.  and  iridir.  disc.,  because 
after  cum  ;  cf.  XLfV.  N.  5   (b)  ;    (b)  the  preceding  suis  is  a  dat. 
case  and  a  noun,  to  theirs,  to  their  (countrymen),  cf.  XL.  N.  1. 

4.  suae,  his  ;  changed  from   tuae,  your  (sing.)  in  the  direct  form, 
where  Divico    is    addressing    Caesar    and    referring    to    the   valor  of 
Csesar. 

5.  ipsos,  them;  refers  to  the  Hclvetii,  and  so  stands  for  n 6s,  us, 
in  the  speech  of  the  Helvetian  Divico. 

6.  ne  aut  .  .  .  tribueret,  aut  .  .  .  despiceret,  not  to  ascribe  it 
to  his  valor  especially,  or  despise  them  ;  both  these  verbs  are  changed 
from  the  pf.  subjv.  M  sing,  in  the  dir.  form,  and  the  clause  is  then 
translated,    Do    not   ascribe    it    to   your    own    valor    especially,   or 
despise  us. 

7.  se,  they,  in  the  reported  speech  stands  for  nos,  we,  in  the  direct 
form. 

8.  didicisse  :  (a)   pf.   inf.,  ending  -isse ;    cf.    XLITI.   N.   5    (a)  • 
(b)  stands  for  the  direct  form  didicimus,  which  is  the  pf.  ind.  act.  1st 
plur.  ;     (c)  nos,  the  subj.  of  didicimus,  is  here  expressed  because 
emphatic,  but  cf.  XLVI.  N.  3  (/)  and  XL.  N.  4  (d). 

9.  contenderent :  (a)  a  result  clause,  giving  the   result  of  didi- 
cisse ;  (b)  stands  for  the  direct  form  contendamus,  the  pres.  subjv. 
act.  1st  plur.  ;   (c)  for  change  of  tense,  cf.  1  (d). 

10.  nitamur  :    (a)   pres.  subjv.  of  a  dep.  verb,  same  construction 
as  conteiidamus ;   (b)   -mur   is  the  ending  of  the  1st  plur.  pass.  ; 
cf.  -mus,  the  ending  of  1st  plur.  act.  ;   (c)  the  clause  aut  iiitamur 
is  peculiar  in  its  connection  with  the  rest  of  the  sentence ;  it  is  best 
translated,   and  (so)  that   we  do  not  rely  on   ambuscades;   (d)  for 
insidiis,  see  Gram.  Less. 


174 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Tenses     of      the     subordinate 

clauses  in  indir.  disc. .     .     .  A.    &    G.    285,    H.  491,  492, 

286.  1,    2,    493, 

1,  2. 

2.  The  pf.  subjv.  in  prohibitions  .  A.  &  G.  269,  a.    H.  484,  IV.  x. 

1. 

3.  Abl.  with  nitl A.    &    G.    254,    H.  425,  II.  1, 

and  b.  1)  and  N. 


4.     VOCABULARY. 


1.  adoriri,  -ortus,  to  rise  against, 

to  attack. 

2.  despicere,  -spexit,  -spectus, 

to  look  down  upon,  to  despise* 

3.  discere,  didicit,  to  learn. 

4.  dolus,  craft,  deceit. 

5.  ferre,    tulit,   latus,    irrcg.,   to 

bear. 

6.  improvise,  adv.  (in  neg.,  pro, 

before,  fore,  visus,  seen),  unex- 
pectedly. 

7.  insidiae,  no  in.  plur.  (in,  in,  and 

sedere,    to   sit)   an    ambush, 
treachery. 

8.  magnopere,  adv.  (magno  and 

opere),  with  great  toil,  great- 
ly ;     magis,     comp.,    more ; 


maxime,   sup.,  very  greatly, 
•most,  especially. 

9.  major  (comp.  of  magnus), 
greater;  majores  natu  or 
simply  majores,  those  greater 
by  birth,  ancestors. 

10.  ne,    adv.,   not;    cf.   ne,   conj., 

that  not. 

11.  niti,  nisus  or  nixus,  to   rest 

upon,  rely  upon,  to  strive. 

12.  nos,  nom.  or^accus.  plur.,  we  or 

11*. 

13.  quam,  adv.,  than. 

14.  tuus,   tua,    tuum,    thy,    thine, 

your  ;  cf.  suus. 

15.  tribuere,  tribuit,  tributus,  to 

assign,  ascribe. 


5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)    Decline   pagus,    auxilium,    flumen,    pater,    virtus,    res. 
(b)  Decline  unus  and  give  the  cardinal  numbers  up  to  ten.     (c)  Write 
the  synopsis  of  posse  in  3d  sing. 

2.  (a)  You  will  not  overcome  the  Helvetii  by  your  valor.     (5)  The 
Helvetii  themselves  proved  that  they  were  very  brave  in  the  war  with 


LESSON   XLVITI.  175 

Cassius.  (c)  In  that  war  they  defeated  the  Roman  army  and  sent 
it  under  the  yoke.1  (d)  Our  fathers,  when  they  waged  war  upon  their 
neighbors,  used  to  rely  (were  relying)  on  their  own  valor,  not  upon 
trickery. 

3,  (a)  The  Helvetii  will  be  in  that  land  where  Cuesar  shall  have 
wished  them  to  be.  (b)  For  twenty  days  the  Helvetii  were  crossing 
the  river,  which  Caesar  crossed  in  one  day  by  the  bridge  which  he  had 
built,  (c)  Divico  says  that  Caesar  is  ascribing  it  to  his  own  valor, 
that  (since)  he  has  killed  those  whom  their  friends  had  left  behind. 

6.     TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  exact  translation  of  Divico's  own  words.  2.  All  the  inf.  and 
partic.  of  mti.  3.  Comparison  of  magnus  and  magnopere.  4.  Two 
meanings  for  ne,  for  quam,  for  quod,  for  virtus.  5.  The  endings 
-mus  and  -mur.  6.  The  sign  of  each  tense  of  the  subjv.  in  the 
3d  conjug.  7.  In  the  1st.  8.  All  the  pers.  endings  you  now  know, 
both  act.  and  pass.  9.  The  reason  for  each  change  of  pers.  in  the 
Text  in  passing  from  dir.  to  indir.  disc.  10.  The  reason  why  some 
subordinate  verbs  are  in  the  subjv.  in  both  dir.  and  indir.  disc.,  and 
some  in  the  subjv.  only  in  the  indir. 


LESSON    XL VIII. 

1.   TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  13,  Quare  ne  to  the  end. 


Quare  ne  commiseris,  ut  is  locus, 
ubi  constiterimus  ex  calami- 
tate  populi  Roman!  et  interne- 
cione  exercitus  ndmen  capiat, 
aut  memoriam  prodat." 


'  Quare  ne  committeret,  ut  is  locus, 
ubi  constitissent,  ex  calami- 
tate  populi  Roman!  et  interne- 
cione  exercitus  nomen  caperet, 
aut  memoriam  proderet.' 


1  Lit.  -.  They  sent  the  defeated  Roman  army  under  the  yoke. 


176  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  committeret :    for  construction    and    change    to  commiseris, 
cf.  XLV1I.  N.  6. 

2.  constituisset ;  stands  for  the  fut.  pf.  ind.  constiterimus,  we 
shall  have  taken  our  stand  ;  cf.  XLYL  N.  3. 

3.  caperet  .   .   .  proderet  :   (a)  impf.  subjv.  of  the  3d  conjug. ; 
(b)  denote  purpose  after  coramitteret,  a  verb  of  urging  ;  cf.  XX. 
N.  5  (b)  ;   (e)  stand  for  tlie  direct  forms  capiat  and  prodat,  which  are 
in  the  pros,   subjv.   because  after    the    primary  tense    commiseris  ; 
cf.  XLVIL  N.  2  (d)t  Grain.  Less.;   (d)  capiat  is  of  the  4th  conjug. 
and  prodat  of  tlie  3d,  though  in  the  impf.  subjv.  both  are  of  the  3d  ; 
some   3d  conjug.  verbs,  (e.  g.  capere  and   facere),  have  4th  conjug. 
forms  in    several    tenses    formed  on  the  pros,  stem ;   (e)  distinguish 
capiat,  prodat  from  capiet,  prodet,  fut.  ind.,  and  capit,  prodit, 
capiuut,  produnt,  pivs.  ind.  ;   (f}  internecione  has  the  same  con- 
struction as  calamitate.     (a)  How  does    tlie  form  exercitus  differ 
from  that  of  nom.  sing.  ? 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  We  have  now  learned  from  the  text  the  3d  sing,  and  plur.  of 
every  tense  of  the  ind.  and  subjv.  act.  and  pass,  in  all  conjug.;  also  the 
partic.,   gerunds,   supines,   and  the  inf.,   with  the  exception  of   the 
fut.  pass,  inf.,  which  is  uncommon  and  may  be  omitted  in  the  grammar 
references  given  below  for  review. 

2.  The  pupil  will  save  himself  much   confusion  in  learning  these 
conjug.,  by  fixing  in  mind  the  following  facts  : 

(a)  The  conjug.  differ  in  the  main,  only  in  their  characteristics  and 
the  formation  of  their  stems  ;  the  method  of  forming  the  tenses,  the 
pers.  endings,  the  endings  of  partic.  and  inf.,  and  most  of  the  tense 
signs,  are  the  same  for  all  conjug. 

(b)  The  pass,  differs  from  tlie  act.,  in  tenses  formed  from  the  pres. 
stem,  Oi:ly  in  its  pers.  endings,  and  forms  all  tenses  of  completed 
action  by  uniting  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  and  some   tense  of  the  verb 
ease. 


LESSON   XLVIII. 


i  i 


(c)  The  most  difficult  tenses  are  the  pres.  ind.,  fut.  ind.,  and  pres. 
subjv.,  which  must  be  carefully  distinguished  :  the  3d  conjug.  in  the 
pres.  ind.  changes  -e  of  the  pres.  stem  to  -i  in  3d  sing,  and  -u'in  3d 
plur. ;  the  tense  sign  of  the  fut.  is  -bi-  in  the  1st  and  2d  conjug.  and 
•e-  in  the  3d  and  4th  ;  and  the  sign  of  the  pres.  subjv.  is  -e-  in  the 
1st  conjug.,  but  -a  in  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th.  For  sterns  of  all  conjug., 
see  XLLV.  Obs.  2. 

4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Tenses  formed  from  the  pres., 

pf.,  and  supine  stems       .      .  A.  &  G.  127.         H.  222,  I.  II. 

2.  The    four    conjug.  ;    ind.    and  III. 

subjv.  3d  sing,  and  plur.  act. 
and  pass.,  and  act.  and  pass. 

inf.  and  partic A.    &    G.   128-    H.  205-212. 

132.1 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  committere,  -misit,  -missus,       4.  internecio,   destruction,   exter- 

to  let  go  together,  to  commit,  to  urination.. 

cause  that;  prcelium  com-  5.  prodere,  -didit,  -ditus,  to  put 

mittere,  to  join  bal.tle.  forth,    to    transmit,    to    hana 

2.  consistere,   -stitit,   to   take  a  do/en. 

stand,  stop.  6.  quare  (qua  and  re),  on  account 

3.  n5men,  a  name.  of  which  thing,  wherefore. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)    Synopsis   of   committere   in   3d    sing.   act.    and    passive ; 
(b)  Of  prodere  in  3d  plur.  act.  and  pass,      (c)  Inf.  and  partic.  of 
capere    with  meaning  of  each  form,     (d)    Decline  is,  internecio, 
locus,   memoria. 

2.  (a)  Caesar  will  not  cause  this  place  where  he  shall  take  his  stand 
(shall  have  taken  his  stand)  to  receive  a  name  from  the  extermina- 

1  Select  from  these  articles  only  what  the  heading  of  this  reference  calls  for. 

12 


178  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

tion  of  his  army.  (&)  In  the  battle  which  Caesar  is  about  to  join  with 
the  Helvetii,  he  will  avenge  the  former  disaster  of  the  Roman  consul. 
(c)  The  memory  of  that  (illius)  misfortune  has  been  handed  down  to 
those  who  are  dwelling  in  Italia. 

3,  (a)  After  enrolling  new  legions,  Caesar  hastened  to  his  army  and 
attacked  that  part  of  the  Helvetii  which  had  not  yet  crossed  the  river. 
(b)  Follow  up  the  Helvetii,  that  they  may  not  arrive  at  the  boundaries 
of  the  Santones.  (c)  Caesar  causes  new  legions  to  be  enrolled,  to 
contend  with  the  Helvetii. 


7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  All  the  tense  signs  of  the  ind.  and  subjv.  2.  All  the  endings 
of  inf.  and  partic.,  and  the  stem  upon  which  each  is  formed.  3.  The 
tenses  of  the  pres.  system.  4.  The  pf.  system.  5.  The  supine 
system.  6.  The  impf.  ind.  and  impf.  subjv.  of  the  4th  conjug. 

7.  Peculiarity   of  the  ending  of  the  pres.   inf.   pass,  in   3d   conjug. 

8.  Similarity  between   1st  and  4th  conjug.     9.  Differences  between 
the  1st  and  4th  conjug.      10.  Some  verbs  which  have  forms  of  differ- 
ent conjug.     11.  The  pres.  and  fut.  ind.  and  pres.  subjv.  3d  sing,  of 
cremSre,  habgre,  ducere,  and  impedire. 


LESSON  XLIX. 


179 


LESSON    XLIX. 


1.     TEXT. 


Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  14,  through  difficile  cavgre. 

His  Caesar  ita  respondit : 


"  E6  mihi  minus  dubitationis  datur, 

quod    eas    res,     quas    

commemoravistis 

memoria  teneo,  atque  eo  gra- 
vius  fero,  quo  minus  merito 
populi  Roman!  acciderunt : 
qui  si  alicujus  iujurise  sibi 
conscius  fuisset,  non  fuit  diffi- 
cile cave re ; " 


'  Eo  sibi  minus  dubitationis  dari, 
quod  efis  res,  quas  legati 
Helvetii  commemorassent, 
memoria  teneret,  atque  eo  gra- 
vius  ferre,  quo  minus  merito 
populi  Roman!  accidissent : 
qui  s!  alicujus  injuries  sibi 
conscius  fuisset,  non  fuisse  diffi- 
cile cavere ; ' 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  respondit  :   (a)  for  the  construction  of  the  preceding  his,  cf. 
XXII.  N.  2,  Obs.  3  ;   (b)  respondit   is  a   pf.  indefinite   referring  to 
simple  past  time.     What  is  the  form  of  the  pres.  ind.  act.,  3d  sing.  ? 
What  tenses  will  follow  respondit  in  the  subordinate  clauses  of  indir. 
disc.?  XLVII.  N.  1  (d)  ;    (c)  remember  that  the  subj.  is  Caesar;  he 
is  about  to  speak  to  the  Helvetian  ambassadors,  for  whom  Divico  has 
acted  as  spokesman. 

2.  dari  :   (a)  in  the  principal  clause  of  indir.  disc.,  for  datur  in 
the  dir.  ;    (b)  note  that  the  tense  of  the  principal  verb  in  indir.  disc, 
is  not  changed  after  a  past  tense  as  in  Eng. ;  in  Lat.,  lit.,  Ccesar  re- 
plied that  less  doubt  is  given,  where  the  Eng.  requires  Ccesar  replied 
that  less   doubt  was  given  ;   (c)   for   construction   of  preceding  eo, 
cf.  XVI.  N.  2   (c)  ;  (d)  instead  of  the  indir.  sibi,  to  him,  Caesar, 
in  speaking  to  the  legates,  used  mihi,  to  me  ;  (e)  minus  is  a  neut. 
adj.  in  form,  here  a  noun,  the  subj.  of  dari,  with  the  partitive  gen. 


180  INDUCTIVE   LATIN    METHOD. 

dubitationis  dependent  upon  it ;  cf.  the  adv.  minus,  and  XYI.  N.  5, 
Obs.  5. 

3.  commemorasseiit   for   commemoravissent  :    (a)   plpf.    subj. 
act.,  1st  conjug.  ;   for  form,  cf.  XXVIII.  N.  6  (a)  (c},  XLIV.  N.  5  (a); 
(b)  for  change  from  commemoravistis,  cf.   XLYII.  N.  1 ;    (c)  the 
subj.  legati  takes  the  place  of  the  Lat.  for  you,  plur.,  in  the  direct 
form,  and  you,  plur.,  is  expressed  by  the  ending  -tis  in  the  verb  com- 
memorav-i3-tis. 

4.  teneret  :   (a)  explain    mode  and   tense  ;    (b)  takes  the  place  of 
the  verb  tene-o,  I  hold,  the  pers.  ending1  -o  meaning'  /. 

5.  ferre  :    (a)  for  fero,  /  bear,  of  the  dir.  disc.  ;   (b)  modified  by 
the  adv.  gravius,   in  the  eomp.,  lit.  /  bear  more  heavily,  freely  / 
am  more   angry ;    (c)    for    construction    of   eo  before    gravius,  cf. 
XXVII.  N.  1. 

6.  accidissent  :   (a)  for  change  from  acciderunt,  cf.  3  ;   (b)  quo, 
the   rel    pro n.   in  abl.    neut.    before    the  adv.    minus,   has   the   same 
construction  as  eo  5  (c)  ;  lit.  by  that  f  bear  these  things  more  heavily, 
by  which  less   they  happened  because  of  the   desert  of  the  Roman 
people,  freely,  /  am  the  more  angered,  in  proportion  as  they  did  not 
happen  deservedly  to  the  Roman  people  ;   (c)  the  subj.  of  both  the 
dir.  and  indir.  verb  is  eae  res,  these  things,  supplied  from  what  pre- 
cedes ;   (d)  for  construction  of  merito,  cf.  XVI.  N.  2  (c). 

7.  fuisset  :   (a)  the  subj.  is  qui,  of  which  the  antec.  is  populi  Ro- 
man! ,   for  translation  of  qui,  cf.  IX.  N,  1  (d),  Obs.  1 ;   (b)  conscius 
is  a  pred.  adj.  agreeing  with  qui;  it  is  followed  by  the  dat.  sibi  and 
the  gen.  injuriae  ;    (c)  alicujus  is  an  indef.  adj.  (from  no  in.  aliqui), 
limiting  injuriae  ;    (d)  the  collective  noun  populus  is  sing,  in  agree- 
ment, not  plur.,  as  the  word  people  would  more  commonly  be  in  Eng. ; 
(e)  fuisset  is  the  plpf.  subjv.  in  both  dir.  and  indir.  form,  to  imply 
that  the  Roman  people  were  not  conscious  of   wrong  ;  the  clause  is 
lit.  translated  if  the  Roman  people  had  been  conscious  to  itself  of 
any  wrong-doing. 

8.  fuisse  :  (a)  pf.  inf.  of  esse,  standing  for  fuit,  it  was,  of  the 
dir.  disc,  (fuisset,  would  have  been,  seems  more  natural  in  connection 
with  the  si  clause  which   precedes) ;    (b)  the   subj.  is   cavere,  and 
difficile  is  the  pred.  adj.  agreeing  with  this  subj. ;  cf.  XXII.  x.  3  (b). 


LESSON  XLIX. 


181 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  pers.  ending  -tis,  you,  is  that  of  the  2d  plur.  in  the  act. 
voice ;  -o  is  used  as  the  pers.  ending  of  the  1st  sing,  in  the  pres.  hid. 
act.,  and  in  some  other  tenses. 

2.  It  is  the  subordinate  and  imperative  clauses  which  change  the 
tenses  of  their  verbs  in  indir.  disc,  after  a  past  tense.     The  inf.  in  the 
principal  clauses  has,  as  nearly  as  the  forms  of  the  inf.  will  admit, 
the  tense  of  the  principal  verb  for  which  it  stands. 


4,     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  partitive  gen.  depending 

on  neuters  and  comparatives    A.  &  G.  216,  2,    H.  397,  3. 

3. 

2.  Quo  .  .  .  eo A.  &  G.  106,  c. 


5.   VOCABULARY. 


1.  accidere,   -cidit  (ad  and   ca-       5. 

dere,  to  fall),   to  fall  upon., 
to  fall  out,   to  happen   (used 
generally  of  unfortunate  oc-       6 
currences,   hence    Eng.   acci-       7- 
denf). 

2.  aliqui,  iudef.  adj.,  any. 

3.  cavere,  cavit,  cautus,  to  take       8, 

care,  beware  of. 

4.  commemorare,  to  call  to  mind,       9. 

to  mention.  10. 


conscius  (con,  with,  and  scire, 
to  know},  knowing  with  one's 
self  or  with  others,  conscious. 

dubitatio,  doubt. 

gravius,  adv.  in  romp.,  more 
heavily ;  gravius  ferre,  to  be 
more  annoyed,  aitf/i'i/. 

raeritum  (mereri),  desert, 
merit. 

mihi,  dat.,  me. 

minor,   adj.   in  comp.,   smaller, 

less. 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Give  the  principal  parts  of  all  the  verbs  in  this  lesson, 
except  dare.  (J)  Decline  sibi,  qui,  conscius,  throughout,  (c)  De- 
cline in  all  genders  difficilia,  minor. 


182  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  (a)  Caesar   said   there    was   no   doubt1    that   the    Helvetii   at- 
tacked the  Romans  without  cause.      (6)    I   am  more  angry  because 
that  former  disaster  did  not  happen  on  account  of  any  wrong  which 
the  Romans  had  committed,     (c)  I  remember  that  the  Romans  were 
not  waging  war  upon  the  Helvetii  when  the  Helvetii  attacked  them. 
(d)  It  will  not  be  easy  to  send  the  brave  Helvetii  under  the  yoke. 

3.  (a)  If  Caesar  contends  (shall  contend)  with  the  Helvetii,  he  will 
overcome  them.     (b)  The  more  I  think  of  it,  the  more  difficult  it 
seems  (pass,  of  videre)  to  me.     (c)  Having  prepared  all  things  for 
waging  war,  Caesar  on  that  day  discussed  the  matter  with  the  Helvetii. 


7.    TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Comparison  between  the  forms  of  the  adj.  and  those  of  the  cor- 
responding adv.  in  positive,  comp.,  and  sup.  2.  All  the  pers.  endings 
learned  thus  far.  3.  Two  uses  of  the  inf.  in  this  lesson.  4.  Con- 
struction used  with  conscius.  5.  The  Lat.  for  to  be  more  angry, 
to  remember,  the  more  .  .  .  the  more.  6.  Tenses  in  the  subordinate 
clauses  of  indir.  disc.  7.  Tn  the  principal  clauses.  8.  Different  kinds 
of  abl.  in  this  lesson.  9.  The  agreement  of  the  collective  noun. 
10.  The  antec.  of  every  pi  on.  in  lesson.  11.  Changes  of  pers.  in  this 
lesson  in  passing  from  dir.  to  mdir.  disc.  12.  The  gender  of  a  sub- 
stantive clause. 

1  See  XXII.  Text  and  N.  7. 


LESSON  L. 


183 


LESSON    L. 


1.    TEXT. 


Csesar,  B.  G.  I.  14,  sed  eo  through  deponere  posse. 


"sed  eo  deceptus  est,  qnod  neque 
commissum  a  se  intellegebat 
quare  time  ret,  neque  sine  causa 
timendura  putabat.  Quod  si 
veteris  coutumelise  oblivisci 
volo,  imm  etiam  receutium  in- 
juriarum,  quod  me  iuvito  iter 
per  proviuciam  per  vim  tempta- 
vistis,  quod  Hseduos,  quod  Am- 
barros,  quod  Allobrogas  vex- 
avistis,  memoriam  depouere 
possum  ?  " 


sed  eo  deceptum,  quod  neque 
commissum  a  se  intellegeret 
quare  timeret,  neque  sine  causa 
timendum  putaret.  Quod  si 
veteris  contumelia3  oblivisci 
vellet,  uum  etiam  recentiura  in- 
juriarum,  quod  eo  iuvito  iter 
per  provincial!!  per  vim  temptas- 
sent,  quod  Hseduos,  quod  Am- 
barroSj  quod  Allobrogas  vex- 
assent,  memoriam  deponere 
posse  ? ' 


2.     NOTES. 

1.  deceptum  :   (a)  forms  with  esse,  understood,  the  pf.  pass.  inf. 
of  decipere  ;    (&)  the  sill)],  is  populum  Romanum,  supplied  from 
what  precedes  ;   (c)  cf.  the  direct  form  deceptus  est,  and  note  that 
there  is  no  change  of  tense  in  the  indir.  form. 

2.  intellegeret  :    (a)   cf.    the    dir.    intellegebat,   arid    note    that 
subordinate  verbs  already  in  a  secondary  tense  remain  in  the  same 
tense  when  changed  to  indir.  disc,  after  a  secondary  tense  ;   (&)  the 
subj.  is  populus  Romaiius  ;   (c)  the  clause  quod  .  .  .  intellegeret 
is  in  apposition  with  the  preceding  eo,  which  is  an  abl.  of  means  with 
deceptum  esse  ;   (W)  the  subj.  of  commissum  (esse)  is  indefinite  ; 
it  would  be  some  such  word  as  aliquid,  anything. 

3.  timeret;  subjv.  in  both  dir.  and  indir.  disc.,  is  explanatory  of 
commissum  (esse). 

4.  putaret  :     (a)    has    the    same    construction    as    iiitellegeret ; 
(b)    for  timendum,   with   esse   understood,   cf.   XXXIII.  N.  3  (b) ; 


184  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

(c)  the  whole  lesson  so  far  may  be  thus  translated  from  the  direct  form 
very  lit.,  but  (the  Roman  people]  was  deceived  by  this,  because  it  knew 
that  it  (or  anything]  had  not  been  committed  by  itself  wherefore  it 
should  fear,  and  it  did  not  think  it  was  to  be  feared  without  a  cause  ; 
very  freely,  but  the  Roman  people  were  deceived  by  the  knowledge  of 
their  own  innocence,  and  the  belief  that  they  did  not  need  to  fear 
without  reason. 

5.  quod,  before  si :   (a)  an  adverbial  aecus.  translated,  with  si,  as 
to  which  if,  or,  freely,  but  if,  now  if;   (b)  its  antec.  is  the  whole 
preceding  sentence. 

6.  vellet :    (a)    irreg.    impf.    subjv.   of   velle,   to   wish ;    (b)   the 
change  from  the  dir.  volo  is  perfectly  regular ;   (c)  for  -o  of  volo, 
cf.  XLIX.  X.  4  (b)  ;   (d)  followed  by  the  pres.  inf.  of  the  3d  conjug. 
oblivisci ;   (e)  oblivisci,  dep.,  to  forget,  is  used  with  the  gen.  contu- 
melice;  cf.  XLVI.  N.  6  (d). 

7.  temptassent  :     (a)    follows    quod,    because ;    (b)    for   change 
from  temptavistis,  cf.  commemorassent  XLIX.  N.  3  ;   (c)  eo,  after 
quod,    is   in    the  abl.  absolute  with   invito  ;    cf.  Sequanis   invitis 
XXXVT. ;   (d)  takes  the  place  of  me,  the  abl.  sing,  of  the  pers.  pron, 
of  the  1st  pers.  ;  cf.  mihi  XLIX.  N.  2  (d),  and  nos  XLVII.  N.  5,  7. 

8.  vexassent  :     (a)    the    same    construction    as    temptassent ; 
(b]  quod,  because,  is  repeated  by  Csesar  before  each  obj.  of  the  verb, 
in  order  to  call  attention  to  the  repeated  instances  of  wrong-doing  on 
the  part  of  the   Helvetii  ;   (c)  Allobrogas  is  a  peculiar  form  of  the 
accus.  for  the  more  common  Allobroges. 

9.  iium    .   .    .    injuriarum    .    .    .    memoriam  deponere  posse  ? 
(a)  note  that  the  clause  is  interrogative  ;  (b)  the  interrogative  word  is 
num,  which  stands  first ;  when  this  word  is  used,  a  negative  answer 
is  expected,  expressed  in  Eng.  by  he  could  not,  could  he?  or  merely 
the  tone  of  the  voice  ;  (e)  the  subj.  of  posse  is  Ceesarem,  understood, 
which  becomes  I'm  the  Eng.  of  the  dir.  disc.  ;  therefore  (d)  possum? 
the  direct  form  of  posse  ?  means  can  I?  the  -m  is  the  pers.  ending 
of  the  1st  pers.  sing.;    (e)  interrogative  clauses  are  usually  in  the 
subjv.  in  indir.  disc.,  but  possum  is  changed  to  posse  because  it  is 
really,  in   connection  with  num,  a  simple  declarative  verb   meaning 
I cannot ;   (f)  injuriarum  depends  upon  memoriam. 


LESSON   L.  185 


3.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  The  pers.  endings  of  the  act. 

voice A.  &  G.  116  ami    H.  247  and  1. 

foot-note  3. 

2.  Force    of    num    in    asking   a 

question A.  &  G.  210,  e.     H.  351,  1,  N. 

3.  The  use  of  the  rel.  quod  as  an 

adv.  accns A.  &  G.  240,  a,    H.  378  and  2; 

b.  453,  6. 

4.  The  gen.  with  verbs  of  forget- 

ting    A.  &  G.  219.          H.  406,  [I. 

5.  Substantive  clauses  introduced 

by  the  conj.  quod      .     .     .    A.    &     G.    329,    H.   540,1    IV. 

333.1  and  N. 


4.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  contumelia,  effrontery,  insult.  5.  oblivisci,  -litus,  to  forget. 

2.  decipere    (de    and    capere),  6.  recens,//*^,,  recent. 

-cepit,     -ceptus,     to    catch  7-  sed.  conj.,  but. 

away,  entrap,  deceive.  8.  temptare  or  tentare  (tenere), 

3.  deponere,  -posuit,   -positus,  to  handle,  to  try. 

to  place  aside.  9.  timere,  timuit,  to  fear. 

4.  num,  interrogative  particle ;  in  10.  vexare,  to  annoy,  vex. 

direct    questions    expects    a 
negative  answer. 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Principal  parts  of  committere,  intellsgere,  putare.  (b)  Syn- 
opsis of  putare  in  3d  sing.,  act.  and  pass,  (c)  Write  the  act.  and 
pass.  inf.  and  partic.  of  intellegere  with  the  meaning  of  each, 
(c?)  Decline  s§,  veteris,  iter,  vim. 

1  Read  examples  carefully. 


186  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  (a)  Bv  deceiving  the  Roman  people  (tlie  Roman  people  having 
been  deceived),  the  Helvetii  were  able  to  overcome  the  Roman  army 
in  battle,     (b)  I  fear  because  you  have  already  committed  evil  deeds. 
(c)  I  ought  not  to  fear  (it  is  not  to  be  feared  by  me),  for  no  wrong 
has  been   done  by  me.      (d)   Forget  that  wrong  which  the  Helvetii 
brought  upon  the  Roman  people. 

3.  (a)  The  Helvetii  use  force,  in  order  to  make  a  way  through  the 
province,      (b)  Though  Caesar  was  unwilling,  the  Helvetii  persisted  in 
wandering  through  the  fields  of  the  Hsedui.     (c)  Caesar  told  the  Hel- 
vetian ambassadors  that  he  was  more  indignant,  because  they  had  at- 
tacked  the  Romans,   who  were    not  conscious  to  themselves  of  any 
wrong-doing. 

6.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

I.  The  forms  of  velle  met  thus  far.  2.  The  forms  me  mihi,  nos, 
vos.  3.  The  difference  in  form  between  impf.  ind.  and  impf.  subjv. 
in  1st,  2d,  and  3d  conjug.  4.  In  the  4th  conjug.  5.  Two  uses  of 
the  form  quod  in  this  lesson.  6.  Two  endings  for  the  1st  sing,  in 
the  act.  voice.  7.  The  adv.  amis.  8.  Different  kinds  of  substantive 
clauses  used  thus  far.  9.  The  translation,  both  lit.  and  free,  of  Pon- 
tem  faciendum  euro  and  Fons  mihi  faciendus  est.  10.  The 
mode  used  in  the  dir.  disc,  of  this  lesson  after  quod  and  si. 


LESSON  LI. 


187 


LESSON    LI. 


1.    TEXT. 


Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  14,  Quod  sua  through  impunitatem  concedere. 


Quod  vestra  victoria  tarn  msolen- 
ter  gloriamini,  quodque  tani 
did  vos  inipune  injurias  tulisse 
admiramini,  eodem  perti- 
net.  Consueverunt  enim  di 
immortales,  quo  gravius  homi- 
nes ex  cominutatidne  reruin 
doleant,  quos  pro  scelere  eorum 
ulcisci  volunt,  his  secundiores 
interdum  res  et  diuturniorem 
impunitatem  concedere." 


'  Quod  sua  victoria  tain  msolen- 
ter  gloriarentur,  quodque  tarn 
diu  se  impune  hijurias  tulisse 
admirarentur,  eodem  perti- 
nere.  Consuesse  enim  decs 
immortales,  quo  gravius  homi- 
nes ex  commutatione  rerum 
doleant,  quos  pro  scelere  eorum 
ulcisci  velint,  his  secundiores 
interdum  res  et  diuturniorem 
impunitatem  concedere/ 


2.    NOTES. 

1.  gloriarentur :   (a)  Why  impf.  subjv.  instead  of  pres.  ind.  (the 
dir.   form)?  (b)  gloriamini  is  the  2d   plur.  of  a  dep.  verb;  note  the 
ending  of  the  pass.  2d  plur.  -mini;  cf.  -mur,  pass.  1st  plur.,  XLVII. 
N.  10  (b)  and  -tur,  -ntur ;  (c)  sua,  their,  in  connection  with  the  3d 
plur.  verb  gloriarentur,  corresponds  to  vestra,  your,  plur.  with  the 
2d  plur.  verb  gloriamini;  (d)  cf.  vestra,  2d  pers.  plur.  possessive 
adj.,  with  tuae,  2d  pers.  sing.  XLVII.  N.  4  and  with  nostri  XL.  N.  5 ; 
(e)  victoria  is  abl.  of  cause  with  gloriarentur. 

2.  admirarentur :    (a)   the  same   construction    as  gloriarentur ; 
note  the   close  connection  with  it  indicated  by  -que  in  quodque  ; 
(b)  followed  by  the  accus.  and  inf.  se  tulisse ;  (c)  sg  takes  the  place 
of  vos,  you  (plur.)  in  the  dir.  disc.  ;   (d)  tulisse  seems  to  be  used  in 
an   unusual  sense ;  you  have  borne  wrongs  with  impunity,  i.  e.  the 
guilt  of  them  has  rested  upon  you  without  doing  you  harm. 


188  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  pertinere  :    (a)  has  (like  the  clir.  form  pertinet)  the  two  pre- 
ceding substantive  quod  clauses  as  its  subj. ;   (b)  the  sentence  may  be 
in  part  translated  thus,  the  fact  that  you  glory  and  wonder  tends  to 
the  same   thing,  i.e.  to  your  final  punishment,  as  explained  in  what 
follows ;   (c)  for  use  of  two  subj.  with  sing,  verb,  cf.  V.  N.  8  (b)  and 
H.  463,  II.  3. 

4.  decs:  (a)  the  subj.  of  consuesse  ;    (b)  changed  from  nom.  di 
(contracted  from  del)  in  the  dir.  disc. ;   (c)  coiisuesse  for  coiisuev- 
isse   is   a  pf.   inf.  act.  ;  note  ending  -isse ;    (d)   note  the  emphatic 
position  of  verb  at  the  head  of  the  clause  ;  cf.  XXX.  N.  1  ;  you  are 
surprised,  says  Caesar,  at  ivhat  is  customary;  (c)  consueveruiit  is 
pres.  in   sense  though  pf.  in  form;    (/)  for  the  position  of  the  conj. 
enitn  after  the  beginning  of  the  clause,  cf.  quoque  IX.  and  autem 
XVII.,  and  contrast  nam  and  ita  XLIV. 

5.  doleant  :   (a)  for  subjv.  in  both  dir.  and  indir.  disc.,  cf.  XXXIV. 
N.  5;   (b)  the  pres.  is  here  used,  rather  than  the  impf.,  after  the  past 
tense  of  the  verb  of  saying  which  introduces  the  whole  clause,  because 
a  universal  truth  rather  than  a  particular  instance  in  the  past  is  re- 
ferred to  ;   (c)  the  preceding  re-rum  is  the  geu.  plur.  of  res. 

6.  concedere  :   (a)  a  complementary  inf.  after  consuesse;   (b)  his, 
the  dat.  plur.  from  hi,  is  the  antec.  of  quos.  which  begins  the  preced- 
ing clause  ;   cf.  quae  pars  .   .   .   ea  XLIV.  ;   (c)  velint  is  pres.  subj. 
of  velle,  to  wish,  for  volunt,  the  pres.  ind.  of  the  dir.  disc.;  cf. 
vellent  XXXIII.,  volebat  XXXVI.,  voluisset  XLVI.  ;  (d)  degree 
of  comp.  of  secundiores  and  diuturniorem  ? 


3.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Pers.  endings  of  the  pass.    .     .  A.  &  G.  116.         H.  247. 

2.  The    complete    conjng.    of   the 

irreg.  verb  velle .      .      .     .     A.  &  G.  138.         H.  293. 

3.  Position  of  enim,  autem,  quo- 

que     A.  &  G.  345,  b.    H.  569,  III. 

4.  Position  of  the  rel.  clause  before 

the  principal  clause     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  201   c.    H.    572,     II. 

and  N. 


LESSON   LI. 


189 


4.     VOCABULARY. 


j .  admlrari,  to  wonder  at,  to  ad- 
mire. 
9,    oommutatio,  -onis   (mutare, 

(o  change),  a  changing,  change. 
8.  consuescere,  -suevit,  -suetus, 

to  accustom  ones  self;  in  pf.  to 

have  accustomed  one's  self,  to 

be  wont. 
4:.  diu,  adv.,  long  (used  of  time,  not 

space). 

5.  diuturnus,  adj.  (from  diu),  long 

(in  time) 

6.  dolere,  doluit,  to  feel  pain,  to 

grieve  for. 

7.  enim,  for ;  used  generally  after 

the  first  word  of  the  clause. 

8.  eodem,  adv.,  to  the  same  place. 
9    gloriari,  to  boast,  to  glory. 

10.  impune,  adv.,   without  punish- 
ment, with  impunity. 


11.  impunitas,  imp  unity. 

12.  Insoleiiter  (in  neg.  and  solere, 

to   be  accustomed],  strangely, 
insolently. 
13    iiiterdum,  adv.,  sometimes. 

14.  scelus,  -eris,  a  crime. 

15.  secundus,    following,     second, 

favorable  (a  wind  following  or 
right  astern  would  be  a  favor- 
able wind). 

16.  tarn,  so  (used  mostly  before  adv. 

and  adj.). 

17.  vestra,   fern.,   your,    plur. ;    cf. 

tuus,  thy  or  your,  sing. 

18.  vos,  ncm.  and  accus.  plur.,  you  ; 

cf.  poss.  adj.  vestra  and  nos, 
nostra. 

19.  victoria,  victory. 


5.     EXERCISES. 

1,  (a)    Principal    parts    of    ferre,    ulcisci,    concedere,    velle. 

(b)  Synopsis  of  concedere  in  3d  sing;,  act.  and  pass,  (c)  Decline 
secundus  in  all  genders,  (d)  Compare  diuturnus  in  all  genders. 
(e)  Decline  secundiores  res  tog-ether  in  plur. 

2,  (a)  We  glory   in  our  victory,  because  we  overcame  the  brave 
Romans.      (5)  We  think  that  when  we  defeated  Cassius  the  victory 
was  a  very  great  (one),     (c)  The  Helvetii  have  brought  many  wrongs 
upon   the  rest  of  the   G-auls.      (d)  The   immortal   gods  are  wont  to 
punish  those  men  who  glory  in  their  crimes. 

3,  (a)  The  Helvetii  wished  to  fight  continually  with   their   neigh- 
bors.    (5)  The  way  was  so  narrow  that  carts  could  be  drawn  (only) 
one-by-one,     (c)  All  those  countries  of  which  Caesar  was  informed 
stretch  toward  the  north,     (d]  Against  my  will  you  were  trying  to 
force  your  way  through  our  province  after  annoying  our  allies. 


190 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


6.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

].  A  letter  found  in  all  but  one  of  the  pers.  endings  of  the  pass. 
2.  Comparison  of  act.  and  pass.  pers.  endings.  3.  The  tenses  for 
completed  action  in  pass.  4.  A  verb  pf.  in  form  but  pres.  in  sense. 

5.  Position   in   Lat.  of  the  rel.  pron.,  of  the  demonstrative,  of  the 
monosyllabic  prep,  used  with   a  noun  and   adj.,  of  cum,  of  autem. 

6.  The   sign  of  the  pres.  subjv.      7.  The  verbs  used  thus  far  with 
the  complementary  inf.     8.   With  an  obj.  clause  of  purpose.     9.  Pe- 
culiarities in  the  conjug.  of  velle.      10.    You  and  your,  we  and  our, 
in  Lat.     11.  Four  kinds  of  abl.  sometimes  translated  by  the  Eng. 
prep.  in. 


LESSON    LII. 


1.    TEXT. 


Csesar,  B.  G.  L  14,  Cum  ea  to  the  end. 


Cum  haec  it  a  Bint,  tamen  si  ob- 


sides a  vobis  mihi  dabuntur, 
uti  ea  qua;  pollicemini  t'actu- 
ros  intellegam,  et  si  Hseduis 
de  injuriis  quas  ipsis  sociisque 
eorum  intulistis,  item  si  Allo- 
brogibus  satisfacietis,  ego  vo- 
biscum  pace  in  faciam." 

Divico  respondit : 


Cum   ea    ita   sint,  tamen  si    ob- 


sides ab  iis  sibi  dentur, 
uti  ea  quse  polliceantur  factu- 
ros  intellegat,  et  si  Ha3duis 
de  injuriis  quas  ipsis  sociisque 
eorum  intulerint,  item  si  Allo- 
brogibus  satisfaciant,  sese 
cum  iis  pacem  esse  facturum.' 


Ita  Helvetii  a  majoribus  suis  m- 
stituti  sunt,  uti  obsides  acci- 
pere,  non  dare  consuerint;  ejus 
rei  populus  Romanus  est 

testis." 


'Ita  HelvetiSs  a  majoribus  suis  in- 
stitutes esse,  uti  obsides  acci- 
pere,  11611  dare  consuerint ;  ejus 
rei  populum  Romanum  esse 

testem.' 


Hoc  responso  dato,  discessit. 


LESSON  LIL  191 


2.   NOTES. 

1.  ea,  those  things :  (a)  changed  from  haec,  these  things,  in  dir. 
disc.,  where  it  is  used  to  indicate  a  closer  relation  to  the  speaker; 
cf.  XXIII.  N.  4  (b)  ;   (b)  haec  like  ea  is  the  uom.  plur.  neut,  and 
like  ea  has  the  same  form  in  the  nom.  and  accus.  plur.  neut.  and  the 
uom.  sing',  fein. 

2.  tamen,  yet ;  this  word   is   used  in  contrast  to  the  preceding 
cum,  which  is  here  used  in  what  is  called  its  concessive  sense  and 
means  although  ;  note  that  it  is  followed  by  the  subjv.  in  both  dir. 
and  indir.  disc. 

3.  dentur  :   (a)  a  primary  is  sometimes   used  after  a  secondary 
tense  of  a  verb  of  saying  for  the  sake  of  vividness ;  see  Gram.  Less. 
below ;  (b)  dabuntur,  fut.  ind.  pass.   3d  plur. ;   for  change   to  pres. 
subjv.,  cf.  XLVI.  N.  1,  Gram.  Less. ;    (c)  vobis   is  the  abl.  plur.  of 
vos,  you,  nom.  plur.     (d)  Why  ab  iis  but  a  vobis  ?  (e)  Eemember 
that  Csesar  is  speaking  to  the  Helvetian  legates. 

4.  polliceantur  :    (a)   mode  and  tense  and  sign  ?  (b)   conjug.  of 
verb,  and  how  you  know  the  conjug.  from  this  form?  (c)  force  of 
the  endings  -ntur  and  -mini? 

5.  intellegat :   (a)  used  after  utl,  for  form  of  which,  see  uti  .  .  . 
proficiscantur  XXVIII.;    (£)  mode  and   tense?  why?   (c)   force  of 
ending  -m  in  intellegam?    (d)  the  subj.  of  facturos  (esse),  excep- 
tionally omitted,  would   be,  if  expressed,  vos  in  the  dir.  and  eos  in 
the  indir.  disc. ;   (e)  ea,  the  obj.  of  facturos,  is  here  the  antec.  of  rel. 
quae  ;  note  that  the  pron.  is,  ea,  id  is  used  constantly  as  the  antec. 
of  a  rel.,  e.  g.  id  XLV.,  ii  XLVII. 

6.  intulerint :    (a)  pf.  subjv.  of  the  verb  inferre ;  sign  ?  In  what 
other  tense   is  this  sign   found  ?    (b)  intul-istis,  pf.   ind.   2d  plur.  ; 
cf.  commemorav-istis  XL IX.  and  note  that  the  ending  is  the  same, 
though  the  steins  are  differently  formed  ;  cf.  XLVIII.  Obs.  2  (a)  ; 
(c)  for  the  preceding  dat.  ipsis   and   sociis,    cf.   flnitimls  inferre 
XVI. ;   (d)  ipsis  refers  to  Haeduls,  upon  the  Hcedui  themselves. 

7.  satisfaciant :    (a)  How  does  the  dir.  form  facietis  differ  from 
it  in  mode  and  tense  ?   (b)  the  preceding  Allobrogibus  is  dat.  with 
this  verb,  lit.  if  they  would  do  enough  for  the  Allobroges,  freely  if 
they  would  satisfy  the  Allobroges. 


192  INDUCTIVE    LATIN    METHOD. 

8.  facturum  esse  :   (a)  fat.  inf.  for  faciam,  the  fut.  ind.  let  pers. 
of  the  dir.  disc.  ;   (b)  note  that  -S-,  the  sign  of  the  fut.  ind.  in  the  3d 
and  4th  conjug,,  is  varied  to  -a- in  the  1st  sing-.,  and  the  form  becomes 
the  same,  in  that  pers.,  as  the  pres.  subjv. ;  cf.  faciam,  satisfacietis, 
intellegam  :   (c)  the  subj.   of  faciam   is   ego,   I,  which  is  here  ex- 
pressed as  a  separate  word  because  of  the  contrast  with  vobis  ;   (cT)  for 
position  of  cum  in  vobiscum,  cf.  VIII.  N.  4  (b). 

9.  majoribus  ;   for  meaning,  cf.  XLVII.  Vocab. 

10.  consuerint :   (#)  pf.  subjv.  even  in  dir.  disc,  because  the  verb 
of  a  result  clause;   (b)  force  of  pf.  tense  in   this  verb  ?  LI.  N.  4  (e)  ; 
(c)  for  whole  passage  from  ita,  cf.  se   .  .  .   niterentur  XLVII. 

11.  rei:    the  gen.  sing,  of  re's  ;  cf.  gen.  plnr.  re-rum  LI.  N.  5  (c). 

12.  testem  :   (a)  Why  accns.  in  indir.  but  uoin.  in  dir.  disc.  ?  cf. 
XX.  N.  4  (d)  •   (b)  What  gen.  depends  upon  it? 

13.  response  ;  here  from  the  noun  responsum,  a  reply. 


3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  Nouns  with  stems  in    g  have  the  endings  of  the  3d  decl.,  except 
in  the  gen.  sing,  and  the  gen.  plnr.,  where  the  endings  are  -I  sing,  and 
-rum  plur. 

2.  The  following  forms  of  the  demonstrative  pron.  hie,  haec,  hoc, 
have  been  used  in  the  text  thus  far :  hie,  hoc,  hac,  hi,  hcec,  horum, 
his. 

3.  Cum  causal  and  cum  concessive  take  the  subjv.  ;  cum  temporal 
usually  takes  the  subjv.  in  Caesar  when  used  with  the  impf.  or  plpf. 
tenses. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  decl.  and  gender  of -e  stems  A.  &  G.  72,  73.    H.  120. 

2.  The  decl.   of   ego    throughout 

and  of  vos  in  plnr.     .     .     .  A.  £  G.  98.^        H.  184. 

3.  The  complete  conjug.  of  esse 

and  posae A.    &    G.   119,    H.   204,  290, 

120,  b.  II.  N.I,  2. 


LESSON   LII.  193 

4.  The  clecl.  of  hie,  hsec,  hoc      .  A.  &  G.   p.  51,    H.  186,  L.  foot- 

foot-note  1  and        note  4. 
101 

5.  The   meaning'  and  use  of  hie, 

ille,  is,  ipse A.  &  G.  102,  a,    H.  450,   1,  4, 

b,  d,  e.  451,  452. 

6.  Cum  concessive A.  &  G.  326.         H.  514,  515 

TIL 

7.  The  pres.  and  pf.  after  an  his- 

torical tense  U    525>  ' 


5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  discedere, -cessit, -cessurus,       4.  responsum,  the.  thing  answered, 

to  (jo  apart,  to  depart.  a  reply. 

2.  instituere,  -stituit,  -stitutus,  5.  satisfacere,  -fecit,  -facturus, 

to  arrange,  construct,  instruct.  to  do  enough,  to  satisfy. 

3.  pollicSri,    pollicitus,   to  pro-  6.  testis,  a  witness. 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Decline  is,   ille,  ips3.     (V)  Decline  obses,  pax,  injuria, 

(c)  All  the  inf.  and  partic.  of  inferre  with  meaning-  of  each,      (d)  The 
synopsis  of  polliceri  in  3d  plur. 

2.  (a)    If  you   shall  give   me   hostages,  I   will  do  you  no  harm. 
(b)  But  if,  after  annoying  the  allies  of  the  Roman  people,  you  shall  lay 
waste  their  fields,  1  will  kill  the  largest  possible  number  of  your  army. 
(c}  The  Helvetii  said  they  would  not  satisfy  the  Allobroges  for  the 
injuries  which  they  had  inflicted  upon  them,     (c?)  The  Roman  people 
have  been  so  instructed  by  their  ancestors  that  they  wage  war  upon 
all  who  inflict  wrong  upon  them. 

3.  (a}  [  have  less  doubt  because  I  remember  that  those  things  did 
not  happen  on  account  of  any  misdeed  of  the  Romans,      (b)  We  ought 
not  to  fear  without  reason,      (c)  I  cannot  forget  that  yon  have  annoyed 
the  tlsedui  and  Allobroges.      (d)  For  fifty  (quinquaginta)  years  the 
Romans  remembered  that  disaster  in  which  the  Helvetii  were  glorying. 

13 


194  INDUCTIVE   L^TIN   METHOD. 


7.     TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  cases  in  which  the  forms  of  hie  given  in  Obs.  2  may  be 
found.  2.  Likeness  between  -e  and  -i  stems.  3.  Difference  between 
vos  and  nos,  tua  and  v»stra,  suus  and  ejus  or  eorum.  4.  Con- 
sonant changes  in  conjng.  of  esse.  5.  Letters  dropped  in  the  conjng. 
of  posse.  6.  Peculiarities  of  decl.  of  hie,  haec,  hoc.  7.  Contrast 
in  meaning  between  hie  and  ille.  8.  The  different  uses  of  conj.  cum. 

9.  Exact  meaning  of  tamen,  etiam,   ita,  item,    autem,    ibi,   ubi. 

10.  Change  of  a  fut.  ind.  in  a  subordinate  clause  in  passing  from  dir. 
to  indir.  disc.     11.  Of  a  fut.  pf.  ind.     12.  The  forms  of  the  fut.  ind. 
and  pres.  subjv.  in  3d  conjug. 


LESSON    LIII. 

REVIEW   of    LESSONS    XLIII.  to   LII.  inclusive. 

The  two  most  important  subjects  in  this  Review  are  the  Conjugation  of  the 
Verb  and  Indirect  Discourse.  On  both  of  them  7iiuch  has  been  learned  from  the 
text  of  the  last  ten  Lessons.  Be  sure  to  gain  so  complete  a  knowledge  of  these  sub- 
jects that  it  can  be  readily  used  in  the  Lessons  which  follow.  On  the  necessity  and 
the  method  of  review,  see  the  introduction  to  Lesson  XII. 

1.   TEXT.—  CAESAR,  B.  G.  I.,  12  TO  14  INCLUSIVE. 

Follow  implicitly  the  directions  given  in  XLII.  under  "  Text,"  1, 
2,  3,  4,  5,  simply  omitting  under  4  the  clause :  "  then  compare  the 
result  with  the  *  Verb  Diagram  '  of  XXVI. " 

2.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The   decl.    and    gender   of  -5 

stems A.  &  G.  72,  73.     H.  120. 

2.  The  decl.  of  vetus  .   A.  &  G.  85.  H.  158. 


LESSON   LTTT.  195 

3.  The  decl.  of  ego,  and  of  vos 

in  plur A.  &  G.  98.  H.  184. 

4.  The  dec!,  of  hie,  hsec,  hoc      .  A.  &  G.  p.   1)1,   H.186,  L  foot- 

foot-note       1,       note  4. 
and  101. 

5.  The  meaning  and  use  of  hie, 

ille,  is,  and  ipse       .     .     .   A.  &  G.  102,  a,    H.  450,   1,  4, 

b,  d,  e.  451,  452. 

6.  Force    of    num    in    asking    a 

question A.  &  G.  201,  c.    H.  351,  1,  N. 

3. 

7.  Quo  .  .  .  eo A.  &  G.  106,  c. 

8.  The  antec.   attracted   into   the 

rel.  clause A.  &  G.  200,  b,    H.  445,  9. 

and  N. 

9.  Position  of  the  rel.  before  the 

principal  clause    .     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  201  c.      H.     572,     II. 

and  N. 

10.  Position      of     enim,     autem, 

quoque A.  &  G.  345,  b.     H.  569,  III. 

11.  The  tenses  formed  on  the  pres., 

the  pf.,and  the  supine  stems  A.  &  G.  127.         H.  222,  I.  II. 

III. 

12.  The  pers.  endings  of  the  act. 

voice A.  &  G.  116  and    H.  247  and  1. 

foot-note  3. 

13.  The  pers.  endings  of  the  pass. 

voice A.  &  G.  116.         H.  247. 

14.  The  four  conjug.  complete1  .      .A.    &   G.    128-    H.  205-212. 

132. 

15.  The  complete  conjug.  of  esse 

and  posse A.    &     G.    119,    H.   204,    290, 

120,   b.  II.  N.  1,  2. 

1  Almost  all  forms  of  the  four  conjug.  have  now  been  learned  from  the  text,  at 
least  in  their  component  parts,  and  it  is  probably  best  to  learn  all  of  them  from  the 
grammar  for  the  sake  of  completeness  of  view.  The  teacher  should  see  to  it,  how- 
ever,  that  the  greatest  emphasis  is  laid  upon  the  3d  pers  and  the  modes  and  tenses 
which  are  most  common  in  Cscsar. 


196  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

16.  The  complete  conjug.  of  velle  A.  &  G.  138.         H.  293. 

17.  The   partitive    gen.    depending 

on    neuters    and    compara- 
tives       A.  &  G.  216,  2,    H.  397. 

3. 

18.  The  gen.  with  verbs  of  remem- 

bering and  forgetting     .     .  A.  &  G.  219.         H.  406,  IT. 

19.  Two    accus.    after    compound 

verbs A.  &  G.  239,  b.    II.  376. 

20.  The  rel.  quod  as  an  adv.  accus.  A.  &  G.  240,  a,    H.  378  and  2 ; 

b.  453,  6. 

21.  The  abl.  of  manner    .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  248  and    11.419,    III. 

Rem. 

22.  The  abl.  witli  niti      .     .     .     .   A.    &     G.     254    H.  425,  IT.  1, 

and  1.  1),  and  N. 

23.  Cum  concessive A.  &  G.  326.         H.  514,   515, 

111. 

24.  The  pf.  subjv.  in  prohibitions  .   A.  &  G.  269,  a.     H.   484,    IV., 

N.    1. 

25.  Substantive  quod  clauses    .      .  A.  &G.329,333.    H.    540,     IV. 

and  N. 
20.    The    gerundive    after    curare 

and  similar  verbs       .     .     .  A.  &  G.  294,  d.    H.  544,   2,  N. 

2. 

27.  The  question  indirectly  quoted  A.&  G.338,334.    H.  523,  TT.  1; 

529,  I. 

28.  Changes  of  mode  in  indir.  disc.   A.  &  G.  336,  339.    H.  523,  I.  II. 

1,111.  524. 

29.  Changes  of  tense  in  the  subor- 

dinate clauses  of  indir.  disc.  A.&G.285.286.    H.  491,  492, 

1,    2,    493, 
1,   2. 

30.  The  pres.  and  pf.  subjv.  after 

an  historical  tense H.  525,  1 

31.  Future  time  in  the  subjv.    .     .   A.  &  G.  110,  a;   H.  496,  I.  II. 

286,  Rem.  last 
sentence. 

32.  Changes  of  pers.  in  indir.  disc II.  526. 


LESSON  LIII. 


197 


3.    WORD    REVIEW. 

Classified  alphabetical  list  of  all  the  new  words  occurring  m   Caesar,  B.  G.   I. 

12-14. 


admirari 

com  memo  rare 
curare 

cave>e 


1.    VERBS. 

1st  Conjug.  (-a  verl 
gloriarl 
judicare 
maudare 


perseverare 
teniptare  (tentare) 
vexare 


abdere 
accidere 
agere 
aggredi 


committere      decipere 


*2d  Conjug.  (-e  verbs'). 
commovere          dolere          polliceri 

3d  Conjug.  (-e  verbs). 
Write  the  principal  parts  of  these  verbs, 
concidere         depoiiere          interticere 
consequi          despicere          niti 
consistere        discedere         oblivisci 
discere 
instituere 


consuescere 


persequi 

persolvere 

4fh  Conjug.  (-1  verbs'). 

adorni  impedlre 

Irregular  verb. 

ferre 

2.    NOUNS  HAVING  -A  STEMS. 
contumeiia          insidiae          silva          victoria 

3.    -O  STEMS. 

Nouns. 

avus  dens  meritum 

castra,  plur.  in  form  dolus  oculus 

Adj.  (having  also  fern,  stems  in  -a), 
aliqiri  diutnrnus  publicus 

Cassianus  incommodus  quartns 

conscius  pristinus  repentmus 

vestii,  plur. 


prodere 

reminisci 

?atisfacere 

tribuere 

ulciscl 


visrdia 


responsum 
soceii,  plur. 


secundus 
tuns 
utii,  plur. 


198 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN  METHOD. 


Arar  (Araris) 

calarnitas 

commutatio 

dubitatio 

dux 


immortal  is 
incredibilis 


4.    THIRD  DECL. 

Nouns. 

Give  the  gen.  and  gender  of  each, 
explorator  nomen 

impuuitas  scelus 

interuecio  testis 

lenitas 
\i\\ter.fem.  fy  exception 


Adj. 

inopinans 
Insigiiis 

5.    -U  STEM. 


major 

minor 


recens 
vetus 


6.    INDECL.  NUMERAL  ADJ. 


aliqui 

ego  (milii,  me,  nos) 


segerrime,  sup. 

diu 

eodem 


7.    PRON. 

tuus 
utrl,  plur. 

vestii,  plur. 
vos,  plur. 

8.    PREP. 

citra 

9.    ADV. 

gravius,  comp.       Insolenter 
improviso  interdum 

impune  magnopere 


emin 


nam 


10.    CONJ. 
sed 


sin 


ne  quare 

num        solum 
quam       tarn 


sive 


LESSON  LIV.  199 


LESSON    LIV. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  15,  through  nostris  cadunt. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  idem  ;   cf.  XXL  N.  4. 

2.  socils  ;  governed  by  ex,  like  provincia  and  Haeduls. 

3.  habebat :    (a)  the  obj.  is  the  rel.  quern  ;   (b)  coactum  agrees 
with  quern  ;   (c)  coactum  habebat  is  similar  in  meaning  to  the  Eug. 
partic.  with  have,  but  lays  more  emphasis  on  the  idea  of  possession 
and    continuing    to    possess,    thus    he    was    holding   after   having 
collected  ;  note  that,  in  the  Eng.  expression  he  has  held  the  cavalry, 
the  pass,  partic.  held  really  limits  cavalry  the  obj.  of  the  verb  has, 
just  as  in  the  case  above  coactum  limits  quern. 

4.  videant  :    (a)    mode,  tense,   and    sign  ?    (b)    why   subjv.  ?   cf. 

XXX.  N.  5  ;  XXXI f.  N.  3;   (c)  pres.,  because  it  is  after  the  primary 
tense  praemittit;   (d)  plur.,  although  its   subj.  refers   to   the  sing, 
collective  noun  equitatum ;  for  more  usual  agreement,  see  XLIX.  x. 
1(d). 

5.  in  ;  for  position,  cf.  XV.  N.  7  (c). 

6.  faciant :   (a)  for  tense,  cf.  4  (c)  ;    (b)  for  mode,  cf.  XLIII.  N. 
2  (c)  ;   (c)  cf.  the  forms  of  the  text  :  adficiSbantur,  facere,  fact! 
sunt,  perficit.  faciunt,  faciendum,  fecisse,  facturum.      Which  are 
of  the  4th  conjug.?    On  what  stem  are  all  the  forms  of  the  4th  conjug. 
based?    (d)   quas,   which    introduces    the   clause   and    agrees   with 
partes,  is  from  the  interrogative  qui,  not  the  rel.  quT. 

7.  committunt :    (a]  Might   the  preceding  cupidius  agree  with 
agxnen,  so  far  as  for.n  is  concerned  ?    How  do  you  know  that  it  does 
not  so  agree  ?  for  its  meaning,  see  Gram.  Less. ;    (b)  for  loco,  see 

XXXI.  N.  9. 

8.  paucl ,  for  use,  sec  XXIX.  N.  6  (5). 


200  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  In  Lat.  as  in  Eng.,  several  nouns  may  be  governed  by  the  same 
prep. 

2.  Capio,  /  take,  facio,  /  make,  gradior,  /  go,  morior,  /  die, 
patior,  I  suffer,  and  their  compounds,  and  some  others  not  yet  found 
in  the  text,  are  of  the  3d  conjug.,  though  having  the  vowels  -io  in  the 
pres.  hid.  1st.  sing,  like  the  4th  conjug.      The  following  forms,  all 
based  on  the  pres.  stem,  are  of  the  4th  conjug.  in  both  act.  and  pass. : 
the  pres.  ind.  1st  sing,  and  3d  plur.,  the  impf.  and  fut.  ind.  and  pres. 
subj.,  throughout,  and  the  3d  plur.  of  the  fut.  imperative;  also  the 
pres.  act.  partic.,  the  gerund,  and  gerundive.     All  other  forms  drop 
the  i,  and  are  of  the  3d  conjug. 


4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  interrog.  adj.  qui   .     .     .    A.  &  G.  104.         H.    188,    II. 

and  1. 

2.  Conjug.  of  capere     .      .     .      .    A.  &  G.  p.  83.      H.   217,  218, 

219. 

3.  The  com  p.  meaning  too  rather 

than  more.  A.  &  G.  93,  a.      H.  444,  1. 

4.  The    pf.     pass,     partic.     after 

habere A.  &  G.  292,  c.     H.  388,  1,  N. 

5.  Collective    nouns    with    agree- 

ment of  plurals    .     .     .     .    A.  &  G.  205,  c.      H.  461,  1. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  agmen   (agere),  that  which  is  3.  cadere,   cecidit,   casurus,   to 

set  in  motion,  an  army  on  the  fall 

march,    a    line   (of  march);  4.  cupide    (rf.     adj.     cupidus), 

iiovissimum     agmen,     the  eagerly, 

newest  or  last  line,  the  rear.  5.  equitatus,  -us,  a  collection  of 

2.  alienus    (alius),    belonging   to  horsemen,  cavalry. 

another,  foreign,  unfavorable. 


LESSON  LIV.  201 

6-  hostis,  a  stranger,  an,  enemy  ;       9.  pauci  (sing,  very  rare)Jt/ez0. 

in  plur.,  the  enemy.  10.  posterus  (post),  coming  after \ 

7.  insequi,    -secutus,    to   follow  following. 

up.  11.  prsemittere,  -misit,  -missus, 

8.  movere,     movit,    motus,    to  to  send  before. 


6.  EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Decline  together  postero  die,  eo  loco,  equitatum  omnem, 
omni  provincia,  novissimum  agmen.      (b)   Synopsis  of  facit,  3d 
sing,  act-  and  pass,     (c)  Decline  qui. 

2.  (a)   Csesar   had    with    him    as    cavalry   four   thousand    men. 
(£)  Those  men  who  had  been  collected  out  of  all  the  province  he  sent 
ahead,     (c)   Having  attacked  the  enemy  in  an  unfavorable  place,  they 
were  defeated,     (c?)  Csesar  sent  the  cavalry  to  follow  up  the  enemy. 

3.  (a)  A  few  of  the  cavalry  fell,  since  they  had  joined  battle  in  a 
very  unfavorable  place,     (b)   Caesar  told  Divico  that  if  the  Helvetii 
would  do  what  they  had  promised  lie  would  make  peace  witli  them. 
(c)  When  hostages  had  been  given,  Csesar  established  friendship  with 
the  nearest  states,  and  levied  several  legions  upon  them. 


7.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  conjug  of  impedire  and  facere  compared  in  the  pres. 
system.  2.  The  Lat.  for  a  more  eager  line  follows,  and  he  follow^ 
the  line  more  eagerly.  3.  The  Eng.  for  novae  res,  novissimum 
agmen.  4.  Lat.  for  a  soldier,  a  leader,  a  lieutenant,  an  enemy, 
the  enemy.  5.  Difference  between  idem  and  idem.  6.  When  the 
pres.  and  when  the  impf.  subjv.  is  used  in  a  purpose  clause.  7.  The 
emphasis  in  the  sentence  Idem  facit  Caesar.  8.  Comparison  of 
cupidius  as  adj. ;  as  adv. 


202  INDUCTIVE  LATI:*  METHOD. 


LESSON   LV. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  15,  quo  proelio  to  the  end. 

Z    NOTES. 

1.  sublati ;  pf.  pass,  partic.,  from  tollere,  means  raised  (in  spirit), 
elated. 

2.  equitibus  ;  for  use,  cf.  legione  mHitibusque  XXXIV.  and  H. 
415,  I.  1. 

3.  equitum  ;   why  not  equitium? 

4.  agmine  ;  for  use  as  abl.  of  place  without  a  prep.,  cf.  Gram. 
Less. 

5.  nostros  ;  for  use,  cf.  suis  XLVII. 

6.  ccepgrunt ;  lacks  the  pres.  system  ;  see  Gram.  Less. 

7.  prohibere  :    (a)  ohj.  of  habgbat,  which  here  means  he  held  in. 
sense  of  regarded  ;  (b)  satis,  which  has  here  the  force  of  a  predicate 
noun,  is  an  accus.  in  agreement  with  prohibere  ;    (c)   hostem,  the 
obj.  of  prohibere,  means  each  one  of  the  enemy  ;  our  Eng.  expres- 
sion, the  enemy,  is  plur.  in  sense,  and  is  generally  represented  in  Lat. 
By  the  plur.,  cf.  hostgs  LIV. ;   (d)  contrast  a  proelio  and  rapinis, 
and  cf.  IX.  N.  15  (c)  (d). 

8.  fecerunt :  (a)  for  const,  of  preceding  dies,  cf.  XX.  N.  3  (b). 
How  do  you  know  that  it  is  not  a  nom.?    (b)  case  of  iter  here? 
gen.  sing? 

9.  primum  ;  limits  what  word  understood  ? 

10.  interesset  :   (a)  why  subjv.  ?  (b)  its  subj.  is  amplius,  which 
is  in  form  a  neut.  comp. ;   (c)  milibus  is  the  abl.  case  after  the  comp. 
amplius  ;  quam,  than,  being  omitted,  and  the  abl.  translated  by  than  ; 
(d)  quinis  and  senis  are  distributive  adj.  meaning  Jive  and  six  to 
each  or  at  a  time  (cf.  singuli  XXIX.)  ;  used  here  to  show  that  the 
armies  were  five  or  six  miles  apart  on   each  day  ;    (e)   with  quim, 


LESSON  LV.  203 

nom.,  cf.  quinque,  jive,  quindecim,  above  (quinque  and  decem), 
fifteen,  quinquaginta  (like  octogiiita  XVII.),  qumgenti  (nom.  of 
quingentis,  above),  ducenta  XVII.  N.  9,  qulntus,  fifth. 

3.     OBSERVATION. 

1.  The  cardinal  numbers  from  quattuor  to  centum  are  indecl.; 
the  multiples  of  ten  from  thirty  to  ninety  end  in  -ginta ;  the  multiples 
of  one  hundred  from  two  to  nine  hundred,  end  in  -cent!  (centum), 
changed  after  n  to  -genti,  and  are  declined.  Almost  all  the  names  of 
cardinals,  ordinals,  and  distributives  are  derived  in  some  way  from 
the  first  ten  cardinals. 

4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Conjug.  of  ccepit      .     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  143,  a.    H.  297. 

2.  The  cardinals  to  mille   .     .     .    A.  &  G.  94.  H.  174. 

3.  The  use  of  distributives .     .     .    A.  &  G.  95  and  H.  174,  2,  1). 

«. 

4.  The  abl.  after  comp.  without 

quam A.  &  G.  247  and  H.  417  and  1. 

a. 

5.  The   abl.  of  place    without   a 

prep. A.  &  G.  258,  /.     H.  425,  II.  1, 

1)  and  2. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  amplus,    ample,   much,    great;       7>  lacessere,  lacessivit  or  laces- 

adv.,  amplS.  siit,  lacessitus,  to  provoke, 

2.  audacter,  boldly.  assail. 

3.  circiter,  adv.,  about.  8.  populatio  (populari),  a  laying 

4.  ccepit,  coepisse,    (he,  she,  it)                 waste*  ravaging. 

began.  9.  preesentia   (prae    and  esse), 

5.  eques,     equitis     (equus,     a  a    being    present,    presence; 

horse),  a  horseman,  a  knight.  in  praesentia,  at  present. 

6.  interesse,  interfuit,  to  be  be-     10.  propellere,    -pulit,    -pulsus, 

tween  or  among,  to  take  part  to  drive  before. 

in;    interest,    it    makes    a     11.  pabulatio  (pabular  I),  a  getting 

difference,  it  interests.  of  food,  a  foraging. 


204  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

12.  quindecim  (qumque  and  de-     16.  sen!  (sex),  distributive,  six  to 

cem),  fifteen.  each,  sLc  at  a  time. 

13.  qumgenti,  five  hundred.  17.  subsistere,   -stitit,   to  make  a 

14.  quini,  distributive,  fee  to  each,  stand,  resist. 

fee  at  a  time.  IS.  tantus,  adj.,  so  much,  so  great.1 

15.  rapma     (rapere,     to     seize}, 

plunder. 

6.     EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Give  all  forms  of  contiuebat  in  both  act.  and  pass,  which 
are  based  on  the  pres.  stem,  using  3d  sing,  in  ind.  and  snbjv. ;  in 
other  words,  give  a   synopsis   of  continebat   in   the   pres.   system, 
(b)  Decline  proelium,  eques,  agmen,  pabulatio,  and  give  the  rules 
for   the   gender   of    the    last    two.       (c)    Compare   amplus,    ample, 
audacter. 

2.  (a)  The  Helvetii  were  elated  by  this  battle,      (b)   It  will  be 
enough  for  Caesar  to  keep  his  soldiers  from  battle  and  restrain  the 
enemy  from  foraging,     (c)  The  horsemen  who  were  driven  forward 
by  the  Helvetii  were  not  Romans  but  Gauls,     (d]  Five  hundred  Hel- 
vetii are  not  able  to  drive  before  (them)  four  thousand  llomans. 

3.  (a)   The  Helvetii  began  to  think  that  they  could  make  a  stand 
and  wage  war  upon  the  Romans,      (b)   The  multitude  of  Helvetii  was 
so  great  that  Caesar  did  not  attack  it  in  an  unfavorable  place  with  his 
legions,     (c)  The  armies  were  marching  in  such  a  way  that  the  rear 
of  the  enemy  was  five  miles  distant  from  the  van  (first  line)  of  the 
llomans.     (d)  Caesar  says  that  the  horsemen  ought  not  to  attack  the 
rear  of  the  other  army  so  boldly. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  The  different  kinds  of  numerals.  2.  Eng.  words  derived  from 
the  first  ten  cardinals.  3.  Lat.  for  the  line  or  army  on  the  march, 
the  van,  the  rear.  4.  The  case  used  when  quam  is  expressed. 
5.  The  3d  decl.  nouns  which  have  i  in  the  gen.  plur.  6.  Meaning  of 

1  Note  how  many  words  in  this  Vocab.  are  related  to  other  Lat.  words.  The 
student  must  not  forget  to  prepare  himself  with  related  Eng.  words. 


LESSON  LVI.  205 

nostri,  nostra,  sul,  sua,  as  nouns  in  the  plur.  7.  Cases  which  have 
the  same  form  in  the  -e  decl.  8.  In  the  -u  dec].  9.  The  use  of 
passuum  in  connection  with  milia.  10.  All  the  numerals  which 
contain  the  syllable  sex.  11.  Difference  between  the  abl.  of  means 
and  the  abl.  of  voluntary  agent.  12.  Between  the  accus.  and  abl.  of 
time. 


LESSON    LVI. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  16,  through  adesse,  dicere. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  flagitare  :   (a)  though  an  inf.  its  subj.  is  the  nom.  Caesar,  and 
it  is  translated  like  the  ind.,  Ccesar  kept  earnestly  asking  or  kept  im- 
portuning.    Such  an  inf.  is  used  in  animated  narrative,  and  is  called 
the  historical  inf.;  (b)  it  has  two  objects,  —  Haeduos,  the  name  of 
the  persons  who  are  asked,  and  frumentum,  the  name  of  the  thing 
asked  for;  with  certain  words  a  similar  const,  occurs  in  Eng.,  e.  g.  in 
the  expression  he  asks  the  boy  the  way,  boy  has  the  same  const,  as 
Haeduos  and  way  the  same  const,  as  frumentum  ;   (c)  essent  in  the 
subordinate  clause  is  subjv.,  because  of  the  idea  of  saying  implied  in 
flagitare ;    Ccesar  asked  for  the  corn  which,  as  he  said,  was  promised. 

2.  ut  .  .   .  dictum  est ;  for  ut  with  ind.,  cf.  XXV.  N.  6. 

3.  frumenta  in   agris ;  note  that  the  plur.  is  here  used  for  the 
grain  in  the  fields,  while  the  harvested  grain  for  which  Caesar  asks 
the  Haedui  is  frumentum.     Why  should  the  plur.  be  more  appropri- 
ate for  the  standing  grain  ? 

4.  subvexerat ;  note  that  flumine  and  navibus  are  both  necessary 
means  in  bringing  up  the  grain. 

5.  poterat :  (a)  followed  by  the  complementary  inf.  uti ;   (b)  const. 
of  frumentS?  XXVIII.  N.  2. 

6.  ducere  :   (a)  historical   inf.  ;    (b)  diem  is  not  its  obj.  but  an 
accus.  of  time;  (c)  ex,  out  of,  has  here  the  force  of  after,  diem  ex- 


206  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

die,  day  after  day ;  (d)  ducere   has  Caesarem   understood  as  its 
obj.,  and  means  to  put  off,  to  delay. 

7.  conferri  :    (a)   pres.  inf.   pass.  ;    note   the    doubling*   of   the  r ; 
(b)    cf.    differunt    IV.,    efferre    (for   efferere)    XXVILI.,   intulerat 
XLIV.,  ferre  (for  ferere)   XLVIL,  fero,  dir.  disc.,  XLIX.,  tulisse 
LI.  and   sublati  LV.    (which    though    not  from   ferre,    shows    the 
supine  stem  of  that  verb);  note  that  the  three  stems  fere-,  tul-  and 
lat-  have  no   common   base,  arid  that  final  -e   of  the  pres.  stem  is 
sometimes  dropped. 

8.  dlcere  :   (a)  historical  inf.,  its  subj.  is  Haedui;  (b)  conferri, 
comportari,  adesse,  inf.  in  indir.   disc. ;  subj.,  frumentum   under- 
stood. 

3.     GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Conjug.  of  ferre A.  &  G.  139.         H.  292  and  1, 

1),  2). 

2.  Two  accus.  with  verbs  of  ask- 

ing and  teaching  .     .     .     .    A.  &  G.  239,  c.     H.  374. 

3.  The  historical  inf.     .     .     .     .    A.  &  G.  275  and    H.  536,  1  and 

Rem.  N. 


4.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  adesse,  -fuit,  to  be  near,  to  be  5.  cotidie  or  quotidig,  daily. 

present,  to  aftxixf.  6.  flagitare,  to  ask  repeatedly  or 

2.  avertere,  -vertit,  -versus,   to  earnestly. 

turn  away.  7-  frigus,  -oris,  cold  ;  in  plur.  with 

3.  comportare,  to  earn/  together.  same  meaning. 

4.  conferre,    tulit,    collatus,  to  8.  interim,  meanwhile. 

briny   together,    to  collect,   to  9.  maturus,  ripe,  early. 

compare ',  where  con  is  inten-  10.  niodo,  adv.,  only. 

sive,    to   briny   vigorously   or  11.  nolle,  noluit  (ne  and  velle), 

rapidly,  se  conferre,  to  betake  to  be  unwilling. 

ove*   self.      (In    this   lesson  12.  pabulum    (pascere,    to  feed, 

conferri  evidently  means  is  pasture],    that    which  feeds, 

being    collected    among    the  food,   especially  for  animals, 

Hasdiii,  comportari,  is  being  fodder. 

brought  together  to  Csesar.) 


LESSON   LVI.  207 

13.  ponere,    posuit,    positus,    to  quidem    enclosing    the   ein- 

pluce.  phatic  word,  thus  ne  Caesar 

14.  publice,    publicly,     by    public  quidem,  not  eoen  Ccesar. 

authority.  16.  subvehere,    -vexit,    -vectus, 

15.  quidem,     indeed',     in     Caesar  to   carry  from    below,  i.e.  to 

mostly  in  the  phrase  ne  .  .  .  carry  up. 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Analyze  polliciti,  suppetgbat,  subvexerat.      (b)  Synopsis 
of  averterant  in  pf.  system,      (c)  Principal  parts  of  polliciti  essent, 
flagitare,  uti.     (d)  Decline  frigora,  septentrionibus,  navibus. 

2.  (a)  The  Haedui  did  not  bring-  the  grain  which  they  had  promised. 
(b)  Caesar  kept  asking  for  the  grain,  because  (as  he  said)  the  supply 
of  food  which  he  had  was  riot  sufficiently  great,     (c)  The  ships  which 
were  carrying  the  grain  were  left  (behind)  when  Caesar  turned  away 
from  the  river,     (d)  The  cold  is  greater  in  Gaul  than  in  Italia,  be- 
cause Gaul  stretches  toward  the  north. 

3.  (a)  Caesar  turned  away  from  the  river,  in  order  to  follow  up  the 
Helvetii.     (b)  The  great  number  of  beasts  of  burden,  which  were  draw- 
ing the  wagons  of  the  Helvetii,  had  consumed  all  the  fodder,    (c)  Hav- 
ing used  very  much  fodder,  Caesar  asked  the  Haedui  for  the  grain 
which  they  were  collecting,     (d)  Caesar  asked  the  Haedui  to  bring 
the  largest  possible  supply  of  fodder. 


6.     TOPICS   FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Different  gen.  endings  possible  for  nouns  in  -us.  2.  Meaning 
and  position  of  nS  .  .  .  quidem.  3.  Difference  in  meaning  between 
frumentum  and  frumenta.  4.  Analysis  of  poterat.  5.  Meaning 
of  copia  in  plur.  6.  Exact  meaning  of  the  word  translated  north. 
7.  How  does  this  exact  meaning  explain  the  use  of  sub  before  it 
instead  of  in.  8.  Two  meanings  of  ut  and  two  modes  used  after  it. 
9.  Different  ways  of  saying  because  of  in  Lat.  10.  Difference  in  the 
two  accus.  after  a  verb  of  asking.  11.  Case  of  the  subj.  of  the 
historical  inf. 


208  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


LESSON    LVII. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  16,  Ubi  se  to  the  end. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  intellexit  :  (a)  follows  ubi,  when  ;  cf.  instances  of  the  use  of 
ubi  in  XXVII.  XXXII.  XXXV.  XLIir. ;   what  mode  and  tense  follow 
ubi  in  all  these  instances  ?  (b)  diutius  is  the  comp.  of  diu,  with  sense 
of  too  rather  than  more;  cf.  cupidius  XLIV. ;   (c)  duel  is  used  in 
same  sense  as  in  preceding  lesson  ;  snbj.?  voice? 

2.  oporteret:   (a)  for  use,  cf.  XXIV.  N.  3;  for  meaning,  cf.  con- 
cgdendum    XXXIII.,    debuerint   XL.;     (b)   quo   die;    cf.   quibus 
itiiieribus  XXIX. ;   (c)  militibus  ;  for  case,  see  XXII.  Obs.  3. 

3.  eorum  ;  antec.  ? 

4.  Divitiaco,  Lisco  ;  form  an  abl.  absolute  const,  with  convoca- 
tis  to  be  supplied. 

5.  praeerat  ;  for  dat.  used  with  it,  cf.  XIX.  N.  12  (c]. 

6.  vergobretum  ;  accus.  in  apposition  with  quern  ;  magistratui, 
just  before,  means  the  magistracy  (office  not  officer),  and  the  antec. 
of  quern  is  Lisco. 

7.  Haedui.     How  does  its  position  at  the  end  of  the  clause  modify 
the  meaning  of  the  sentence  ? 

8.  annuus  ;  adj.,  agreeing  with  qui. 

9.  in  suds  ;  into,  toward,  over  his  (countrymen),  not   among  his 
(countrymen),  which  would  be  in  suis   or  apud   suos ;  cf.  in  his, 
just  before,  and  apud  Helvetios  XIII. 

10.  graviter ;  adv.,  formed  by  adding  the  ending  -ter  to  gravi-, 
the  stem  of  the  corresponding  adj.  ;  cf.  the  comp.  gravius  XLIX. 

11.  accusat ;  the   principal  verb  of  the   sentence ;  note  how  tho 
reader  is  kept  in  suspense  until  preliminary  statements  are  brought  in. 

12.  posset:    (a)   for  mode,   cf.   XLIV.   N.  5;    (b)  the  subj.  is 
frumentum  to  be  supplied. 


LESSON  LVII.  209 


13.  propinquls    hostibus  :     for    const,,    cf.    Sequanis 
XXXVI. 

14.  sublevetur  :     (a)    mode   and  tense?  why?  cf.   accusat   and 
LVI.  N.  1  (c)  •   (b)  the  subj.  is  Caesar. 

15.  magna  ex  parte,  out  of  or  from  a  great  part,  freely,  in  a 
great  measure,  largely  ;  note  position  of  prep. 

16.  susceperit:    (a)  pf.    subjv.  ;    another  tense  with  same  form? 
(b)  for  reason  of  mode,  cf.  XL.  N.  2  (b). 

17.  multo  gravius;  for  multo,  cf.  XXVI  T.  N.  1. 

3.     OBSERVATION. 

1.  Many  adj.  with  stems  ending  in  -I  form  the  positive  of  the  cor- 
responding adv.  by  adding-  -ter  to  this  stem  ;  most  adj.  with  masc. 
stems  in  -o  form  the  positive  of  the  adv.  by  changing  -o  of  the  stem  to 
-S  ;  both  adv.  in  -e  and  those  in  -ter  have  the  comp.  like  the  nom. 
sing.  neut.  of  the  corresponding  adj.  and  usually  form  the  sup.  by 
changing  final  -um  of  the  neut.  sup.  of  the  adj.  to  -e*. 

4.     GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Difference  in   meaning   of  the 

same  prep,  when   used  with 

different  cases   .....  A.  &  G.  152,  c.     H.     435    and 

N.  1. 

2.  Mode  and  tense  used  after  ubi    A.  &  G.  324.        H.    518    and 

N.  1. 
5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  accusare  (ad  and  causa),  to       6.  emere,  emit,  emptus,  to  buy. 

call  to  account,  to  blame,  to  7  .  graviter,  heavily,  severely* 

accuse.  8.  Instare,    -stitit,   -staturus,  to 

2.  annuus  (annus),  annual,  yearly.  stand  upon,    to  approach,   to 

3.  convocare,    to    call    together,  press  upon. 

summon.  9    metiri,  mensus,  to  measure. 

4.  creare,  to  make,  to  elect.  10.  nex,  necis,  death,  especially  a 

5.  destituere,  -stituit,  -stitutus,  violent  death. 

to   set  away  from,  to   aban-     11.  potestas  (posse),  power,  law- 
don.  fid  authority. 

H 


210                     INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

12."-praeesse,  -fuit,  to  be  over,  to     17.  sublevare,  to  lift  up  from  be- 

command  ;  cf.  praeficere,  to                neath,  to  aid. 

put  in  command.  18.  summus    (irreg.    sup.    of   su- 

13.  praesertim,  especially.  perus),  highest. 

14.  precea,  prayers.  19.  vergobretus,  the  title   of  the 

15.  propinquus,  near;  as  noun,  a  chief    magistrate   among   the 

relative.  Hsedui. 

16.  queri,  questus,  to  complain.  20.  vita,  life. 


6.   EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)    Synopsis    of  metiri  *    and    susceperit    in    pres.    system. 

(b)  Synopsis  of  perfect  system  of  emere.      (c)    Synopsis   of  supine 
system  of  accusare.     (c?)  Compare  gravius,  grave,  gravis.     (e)  De- 
cline nex,  dies,  magistratus. 

2.  (a)  The  chief  magistrate  among  the  Haedui  is  called  by  them 
vergobretus.      (b)  Caesar    ought  to   measure  out   grain   to-day    (this 
day),     (c)  Although   Caesar  cannot  buy  grain  or  take  it  from  the 
fields,  yet  the  Haedui  do  not  bring  together  into  the  camp  the  grain 
which  they  have  promised. 

3.  (a)  Caesar,  influenced  by  the  prayers  of  the  Haedui,  has  enrolled 
his  legions  (abl.  absolute)  and  is  waging  war.     (b)  Cnesar  was  much 
more  angry,  because    the   Hsedui    had   put    him    off   day   after  day. 

(c)  Caesar  could  not  use  the  grain  which  was  in  the  ships,  because  he 
had  marched  away  from  the  river,     (d)  Many  chiefs   of  Gaul  who 
had  followed  Caesar  were  in  the  camp. 


7.     TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Difference  in  form  and  meaning  between  emit  and  emit.  2.  Two 
ways  of  forming  adv.  from  adj.  3.  Difference  between  in  castra  and 
in  castris.  4.  Two  meanings  of  magistratus.  5.  Three  verbs 
meaning  to  command  arid  one  meaning  to  put  in  command.  6.  Two 
words  meaning  ivhen  and  the  const,  used  with  each.  7.  How  to 
say  when  in  Lat.  without  using  any  word  meaning  when.  8.  Two 

1  Where  no  pers.  or  number  is  mentioned,  the  3d  sing,  may  be  used  in  the  ind. 
and  subjv. 


LESSON   LVIII.  211 

possible  meanings  of  diutius ;  four  possible  meanings  of  gravius. 
9.  Peculiarity  in  use  of  oporteret.  10.  Three  ways  of  expressing 
obligation.  11.  Difference  between  Lat.  and  Eng.  as  to  the  number 
of  particulars  included  in  any  one  sentence.  12.  The  tense  of  the 
subjv.  which  is  used  after  a  pres.  ind.  to  express  incomplete  action ; 
to  express  complete  action.  13.  Eng.  words  derived  from  some  form 
of  convocare,  appellare,  emere,  metiri. 


LESSON     LVIII. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.    f.  17,   through  imperia  praeferre  ; 

Before  translating  this  Text,  review  once  more  the  text  of  Chap.  13  and  14. 

2.     NOTES. 

1,    proponit :   (a)  its  obj.  is  id  understood,  which  is  the  antec.  of 
quod ;   (b)  quod  is  the  obj.  of  tacuerat;  which  is  here  transitive. 
2     esse  ;  why  inf.,  and  what  is  the  dir.  form  ? 

3.  plurimum  vale  at ;  for  meaning,  cf.  plurimum  possent  XXII. 

4.  magistrates  :   (a)  a  nom.  plur.,  has  the  same  const,  as  the  qui 
before   quam,  i.  e.  it  is  the  subj.  of  possint  to   be   supplied  ;    lit. 
translation  from  qui,  who  can  more  than  the  magistrates  themselves 
(can} ;  (b)  reason  for  mode  of  possint  ?   for  tense  ?  (c)  plus  is  the 
irreg.  nent.  comp.  of  multum  and  plurimum. 

5.  conferant :   (a)  for  const.,  cf.  XXV.  N.  1 ;   (b)  for  the  use  of 
plur.  number  here,  cf.  LIV.  N.  4  (d). 

6.  debeant :   (a)   used  with  complementary  inf.  praestare,  which 
here  means  to  furnish  ;   (b)  antec.  of  quod? 

7.  praeferre :   (a)  the  subj.  is  se,  referring  to  nonnullos,  i.  e.  to 
the  influential  H;eduan  chiefs  who  were  unfriendly  to   the   Romans; 
(b)  these  chiefs  say  to  the  multitude,  if  we  cannot  any  longer  hold 
the  chief  place  of  Gaul,  we  choose  the  rule  of  the  Gnuls  (i.  e.  to  be 
ruled  by  the  Gauls)  rather  than  the  rule  of  the  Ronwns. 


212  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  Irreg.    comparison   of   the   adj. 

exterus,  superus,  magnus, 
parvus,    multus,    propior, 

ulterior A.  &  G.  90,  91    H.  163,  3;  165 

and  a.  and    N.    1  ; 

166. 

2.  Comparatives  with  quain     .     .  A.&G.  208,  a  ;   H. 417, 1,444, 

247,  a.  2. 


4.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  antea,  adv.,  before.  8.  proponere,  -posuit,  -positus, 

2.  dSmum,  at  last.  to  put   or   set  forth,    to   ck- 

3.  deterrere,     reg.,     to    frighten  dare. 

away  from,  to  deter.  9.  seditiosus,  seditious. 

4.  improbus,  abooe  or  below  the  10.  tacere,  reg.,  to  be  silent ;  also 

proper  standard,   base,  exces-  sometimes    transitive,    to    be 

sloe,  wicked.  silent  about,   to  pass  over  in 

5.  plus,   pluris    (tie ut.    comp.    of  silence. 

multus),  more.  11.  turn,  adv.,  of  lime,  then. 

6.  praeferre,  -tulit,  -latus,  to  bear  12.  valere,   valuit,   valiturus,  to 

before,  to  prefer,  to  choose.  be    strong    or     powerful,     to 

7.  privatim,  privately,  as  private  avail. 

citizens. 

5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  Write  first  the  Eng.  and  then  the  Lat.  of  the  dir.  disc,  which  is 
quoted  in  this  lesson. 

2.  (a)   Dinnnorix,  the  brother  of   Divitiactis,  was   moie  powerful 
than  Liscus  himself,     (b)  When  Caesar  ordered  grain  to  be  brought 
together,  some  did  riot  do  what  he  ordered,     (c)  Some  were  persuading 
the  multitude  not  to  bring  grain  to  Caesar,      (d)  Caesar  was  informed 
by  Liscus  that  some  of  the  chiefs  were  unfriendly  to  the  Boinans. 

3.  (a)  The  multitude,  (because)  influenced  by  the  reckless  talk  of 
the  chiefs  who  desired  revolution,  did  not  bring  the  grain  to  the  camp. 


LESSON   LIX.  213 

(b}  The  common  people  ought  to  furnish  the  grain  which  they  have 
promised,  (c)  When  Caesar  has  called  together  the  chiefs,  he  asks  for 
the  grain,  (d)  All  prefer  the  rule  of  their  own  (countrymen)  to 
(than)  the  rule  of  strangers  (alienus,  as  noun). 

6.     TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Principal  parts  of tacere  and  formation  of  its  stems.  2.  Gender 
and  decl.  of  plus.  3.  What  quam  connects  in  each  instance  of  its 
use  in  the  Text  of  this  lesson.  4.  Difference  in  form  and  meaning 
of  possunt,  possint,  possent,  poterunt,  poterant,  potuerunt. 
5.  Antec.  of  the  pronouns  in  this  lesson.  6.  Two  cases  in  which  the 
form  ipsl  is  found.  7.  How  to  decide  whether  quod  means  because 
or  which.  8.  A  transitive  and  an  intransitive  meaning  of  tacere. 
9.  Eng.  words  related  to  tacere,  proponere,  valere.  plus.  10.  What 
subjv.  in  the  passage  are  so  simply  because  they  are  in  indir.  disc., 
and  what  are  subjv.  in  dir.  disc.  ? 


LESSON    LIX. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  17,  neque  dubitare  to  the  end. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  debeant :    (a)  the  brackets   about  this   word  indicate   that  it 
probably  does  not  belong  in  the  Text ;  it  may  be  omitted  in  transla- 
tion; (b)  dubitare  is  therefore  the  principal  verb  of  indir.  disc.;  it 
has  the  same  subj.  as  praeferre  in  preceding  lesson. 

2.  superaverint :    (a)  a  pf.  subjv.  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  indir. 
disc,  after  the  primary  tense,  proponit ;    (b)   changed  from  a  fut. 
pf.  ind.  in  dir.  disc.,  where,  however,  its  form  was  the  same  ;  for  a 
fut.  pf.  quoted  after  a  secondary  tense,  cf.  XLYI.  N.  3  (b)  (c)  (d)  ; 
(c)  conjug.  and  analysis  of  form  ? 


214  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  sint  erepturl :  (a)  sint  is  in  the  subjv.  after  quin  in  both  the 
dir.  and  indir.  disc. ;  cf.  XXII.  N.  7  (b)  and  XXV.  N.  8  (b)  ;   (b)  note 
how  Roman!,  which  is  the  subj.  of  sint,  is  drawn  to  the  end  of  the 
preceding  clause,  and  cf.   XXXVI.   N.  2    (6)  and    A.  &  G.  344,   b; 
(c)  una   before  cum   is   an   adv.   meaning  together;    cf.  una  cum 
XXV [II.  ;    (d)  for  meaning  of  reliqua,  cf.  IX.  N.  5  (b)  ;    (e)  Haeduls 
is  here  a  dat.  with  erepturl;   see  Grain.  Less.;   (/)  erepturl  is  from 
eripere  a  verb  in  -io  of  the  3d  conjug. ;   what  partic.  ?  how  different 
from  erepti  ? 

4.  iiuntiari  :  (a)  the  subj.  are  consilia  and  the  clause  quae   .  .   . 
gerantur,    quae    meaning    here    whatever    or    those    things    which; 
(b)  gerantur  means  are  done;  why  subjv.? 

5.  posse  :  (a)  which  of  the  inf.  in  this  clause  is  the  principal  verb 
of  ind.  disc.?  which  complementary?   (b)  the  antec.  of  se  is  the  subj. 
of  the  verb  of  saying  in  LVI  If. 

6.  enuntiarit  for  enuntiaverit ;  pf.  subjv.  after  quod,  because  ; 
this    substantive  quod    clause    is    used    as    an  adv.   accus. ;    cf    L. 
N.  5  (a). 

7.  intellegere  sese  :    (a)  in   dir.  disc,  intellego,  I  know  ;  (b)  in- 
troduced by  quin,  which   means  nay  more,  in  fact  ;  not  that  or  but 
that,  which  is  its  meaning  when  followed  by  the  subjv. 

8.  fecerit:     (a)   for    mode,    cf.    XLIII.   x.    2   (c),    Gram.    Less.; 
(&)  preceded  by  what   interrogative  word,  and  what  does  that  word 
limit?  (c)  why  pf.  ?   (d)  its  obj.  id  has  the  quod  clause  for  its  antec. 

9.  quam  diu,  as  long  as. 

10.    tacuisse;  here  intrans.  ;  cf  the  trans,  tacuerat  LVIII. 

3.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  use  of  quin  with  the  subjv.  A.  &  G.  332,  g    H.  501,  II.  2; 

and  Kern.  -504. 

2.  The  adv.   use  of   the   substan- 

tive quod  clause    ....   A.  &  G.  333*a.    H.    516,1    II. 

2,  N. 
3>  The  dat.  with  certain  verbs   of 

taking  away A.  &  G.  229.         H.     386,     2  ; 

385,  II.  2. 
1  Study  examples  and  note  their  translation, 


LESSON   LIX.  215 


4.     VOCABULARY. 

1.  coercere,  reg.,  to  hold  on  all  5.  quantus,    adj.    (quam,    how\ 

sides,  restrain,  coerce.  how  great,  as  much  as  ;  after 

2.  dubitare,  to  doubt,  to  hesitate.  tantus   (so  great},  quantus 

3.  libertas,  freedom,  liberty.  may  be  translated  as. 

4.  necessario,    adv.,    necessarily,  6.  quin,  conj.,  when  used  with  the 

of  necessity.  iiid.,  but,  nay  more,  in  fact. 


5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  Write  in  Eng.  and  then   in  Lat.  the  dir.  disc,  for  the  indir.  in 
this  lesson. 

2.  (a)  If  the  Eomans  shall  overcome  (shall  have  overcome)  the 
Helvetii,  they  will  take  away  the  liberty  of  the  Haedui.      (b)  Liscus, 
although  he  was  vergobretus,  could   not  restrain  these  reckless  men. 
(c)  These  same  (men)  inform   the  enemy  that  Caesar  has  not  a  large 
enough  supply  of  fodder,     (d)  Caesar  asks  Liscus  how  great  a  num- 
ber of  the  common  people  are  influenced  by  the  reckless  speeches  of 
these  men. 

3.  (a)  (When)  compelled  to  speak,  Liscus  sets  forth  the  plans  of 
those  who  are  unfriendly  to  the  Eomans.      (b)  Liscus  began  to  set 
forth  these  things,  because  Caesar  had  rebuked  him  sternly,     (c)  Caesar 
himself  will  punish   these  chiefs,  that  others  may  not   do  the  same 
(thing). 

6.    TOPICS   FOR  STUDY. 

1.  The  tense  sign  -eri-.  2.  Cases  possible  for  the  form  quae. 
3.  For  se.  4.  Meaning  of  quam,  tarn,  quantus,  tantus.  5.  The 
endings  -us  and  -urus.  6.  Two  meanings  of  quin.  7.  Of  una, 
8.  Of  quam.  9.  How  fut.  time  is  represented  in  the  subjv. 
10.  Mode  and  tense  of  gerantur,  geruntur,  gereiitur.  11.  Pour 
interrogative  words  learned  thus  far?  12.  The  best  translation  for 
the  clause  quod  .  .  .  eiiuntiarit.  13.  Analysis  of  tacuisse, 
superaveriiit. 


216  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

LESSON    LX. 

1.     TEXT. 
Ctcsar,  B.  G.  1.  18,  through  audeat  nemo. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  fratrem :   (a)  stem  fratr-,  nom.  frater,  —  the  e  before  r  being 
developed  in  the  effort  to  pronounce  the  stein  ;  (I)  with  stem  fratr-, 
cf.  stem  agro-  (cf.  agru-m  for  agro-m  XV.)  ;  here  -o  of  the  stem  is 
dropped  and  e  is  developed  in  the  nom.  as  in  fratr-,  giving  ager  as 
the  nom.  of  stem  agro- ;   (c)  in  alter-um  XXIX.  the  nom.  is  formed 
from   the  stem   by  simply  dropping  the   -o,  thus   stem  altero-  gives 
nom.  alter. 

2.  pluribus  praesentibus  :    (a)  for  const.,   cf.   Sequams  invltis 
XXXY1.  ;    (If)  pluribus,  from   nom.   plur.    masc.  plures,  means  here 
many. 

3.  celeriter:  (a)   for  formation,  cf.  LVII.  N.  10;   (b)  the   nom. 
masc.  of  the   corresponding   adj.  is  celer  ;  the  sup.  of  celeriter  is 
celerrime  or  celerrume  ;  cf.  aegerrume  XLV.  and  LVII.  Obs.  1. 

4.  solo :    (a)   agrees   with    eo    understood   referring  to   Liscus ; 
(b)  the  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  are  like  those  of  totus. 

5.  conventii:   (a)  the  nom.  sing,  conventus  means,  primarily,  a 
coming  together,  i.  e.  the   ending  -tus   names  the  action  of  the  verb 
convenire;    cf.   XXVII.   N.   6,   XXX If.    N.  1;    (b)  the  form  is  the 
same  in  the  nom.  as  the  masc.  of  the  pf.  pass,  partic. 

6.  esse  vera :   (a)  the  subj.  of  esse  is  ea,  those  things,  to  be  sup- 
plied ;   (b)  why  inf.  in  esse  ?   (c)  case  of  vera  and  why  ? 

7.  ipsum  ;  in  the  sense  of  very  one  rather  than  himself;  (he  finds 
out}  that  Dumnorix  is  the  very  man. 

8.  audacia ;  the  name  of  a  quality  formed  from  the  adj.  audax 
by  the  addition  of  -ia  to  the  stem  ;  before  i  of  the  ending,  -i  of  the 
stem  is  dropped ;  thus,  audac-ia ;  cf.  XIX.  N.  2. 


LESSON   LX.  217 

9.  gratia :   (a)  qualified  by  the  preceding  magna ;    (b)  for  const, 
and  also  for  that  of  audacia,  cf.  XXX.  N.  2. 

10.  vectigalia ;  accus.  plur.  nent.  from  nom.  sing,  vectigal. 

11.  redempta    habere :    (a)    for    use,    cf.    LIV.    N.   3    (b)    (c)  • 
(b)  pretio ;  this  word  tells  at  how  much  he  bought  the  revenues;  it 
is  called  an  abl.  of  price  ;  the  abl.  of  price  is  closely  related  to  the 
abl.  of  means  or  instrument. 

12.  licente  :   («)  a  pres.  act.  partic.  from  verb  lice-ri;   its  nom.  is 
lice-ns ;   cf.  ori-e-iis,  inoplna-ns,  and  note  that  though  the  verbs  are 
of  different  conjug.  the  ending  is  the  same  in  each  ;    (b)  forms  with 
illo  an  abl.  absolute  const.,  he  bidding  or  while  he  ivas  bidding; 
this  is  the  first  pres.  partic.  which  has  been  used  as  such  in  the  text 
thus  far ;  other  Avords  having  the  forms  of  pres.  partic.  were  adj.  in 
all  respects ;   (c)  note  that  liceri,  though  dep.  and  therefore  pass,  in 
form,  has  the  pres.  act.  partic.  licente. 

13.  nemo  ;  force  of  position  ? 


3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  A  few  stems  in  -ro  and  -ero  have  the  nom.  masc.  in  -er.     Those 
thus  far  used   are   as  follows  ;  stems  in  -ro ;  ager,  noster,  vester, 
aeger,  uter  ;  in  -ero  ;  socer,  alter,  liber.1 

2.  The  pres.  act.  partic.  is  used  in  Lat.  only  to  represent  the  action 
as  actually  going  on  at  the  time  of  the  principal  verb,  and  never  loosely 
as  in  Eng.  to  describe  an  action  which  preceded  that  of  the  principal 
verb.2     This  partic.  ends  in  -ns  in  all  conjug. 

1  Adj.  in  -er  have  forms  in  -a  and  -um ;  thus,  alter,  altera,  alterum, 
noster,  nostra,  nostrum. 

2  In  the  Eng.  sentence  "  Hobbling  to  the  door  he  found  it  locked,"  the  pres. 
partic.  "hobbling"  is  evidently  used  to  describe  an  act  which  preceded  the  finding 
of  the  door  locked.     A  Roman  would  have  used  instead  of  "  hobbling,"  a  pf.  partic. 
or  a  temporal  clause  7neaning  when  he  had  hobbled  to  the  door. 


218  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


4.     GRAMMAR   LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  neuters  in -al    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  52,  ani-  H.    63,    ani- 

mal, mal. 

2.  Decl.  of  nouns  and  adj.   with 

stems  in  -ro  and  -ero      .     .  A.  &G.38,puer,  H.  51,  puer, 

ager    and    N.  ager  and  2, 

near     bottom  1),  4),  5)  ; 

of  p.  16  ;  82.  149,  150. 

3.  Thedecl.  of  thepres.  act.  partic.  A.  &  G.  85,  b,  H.157,amans. 

iens. 

4.  Sup.  of  adj.   in  -er    and   adv. 

formed  from  them  .     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  89,  a ;  H.    163,     1  ; 

92  ;  miserg.  306  and  2. 

5.  The  partic.  of  dep.  verbs      .     .  A.    &    G.    135  H. 231, 1,232. 

and  a. 

6.  The  name  of  the  quality  in  -ia, 

-tia,  -tas,  -tudo     .      .     .      .  A.  &  G.  163,  e.  H.  325  and  1. 

7.  Ipse,  meaning  very    .     .     .      .  A.  &  G.  195,  /  H.  452,  2. 

Rem. 

8.  The  time  denoted  by  the  partic.  A.  &  G.  290.  H.  550. 

9.  The  abl.  of  price  .  *  .      .      .     .  A.  &  G.  252.  H.  422. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  audacia      faudax),     boldness,  6.  conventus,   -us,  a  coming  to* 

audacity.  gether,  a  meeting. 

2.  audere,  ausus  est,1  to  dare,  7-  designare  (signum  a  mark),  to 

3.  celeriter,  celerius,  celerrime,  mark  out,  point  out,  describe. 

quick!,//.  8.  dimittere,  -mlsit,  -missus,  to 

4.  concilium,  an  assembly,  coun-  send  apart,  to  dismiss. 

cil ;  cf.  consilium,  a  plan,  9.  jactare,  to  throw  about;   when 

counsel.  used  of  words,  to  discuss. 

5.  contra,    adv.    and    prep,    with  10.  liberalitas  (liber, free)  the  qual- 

accus.,  against.  ity  of  a  freeman,  generosity 

1  Dep.  in  the  pf.  system,  though  not  in  the  pres.     Such  verbs  are  called  semi- 
deponent. 


LESSON  LX.  219 

11.  libere  (from  adj.  liber),  freely.  18.  quaerere,    quaesivit    or    -lit, 

12.  liceri,  reg.,  to  bid  {at  an  auc-  quaesitus,  to  seek  ;  cf.  queri, 

tioti).  to  complain. 

13.  nemo,    nemini   dat.    (ne   and  19.  redimere,  -emit,  -emptus,  to 

homo),  no  man,  no  one  ;  the  buy  back,  to  buy  up. 

gen.    and    abl.    sing,   of  this  20.  reperire,  repperit,  repertus, 

word  are  supplied  by  nullius  to  find  out. 

and  nullo.  21.  re  tin  ere,   -tinuit,   -tentus,   to 

14.  parvus,  minor,  minimus,  little,  hold  back. 

small.  22.  secreto,  separately,  in  private. 

15.  portorium    (portare),  a  tax,  23.  solus  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -i),  alone. 

especially  a  tax  paid  on  goods  24.  sentire,  sensit,  sensus,  to  feel, 
imported.  to  perceive,  to  think. 

16.  praesens  (in  form  a  partic.  from  25.  vectigal,  tax,  revenue. 

praeesse),  present,  immediate.  26.  verus,  true,  right. 

17.  pretium,  a  price. 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Synopsis  of  liceri  in   3d  plur.  hid.  and  subjv.     (b)  Write 
the  Eng.  and  then  the  Lat.  of  the  dir.  disc,  which  is  quoted  in  this 
lesson. 

2.  (a)  After  very  quickly  dismissing  the  council,  Caesar  ordered 
Liscus  to   speak  freely,     (b)  Those   (things)  which  were  said  in  the 
council  are  true,     (c)  Caesar  did  not  allow  these  things  to  be  discussed 
when   many  were  present,     (d)  Among  the  chiefs  who  were  in  the 
camp  Caesar  found  enemies  of  the  Romans. 

3.  (a)  When  Dumnorix  is  a  bidder,  the  rest  do  not  dare  to  buy  up 
the  taxes,     (b)  Which  field  (of  the  two)  is  ours?      (Ft)  is  the  other. 
(c)  Dumnorix  was  a  man  of  so  great  popularity  among  the  common 
people  that  the   magistrates   could  not  restrain   him.      (d)    Having 
bought  up  the  taxes  at  a  very  small  price,  Dumnorix  tried  to  obtain 
very  much  money  (pecunia). 


7.   TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Formation   of  the  nom.  from  the  stems  agro-,  socero-,  patr-. 
2.  The  formation  of  the  adv.  from  the  adj.,  in  each  degree.     3.  The 


220  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

form,  decl.,  and  use  of  the  pres.  partic.  4.  The  neut.  of  noster,  alter, 
magnus,  gravior,  gravis,  licens.  5.  The  fern,  of  each  of  the  fore- 
going. 6.  Difference  in  use  of  the  final  letters  -ia  in  vectigal-ia 
and  audac-ia.  7.  Definition  of  gravi-tas,  desigua-tio,  veri-tas, 
accusa-tio,  motus,  -us,  forti-tudo.  8.  Collect  from  Chap.  12-18 
the  names  of  qualities  and  the  names  of  actions  which  they  contain. 
9.  The  comparison  of  multus,  parvus,  magnus.  10.  Other  Lat. 
words  related  to  audere,  Hbere. 


LESSON    LXI. 

1.     TEXT. 
Csesar,  B.  G.  I.  18,  His  rebus  through  civitatgs  collocasse. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  comparasse  ;   (a)  full  form  ?  (b)  the  subj.  is  Dumnorigem  to 
be  supplied;   (c)  his  rebus  is  an  abl.  of  means  with  comparasse  and 
auxisse  ;  Dumnorix  had   made  money  by  farming  the  taxes  ;   (d)  et 
.  .  .  et,  both  .  .  .   and;  (e)  ad  largiendum  ;  for  form,  cf.  XVIII. 
N.  6 ;  it  here  expresses  purpose  like  ad  res  conficiendas  XIX. 

2.  sumptu,   expense;    for  its    derivation   from   sumere,   cf.  LX. 
N.  5 ;  sumere  as  the  basis  of  this  word  means  to  take  from  one's 
means  for  some  purpose,  i.  e.  to  spend. 

3.  neque  =  et  non,  and  not. 

4.  domi,  at  home  ;  the  ending  -I  is  not  here  that  of  the  gen.,  but 
the  ending  of  a  case  which  occurs  in  comparatively  few  Lat.  words  ; 
this  case  is  called  the  "  locative  "  because  it  denotes  the  place  (locus) 
in  which. 

5.  largiter    posse,    can    largely,  has  influence ;    cf.   plurimum 
possent  XXI  [.,  plus  possint  LVIII. 

6.  collocasse,  has  placed,  has  given  in  marriage:    (a)   hujus 
potentiae  causa,  because  of,  or  for  the  sake  of  this  power,  i.  e.  in 


LESSON  LXI.  221 

order  to  secure  this  power ;  the  phrase  expresses  purpose ;  (b)  for 
case  of  causa,  cf.  XVI.  N.  2  (c)  •  (c)  for  case  of  hominl,  cf.  XXII. 
Obs.  3. 

7.  sororem  ex  matre,  a  sister  from  the  mother,  a  sister  on  the 
mother's  side  (only),  i.  e.  a  half -sister. 

8.  miptum   collocasse ;    for  nuptum,  cf.  XL.  N.  2  (a)  ;   collo- 
casse  has  in  this  expression  the  force  of  a  verb  of  motion. 


3.    OBSERVATION. 

1.  We  have  found  thus  far  four  different  ways  of  expressing  pur- 
pose in  Lat. :  (a)  By  the  subjv.  with  ut  (sometimes  qui  =  ut  is)  or 
ne.  (b)  By  ad  with  the  gerund  or  gerundive,  (c)  By  causa  with  a 
gen.  depending  upon  it.  (d)  By  a  supine  in  -um,  after  a  verb  of 
motion. 

4.  GRAMMAR   LESSON. 
1.  The  locative  case A.  &  G.  31,  h.     H.  45,  2. 

5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  alere,  aluit,  altus,  to  nourish,       1.  largiter,  largely,  bountifully. 

support.  8.  mater,  -tris,  mother. 

2.  augere,  auxit,  auctus,  trans.,       9.  nubere,   nupsit,   nGptus,1  to 

to  increase.  veil  one's  self,  hence,  to  marry 

3.  collocare,  to  place  together,  to  (said  of  the  woman)  ;  homini 

set  up,  establish.  nftbere,  to  veil  one's  self  for 

4.  familiaris   ifamilia),  belonging  a  man,  to  marry  a  man. 

to  the  household,  private,  inti-     10.  potentia  (potgns),  power, 
mate',  as  noun,  a  friend.  11.  semper,  always. 

5.  illic  (ille),  in  that  place,  there,     12.  soror,  sister. 

yonder.  13.  sumptus,    -us    (sumere),    ex- 

6.  largiri,  largitus,  to  give  bounti-  pense. 

fully,  to  give  bribes.  14.  uxor,  wife. 

1  For  change  of  b  to  p  before  s  and  t,  see  A.'&  G.  11, /,  1 ;  H.  33,  1. 


222  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  Write  in  Eng.  and  then  in  Lat.  the  dir.  disc,  which  is  quoted  in 
this  lesson. 

2.  (a)  Dumnorix  by  buying  up  the  taxes  (the  taxes  having  been 
bought  up)  amasses  large  means.     (£)  His  means  were  so  large  that 
he  could  support  many  horsemen.      (c)   He   increased  his  influence 
among  the  neighboring  states  by  giving  his  female  relatives  in  marriage. 
(d)  Dumnorix  was  willing  to  do  anything  (all  things)  to  increase  his 
own  power. 

3.  (a)  Dumnorix,  that  bold  chieftain,  is  persuading  the  common 
people  not  to  send  grain  to  Caesar,     (b)  Dumnorix  was  most  powerful 
among  the  common  people  who  lived  in  his  country,  but  was  riot  well 
disposed  toward  the  Romans,      (c)  When  he  had  collected  cavalry  to 
defend  him,  the  magistrates  did  not  dare  to  set  forth  the  things  which 
he  had  done. 


7.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  endings  of  the  pres.  act.,  pf.  act.,  and  pres.  pass.  inf.  2.  The 
Lat.  for  means,  expense,  private  property,  public  revenue,  customs 
(i.  e.  duties  on  imports).  3.  For  council,  counsel.  4.  For  father, 
mother,  sister,  brother,  wife.  5.  Lat.  words  and  Eng.  words  related 
to  alere,  posse.  6.  One  regular  verb  of  each  conjug.  in  this  lesson, 
with  principal  parts.  7.  The  other  Lat.  case  which  the  locative  most 
nearly  resembles.  8.  The  Lat.  for  Ccesar  married  Calpurnia,  Gal- 
purnia  married  Ccesar.  9  Three  ways  of  saying,  he  came  to  ask 
aid. 


LESSON   LX1I.  228 

LESSON    LXII. 

1.  TEXT. 
Csesar,  B.  G.  I.  18,  Favere  et  through  gratia,  desperare. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  Helvetiis  ;    dat.    with    favere,    lie  favors   (Dumnorigem    or 
eum  being  understood),  and  cupere,  he  is  well  disposed;   note  that 
the  meaning  of  favere  might  lead   us  to  expect  the  accus.,  and  cf. 
XIV.  N.  12  (b),  XXX  [.  N.  8,  XXXVI.  N.  5. 

2.  Sdisse,  he  hates  ;  pres.  in  sense,  though  pf.  in  form ;  cf.  LI.  N. 
4  (e)  ;  lacks  the  pres.  system,  like  coepisse  ;  see  Gram.  Less. 

3.  suo  nomine  ;  in  his  own  name,  on  his  own  account ;  abl.  of 
cause. 

4.  deminuta  ;  supply  sit ;  why  not  est  ?  why  not  esset  ? 

5.  si  quid  ;   cf.  XXXIII.  N.  9,  Gram.  Less. 

6.  accidat ;   (a)  for  meaning,  see  XLIX.  Vocab.  ;   (b)  stands  for  a 
fut.  in  the  dir.  disc. ;  cf.  XLVI.  N.  1  (b),  LIT.  N.  3  (b). 

7.  per  Helvetica,  through  the  ffelvetii,  i.  e.  by  their  assistance. 

8.  regni  obtinendi  ;  regni  depends  on  spem,  and  obtinendi  is  a 
gerundive   agreeing  with  regni ;    lit.  the  hope  of  the  kingly  power 
to  be  possessed,  freely,  the  hope  of  possessing  the  kingly  power  ;  cf. 

xix.  N.  s,  xxxni/N.  s. 

9.  imperio  popull  Roman!,  under  the  government  of  the  Roman 
people ;  imperio,  like  adventu,  above,  is  an  abl.  of  both  time  and 
cause  ;  Dumnorix  is  losing  hope  not  only  at  the  time  of  the  Roman 
government,  but  because  of  it ;  cf.  XL.  N.  2  (b). 

10.  de  ea  quam  habeat  gratia  ;   note  that  gratia  is  the  antec.  of 
quam,  and  that  quam  habeat  has  the  force  of  an  adj.  restricting  the 
meaning  of  ea,  and  is  for  that  reason  placed  after  it ;    the  phrase 
might  be  translated    of  his  existing  popularity  ;   cf.  magna  apud 
plebem    propter    liberalitatem    gratia,    of  great  popular,    bribe- 
bought  influence,  LX. 


224  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.    OBSERVATION. 

1.  Some  verbs,  the  ordinary  meaning  of  which  would  lead  us  to 
expect  the  accus.,  are  used  with  the  dat.  Pour  such  verbs  have  al- 
ready been  found  in  the  text,  viz.,  favere,  to  favor  ;  imperare,  to 
command  ;  persuadgre,  to  persuade  ;  studere,  to  desire. 


4.    GRAMMAR   LESSON. 
1.    Conjug.  of  5dit     .     A.  &  G.  143,  b  and  c,  N.     H.  297  and  2. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  adfinitas     (fines),     nearness,       5.  desperare,    to    be  hopeless,   to 

relationship  iy  marriage.  despair. 

2.  antlquus  (ante),  old,  ancient,       G.  favere,     favit,    fauturus,    to 

former.  facor  ;  takes  dat.  of  person. 

3.  cupere,  cupivit  or  -iit,  ctipi-       7-  honor,  honor,  office. 

tus  (a  verb  in  -io  of  the  3d  8.  odisse,     to   hate  ;    found   only 

conjug.),  to  long  for,  desire,  in  the  pf.  system,  and  in  the 

be  well-disposed  towara ?(in  the  pf.  is  pres.  in  sense, 

the  last  sense  it  takes  a  dat.).  9.  restituere,  -stituit,  -stitutus, 

4.  deminuere,  -minuit,  -minutus  to  set  up  again,  to  restore. 

(de  and  minus),  to  lessen. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  Write  first  in   Eng.  and   then   in  Lat.  the  dir.  disc,  which  is 
quoted  in  this  lesson. 

2.  (a)   Influenced  by  this  relationship,  Dumnorix  favors  the  Hel- 
vetii.     (b)   Influenced  by  his  Helvetian  wife,  Dumnorix,  in  order  to 
furnish  aid  to  the  Helvetii,  tries  to  take  away  (to  snatch  away)  the 
grain  from  the  Romans,      (c)   Men  often  hate  those  who  keep  them 
from  power,      (d)  For  the    sake   (causa)   of  possessing  the  kingly 
power,  Dumnorix  wished  to  defeat  the  Roman  army. 

3.  (a)  The  high-born  chiefs  of  Gaul  were  always  longing  to  seize 
the  kingdoms  which  their  fathers  had  held  for  many  years,     (b)   In 


LESSON  LXIII.  225 

former  times  Divitiacus  had  been  more  powerful  than  Dumnorix. 
(c)  Dumnorix,  after  amassing-  large  means  and  marrying  a  Helvetian 
wife,  was  influential  both  with  the  common  people  of  his  own  country 
and  with  the  Helvetii. 


7.    TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Likeness  and  difference  between  odit  and  ccepit.  2.  The 
meaning  of  obtinere,  of  potm,  of  consequi.  3.  A  verb  of  com- 
manding which  does  not  take  the  dat.  4.  The  meaning  of  si  quid 
accidet,  accidit,  accidat.  5.  How  Eng.  accident  shows  the  mean- 
ing of  accidere.  6.  The  best  Eng.  for  venire  in  spem.  7.  Decl. 
of  nomine,  adventu,  spem.  8.  Compare  antiquus  by  endings,  and 
also  by  adverbs.  9.  Compare  summus.  10.  Define  consanguini- 
tas,1  and  contrast  its  meaning  with  that  of  adfinitas. 


LESSON    LXIII. 

1.    TEXT. 

Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  18,  Reperiebat  etiam  through  equitatum 
perterritum. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  reperiebat  .  .  .  Caesar  :  (a)  note  the  expressiveness  of  the 
transposition  in  this  clause  ;  the  verb  first,  to  show  that  something 
important  is  found  out,  —  riot  simply  related  by  Divitiacus,  who  has 
been  speaking, — and  the  subj.  last,  to  show  that  Caesar  was  now 
active  and  not  simply  a  listener ;  (b)  quaerendS  is  a  gerund,  in 
seeking. 

1  Do  not  forget  that  there  is  a  General  Vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book.  If 
you  have  forgotten  tha  meaning  of  the  adj.  consanguineus.  look  it  up. 

15 


226  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  equestre ;  note  stem  equestri-,  and  cf.  XXI.  N.  1,  and  Gram. 
Less,  below. 

3.  panels  ante  diebus  ;  ante  is  here  an  adv.,  and  diebus  an  abl. 
of  degree  of  difference,  before  by  a  few  days,  a  few  days  before  ;  cf. 
XXVII.  N.  1. 

4.  quod  .   .   .  esset  factum  :    (a)  for  const,  of  clause,  cf.  LIX.  N. 
6,  Gram.  Less.;   (b)  why  subjv.  ?  LVI.  N.  1  (c). 

5.  factum  ;   esse  is  to  be  supplied. 

6.  ejus  equitibus  ;   (a)   for  const,   of  equitibus,  cf.  LIV.   N.  2, 
Obs.  1;   (b)  antec.  of   ejus?  why  ejus  rather   than  RUIS  ?  cf.   ejus 
fugse,  where  ejus  is  an  adj.  limiting  fugae,  of  that  flight. 

7.  niiserant  ;  the  preceding  dat.  auxilio  means  for  aid,  i.  e.  in 
order  to  aid,  sometimes  called  a  dat.  of  "  purpose  "  or  "  end,"  and  the 
dat.  Caesari  means  to  Ccesar  ;  cf.  Gram.  Less. 

8.  praeerat ;  for  const,  of  preceding   equitatui,   cf.   magistratui 
praeerat  LVII. 

9.  perterritum  :    (a)  the  antec.  of  the  preceding  eorum  is  equita- 
tui;  cf.  LTV.  N.  4  (d)  ;   (b}  reliquum  is  made  emphatic  by  separa- 
tion from  its  noun  equitatum  ;  the  rest  of  the  cavalry  was  terrified, 
not  all  of  it,  for  that  of  Dumnorix  ran  away  for  the  purpose  of  creat- 
ing a  panic. 

3.    GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  3d  decl.  adj.  in  -er     ....  A.  &  G.  84,  acer.  II.  153,  acer. 

2.  Two  dat.,  the  obj.  to  which  and 

the  end  for  which     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  233.         H.    390    and 

I.   II. 

3.  Time  before  or  after  .     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  259,  d.1  H.    4301   and 

N.  1,  2); 
also  foot- 
note 3. 

4.  The  effect  of  separating  words 

naturally  connected  .     .     .  A. &G. 344 and*.  H.  561,  III. 

1  Study  examples. 


LESSON  LXIII.  227 


4.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  adversus     (in     form     the    pf.       2.  equester,   equestris,    eques- 
partic.  of  advertere),  turned  tre,   belonging  to  a  horseman, 

toward,  in  front   of,  adverse,  cavalry, 

unfavorable.  3.  perterrere,    reg.,    to    frighten 

thoroughly. 


5.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Principal  parts  of  all  the  verbs  in  this  lesson.     (5)   Synop- 
sis of  reperiebat  in  pres.  system,      (c)   Of  miserant  in  pf.  system. 
(d)   All  the  inf.  and  partic.  of  perterritum.     (e)  Decline  equitibus, 
quern. 

2.  (a)  Dumnorix  and  his  horsemen  had  begun  to  retreat,  in  order 
that    the    rest    of    the    horsemen    might    be    thoroughly    frightened. 
(fr)  The  Haedui,  influenced  by  the  popularity  and  liberality  of  Dum- 
norix, had  put  him  in  command  of  their  cavalry,     (c)  The  battle, 
which  was  fought,  was  unfavorable,  because  Dumnorix  favored  the  Hel- 
vetii.     (d)  The  horsemen  whom  the  Haedui  had  sent  to  aid  Caesar 
were  influenced  by  Dumnorix. 

3.  (d)  When  the  horsemen  of  Dumnorix  began  to  retreat,  the  rest 
followed  (them),     (b)  Dumnorix  entertains  the  hope  of  defeating  the 
Romans,     (c)  He  intends  to  obtain  the  greatest  possible  influence. 
(d)  Dumnorix  is  angry  because   Divitiacus,   his  brother,   has   been 
restored  to  his  former  position  of  honor. 

6.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  Difference  in  meaning  between  reperlre,  quaerere,  rogare, 
flagitare.  2.  The  nom.  sing,  and  plur.  neut.  of  equester,  magnus, 
ceger,  gravis,  gravior,  fluens.  3.  The  abl.  sing,  and  gen.  plur.  of 
each  of  the  foregoing.  4.  The  position  and  const,  of  diebus  in  the 
phrase  paucis  ante  diebus.  5.  Eng.  words  related  to  those  in 
Vocab.  6.  The  effect  of  placing  a  subj.  last  in  a  sentence ;  a  verb  first ; 
an  adj.  far  away  from  its  noun.  7.  An  example  in  this  lesson  of  the 
abl.  of  agent,  and  also  of  the  abl.  of  means.  8.  Difference  between 
ejus  or  eorum  and  suus.  9.  Five  ways  to  express  purpose. 


-2-28  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 


LESSON    LXIV. 

1.     TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  19,  through  anima dvertere  jubgret. 

2.     NOTES. 

1.  accederent :  (a)  accedere,  meaning  strictly  to  go  to,  comes  to 
have  the  pass,  meaning  to  be  added,  because  of  the  idea  of  increase  or 
addition  in  the  original  meaning-;  l  (b)  for  mode,  cf.  XL.  N.  2  (b). 

2.  traduxisset :     (a)    its    subj.  is    Dumnorix    to    be    supplied ; 
(b)  subjv.  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  indir.  disc. ;  the  thought  of  Csesar, 
as  suggested  by  the  word  suspitiones,  is  here  quoted. 

3.  dandos  curasset  ;    (a)  dandos  agrees  with  obsides  not  e5s  ; 
(b)  the  antec.  of  eos  are  Sequanorum  and  Helvetica  ;  for  the  cir- 
cumstance referred   to,  cf.  XXXVI.  and   XXXVII.;   (c)   for  use  of 
dandos,  cf.  XLV.  N.  3  (a). 

4.  injussu  suo  et  civitatis  :   (a)  injussu,  without  the  command, 
is  an  abl.  of  manner;  for  form,  cf.  LX.  N.  5  (b)  ;   (b)  suo  here  refers 
to  Caesar,  the  unexpressed  subj.  of  a  verb  which  follows  ;  (c)  suo  and 
clvitatis  (which  depends  on  injussu)  are  connected  by  the  co-ordinate 
conj.  et;  note  that  the  adj.  suo  and  the  gen.  clvitatis  have  exactly 
the  same  possessive  force. 

5.  ipsis  ;  its  antec.  are  clvitatis  and  Caesaris  (the  latter  implied 
in  suo)  ;  it  forms  an  abl.  absolute  const,  with  inscientibus  ;  for  decl. 
of  inscientibus,  see  Grain.  Less. 

6.  accusaretur ;  the  four  quod  clauses  which  end  with  this  word 
have  the  same  const. ;   they  are  in  apposition  with  res  (the  subj.  of 
accederent)  and  may  each  be  introduced  in  translating  by  the  phrase 
the  fact  that. 

1  Cf.  in  Harper's  Lat.  Dictionary,   ad,  E,  2  and   in  Webster's  Unabridged 
Dictionary,  to,  5  (/). 


LESSON   LXIV. 


229 


7.  arbitrabatur :  (a)  the  subj.  is  Caesar  understood;  (b)  the 
preceding  causae  is  a  partitive  gen.  depending1  on  satis  ;  cf.  minus 
dubitatioiiis  XL IX. 


3.     OBSERVATION. 

ltt  Accedere,  though  active  in  form,  has  often  the  pass,  meaning, 
to  be  added. 

4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  adj.  in  -ns    .      .     .     .  A.  &  G.   85,  a,    H.  157,  pru- 

egens.  dens,  N. 

2.  The  adj.  with  the  force  of  the 

gen A.  &  G.  p.  140,    H.  393,  foot- 

N.,  190.  note  3;  395, 

N.  2. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 


1.  accedere,  -cessit,  -cessus,  to 

go  to,  to  approach,  to  be  added ; 
accedit,  it  is  added  ;  with  ut 
or  quod,  moreover. 
2  animadvertere  (animum,  ad, 
and  vertere),  to  turn,  the  mind 
or  attention  to,  to  notice  (in 
this  sense  takes  simple  accus.); 
in  hominem  animadver- 
tere, to  punish  a  man ;  cf. 
the  Eng.  expression  to  attend 
to  in  sense  of  to  punish. 


3.  cSgnoscere,    cognovit,   cog- 

iiitus,  to  learn  thoroughly ; 
cognovit,  he  has  learned,  he 
knows. 

4.  injussu  (in  neg.  and  jubere), 

found  only  in  abl.,  without 
command* 

5.  insciens  (in  neg.  and  scire, 

to  know),  adj.,  though  pres. 
partic.  in  form,  not  knowing, 
'unaware* 


6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Write  all  the  partic.  of  cognoscere,  dare,      (b}  Synopsis  of 
traducere  in   ind.  and  subjv.  act.  and  pass,      (c)  Decl.  of  quis  and 
qui.      (d)  Comparison  of  certus. 

2.  (a)  Dumriorix  had  done  all  things  without  the  knowledge  of  his 
state,     (b)  Csesar  knows  that  very  certain  facts  can  be  added  to  these 


230  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

suspicions,  (c)  Caesar  himself  has  done  all  these  things  very  quickly. 
(d)  Caesar  was  influenced  by  the  fact  that  (because)  Dunmorix  was 
accused  by  Liscus,  a  llaeduan  magistrate. 

3.  (a)  There  was  reason  enough  why  Caesar  should  punish  Dum- 
norix.  (b]  Caesar  was  no  longer  without  knowledge  of  (de)  this 
matter,  since  very  certain  facts  had  been  learned,  (c)  Caesar  having 
been  informed  of  this  crime  will  punish  the  man  by  whom  it- was 
committed,  (d)  Caesar  noticed  many  things  which  others  were  not 
able  to  find  out. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY. 

1.  Similarity  in  use  of  fiebat  and  accedebat.  2.  Difference  in 
the  decl.  of  pres.  partic.  and  that  of  other  adj.  in  -na.  3.  The  adj. 
case  of  nouns.  4.  The  adv.  case.  5.  The  Lat.  for  to  notice,  to  pun- 
ish, to  have  a  thing  done,  to  lead  across,  to  cross,  to  learn,  to  know. 
6.  The  translation  of  the  substantive  quod  clause.  7.  The  various 
classes  of  words  with  which  the  partitive  gen.  is  used. 


LESSON    LXV. 

1.    TEXT. 
Ccesar,  B.  G.  I.  19,  His  omnibus  through  sint  dicta ; 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  repugn  abat,   was  opposed  (or  repugnant)  :  (a)  the  subj.   is 
unum,  one  (thing)  ;  (5)  rebus  is  the  dat.  of  indir.  obj. 

2.  cognoverat:   (a)  for  meaning,  cf.  LX IV.  Vocal).  ;   (6)  its  subj. 
is  Csesar  understood  ;   (c)  an  tec.  and  case  of  se  in  phrase   in  se? 
(rf)  note  that  the  conj.  is  entirely  omitted  between  the  different  obj. 
of  cognoverat ;  cf.  lingua,  institutis,  legibus   IV.  and  Garumna, 
Oceano,  finibus   X.,  but  contrast  Rauracis   et  Tulingis   et  Lato- 
brigis  XXVIII. 


LESSON   LXV.  231 

3.  ne    .       .   offenderet    vergbatur,    he  feared    that   he    would 
offend:  (a)  ne,  following-  verebatur  in  thought,  is  translated  that  ;* 
(b)  the  impf.  subjv.  offenderet  refers  to  the  fut.  ;   (c)  the  antec.  of 
ejus  is  Dumnorix. 

4.  quicquam,  sometimes   written  quidquam,  anything :   (a)   the 
accus.  sing.  neut.  of  the  indef.  pron.  quisquam,  quaequam,  quicquam 
(quidquam)  ;    (b)  cf.   quemque,   each   one    XXV ill. ;    it  is   from' 
quisque,  quaeque,  quidque  ;   note  that  both  of  these  pron.  have  only 
the  first  syllable  declined  and  that  this  is  the  indef.  quis,  quae,  quid ; 
for  which,  see  XXXIII. 

5.  cui  .  .  .  habebat,  to  whom  he  was  having  the  highest  con- 
fidence of  all  things,  more  freely,  in  ivhom  he  had  the  highest  confi- 
dence respecting  everything:  (a)  case  and  antec.  of  cui?   (b)   note 
that  the  gen.  rerum  is  not  best  translated  by  of,  and  cf.  dictionis, 

for  pleading  XXLV.,  trium  mensium,  sufficient  for  three  months 
XXVIII.,  incommodl,  disaster  (like  accus.)  XL VI.,  minus  dubita- 
tionis,  less  doubt  XL IX. 

6.  colloquitur  :  (a)  part  of  speech  and  const,  of  preceding  Galliee  ? 

(b)  familiarem  is  a  noun  ;  cf.  LXI.  Vocab. ;   (c)  antec.  of  eo  ? 

7.  quae  .   .  .  dicta  sint  :    (a)   ea  the  omitted  antec.  of  quae  is 
the  obj.  of  the  preceding  verb  ;   (b)  the  antec.  of  ipso  is  Divitiacus. 

(c)  Why  is  dicta  sint  subjv.,  and  why  in  the  pf.  tense  ? 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  translation  of  the  gen.,  like  that  of  all  cases,  depends  upon 
the  context;  thus,  though   most  frequently  translated   by   the   Eng. 
possessive,  or  obj.  with  of,  it  is  sometimes  translated  byybr,  by  a  nom. 
or  objective  or  by  a  phrase  containing  words  for  which  there  are  no 
exact  equivalents  in  the  Lat. 

2.  The  neg.  ne,  introducing  a  clause  which  is  the  obj.  of  a  verb 
of  fearing,  is  regularly  translated  by  the  affirmative  that.     This  will 
seem  less  strange  if  we  observe  that  where  ne  is  used  the  obj.  is  not 
desired. 

1  Note  that,  if  verebatur  is  translated  by  the  verb  desire,  ne  becomes  neg.  in 
sense,  thus,  he  desired  that  he  might  not  offend.  We  never  fear  that  a  thing  will 
happen  without  desiring  the  contrary. 


232 


INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


4.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Decl.  of  quisque  and  quisquam  A.  &  G.  105,  c,    H.  190,  2,  1) 

e.  2)  and  N.  1. 

2.  Use  or  omission   of  the  conj. 

in   series  of  more  than  two 

words A.  &  G.  208,  b.     H.  554,  I.  6. 

3.  The  const,  with  verbs  of  fear- 

ing   A.  &  G.  331, /.     H.    498,    III. 

and    N.    1, 
foot-note  4. 

5.  VOCABULARY. 


1.  Caius,  more   correctly   written 

Gaius  or  Gajus,  a  Roman 
first  name,  usually  represent- 
ed by  C. 

2.  colloqui,  -locutus,  to  confer, 

converse. 

3.  commonefacere,  -fecit,  -fac- 

tus,  to  put  in  mind,  to  remind 
forcibly. 

4.  egregius  (e   and  grex,  -gis,  a 

herd},  out  of  the  (common)  herd, 
hence,  eminent,  excellent. 

5.  interpres,  -etis,  an  interpreter. 

6.  justitia  (Justus,  just),  justice, 

sense  of  justice,  uprightness. 
7    offenders,  -fendit,    fensus,  to 

hit  against,  stumble,  blunder, 

offend. 
S.  prius,   adv.  in    comp.,   sooner ; 

prius  quam  or  priusquam, 

conj  ,  sooner  than,  before. 


9.  quisquam,    qugequam,  quid- 

quam,  any  one,  anything. 

10.  removere,   -mSvit,    -motus, 

to  move  back,  remove. 

11.  repugnare,  to  fujht  back,  to  be 

opposed. 

12.  simul,  adv.,  at  the  same  time, 

at  once. 

13.  studium,  zeal,  devotion,  a  pur- 

suit. 

14.  supplicium  (sub  and  plicare, 

to  fold,  to  bend,  as  the  knees 
in  kneeling),  a  kneeling,  sup- 
p  lie  a  tion,  p  un  ish  ment. 

15.  temperantia  (temperare)  mod- 

eration. 

16.  vocare,  to  call,  to  summon. 

17.  ver§ri,  reg.,  to  feel  awe  of,  to 

fear. 


6.     EXERCISES. 


1.    (a)    Principal  parts    of  repugnare,  habere,    jubere,    dicere. 

(b)  Decline  fidem,    justitiam,    animum,   sg,   omnium,    praesente, 

(c)  Compare  summus. 


LESSON  LXVI.  233 

2.  (d)  After  finding  out  all  these  things,  Caesar  called  Divitiacus, 
the   brother   of   Dumnorix.      (6)   He   was    unwilling   to   wound   the 
feelings  of  Divitiacus,   who  had  been  a  friend   to  him  and  to  the 
Eoman  people  for  many  years,     (c)  Though  Dumnorix  was  reckless, 
his  brother  was  a  man  of  eminent  moderation,      (d)  After  conversing 
with  all  the  rest,  Caesar  determined  to  inform  Divitiacus  of  all  that  he 
had  learned. 

3,  («)  I  fear  that  I  shall  forget  many  things,     (b)  Divitiacus  sur- 
passed all  in  good  faith,  in   moderation,  and  in  justice,     (c)  These 
were  men  in  whom  Caesar  had  entire  confidence  respecting  the  most 
important  matters,     (d)  Caesar  feared  that  there  would  not  be  grain 


enough. 


7.    TOPICS   FOR   STUDY. 


1.  The  derivation  of  voluntas,  temperantia.  2.  The  abstract 
noun  from  stem  of  prseseiis.  3.  Lat.  words  related  to  studium, 
princeps,  familiaris.  4.  Difference  between  concilium  and  con- 
silium.  5.  Translation  and  peculiarity  in  use  of  consuevit,  cogno- 
vit, odit,  ccepit.  6.  Three  indef.  pron.  7.  How  Idem  resembles 
two  of  them  in  dec!.  8.  Why  the  Eomans  used  the  neg.  ne  where 
we  use  the  affirmative  that.  9.  Difference  between  Lat.  and  Eng.  re- 
specting the  use  of  the  conj.  in  the  enumeration  of  particulars. 
10.  Eng.  words  related  to  studium,  voluntas,  vocare,  colloqui. 


LESSON    LXVI. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  19,  et  ostendit  through  se  crgvisset ;  in  20. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  ostendit  :  What  two  tenses  are  possible  for  this  verb  ? 

2.  dixerit  :   (a)  How  does  the  tense  of  this  verb  determine  that 
of  ostendit  ?   (6)  antec.  of  eo  and  se  ?  (c)  apud  se,  near  him,  in 
his  presence. 


234  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

3.  statuat  :   (a)  mode  and  tense  ?   (b)  for  const.,  cf.  XX.  N.  5, 
Gram.  Less.,   and   examples  of  the  same  const,  in   XXX.,  XXX1L, 
XXXVII.,  XLVIlf.  ;    (e)  ejus   depends   upon   animl  and   refers  to 
Divitiacus  ;    (d)  ipse  refers  to  Caesar,  eo  to  Dumnorix ;    (e)  const, 
arid  best  translation  of  causa  cognita? 

4.  statueret  :   (a)  for  const.,  cf.  3  ;  (b)  note  the  position  of  quid 
with  respect  to  ne,  and  cf.  si  quid  LXI1.  ;   (c)  gravius  is  here  an 
adj. ;  gender  and  agreement  ?  it  means  too  severe  rather  than  more 
severe;   cf.  the  meaning  of  adv.  cupidius  L1V.;    (d)  in  fiatrem, 
against  his  brother. 

5.  capere  :   (a)  why  inf.  ?    (b)  nom.  and  const,  of  quem-quam  ? 
(c)  ex  eo,from  that  fact,  i.  e.  the  behavior  of  Dumnorix  ;   (d}  const, 
and  antec.  of  sS  ?  LVII1.  N.  4,   Gram.  Less.;   (e)  for  plus  doloris, 
cf.  minus  dubitationis  XL IX. 

6.  doml;  cf.  LXI.  N.  4. 

7.  posset  :   (a)  Was  this  verb  snbjv.  in  the  dir.  disc.  ?  XLIV.  N.  5. ; 
(b)  modified  by  both  plurimum  and  minimum;   cf.  XXII.  N.  7  (c). 

8.  crevisset  :    (a)   from    crescere  ;    (b)   steins    crgsce-,    crev-, 
cret- ;    (c)  note  that  ere-  is  the  basis  of  all  three  steins  ;  it  is  called 
the  verb  stem  ;   (d)  the  pres.  stern  is  formed  from  this  verb  stem  by 
adding -see  ;  cf.  consclscere,  verb  stem  consci-,  pres.  stem  con- 
scisce- ;  consuescere,  verb  stem  consue-,  pres.  stem  consuesce- ; 
(e)  note  that  all  the  verb  stems  mentioned  above  end  in  a  vowel,  ns 
also  in  the  case  of  sci-,  verb  stem  of  scire  ;  the  pf.  stems  are  crev-, 
consciv-,  consuev-.  sciv-,  and  the  sup.  stems  cret-,  conscit-,  con- 
suet-,  scit- ;  cf.  ama-,  amav-,  amat-. 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  b.isis  of  the  three  stems  of  a  verb  already  learned  —  the 
pres.,  the  pf.,  and  the  sup.  —  is  called  the  verb  stern.     This  in  the 
1st  and  4th  conjng.  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  pres.  stem. 

2.  Verbs  of  the  3d  conjug.  in  -scere  form  the  pres.  stem  by  adding 
-see  to  the  verb  stem. 

3.  Most  verb  stems  ending  in  a  vowel  form  the  pf.  stem  by  add- 
ing -v,  and  the  sup.  by  adding  -t. 

4.  The  indef.  quis  usually  stands  immediately  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  or 
num. 


LESSON   LXVI.  235 


4.  VOCABULARY. 

1.  complect!,    -plexus,    to   em-  6.  obsecrare  (ob  and  sacrum, 

brace.  sacred) ,   to   ask   on  religious 

2.  crescere,  crevit,  cretus,  in-  grounds,  to  beseech. 

trans.,  to  grow,  increase ;  cf.  1.  petere,   petivit,  petitus,   to 
the  trans,  augere.  aim  at,  to  seek. 

3.  hortari,  to  urge.  8.  scire,  scivit,  scitus,  to  know. 

4.  lacrima,  a  tear.  9.  sSparatim,  separately. 

5.  offensio  (offendere),  a  strik- 

ing against^  a  stumbling,  an 
offence. 

5.     EXERCISES. 

1.  Write  in  Eng.  and  then  in  Lat.  the  dir.  disc,  which  is  quoted  in 
this  lesson. 

2.  (a)   Divitiacus  began  to  embrace  Caesar  and  to  beseech  him 
not  to  compel  Dumnorix  to  pay  the  penalty  of  his  crime,     (b)  The 
greater  his  wrong-doing  is,  the  greater  sorrow  I  experience  because  of 
it.     (e)  Dumnorix  was  increasing  in  power  because  of  the  aid  which 
Divitiacus  was  giving  to  him.     (d)  When  Divitiacus  had  learned  all 
things  which  Caesar  had  found  out,  he  feared  that  Caesar  would  kill 
his  brother. 

3.  (a)  Caesar  was  accustomed  to  converse  with  the  G-auls  by  means 
of  interpreters.     (&)  Each  one  says  that  no  one  is  more  unfriendly  to 
Caesar  than  Dumnorix  (is),     (c)  If  Caesar  kills  (shall  kill)  Dumnorix, 
he  will  offend  many  among  the  Haedui,  because  Dumnorix  is  popular 
at  home. 

6.    TOPICS    FOR   STUDY. 

1.  The  pres.  ind.,  pres.  subjv.,  and  fut.  ind.,  3d  sing,  and  plur.  of 
statuere.  2.  The  synopsis  and  inf.  and  partic.  of  crescere  in  act. 
voice.  3.  Synopsis  of  capere  in  pres.  system.  4.  Decl.  of  quisque, 
plus.  5.  Third  plur.  of  ostendit  in  pres.  ind.  ;  in  pf.  ind. 
6.  How  to  distinguish  like  forms  of  rel.  and  indef.  pron.  by  the 
position  of  the  latter.  7.  The  four  stems  of  the  verb.  8.  Two 
meanings  of  the  comp.,  of  the  sup.  9.  Difference  between  in 


236  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

fratrem,  in  fratre,  and  apud  fratrem.  10.  Antec.  of  every  pron. 
in  the  lesson.  11.  Verbs  in  text  thus  far  which  take  an  obj.  clause 
of  purpose. 


LESSON   LXVII. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  20,  quibus  opibus  through  sg  averterentur. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  uteretur  :     (a)    why    subjv.  ?     (V)    what    case    used    with    it  ? 
XXVIII.   N.  2;    (c)  for   translation   and    force   of  ad    minuendam 
gratiam,  cf.  XIX.  N.  5,  LXI.  N.  1  (e)  ;  (d)  ouam  is  for  meam,  my, 
in  the  words  of  Divitiacus  ;    for  form  and  use  of  meam,  cf.  suus, 
tuus  XLVII.  N.  4. 

2.  amore  ;   the   noin.  sing,  amor  names  the  action   of  the  verb 
amare,  to  love  ;  cf.  dolor  LXVI.,  which  names  the  action  of  dolere, 
and  LX.  N.  5. 

3.  fraterno  :   (a)  an  adj.,  the  noin.  sing,  of  which,  frater-nus,  is 
formed  from  frater  by  the  addition  of  the  ending  -nus  ;  cf.  the  fol- 
lowing adj.  :   Cassi-anus,  repent-Inus,  frument-arius,  consanguin- 
eus,  egreg-ius,  cupi-dus,  faci-lis,  immort-alis,  incredi-bilis.     Give 
the  meaning  of  each   of  these   adj.  and  the  word  from  which  it  is 
formed.      (b)  Note  that  the  adj.  fraterno  has  here  the  same  force  as 
the  gen.  vulgi,  just  beyond,  and  cf.  LXIV.  N.  4  (c),  Gram.  Less. 

4.  existimaturum  :   (a)  supply  esse.     What  inf.  is  then  formed  ? 
(b)  the  preceding  accidisset,  after  si,  stands  for  a  fut.  pf.  in  the  dir. 
disc. ;  cf.  LIX.  N.  2  ;  the  exact  Eng.  for  the  dir.  form  of  the  Lat. 
would  be  "If  any  thing  shall  have  happened,   no  one  will  think;" 
the    Lat,  uses    the    fut.  pf.   in    the   si   clause,   but   the   simple   fut. 
in  the  conclusion,  to   indicate  that   something    must   happen   before 
there  can  be  any  thought  about  it ;   contrast  the  vague  use  of  the 
pres.  "happens"  in  the   Eng.   sentence,   "If  anything  happens,  no 


LESSON  LXVIL  237 

one  will  think,"  and  XVI.  N.  15,  foot-note  ;  LX.  Obs.  2,  foot-note  ; 
(c)  for  quod,  cf.  L.  N.  5  ;  (d)  for  quid  and  el,  cf.  si  quid  accidat 
Romania  LX11.  ;  (e)  for  gravius,  cf.  LVf.  N.  4  (c)  ;  (/)  neminem 
is  an  accus.  sing,  from  nemo. 

5.  factum  :    (a)  esse,  understood,  it  was  done ;   what  inf.  ?   cf. 
existimaturum  (esse) ;    (b)  voluntate  is  an  abl.  of  manner ;  cf.  vo- 
luntate  XXX [I.  N.  9  (e). 

6.  avertsrentur  :   (a)  cf.  f uturum  ut  .   .   .  haberet  XXXVIII. ; 
(b)  cf.  averterant  LVI.,  and  note  that  the  pres.  stem  averte-  differs 
from  the  pf.  stem  avert-  only  in  the  final  -e  of  the  pres. ;  avert-  is 
both  verb  stem  and  pf.  stem  ;  verbs  like  avertere  in  this  respect  have 
the  same  form  in  the  pres.  and  pf.  ind.  3d  sing. ;  examples  are  minu- 
it,   ostendit,  statuit,  incendit,  offendit,   solvit ;   cf.  XXIV.  N.  5, 
Obs.  3,  LXVI.  N.  8,  Obs.  1,  2,  3. 

3.     OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  following  adj.  endings  meaning  belonging  to  or  pertaining 
to  have  been   used  in   the   text  :    -nus,  -anus,   -Inus,    -arms,    -ius, 
alls. 

2.  The  Lat.  use  of  tenses  is  more  precise  and  definite  than  the 
Eng. ;  the  pres.  ind.  is  very  rarely  used  for  the  fut.  or  flit,  pf.,  or  the 
pres.  partic.  for  the  pf.  partic.,  or  the  simple  past  tense  of  the  ind.  for 
the  impf.     All  of  these  inaccuracies  are  permitted  by  Eng.  usage. 

4.     GRAMMAR  LESSON. 

1.  The  possessive  adj.  pronouns    .    A.  &  G.  99,   a,    H.  185,  449. 

197. 

2.  The  name  of  an  action  in  -io, 

-tio,  -tus,  -or A.  &  G.  163,  a,   H.  326  arid  1, 

b.  327  and  1. 

3.  Four    classes    of    3d    conjng. 

verbs,  classified  according  to 
the    formation    of    the    pf. 

stern  from  the  verb  stem    .    A.  &  G.  124,  a,    H.  252  and  1, 

b,  d,  e.  254,       255 

and  II. 


238  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


5.    VOCABULARY. 

1.  amor  famare),  love,  desire.  1.  ops,   ability ;    in  plur.,  means, 

2.  existimatio  (existimare),  es-  resources. 

tint  at  ion,  opinion.  8.  pernicies,  -ei  (nex),  destruc- 

3.  fraternus,  of  a  brother,  brother-  tion. 

1  >/,  fraternal.  9.  vulgus  (of  the  2d  decl.,  neut.  by 

4.  metis,  myt  mine.  exception  and,  hence,  having 

5.  mi  mere,     minuit,     minutus  nom.  and  accus.  alike;  want- 

(minus),  to  lessen.  ing  in  plur.),  the  public,  the 

6.  nervus,  a  sinew,  tendon,  nerve  ;  crowd,  the  mob. 

in  plur.,  power,  strength. 


6    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Write  first  the  Eng.    and    then  the  Lat.  of  the  dir.  disc, 
which  is  quoted  in  this  lesson. 

2.  (a)  Dumnorix  used  the  resources  which  he  received  from  his 
brother  to  increase  his  own  popularity,      (b)   Divitiacus  showed  that 
Caesar  would  turn  the  affections  of  the  public  from  him  (i.  e.  Divitia- 
cus) if  he  should  decide  upon  any  too  severe  (punishment)  for  his 
brother.      (c)  It   happened    that    the    popularity    of   Divitiacus    was 
lessened,  but  the  influence  of  Dumnorix  was  increased,     (d)  If  any- 
thing happens  to  my  brother,  his  friends  will  blame  me. 

3.  (a)   Although  Dumnorix  had  inflicted  injuries  upon  his  brother, 
yet  Divitiacus  asked  Caesar  not  to  punish  him  too  severely,      (b)   If 
Caesar  punishes   Dumnorix,  every  one  will  say  that  Divitiacus,   the 
friend  of  Caesar,  urged  him  to  do  it.     (c)  He  lessened  our  popularity, 
in  order  to  obtain  favor  himself,      (d)  Embracing  Caesarj  he  said  that 
he  experienced  more  sorrow  than  any  other  man  on  account  of  his 
brother's  wrong-doing. 

7.    TOPICS    FOR    STUDY, 

1.  Three  possible  translations  for  ostendit.  2.  How  to  determine 
the  tense  where  the  form  is  the  same  in  pres.  and  pf.  ind.  3.  Verb  stems 
of  ducere,  agere,  emere,  facere,  consuescere,  defendere.  nubere. 
4.  Formation  of  pf.  stem  and  classification  of  each  of  the  foregoing. 


LESSON  LXV1II.  239 

5.  Difference  in  meaning  or  use  between  tuus  and  vester,  noster  and 
vester,  meus  and  noster,  suus  and  ejus.  6.  The  names  of  actions 
and  the  names  of  qualities  in  Chap.  19  and  20.  7.  The  difference  in 
form  between  fnt,  act.  and  pf.  pass.  inf.  8.  Mode  and  tense  of  acci- 
dere,  accideret,  accidisse,  accidisset.  9.  Explanation  of  combina- 
tions quod  si  and  si  quid.  10.  Comparison  of  gravius  as  adj.  and 
as  adv.  11.  Declension  of  gravius  as  an  adj.  12.  A  class  of  nouns 
having  a  stem  ending  which  is  like  that  of  nemo.  13.  Use  of  tenses 
in  the  Eng.  sentences  :  "  Seizing  his  hand,  he  thanked  him,"  "  If  he 
goes,  he  will  come  again,"  "  While  I  mused,  the  fire  burned." 


LESSON    LXYIII. 

1.    TEXT. 
Caesar,  B.  G.  I.  20,  Heec  cum  to  the  end. 

2.    NOTES. 

1.  peteret :    (a)  the  introductory  cum  is  here  best  translated  while, 
as  very  often  when  used  with  the  impf.  subj.     (b)  Why  does  hsec  pre- 
cede cum  ?   (c)  flgns,  pres.  partic.  in  form  and  use  ;  for  meaning,  cf. 
LX.  N.  12  (b},  Obs.  2 ;  for  pf.  ind.,  cf.  LXY1.  N.  8  (e),  Obs.  3. 

2.  prendit :   (a)  for  verb  stem  and  pf.  stem,  cf.  LXVII.  N.  6  (b)  ; 
(b)  for  decl.  of  dextram   (sometimes  written  dexteram),  cf.  LX. 
N.  1.      (<?)  What  would  mean  his  own  right  hand,  her  right  hand? 

3.  f aciat :   (a)  for  omission  of  ut  before  faciat,  see  Gram.  Less.; 
(b)  for  const,  of  clause,  cf.  statuat,  LXVI.  N.  3  (b) ;    (c)  meaning  of 
finem  in  plnr.  ?     (d)  for  orandi,  cf.  bellaiidi,  XVI.  N.  12. 

4.  ostendit :   (a)  antec.  of  preceding  ejus  and  se?   (1)  taiiti,  the 
gen.  sing,  of  tantus  is  a  predicate  after  esse,  lit.,  he  shows  that  his 
favor  is  of  so  much,  freely,  is  of  so  much  (account),  is  worth  so 
much ,'  tanti  is  called  a  gen.  of  price,  since  it  tells  (in  an  indefinite 
way)  how  much  a  thing  is  worth. 


240  INDUCTIVE   LATIN  METHOD. 

5.  reipublicae  :    (a)  really  two  words,  re's  and   publica,  declined 
together ;    cf.   jusjurandum    and  also    res    familiaris,   novee   res ; 
(b)  note  the  gen.  ending'  -I  of  the  -e  decl. 

6.  condonet :   (a)   What  coujug.,  mode,  and  tense?    (&)   Explain 
mode ;  (c)  antec.   of  ejus  ;   (d)  the  dat.  in  voluntati  and  precibus 
may  be  best  translated  for  the  sake  of  or  because  of. 

7.  queratur  :     («)    mode    and    tense?    why?    (b)    meaning?    cf. 
quaeratur ;    (c)    Might   quae   agree   with   civitas    (cf.  quae   civitas 
XXXVII.)  so  far  as  form  is  concerned  ?     How  do  you  know  that  it 
does  not  ? 

8.  ut  .  .  .  vitet:   (ft)  same  const,  after  monet  as  in  faciat,  above; 
(b)  best  Eng.  translation  for  in  reliquum  tempus  ? 

9.  praeterita:    (a)    in    form   a    pf.  pass,   partic.   plnr.   nciit.   from 
praeterire,  to  go  by:  lit.  the  things  which  have  been  passed  by,  more 
freely,  brgoncs,  the  past ;  (b)  cf.  the  following  forms  of  ire  and  its 
compounds  :  exirent  XIII.,  exeant,  subeunda  XXVII.,  exlre,  tran- 
situr  XXIX.,  ire  XXX.,  translbant,  transierat   XLIII.,  Ibunt  (dir. 
disc.),    ituros  XLVI.,  transient,  and  the  derivatives  iter,  initium, 
reditio.     What  is  the  verb  stem  of  Ire  ?     Its  pres.  stem  ?     How  is 
this  stem  changed  when   it  stands  before  a  vowel?     How  is  the  sup. 
stem  formed  ?     What  is  true  of  its  tense  signs  and  pers.  endings  ? 

10.  dicit :  (a)  note  the  position  of  this  word  with  reference  to  the 
clause  which  follows  it  in  thought,  and  contrast  the  position  of  verbs 
of  saying  or  thinking  in  LX.,  LXIII.,  LXVI.  ;  cf.,  however,  position 
of  dicere   LVL,  arbitrabatur  LXIV. ;    (b)  cf.  also  (as  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  verb  of  urging)  monet   ut  vitet,  above,  and  hortatur  ut 
statuat,  obsecrare  lie  statueret  LXVI.,  rogat  faciat,  above  ;  note 
also  the  position  of  result   clauses  in  XXIX.,   LXVII.  and  in  this 
lesson  ;  (c)  for  repetition  of  pres.  ind.  in  this  lesson,  cf.  XXXI.  N.  10. 

11.  possit :   (a)  used  after  ut ;  why,  then,  subjv.  ?   (b)  quae  agat 
is  an  indir.   question  ;  quae  being   here  an  interrogative,  not  a  rel. 
pron. 

3.    OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  The  verb  stem  of  Ire  is  i-,  which  is  lengthened  to  I-  to  form 
the  pres.  stem  and  adds  -t  to  form  the  supine  stem.  Before  a  vowel 
the  pres.  stem  is  changed  to  e, 


LESSON  LXVIII.  241 

2.  Quoted  clauses  more  frequently  follow  a  verb  of  saying  tliau 
precede  it,  though  short  quoted  clauses  often  precede.     In  like  manner 
the  obj.  clause  of  purpose  and  all  result  clauses  usually  follow  the 
principal  verb  on  which  they  depend. 

3.  Cum  vvitlrthe  impf.  subjv.  is  often  best  translated  while. 

4.     GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  The  conjng.  of  Ire      .      .     .     .   A.  &  G.  141.         H.  295,  1,  3. 

2.  Ut    omitted    after    a   verb    of 

urging A.  &  G.  331,  /    H.  499,  2. 

Bern. 

3.  The  gen.  of  price A.  &  G.  214,  c,    H.  401,  404. 

215,  c. 

5.   VOCABULARY. 

1.  adhibere,   reg.,  to  hold  to,  to       9.  orare,  to  entreat,  to  beg. 

summon,  to  employ.  10.  praeterire,  -lit,  -itus,  to  go  by, 

2.  condonare,  to  give  up,  to  par-  to  pass  In/ ;  praeterita,  things 

don.  gone  by,  the  past. 

3.  consolari  to  console,  to  comfort.  11.  prendere  (also  written  prehen- 

4.  custos,   oclis,  a  guard.  dere),  prendit,  prensus,  to 

5.  dexter,  -tera,  -terum  or  more  grasp. 

frequently   -tra,   -trum,    the  12.  reprehendere,  to  hold  back,  to 

right ;  dextra  (maims,  fern.,  blame. 

the  hand,  being  understood),  13.  respublica  (also  written  as  two 

the  right  hand.  words  res   publica,  and  al- 

6.  flere,  flevit,  fletus,  to  weep.  ways  decl.  as  two),  the  common- 

7.  loqui,  locutus,  to  speak.  weal*  republic. 

8.  monere,  reg.,  to  remind,  warn,  14.  verbum,  a  word. 

advise.  15.  vitare,  to  shun. 

6.    EXERCISES. 

1.  (a)  Decline  flens,  haec,  ejus,  dextram,  flnem,  reipublicee, 
jusjiitandum,  precibus,  omnes,  tempus.  (&)  Synopsis  of  peteret 
in  the  pres.  system  and  of  prendit  in  the  pf.  system,  (c)  Principal 
parts  of  condSnet,  adhibet,  intellegat,  sclre,  faciat. 

IS 


242  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

2.  (a)  Your  (sing.)  favor  is  worth  so  much  that  I  freely  pardon 
your  brother  hvorder  to  retain  it.     (b)  Dunmorix,  when  called  (having 
been  called),  is  reproved  by  Caesar  because  he  has  not  shunned  sus- 
picion,    (c)   He  asks  what    Caesar  is  complaining  about,     (d]  He 
asked  Caesar  to  pardon  his  brother. 

3.  (a)  I  will  forgive  the  past  if  you  will,  for  the  future,  do  what 
ought  to  be  done.     (6)  Caesar  went  into  Gaul,  to  overcome  the  Hel- 
vetii,  who  had  gone  out  of  their  territory  and  were  crossing  the  fields 
of  the   Haedui.      (c)    Caesar  told  the   ambassadors,  who  had  asked 
permission  to  cross  the  province,  that,  if  they  should  try  to  cross  by 
force,  he  would  prevent  them. 


7.    TOPICS  FOR  STUDY. 

1.  Where  the  following  forms  are  found  :  eunt,  eo,  eant,  it,  Iret, 
itiirus.      2.    The  partic.  of  cSnsolari   with    the   meaning  of  each. 

3.  Formation  of  pres.  and  fut.  ind.  and   pres.  subjv.  in   all  conjug. 

4.  Meaning   of  tain,    quam  ;   tantus,  quantus  ;    is,   qui ;   ibi,   ubi. 

5.  Of  copia,   copiee  ;    finis,   fines  ;    castrum,   castra.      6.   Of  res 
publica,  res  familiaris,  novae  res.     7.  Of  est  tanti.      8.  Of  quaerere, 
queri.      9.    Of  praeterita,    in    reliquum    tempus,    in    praesentia. 

10.  Usual  position  of  the  verb  and  all  the  exceptions  thus  far  learned. 

11.  Ut  clauses  in  this  lesson.      12.  All  possible  meanings  of  cum, 
conj. 


LESSON  LXIX.  243 


LESSON    LXIX. 

REVIEW   of   LESSONS   LIV.  to   LXVIII.  inclusive. 

1.   TEXT.— CAESAR,  B.  G.  I.,  15  TO  20  INCLUSIVE. 

Follow  implicitly  the  directions  given  in  LIII.  under  "  Text." 

2.    GRAMMAR    LESSON. 

1.  Deel.  of  neuters  in  -al     .      .      .   A.  &  G.  5£  ani-  H.    63,    ani- 

mal, mal. 

2.  Decl.   of  nouns  and  adj.  with 

stems  in -ro  and -ero      .     .  A.  &G.  38,puer,  H.   51,  puer, 

ager    and    N.  ager  and  2, 

near     bottom  1),  4),  5); 

of  p.  16;   82.  149,  150. 

3.  Decl.  of  the  pres.  act.  partic.     .  A.  &  G.  85,  b,  H.     157,     a- 

iens.  mans. 

4.  Decl.  of  adj.  in  -ns  (other  than 

pres.  partic.) A.  &   G.  85,  a,  H.   157,  pru- 

egens.  dens  N. 

5.  3d  dec!,  adj.  in  -er     .      .     .     .  A.  &  G.  84,  acer.  H.  153,  acer. 

6.  Comparison    of    certain    irreg. 

adj A.  &  G.  90,  91  H.    163,    3  ; 

and  a.  165  and  N. 
1,  166. 

7.  Comparative       meaning       too 

rather  than  more   .     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  93,  a.  H.  444,  1. 

8.  Sup.  of  adj.  in  -er  and  of  adv. 

formed  from  them  .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  89,  a ;  H.     163,     1 ; 

92,  misere.  306  and  2. 

9.  The  cardinals  to  mllle    .     .     .  A.  &  G.  94.  H.  174. 

10.  The  use  of  distributives  .     .     .  A.  &  G.  95  and  H.  174,  2,  1). 

a. 


244  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

11.  The  possessive  adj.  pronouns    .  A.  &  G.  99,  a,    H.  185,  449. 

197. 

12.  Decl.  of  the  interrogative  adj. 

qui A.  &  G.  104.         H.     188,     II. 

and  1. 

13.  Decl.  ofquisque  and  quisquam  A.  &  G.  105,  c,  e.    If.  190,  2,  1), 

2)  and  N.  1. 

14.  Ipse  meaning  very     .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  1S5,  /,    H.  452,  2. 

Rein. 

15.  The  partic.  of  dep.  verbs      .     .A.  &  G.  135  and    H.     231,     1; 

a.  232. 

16.  Four  classes  of  3d  conjug.  verbs  A.  &  G.  124,  a,    H.  252  and  1, 

I,  d,  e.  254,       255 

and  II. 

17.  Conjng.  of  capere      .     .     .      .  A.  &  G.  p.  83.      H.   217,  218, 

219. 

18.  Conjug.  of  ire A.  &  G.  141.         H.  295,  1,  3. 

19.  Conjug.  of  ferre A.  &  G.  139.         H.  292  and  1, 

]),2). 

20.  Conjug.  of  odisss      .     .     .     .   A.  &  G.  143,  b    H.  297  and  2. 

and  c,  x. 

21.  Conjng.  of  ccepisse  .     .      .      .   A.  &  G.  143,  a.    H.  297. 

22.  The  name  of  the  action  in  -io, 

-tio,  -tus, -or A.  &G.  163,  a,  6.    H.  326  and  1, 

327  and  1. 

23.  The  name  of  the  quality  in  -ia, 

-tia,  -tas,  -tudo     .     .     .      .   A.  &  G.  163,  e.     H.  325  and  1. 

24.  The  gen.  of  price A.  &  G.  214,  c,    H.  401,  404. 

215,  c. 

25.  The  adj.   with   the  force   of  a 

gen A.  &  G.  p.  146,    H.    393    and 

N.,  190.  foot-note  3; 

395,  N.  2. 

26.  T\vo  dat,  ;    the    obj.   to  which 

and  the  end  for  which      .     .  A.  &  G.  233.         H.390  and  I., 

II. 

27.  The  dat.  with  certain  verbs  of 

taking  away A.  &  G.  229.         H.     386,     2; 

385.  IF.  2. 


LESSON  LXTX.  245 

28.  Two  accus.  with  verbs  of  asking 

and  teaching     .     .     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  239,  c.  H.  374. 

29.  The  locative  case A.  &  G.  31,  /?,.  H.  45,  2. 

30.  The  abl.  of  price A.  &  G.  252.  H.  422. 

31.  The  abl.  of  place  without  a  prep.  A.  &  G.  258,  /.  H.  425,  II.  1, 

1)  and  2. 

32.  Time  before  or  after  .     .     .     .  A.  &  G.  259,  d.    H.  430  and  N. 

1,    2),  also 
foot-note  3. 

33.  Difference  in  meaning  of  same 

prep,  when  used  with  differ- 
ent cases A.  &  G.  152;  c.    H.  435  and  N. 

1. 

34.  Comparatives  with  quaxn     .      .   A.  &  G.  203,  a;    II.      417,     1, 

247,  a.  444,  2. 

35.  Comparatives  without  quam     .   A.  &G.247anda.  H.  417  and  1. 

36.  Collective  nouns  with  the  agree- 

ment of  plurals       .     .      .     .  A.  &  G.  205,  c.     II.  461,  1. 

37.  Const,  with  verbs  of  fearing      .  A.  &  G.  331,  /.     H.    498,    III. 

and    N.    1 , 
foot-note  4. 

38.  The  use  of  qum  with  the  subjv.  A.  &  G.  332,  g,    H.  501,  II.  2  ; 

Bern.  504. 

39.  The  adv.  use  of  the  substantive 

quod  clause A.  &  G.  533,  a.    H.  516,  II.  2, 

N. 

40.  Mode  and  tense  used  after  ubi    A.  &  G.  324.         H.    518    and 

N.   1. 

41.  Ut  omitted  after  a  verb  of  urg- 

ing       ,  A.  &  G.  331,  /,    H.  499,  2. 

Hem. 

42.  The  historical  inf.       .     .      .      .A.  &  G.  275  and    H.  536,  1  and 

Hern.  N. 

43.  The  time  denoted  by  participles  A.  &  G.  290.  II.  550. 

44.  The  pf.  pass,  partic.  after  habere  A.  &  G.  292,  c.  H.  388,  1.  N. 

45.  The  use  or  omission  of  the  conj.  A.  &  G.  208,  b.  H.  554,  I.  6. 

46.  The  effect  of  separating  words 

naturally  connected     .     .     .  A.    &    G.    344,    H.  561,  III. 

and  e. 


246 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


3.    WORD   REVIEW. 

Classified  alphabetical  list  of  all  the  new  words  occurring  in   Csesar,  B.  G.  I. 

15-20. 

1.    VERBS. 
1st  Conjug.  (-a  verbs). 


accusare           consolaii          desperare         in  stare             repugnare 
collocare          convocare        dubitare          jactare             sublevare 
comportare      creare               flagitare           obsecrare         vltare 
condonare       deslgnare         hortaii             orare                vocare 

2d  Conjug. 

(-e  verbs). 

adliibere 

deterrere 

monere 

retinere 

audere 

favere 

movere 

tacere 

augere 
coercere 

Here 
liceii 

perterrere 
rcmovere 

valere 
vereri 

3d  Conjug. 

(-e  verbs). 

Give  the  principal  parts  of  these  verbs. 

accedere 
alere 
animadvertere 
avertere 
cadere 

complect! 
crescere 
cupere 
deminiiere 
destituere 

loqul 
minuere 
utibere 
odisse 
offendere 

propellere 
proponere 
quaerere 
queil 
redimere 

ccepisse 
c5gnoscere 
colloqui 
commonefacere 

dimittere 
em  ere 
insequl 
lacessere 

petere 
ponere 
praemittere 
prendere 

repreliendere 
restituere 
subsistere 
subvehere 

largiri 


4:th  Conjug.  (-1  verbs). 
metiri  repeiire  scire 


sentire 


Irregular  verbs. 
adesse    conferre    interesse    nolle    prseesse    praeferre    prajterire 


LESSON  LXIX. 


247 


2.    NOUNS  HAVING  -A  STEMS. 


audacia 

lacrima 

pra5sentia 

temperantia 

justitia 

potentia 

rapiria 

vita 

3. 

-O  STEMS. 

Nouns. 

Cains 

pabulum 

studium 

vergobretus 

concilium 

portor,ium 

supplicium 

vulgus 

nervus 

pretium 

verb  u  m 

Adj.  (having  also  stems  in  -a). 

ad  versus 

egregius 

panel 

seditiosus 

alien  us 

fraternus 

posterns 

sen! 

ampins 

improbus 

propinquus 

solus 

animus 

rnaturus 

quantus 

sumrnus 

antiouus 

meus 

quingenti 

tantus 

dexter 

parvus 

qnini 

verus 

4.    THIRD  DECL. 

Nouns. 

Give  the  gen 

.  and  gender  of  each. 

adfinitas 

frlgus 

mater 

populatio 

aginen 

honor 

nemo 

potestas 

amor 

liostis 

nex 

prex 

custos 

interpres 

oifensio 

soror 

eques 

liberalitas 

ops 

nxor 

existimatio 

libertas 

pabulatio 

vectlgal 

equester        familiaris        insciens        plus,  neut.         praesens 


conventus 


5.    -U  STEMS. 
equitatus  injussu 


sumptus 


248 


INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

6.    -E  STEMS. 
pern  icies  respublica 

7.    INDECL.  NUMERAL  ADJ. 
quindecira 


>.     FKON. 


quisqi 


meus 


9.    PREP. 

contra 

10.    ADV. 

antea 
celeriter 

gravitcr 
illic 

necessario 
praesertim 

secreto 
semper 

circiter 
cotidie 
rupide 
demum 

interim 
largiter 
llbere 
modo 

prius 
prlvatim 
publice 
quidera 

separatim 
sitnul 
turn 

11.    CONJ. 

quin 

LESSON  LXX.  249 


LESSON    LXX. 

GRAMMATICAL  REVIEW   and    INDEX  of   LESSONS   I.   to 

LXVin. 

In  this  Lesson  the  most  important  grammatical  points  discussed  in  the  foregoing 
Lessons  are  arranged  in  the  usual  order  of  the  grammars.  The  Lesson  may  be 
used  both  for  systematic  study  and  for  reference.  It  has  been  thought  best  in 
giving  references  to  mention  only  the  Notes  and  Observations  ;  the  pupil  should 
remember,  however,  that  the  subject  of  reference  is  very  often  treated  under  the 
Grammar  Lesson  and  the  Topics  of  Study  in  the  Lesson  referred  to. 

The  grammatical  principles  referred  to  below  are  always  discussed  in  immediate 
connection  with  their  application.  It  is  therefore  possible  and  very  desirable,  in  the 
systematic  study  of  this  Lesson,  for  the  pupil  to  prepare  classified  sets  of  examples 
taken  from  the  text  and  illustrating  the  most  important  principles  which  he  has 
been  studying.  The  teacher  cannot  too  strongly  urge  upon  his  pupils  the  necessity 
of  associating  every  principle  with  a  definite,  concrete  example  of  its  use. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Eoraan  pronunciation,  I.— IV.,  au,  ce,  IX.  Obs.  7  ;  j,  XX.  N.  1, 
Obs.  1 ;  accent,  I.  ;  consonant  changes,  IV.  N.  8  (&)  ;  VII.  N.  12  (a), 
Obs.  4  ;  X.  Obs.  6  ;  XXV.  N.  2  ;  vowel  changes,  XXII.  N.  3,  Obs.  2  ; 
the  mutes,  XXV.  ;  quantity  of  contracts,  XXV.  N.  3. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

NOUNS. 

Gender:  I.  N.  1  (d)    Obs.  5,  9;   II.  N.  4  (e),  Obs.  7. 

Declension:  there  are  different  decl.  II.  Ob<*.  8;  the  stern,  VI.  N. 
4,  Obs.  8  ;  the  neut.  ending  -a,  N.  7,  Obs.  2  ;  classification  of  nouns 
by  stem  endings,  XVII.  N.  8,  Obs.  1;  nom.  formed  by  adding  -s, 
XXV.  N.  3  (&),  Obs.  2. 

-a  decl.;  -a,  -am,  -ee  nom.  plur.  II.  Obs.  5,  6,  7;  -arum,  -a,  III.  ; 
-as,  Is,  ubl,  V. ;  -ae  gen.  VI. ;  all  forms,  VIII.  Obs.  10. 


250  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

-o  decl.  -I  nora.  plur.,  -orum,  III. ;  -is,  abl.  IV.  N.  4,  Obs.  3 ;  -os, 
V. ;  -um  (raasc.),  and  the  iieut.  endings,  VIII.;  XL  Obs.  3;  masc. 
nouns  declined,  XIII.  N.  2,  Obs.  3,  4. 

3d  decl.  ;  the  ending  -es,  I.  N.  6,  Obs.  6  ;  -is,  -ibus,  IV.;  -en,  V. 
N.  5,  Obs.  6;-i-um, -e,  VI.;  dental  stems  complete,  XIII.  N.  11, 
Obs.  5;  -i  stems,  XIV.  N.  1,  Obs.  1;  nouns  in  -ns,  -rs,  and  -en, 
XV. ;  nouns  in  -or,  XVI.  N.  14,  Obs.  8 ;  stems  in  -c  and  -g,  XVIII. 
N.  2,  Obs.  2  ;  riom.  in  -os  and  -o,  neuters  with  gen.  in  -uris  and 
-oris,  -i  stems,  XXV. ;  decl.  of  vis,  XXX.  ;  iter,  XXXI.  N.  3,  Obs. 
2 ;  gen.  in  -eris,  XXXIV.  N.  4 ;  neuters  in  -al,  LX.  N.  10. 

-u  decl.  XXV.  N.  3,  Obs.  1. 

-g  decl.  LII,  N.  11,  Obs.  1. 


ADJECTIVES. 

First  and  second  decl.  XIII.  N.  2,  Obs.  6;  in  -is,  -e,  XIV.  N.  1, 
Obs.  1  ;  force  of  prefix  per,  XIV.  N.  1,  Obs.  4,  XVIII.  N.  3  (b)  • 
altera  and  alia,  XV.  N.  7,  Obs.  5;  comp.  XVI.  N.  5  (c),  Obs.  5, 
XXIII.  N.  6,  Obs.  3  ;  neut.  of  the  comp.  XXIX.  N.  8;  decl.  of  duo, 
XXIX.  N.  2;  adj.  with  gen.  in  -lus,  dat.  in  -I,  XXXII.  N.  7  (b)  ; 
comp.  by  adv.  XXXVIII.  N.  5  ;  the  first  ten  ordinals,  XXXIX.  N.  4 ; 
the  abl.  ending -i,  XL.  N.  3,  Obs.  1;  decl.  of  vetus,  XLVI. ;  comp. 
meaning  too,  LIV.  N.  7  (a)  ;  the  cardinals  to  mUle  and  use  of  dis- 
tributives, LV.  N.  10  (d),  (e),  Obs.  1;  irreg.  comp.  LVIII.  N.  4  (c)  • 
decl.  and  comp.  of  adj.  in  -er,  LX.  N.  1,  3,  Obs.  1  ;  LXIII.  N.  2  ; 
adj.  in  -ns,  LXIV.  N.  5. 


PRONOUNS. 

Decl.  of  is  and  quT,  XXI.  N.  2,  5,  Obs.  1,  2  ;  of  ille  and  ipse, 
XXII.  N.  4;  the  indefinite  quis,  XXXIII.  N.  9,  Obs.  2;  decl.  of 
idem,  XLT.  N.  1 ;  decl.  of  hie,  LII.  N.  1  (b\  Obs.  2  ;  decl.  of  ego 
and  vos,  LII.  N.  8  (c)  ;  the  interrogntive  adj.  pron.  qui,  LIV.  N. 
6  (d)  ;  quisque  and  quisquam,  LXV.  N.  4 ;  the  possessive  adj. 
pron.  LXVII.  N.  1  (d). 


LESSON  LXX.  251 


VERBS. 

In  general:  the  pers.  ending  -t,  I.  N.  2  (b)  ;  -nt,  II.  N.  2  (c), 
Obs.  ;  -ntur,  III.  N.  8,  Obs.  5  ;  the  stem  VI.  N.  4,  Obs.  8;  pres. 
ind.  VII.  N.  11,  Obs.  3  ;  all  3d  pers.  endings,  X.  N.  10  (c),  Obs.  5  ; 
ending  of  pres.  inf.  XIV.  N.  8,  Obs.  7;  sign  of  the  inipf.  ind.  and 
subjv.  XVI.  N.  3  (b),  Obs.  1;  dep.  verbs  XVII.  N.  5  (b),  Obs.  4; 
characteristics  of  the  four  conjug.  XVIII.  N.  11 ;  Obs.  5,  6,  7,  8 ;  the 
gerundive,  XIX.  N.  5,  Obs.  2  ;  plpf.  ind.  act.  and  pass.  XX.  N.  3,  4, 
Obs.  3 ;  the  supine  stern,  XXI.  N.  3  (a)  ;  fut.  act.  and  pf.  pass,  partic. 
XXII.  N.  5,  Obs.  1 ;  supine  in  -u,  XXII.  N.  1 ;  the  three  stems,  how 
found,  XXIV.  N.  5,  Obs.  1,  2;  impers.  verbs,  XXIV.  N.  3  ;  plpf. 
subjv.  pass.  XXXI.  N.  2  ;  the  pf.  ind.  and  pf.  inf.  pass.  XXXIII. 
N.  2  (a)  ;  sign  of  the  pres.  subjv.  XXXVII.  N.  4,  Obs.  2  ;  the  sign  of 
the  pf.  subjv.  act.  XL.  N.  7  (a),  Obs.  3;  pf.  inf.  act.  XLIII.  N.  5, 
Obs.  1 ;  the  plpf.  subjv.  act.,  the  stems  of  all  conjug.,  the  principal 
parts,  XLIV.  ;  tense  signs  of  the  fut.  and  fut.  pf.  ind.XLVI.  N.  1  (c), 
N.  3 '(«?),  N.  5  (d) ;  tenses  of  the  ind.  and  subjv.  XL VI.  Obs.  3; 
summary  of  reg.  verb  forms,  XLVIII. ;  the  pers.  endings  of  the  act. 
L.  ;  pers.  endings  of  the  pass.  LI.  ;  partic.  of  dep.  verbs,  time  denoted 
by  pres.  partic.  and  decl.  of  pres.  partic.  LX. ;  the  verb  stem,  LXVI. 
N.  8,  Obs.  1,  3. 

First  conjug. :  pf.  stem,  XXVIII.  N.  6,  Obs.  2  ;  loss  of  -v  from 
pf.  stem,  XXVIII.  N.  6  (a). 

Second  conjug. :  pf.  stem,  XX.  N.  3  (a),  Obs.  2  ;  the  supine  stem, 
XXXV.  N.  3  («),  Obs.  2. 

Third  conjug. :  how  to  find  stems,  XXIV.  N.  5,  Obs.  3,  4  ;  pres. 
inf.  pass.  XXX 1.  N.  11,  Obs.  6  ;  conjug.  of  capere,  LIV.  N.  6  (c), 
Obs.  2  ;  -see  in  3d  conjug.  LXVI.  N.  8,  Obs.  2  ;  verbs  in  which 
the  verb  stem  and  pf.  stem  are  alike,  and  four  classes  of  3d  conjug. 
verbs,  LXVII.  N.  6. 

Irregular:  formation  and  conjug.  of  posse,  XXIII".  \.  8;  pf.  of 
compounds  of  Ire,  XLTII.  N.  7,  Obs.  2;  conjug.  of  esse,  XLVI.  ; 
complete  conjug.  of  velle,  LI.  N.  6  (c)  ;  of  esse  and  posse,  LIL; 
of  ccepit,  LV.V.  6;  of  ferre,  LVI.  N.  7  ;  of  odit,  LXII.  N.  2 ;  of 
Ire,  LVI  1 1.  N.  9  (b),  Obs.  1. 


252  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 


PARTICLES   (/.  e.  adv.,  conj.,  prep.). 

The  adv.  ending  e-,  YL  N.  11  (a),  Obs.  2;  sup.  of  the  adv.  Vf. 
\.  11,  Obs.  3 ;  force  of  ob  and  con  in  composition,  X. ;  difference  in 
meaning  of  a  or  ab  and  ex,  XV.  N.  1,  Obs.  1 ;  comp.  of  adv.  XV  L  N. 
5,  Obs.  5. 

FORMATION   OF   WORDS. 

Formation  of  adv.  in  e-  and  -ter,  LYIF.  x.  10,  Obs.  1. 
The  name  of  the  quality  in  -ia,  -tia,  -tas,  -tudo,  LX.  N.  8. 
The  endings  of  adj.,  and  the  name  of  the  action,  LXYLI. 


SYNTAX. 

NOUNS. 

Agreement:  two  sing.  subj.  with  sing,  verb,  Y.  N.  8  (b),  Obs.  4; 
appositive,  Y.  N.  5  (b)  ;  X.  N.  9  (b),  Obs.  1  ;  pred.  noun  or  adj.  XX. 
N.  4  (d). 

Norn.:  as  subj.  II.  N.  2  (/),  Obs.  3,  5. 

Accus.:  as  Obj.  II.  N.  2  (/),  5  (c),  Obs.  4,  6;  with  in  and 
inter,  IY.  N.  7,  Obs.  1  ;  extent  of  space,  XVII.  N.  7  (b),  Obs.  7  ; 
duration  of  time,  XX.  N.  3  (b}  •  domum  XXVII.  N.  6  (b)  ;  two 
accus.  after  compound  verbs,  XLIII.  N.  5  (b) ;  two  accus.  with  verbs 
of  asking  and  teaching,  LVI.  N.  1  (b)  ;  substantive  quod  clause  as 
adv.  accus.  LIX.  N.  6. 

Gen. :  in  general,  and  also  possessive  and  partitive,  VI. ;  words 
used  with  partitive  gen.  XVII.  N.  8  (b),  Obs.  8;  with  potiri,  XXIII. 
N.  7  ;  of  quality,  XXXIV.  N.  2  (b)  ;  with  special  verbs,  L.  N.  6  (e) ; 
the  adj.  with  force  of  gen.  LXIV.  N.  4  (e) ;  gen.  not  always  translated 
of,  LXV.  N.  5  (b},  Obs.  1  ;  of  price,  LXVIII.  N.  4  (b). 

Dat.:  indir.  obj.  VIII.  N.  2,  Obs.  1  ;  with  compounds,  XIX.  N. 
12  (c),  Obs.  3  ;  with  adj.  XX [.  N.  3  (b)  ;  with  verbs  of  giving  and 
saying,  XXII.  N.  2  (b),  Obs.  3;  of  possessor,  XXXII.  N.  4  (b)  •  of 
the  agent,  XLI.  x.  7  (b) ;  with  certain  verbs  of  taking  away,  LIX.  N. 


LESSON  LXX.  253 

3  (e)  ;  the  dat.  where  the  accus.  might  be  expected,  LXII.  N.  1,  Obs. 
1 ;  two  dat.  LXIII.  N.  7. 

All. :  in  general  and  of  respect,  IV.;  with  a  or  ab,  V. ;  of  separa- 
tion, IX.  N.  15,  Obs.  2  ;  with  in,  IX.  N.  18,  Obs.  3  ;  of  means,  X.  N. 
11,  Obs.  2  ;  absolute,  XIII.  N.  5,  Obs.  1  ;  of  cause,  XVI.  N.  2  (c), 
Obs.  9  ;  prep,  with,  XVII.  N.  1,  Obs.  5  ;  of  agent,  XX.  N.  4  (c)  ;  of 
time,  XXI.  N.  2  ;  translation  of  abl.  absolute,  XXIII.  N.  5  ;  abl.  of 
degree  of  difference,  XXVII.  N.  1  ;  place  from  which,  and  domo, 
XXVIIL  N.I  (b)  •  abl.  with  special  verbs,  XXVIII.  N.  2;  prep, 
omitted  with  loco  and  locis,  XXIX.  N.  9  ;  abl.  of  quality,  XXX. 
N.  2,  Obs.  1  ;  of  manner,  XLIII.  N.  1  ;  of  place  without  a  prep.  LV. 
N.  4  ;  after  comp.  without  quam,  LV.  N.  10  (c)  ;  of  price,  LX.  N. 
11  (b)  ;  time  before  or  after,  LXIII.  N.  3. 

The  locative  case,  LXI.  N.  4. 

ADJECTIVES. 

Agreement,  VI.  N.  2,  Obs.  7  ;  used  snbstantively,  XXIX.  N.  6 
(b)  ;  with  force  of  gen.  IX.  N.  5  (5),  LXIV.  N.  4  (c). 

PRONOUNS. 

Agreement,  VII.  N.  3,  Obs.  6  ;  rel.  translated  like  demonstrative, 
IX.  N.  1  (d),  Obs.  1  ;  suus  and  e6rum  IX.  N.  19,  Obs.  9  ;  use  of 
demonstrative  as  pers.  pron.  XIAr.  N.  9,  12,  Obs.  8  ;  use  of  reflexives, 
XIX.  N.  12  (d),  Obs.  4  ;  rel.  agreeing  with  repeated  antec.  XXIX. 
N.  3  (c)  ;  pers.  pron.  often  omitted,  XL.  N.  4  (c)  (d)  ;  change  of  pers. 
pron.  in  indir.  disc.  XLVI.  ;  use  of  the  rel.  quod  as  an  adv.  acrus. 
L.  N.  5 ;  meaning  and  use  of  hie,  ille,  is,  ipse,  LI  I.  N.  1  (a),  LX. 
N.  7. 

VERBS. 

Tenses,  use  of,  LXVII.  N.  4  (b),  Obs.  2  ;  agreement,  VII.  N.  6  (a)  • 
omission  of  esse,  XXIII.  N.  3  (a),  Obs.  1;  substantive  clauses, 
XXIV.  N.  3  (b). 

Ind. :  force  of  the  pf.  XIII.  N.  3,  Obs.  8  ;  force  of  the  impf.  XVI. ; 
pres.  in  narrative,  XXXI.  x.  10  ;  used  after  ubi,  LVII.  N.  1  (a). 


254  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

Subjv.:  of  purpose,  XVIIL  N.  13  (d),  Obs.  10;  obj.  clause  of 
purpose,  XX.  'x.  5  ;  neg.  purpose,  XXV.  N.  1 ;  translation  of  purpose 
clause,  XXVJII.  N.  4,  Obs.  4  ;  subjv.  of  result,  XXIX.  N.  6  ;  purpose 
clauses  introduced  by  a  rd.  XXX.  N.  5 ;  the  subordinate  clause 
of  iridir.  disc.  XXXII.  N.  6  ;  dum  clauses  of  purpose,  XXXIII.  N. 
7  ;  subjv.  of  purpose  after  qu6,  XXXIV.  N.  5  (b) ;  substantive  clause 
of  result,  XXXVIII.  N.  6  ;  cum  causal,  XL.  N.  2  (b)  ;  indir.  question, 
XL1II.  N.  2  (c)  ;  cum  temporal  in  Caesar,  XLIV.  N.  5  ;  fut.  time  in 
the  subjv.  XLVI. ;  tenses  of  the  subordinate  clauses  in  indir.  disc. 
XLVII. ;  cum  concessive,  LII.  N.  2,  Obs.  3;  subjv.  with  quin,  LIX. 
N.  3  (a) ;  with  verbs  of  fearing-,  LXV.  N.  3,  Obs.  2 ;  ut  omitted  after 
a  verb  of  urging,  LXVIII.  N.  3. 

Inf. :  after  a  verb  of  saying,  XIV.  N.  2,  Obs.  9  ;  the  subj.  of  the 
inf.,  XVII.  N.  3,  Obs.  6  ;  complementary  inf.,  XVIIL  N.  8,  Obs.  11  ; 
inf.  with  jubere,  XX VII I.  x.  1 ;  subj.  of  inf.  in  indir.  disc,  regularly 
expressed,  XL.  N.  4  (d)  ;  translation  of  pres.  inf.  after  past  tense  of 
debere  ;  tense  of  inf.  in  indir.  disc.  XLIX.  N.  5,  8,  Obs.  2  ;  the  his- 
torical inf.  LVI.  N.  1  (a). 

Gerunds,  Supines,  and  Partic. :  force  of  the  partic.  XIII.  N. 
7,  Obs.  7  ;  of  the  gerund,  XVI.  N.  12,  Obs.  6  ;  best  translation  of 
partic.  XXVI II.  N.  3,  7  ;  gerundive  meaning  ought  or  must,  XXXIII. 
N.  3  (b) ;  the  supine  in  -um,  XL.  N.  2  (a)  ;  gerundive  after  curare, 
XLV.  N.  3  ;  gerundive  expressing  purpose,  LXI.  N.  1  (e). 

PARTICLES  (i.  e.  adv.,  conj.,  and  prep.). 

Et,  -que.  atque,  VII.  N.  1,  Obs.  1 ;  ut  introduces  both  ind.  and 
subjv.  XXV.  x.  6,  Obs.  4  ;  quam  with  the  sup.  XXXI.  N.  5,  Obs.  3  ; 
meaning  of  ad  with  names  of  towns,  XXXI.  N.  6  ;  force  of  num  in 
asking  a  question,  L.  N.  9  (b) ;  the  comp.  of  the  adv.  sometimes 
means  too,  LIV.  N.  7  (CL)  ;  difference  in  meaning  of  same  prep,  when 
used  with  different  cases,  LVIT.  N.  9  ;  comparative  with  quam,  LVIII. 
N.  4  (a)  ;  use  or  omission  of  the  conj.  LXV.  N.  2  (d  ). 

ARRANGEMENT  OF  WORDS  AND   CLAUSES. 

Position:  of  verb,  VIT.  x.  12  (c),  Obs.  8;  of  monosyllabic  prep. 
XV.  N.  7  (e),  Obs.  6  ;  of  adj.  XXIV.  N.  1  (b),  Obs.  6  ;  grouping  of 


LESSON  LXX.  255 

words,  XXIV.  N.  4,  Obs.  4  ;  effect  of  position  at  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence, XXX.  N.  1 ;  effect  of  placing  subj.  at  the  end  of  a  sentence, 
XXXI.  N.  9;  change  of  order  for  emphasis,  XXXII.  N.  7  (a);  the 
unemphatic  order,  XXXIII.  N.  3  (a)  ;  the  order  of  the  modifiers  of 
the  verb,  XXXIV.  N.  3  (b)  ;  position  of  word  closely  connected  with 
the  preceding  or  following  clause,  XXXVI.  N.  2  (b)  ;  position  of 
eiiim,  autem,  quoque,  LI.  N.  4  (/)  ;  the  rel.  before  the  principal 
clause,  LI.  N.  6  (6)  :  the  effect  of  separating  words  naturally  con- 
nected, LX1II.  N.  1  (a)  ;  position  of  the  indefinite  quis,  LXVI.  N.  4 
(b),  Obs.  4 ;  position  of  obj.  clauses  of  purpose,  clauses  of  result,  and 
quoted  clauses,  LXVIII.  N.  10,  Obs.  2. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Variation  of  meaning  with  context,  XXX.  N.  4,  Obs.  2. 
Koman  way  of  reckoning  time,  XXX.  N.  6,  Obs.  2. 
Four  ways  of  expressing  purpose,  LX.  N.  1,  6,  Obs.  1. 


256  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

THE  HELVETIAN   WAR. 

B.  G.  I.  1-29. 

NOTE.  —  The   numbers   within   parentheses  indicate  the  Lessons  in  which 
the  following  text  is  treated. 

The  divisions  of  Gaul. 

1.  (1)  Gulliu  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres  ;    (2)  qunrum  imam 
iucolunt  Belgce,  aliam  Aquitani,  (3)  tertiam   qui  ipsorum    lingua 
Celtje,  nostra  Galli  appellantur.      (4)  Hi  omiies  lingua,  institutis, 
legibus    inter    se    differunt.      (5)  Gallos   ab  Aquitanis    Garumna 

5  flumen,  a  Belgis  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit.  (6)  Horinn  omnium 
fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  proptcrea  quod  a  cultu  atque  humanitate 
provincial  longissime  absunt,  (7)  minimeque  ad  eos  mercatores 
saepe  com  meant,  atque  ea  quae  ad  effeminandos  animos  pertinent 
important ;  (8)  proximique  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rhenum  in- 

10  colunt,  quibuscum  continenter  bellum  gernnt.  (9)  Qua  de  causa 
Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  quod  fere  quo- 
tidianis  proeliis  cum  Germanis  contendunt,  cum  aut  suis  finibus 
eos  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt.  (10)  Eorum 
una  pars,  quam  Gallos  obtinere  dictum  est,  initium  capit  a  flumine 

15  Rhodano  ;  continetur  Garumna  flumine,  Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum  ; 
attingit  etiam  ab  Sequanis  et  Helvetiis  flumen  Rhenum  ;  vergit  ad 
septentriones.  (1-1)  Belgne  ab  extremis  Gallise  finibus  oriuntur, 
pertinent  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Rheni,  spectant  in  septen- 
trionem  et  orientem  solem.  Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad 

20  Pyreuaeos  montes  et  earn  partem  Oceani  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam 
pertinet,  spectat  inter  occasum  sol  is  et  septentriones. 

Orgetorix,  a  Helvetian  noble,  forms  a  plot  to  seize  the  government  in 
Gaul.  The  warlike  Helcetii  prepare  to  leave  their  narrow  boun- 
daries in  a  body. 

2.  (13)  Apud   Helvetios  longe  uobilissimus  fuit  et  ditissimus 
Orgetorix.     Is,  M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisone  consulibus,  regni  cupidi- 


THE   HELVETIAN   WAR.  257 

tate  inductus,  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit,  et  civitati  persuasit  ut 
de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent ;  (14)  perfacilc  esse, 
cum  virtute  omnibus  prrestarent,  totius  Gallise  imperio  potiri.  Id 
hoc  facilius  eis  persuasit,  quod  undique  loci  iiatura  Hclvetii  con- 
tiuentur  :  (15)  una  ex  parte  fluraine  llheno  latissimo  atque  altis-  5 
simo,  qui  agrum  Helvetium  a  Gerrnanis  dividit;  altera  ex  parte 
monte  Jura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios ;  tertia 
lacu  Lemaimo  et  flumine  Bhodaiio,  qui  provinciam  nostram  ab  Hel- 
vetiis  dividit.  (16)  His  rebus  fiebat,  ut  et  minus  late  vagarcntur, 
et  minus  facile  h'nitimis  bellum  inferre  pqssent  |  qua  ex  parte  10 
homines  bellandi  cupidi  magno  dolore  adticiebantur.  (17)  Pro 
multitudine  autem  hominum,  et  pro  gloria  belli  atque  fortitudinis, 
angustos  se  fines  •  habere  arbitrabantnr,  qui  in  longitudinem  milia 
passuum  CCXL,  in  latitudinem  CLXXX  patebant. 

3.    (18)  His  rebus  adducti,  et  auctoritatc  Orgetorigis  permoti,  15 
constituerunt    ea    quae    ad    proficiscendum    pertinerent    comparare, 
jumentorum  et  carrorum  quam    maximum   numerum   coemere,  sc- 
mentes   quam  mnximas  faeere,  ut  in  itinere  copia  frumenti  suppe- 
teret,  (19)  cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare. 
Ad    eas    res   conficiendas    bienniuin    sibi  satis    esse    duxerunt,    in  20 
tertium  annum   prefectionem  lege  confirmant.      Ad  eas  res   con- 
ficiendas Orgetorix  deligitur.     Is  sibi  legationem  ad  civitates  sus- 
cepit.      (20)  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Castico,  Catamantaloedis  filio, 
Sequano,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  inultos  anr.os  obtinuerat, 
et  a  senatu  populi   Eomaiii  amicus  appellatus  erat,  ut  regnum  in  25 
civitate    sua   occuparet,    quod   pater  ante   habuerai ;    (21)   itemque 
Dumnorigi  Hseduo,  fratri  Divitiaci,  qui  eo  tempore  principatum  in    ,, 
civitate  obtjnebat  ac  maxime  plebi  acceptus  erat,  ut  idem  conaretur  / 
persuadet,  eique  filiam  suam  in  matrimonium  dat.     (22)  PerFacile 
factu   csse   ill  is   probat  conata  perfieere,  propterea  quod  ipse   sure  30 
civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  esset  :  non  esse  dubium,  quin  totius 
Gallise  plurimum    Helvetii    possent ;     (23)    se  suis  copiis   suoque 
exercitu  illis  regna  conciliaturum  confirmat.     Hac  oratione  adducti, 
inter  se  fidem  et  jusjurandum  dant,  et,  regno  oeeupato,  per  tres  po- 
tentissimos  ac  firmissimos  populos  totius  Gallise  sese  potiri  posse  35 
sperant. 


17 


258  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

The  plot  of  Orgetorix  discovered  ;  his  sudden  death. 

4.  (24)  Ea  res  est  Helvetiis  per  indicium  enuntiata.     Moribus 
suis  Orgetorigein  ex  vinclis  causam  dicere  coegerunt.     Damriatum 
poenam  sequi  oportebat,  ut  igni  cremaretur.     Die  constituta  causse 
dictiouis,  Orgetorix  ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam,  ad  kominum 

5  milia  decem,  undique  coegit,  et  omnes  clientes  obseratosque  suos, 
quorum  magnum  numerum  habebat,  eodem  conduxit ;  (25)  per 
eos,  ne  causam  diceret,  se  eripuit.  Cum  civitasob  earn  reni  incitata 
armis  jus  suum  exsequi  conaretur,  multitudinemque  hominum  ex 
agris  magistratus  cogerent,  Orgetorix  mortuus  est;  neque  abest 
10  suspitio,  ut  Helvetii  arbitrantur,  quin  ipse  sibi  mortem  consciverit. 

The  Helvetii  continue  their  preparations  ;  they  gain  allies. 

5.  (27)  Post  ejus  mortem,  uihilo  minus  Helvetii  id  quod  con- 
stituerant  facere  couantur,  ut  e  finibus  suis  exeant.     Ubi  jam  se  ad 
earn  rein  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida  sua  omnia  uuinero  ad 
duodecim,  vicos  ad  quadringentos,  reliqua  privata  sedificiaincendunt ; 

15  frumentuin  omne,  prseterquam  quod  serum  portaturi  erant,  com- 
burunt,  ut  —  domum  reditionis  spe  sublata  —  paratiores  ad  omnia 
pericula  subeunda  essent ;  (28)  triura  mensium  molita  cibaria  sibi 
quemque  domo  efferre  jubent.  Persuadent  Kauracis  et  Tulingis  et 
Latobrigis  finitimis,  uti,  eodem  usi  consilio,  oppidis  suis  vicisque 

20  exustis,  una  cum  iis  proficiscantur ;  Boiosque,  qui  trans  Ehenum 
incoluerant,  et  in  agrum  Noricum  transierant  Noreiamque  oppug- 
narant,  receptos  ad  se  socios  sibi  adsciscunt. 

The  Helvetii  plan  to  cross  the  Roman  Province.      Ctesar  suddenly 
appears  and  keeps  them  out. 

6.  (29)  Erant  omnino  itinera  duo,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exire 
possent :  unum  per  Sequanos,  angustum  et  difficile,  inter  montein 

25  Juram  et  flumen  Rhodanum,  vix  qua  singuli  carri  ducerentur; 
mons  autem  altissimus  iinpendebat,  ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere 
possent :  alterum  per  provinciam  nostram,  multo  facilius  atque  ex- 
peditius,  propterea  quod  inter  fines  Helvetiorum  et  Allobrogum,  qui 


THE   HELVETIAN   WAR.  259 

iiuper  pacati  erant,  Ehodanus  fluit,  isque  nonnullis  locis  vado  tran- 
situr.  (30)  Extremurn  oppidura  Allobrogum  est,  proximumque 
Helvetiorum  finibus,  Genua.  Ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad  Helvetios  per- 
tinet.  Allobrogibus  sese  vel  persuasuros  (quod  nondum  bono 
animo  in  populura  Romanum  viderentur)  existimabant,  vel  vi  co-  5 
acturos,  ut  per  suos  fines  eos  ire  paterentur.  Omnibus  rebus  ad 
profeetionem  comparatis,  diem  dicunt,  qua  die  ad  ripam  Rliodani 
o nines  conveniant.  Is  dies  erat  a.  d.  v.  Kal.  Apr.,  L.  Pisorie  A. 
Gabinio  consulibus. 

7.  (31)   Caesari   cum   id  nuntiatum  esset,   eos   per   provinciam  10 
nostram  iter  facere  conari,  maturat  ab  uvbe  proficisci,  et  quam  maxi- 
mis  potest  itineribus  in  Galliam  ulteriorem  contendit,  et  ad  Genuam 
pervenit.     Provincias  toti  quam  maximum  potest  militum  numerum 
imperat  —  erat  omnino  in   Gallia  nlteriore  legio  una  ;  pontem.  qui 
erat  ad  Genuam,  jubet  rescind!.     (32)  Ubi  de  ejus  adventu  Helvetii  15 
certiores  facti  snnt,  legatos  ad  eum  inittunt,  nobilissimos  civitatis, 
cujus  legationis  Nammeius  et  Verudoctius  principem  locum  obtine- 
bant,  qui  dicerent  '  sibi  esse  in  animo  sine  ullo  maleficio  iter  per  pro- 
vinciam facere,  propterea  quod  aliud  iter  haberent  riullum  :   rogare, 
ut  ejus  voluntate  id  sibi  facere  liceat.'      (33)  Caesar,  quod  memoria  20 
tenebat  L.  Cassium  consulem  occisum,  exercitumque  ejus  ab  Hel- 
vetiis  pulsum  et  sub  jugura  missum,  concedendum  non  putabat ; 
neque  homines  inimico  auimo,  data  facilitate  per  provinciam  itineris 
faciundi,  temperaturos  ab  iujuria  et  maleficio  existimabat.     Tamen, 
ut  spatium  intercedere  posset,  dum  milites  quos  imperaverat  con-  25 
venirent,  legatis  respondit  diem  se  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum ;  si 
quid  vellent,  ad  Id.  Apr.  reverterentur. 

8.  (34)  Interea  ea  legione,  quam  secum  habebat,  militibusque 
qui  ex  provincia  convenerant,  a  lacu  Lemanno,  qui  in  numen  Eho- 
danum  influit,  ad   montem  Jnram,  qui  fines  Sequanorum  ab  Hel-  30 
vetiis  dividit,  milia  passuum  decem  novem,  murum  in  altitudinem 
pedum  sedecim,  fossamque  perducit.     Eo  opere  perfecto,  praesidia 
disponit,  castella  commmiit,  quo  facilius,  si  se  invito  transire  cona- 
rentur,  prohibere  possit.     (35)  Ubi  ea  dies  quam  constituerat  cum 
legatis  venit,  et  legati  ad  eum  reverterunt,  negat  se  more  et  exemplo  35 
populi  Romani  posse  iter  ulli  per  provinciam  dare  ;  et,  si  vim  facere 
conentur,  prohibiturum  ostendit.     Helvetii,  ea  spe  dejecti,  navibus 
junetis   ratibusque   compluribus    factis,    alii   vadis    Ehodani,    qua 


260  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

minima  altitudo  flumiuis  erat,  nonnunquam  interdiu,  saepius  noctu, 
si  perrumpere  possent  conati,  operis  niunitione  et  militum  concursu 
et  telis  repulsi,  hoc  conatu  destiterunt. 

The  Helvetii  obtain,  permission  to  go  out  by  the  only  remaining  way,  — 
that  through  the  country  of  the  Sequani. 

9,  (36)  Relinquebatur  una  per  Sequanos  via,  qua,  Sequanis  iuvitis, 
5  propter  angustias    ire   non   poterant.      His  cam   sua   sponte  per- 

suadere  non  possent,  legates  ad  Dumnorigera  Haeduum  mittuut,  ut 
eo  deprecatore  a  Sequanis  iuipetrareut.  Dumnorix  gratia  et  largi- 
tione  apud  Sequanos  plurimuin  poterat,  et  Helvetiis  erat  amicus, 
quod  ex  ea  civitate  Orgetorigis  filiam  in  inatrimouiuui  duxerat;  et 

10  cupiditate  regrii  adductus  novis  rebus  studebat,  et  qiiam  plurimas 
civitates  suo  beneficio  habere  obstrietas  volebat.  (37)  Itaque  rem 
suscipit,  et  a  Sequanis  impetrat  ut  per  tines  suos  Helvetios  ire 
patiantur,  obsidesque  uti  inter  sese  dent  perficit :  Sequani,  ne 
itinere  Helvetios  prohibeant ;  Helvetii,  ut  sine  maleficio  et  injuria 

15  trail  scant. 

Cccsar  again  objects,  and  quickly  brings  up  his  legions. 

10.  Oaesari  renuntiatur   Helvetiis   esse  in  animo  per  agruni  Se- 
quunorum  et  Hieduorum  iter  in  Santonum  fines  facere,  qni  non  longe 
a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt,  quse  civitas  est  in  Provincia.     (38)  Id 
si  tieret,  iutellegebat  mag-no  cum   periculo   provinciae  futurum,  ut 

20  homines  bellicosos,  populi  Romaui  inimicos,  locis  patentibus  maxi- 
meque  frumentariis  finitimos  haberet.  Ob  eas  causas,  ei  munition! 
quain  fecerat  T.  Labienum  legatum  praefecit ;  ipse  in  Italiam 
magnis  itineribus  contend  it,  duasque  ibi  legiones  conscribit,  et  tres, 
quue  circum  Aquileiam  liiemabant,  ex  hibernis  educit,  et,  qua  proxi- 

25  mum  iter  in  ulteriorem  Galliam  per  Alpes  erat,  cum  his  quinque 
legionibus  ire  contendit.  (39)  Ibi  Centrones  et  Graioceli  et 
Caturig-es,  locis  superioribus  occupatis,  iti-nere  exercitum  prohibere 
conantur.  Compluribus  his  pra^liis  pulsis,  ab  Ocelo,  quod  est 
citerioris  provincise  extremum,  in  fines  Vocontiorum  ulterioris 

30  provincijfi  die  septimo  pervenit ;  inde  in  Allobrogura  fines,  ab 
Allobrogibus  in  Segusiavos  exercitum  ducit.  Hi  sunt  extra  pro- 
viuciam  trans  Rhodanum  priini. 


THE   HELVETIAN   WAR.  261 


Ccesar  aroused  by  the  entreaties  of  Roman  allies,  whose  fields  are  being 
ravaged,  at  once  attacks  and  defeats  a  fourth  part  of  the  llelcetii. 

11.  Helvetii  jam  per  angustias  et  fines  Sequanorum  suas  copias 
trail uxerant,  et   in   Haeduoruni  fines   pervenerant,  eorumque  agros 
populabantur.      (40)  Hawlui,  cum   se  suaque  ab  iis  defendere  non 
possent,  legatos  ad   Caesarem   inittuiit  rogatum  auxiliuin  :  '  Ita   se 
otimi  teinpore  de  populo  Romano  meritos  esse,  ut  pserie  in  conspectu    5 
exercitus  nostri   agri   vastari,    liberi  eorura  in   servitutem    abduci, 
oppida  expugnari   non   debuerint.'     (41)   Eodem   teinpore   Hsedui 
Awbarri,  necessarii  et  consanguine!  Hseduorum,  Cajsarem  certiorem 
faciunt,  sese,  depopulatis  agris,  non  facile  ab  oppidis  vim  hostium 
prohibere.      Item  Allobroges,  qui  trans  Rhodanuin  vicos  possessio-  10 
nesque  habebant,  fuga  se  ad  Csesarem  recipinnt,  et  demonstrant  sibi 
prseter  agri    sol  tun    nibil  esse  reliqui.      Quibus   rebus   adductus, 
Caesar   non    exspectandura    sibi    statuit,    dum,    omnibus   fortunis 
sociorum  consurnptis,  in  Santonos  Helvetii  pervenirent. 

12.  (43)  Flumen  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  Hpeduorum  et  Scqua-  15 
uorum   in   Ehodanum  influit,  incredibili  lenitate,  ita  ut  oculis,  in 
utram   partem  fluat,  judicari  non   possit.     Id   Helvetii  ratibns  ac 
lintribus  junctis  transibant.     Ubi  per  exploratores  Csesar  certior 
factus  est,  tres  jam  partes  copiarum  Helvetios  id  flumen  traduxisse, 
quartam  fere  partem  citra  fiumen  Ararim  reliquam  esse ;  de  tertia  20 
vigilia  cum   legionibus  tribus  e  castris  profectus,  ad  earn  partem 
pervenit,  qu83  nondum  flumen  transierat.     (44)  Eos  impeditos  et 
inopinantes  adgressus,  magnam  partem  eorum  concidit  :  reliqui  sese 
fugse  mandarunt,  atque  in  proximas  silvas  abdiderunt.     Is  pagus 
appellabatur  Tigurinus :   nam  ornnis   civitas  Helvetia  in  quattuor  25 
pagos  divisa  est.      Hie  pagus  unus,  cum  domo  exisset,  patrum  nos- 
trorum  mernoria  L.  Cassium  consulem  interfecerat,  et  ejus  exercitum 
sub  jugum  miserat.    Ita  sive  casu,  sive  consilio  cl eorura  immortalinm, 
quse  pars  civitatis  Helvetia;  insignem  calamitatem  populo  Romano 
intulerat,  ea  princeps  pcenas  persolvit.      (45)  Qua  in  re  Cpesar  non  30 
solum  pnblicas,  sed  etiam   privatas  injurias  ultus   est ;   quod   ejus 
soceri  L.  Pisonis  avurn,  L.  Pisonem  legatum,  Tigurini  eodem  prcelio 
quo  Cassium  interfecerant. 


262  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 


The  Helvetii  proudly  ask  for  peace,  but  refuse  to  accept  the,  terms  of  Ccesar. 

13.  Hoc  prcelio  facto,  reliquas  copias  Helvetiorurn  ut  consequi 
posset,  pontein  in  Arare  faciendum  curat,  atque  ita  exercitum  tradu- 
cit.     Helvetii,  reperitino  ejus  adventu  conmioti,  cum  id  quod  ipsi 
diebus  xx  aegerrume  confecerant,  ut  flumen  transirent,  ilium  uno 

5  die  fecisse  intellegerent,  legatos  ad  cum  mittunt ;  cujus  legationis 
Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  hello  Cassiano  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat. 
(46)  Is  ita  cum  Caesare  egit :  '  Si  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum 
Helvetiis  faceret,  in  earn  partem  ituros  atque  ibi  futures  Helvetios, 
ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisst't  atque  esse  voluisset ;  sin  bello  persequi 

10  perseveraret,  reminisceretur  et  veteris  incomniodi  populi  Romani,  et 
pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum.  (47)  Quod  improvise)  unuin  pagum 
adortus  esset,  cum  ii,  qui  tinmen  transissent,  suis  auxilium  ferre 
non  possent,  ne  ob  earn  rein  aut  sure  magnopere  virtuti  tribueret, 
aut  ipsos  despiceret ;  se  ita  a  patribus  inajoribnsque  suis  didicisse. 

15  ut  magis  virtute  qnam  dolo  contendcrent,  aut  insidiis  niterentur, 
(48)  Quare  ne  committeret,  ut  is  locus,  ubi  constitissent,  ex  calami- 
tate  populi  Romani  et  iriternecione  exercitus  nomen  caperet,  aul 
memoriam  proderet.' 

14.  (49)  His  Caesar  ita  respondit :   '  Eo  sibi  minus  dubitationis 
20  dari,  quod  eas  res,  quas  legati  Helvetii  commemorassent,  memoria 

teneret,  atque  eo  gravius  ferre,  quo  minus  merito  populi  Roman? 
accidissent :  qui  si  alicnjus  injurise  sibi  conscius  fuisset,  non  fuisse 
difficile  cavere  ;  (50)  sed  eo  deceptum,  quod  neque  commissum  a 
se  intellegeret  quare  timeret,  neque  sine  causa  timendum  putaret, 

25  Quod  si  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet,  uum  etiam  recentium 
injuriarum,  quod  eo  invito  iter  per  provinciam  per  vim  temptassent, 
quod  Haeduos,  quod  Ambarros,  quod  Allobrogas  vexassent,  me- 
moriam deponere  posse?  (51)  Quod  sua  victoria  tarn  insolenter 
gloriarentur,  quodque  tarn  diu  se  impune  injurias  tulisse  admira- 

30  rentur,  eodem  pertinere.  Consuesse  enim  deos  immortales,  quo 
gravius  homines  ex  commutatione  rerum  doleant,  qnos  pro  scelere 
eorum  ulcisci  velint,  his  secundiores  interdum  res  et  diuturniorem 
impunitatem  concedere.  (52)  Cum  ea  ita  sint,  tamen  si  obsides 
ab  iis  sibi  dentur,  uti  ea  qune  polliceantur  facturos  intellegat,  et  si 

35  Haeduis  de  injuriis  quas  ipsis  sociisque  eorum  intulerint.  item  si 


THE   HELVETIAN  WAK.  263 

Allobrogibus  satisfaciant,  scse  cum  iis  pacem  esse  facturum.'  Divico 
respondit :  '  Ita  Helvt'tios  a  majoribus  suis  institutes  essc,  uti  ob- 
sides  accipere,  11011  dare  consuerint ;  ejus  rei  populum  Romanum 
esse  testem.'  Hoc  response  dato,  discessit. 

Caesar  continues  to  pursue  the  Heloetii,  who  are  elated  by  a  successful 
skirmish. 

15.  (54)    Postero  die  castra   ex  eo  loco   raovent.      Idem  facit   5 
Caesar,  equitatumque  omnein,  ad  numerum  quattuor  milium,  quem 
ex  omni  proviiicia  et  Haeduis  atque  eorum  sociis  coactutn  habebat, 
pneraittit,  qui  videant  quas  in  partes  hostes  iter  faciant.     Qui,  cupi- 
dius  iiovissiiiiuui  agmen  insecuti,  alieno  loco  cum  cquitatu  Helve- 
tioruin  proalium  committuiit ;  et  pauci  de  nostris  cadunt.    (55)  Quo  10 
proelio  sublati  Helvetii,  quod  quingeiitis   equitibus  tantam  multi- 
tudiriem  equitum  propulerant,  audacius  subsistere  nonnunquam,  et 
novissimo  agmine  proelio  nostros  lacessere  coeperuut.     Caesar  suos 

a  proelio  continebat,  ac  satis  liabebat  in  prsesentia  bostem  rapinis, 
pabulationibus,  populationibusque  prohibere.     Ita  dies  circiter  quin- 15 
decim  iter  fecerunt,  uti  inter  novissimum  liostium  agmen  et  nostrum 
primurn  non  amplius  quinis  aut  senis  milibus  passuum  interesset. 

The  Hadui  fail  to  furnish  supplies  ;  Liscus  tells  why, 

16.  (56)  Interim  cotidie  Caesar  Hreduos  frumentum,  quod  essent 
publice  polliciti.  flagitare.     Nam  propter  frigora,  quod  Gallia  sub 
septentrionibus  (ut  ante  dictum  est)  posita  est,  non  modo  frumenta  20 
in  agris  matura  non  erant,  sed  ne  pabuli  quidem  satis  magna  copia 
suppetebat :  eo  autem  frumento,  quod  fhimine  A  rare  navibus  sub- 
vexerat,  propterea  minus  uti  poterat,  quod  iter  ab  A  rare  Helvetii 
averterant,  a  quibus  discedere  nolebat.    Diem  ex  die  ducere  Hsedui : 
conferri,   comportari,  adesse,  dicere.      (57)  Ubi  se   diutius  duci  25 
intellexit,  et    diem   instare,  quo  die   frumentum    militibus   metiri 
oporteret,  convocatis  eorum  principibus,  quorum  magnam  copiam 
in  castris  habebat, — in  his  Divitiaco  et  Lisco,  qui  summo  magis- 
tratui  praeerat   quem    vergobretum  appellant   Haedui,    qui    creatur 
annuus,  et  vitaa  necisque  in  suos  habet  potestatem,  —  graviter  eos  30 
accusat,  quod,  cum  neque  emi  neque   ex  agris  sumi   posset,  tarn 


264  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

necessario  terapore,  tarn  propinquis  hostibus,  ab  iis  11011  sublevetur ; 
prsesertim  cum  inagua  ex  parte  eorum  precibus  adductus  bellum 
susceperit,  multo  etiam  gravius  quod  sit  destitutus  queritur. 

17.  (58)  Turn  demum  Liscus,  oratioue  Csesaris  adductus,  quod 
5  antea  tacuerat  proponit  :    '  Esse  iioiuiullos,  quorum  auctoritas  apud 

plebem  plurimum  valeat,  qui  privatim  plus  possint  quam  ipsi 
magistratus.  Hos  seditiosa  atque  improba  oratioue  iimltitudinem 
deterrere,  ne  fruinentum  couferaut,  quod  prsestare  debeaiit :  si  jam 
priucipatum  Gulliae  obtinere  non  possint,  Gallorum  quam  Rorna- 

10  uorum  imperia  prneterre ;  (59)  ueque  dubitare  [debeant]  quin,  si  Hel- 
vetios  superaveriut  Romani,  uua  cum  reliqua  Gallia  Hseduis  liberta- 
tem  siiit  erepturi.  Ab  eisdcin  uostra  consilia,  quzeque  in  castris 
gerantur,  hostibus  enuntiuri ;  hos  a  se  coerceri  non  posse.  Quiu 
etiam,  quod  necessario  rein  coactus  Caesari  euuntiarit,  intellegere 

15  sese  quanto  id  cum  periculo  fecerit,  ct  ob  earn  causam,  quam  diu 
potuerit,  tacuisse.' 

Dumnorix,  the  Hfsduan  noble;  his  influence  and  his  hate  of  the  Romans. 

18.  (60)  Caesar  hac  oratioue  Lisci  Pumnorigem,  Pivitiaci  fra- 
trem,  designari  seutiubat ;  sed,  quod  pluribus  prsesentibus  eas  res 
jactari  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit,  Liscum  retinet.     Quaerit 

20  ex  solo  ea  qure  in  conventu  dixerat.  Dicit  liberius  atque  audacius. 
Eadem  secreto  ab  aliis  quaerit ;  reperit  csse  vera :  '  Ipsum  esse 
Dumnorigem,  summa  audacia,  magua  apud  plebem  propter  liberali- 
tatem  gratia,  cupidum  rerurn  novarura.  Complures  annos  portoria 
reliquaque  oinnia  Haed uorum  vectigalia  parvo  pretio  redempta 

25  habere,  propterea  quod  illo  licente  contra  liceri  audeat  nemo. 
(61)  His  rebus  et  suam  rein  familiarcm  auxisse,  et  facilitates  ad 
largiendum  inagnas  comparasse;  magnum  numerum  equitatus  suo 
sumptu  semper  alere  et  circum  se  habere,  ueqne  sohmi  dorai,  sed 
etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates  largiter  posse  ;  atque  hujus  potentiae 

30  causa  matrem  in  Biturigibus  hornini  illic  nobilissimoac  potentissimo 
collocasse,  ipsum  ex  Helvetiis  uxorem  habere,  sororem  ex  matre  et 
propinquas  suas  nuptum  in  alias  civitates  collocasse.  (62)  Favere 
et  cupere  Helvetiis  propter  earn  adfinitatem,  odisse  etiam  suo  nomine 
Caesarem  et  Romanes,  quod  eorum  adventu  potentia  eju^  deminuta, 

35  et  Divitiacus  frater  in  antiquum  locum  gratiae  atque  honoris  sit 


THE  HELVETIAN   WAR.  266 

restitutus.  Si  quid  accidat  Romania,  suramam  in  spem  per  Helvetios 
regni  obtinendi  venire ;  iinperio  populi  Romani  11011  inodo  de  regno, 
sed  etiam  de  ea  quaiu  liabeat  gratia,  desperare.'  (63)  Reperiebat 
etiam  in  quserendo  Csesar,  quod  proeliuui  equestre  adversum  paucis 
ante  diebus  esset  factum,  initium  ejus  i'ugae  factum  a  Dumnorige  5 
atque  ejus  equitibus, —  nam  equitatui,  quern  auxilio  Csesari  Haedui 
miserant,  Duinnorix  prseerat :  eorum  fuga  reliquum  esse  equitatum 
perterritum. 

Ccesar  spares  Dumnorix  out  of  friendship  for  his  brother  Diviliacus, 
Dumnorix  is  reprimanded  and  icatched. 

19.  (64)  Quibus  rebus  cognitis,  cum  ad  has  suspitiones  certis- 
simse  res  accederent,  —  quod  per  fines  Sequanorum  Helvetios  tra-  10 
duxisset,  quod  obsides  inter  eos  dandos  curasset,  quod  ea  omriia  non 
inodo  injussu  suo  et  civitatis,  sed  etiam  inscientibus  ipsis  fecisset, 
quod   a    magistratu    Hseduorum    accusaretur,  —  satis    esse    caus.e 
arbitrabatur,  quare  in  eum  aut  ipse  animadvertcret,  aut  civitatem 
animadvertere  juberet.      (65)  His  omnibus  rebus  unum  repugnabat,  i, 
quod  Divitiaci   fratris   suinmum   in   populum   Eomanum  studium, 
suinmam  in  se  voluntatem,  egregiara  fidem,  jnstitiain,  temperaritiam 
cognoverat :    nam  ne    ejus   supplicio    Divitiaci  animnm   offenderet 
verebatur.     Itaque  prius  quam  quicquam  conaretnr,  Divitiacum  ad 
se  vocari  jubet,  et  qnotidianis  interpivtibus  remotis,  per  C.  Valerium  20 
Procillum,  principem  Galli?e  provincise,  familiarem  suum,  cui  sum- 
mam  omnium   rerum  fidem   habebat,   cum   eo   colloquitur;    simul 
commonefacit  qu;c  ipso  prsesente   in  concilio  Gallorum  de  Dum- 
norige sint  dicta;   (66)  et  ostendit  qure  separatim  quisque  de  eo 
apud  se  dixerit ;  petit  atque  hortatur,  ut  sine  ejus  oft'ensione  animi  25 
vel  ipse  de  eo  causa  cognita  statuat,  vel  civitatem  statuere  jubeat. 

20.  Divitiacus,    multis   cum  lacrimis  Csesarem   complexus,   ob- 
secrare  coepit,  ne  quid  gravius  in  fratrem  statueret :   '  Scire  se  ilia 
esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex  oo  plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  pro- 
pterea   quod,   cum  ipse  gratia   plurimurn    domi    atque   in    reliqua  30 
Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter  adulescentiara  posset,  per  se  crevisset; 
(67)  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam, 
sed  pasne  ad  perniciem  suam  uteretur;  sesetamen  et  amore  fraterno 

et   existimatione  vulgi    commoveri.      Quod   si    quid  ei  a  Caesare 


266  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

gravius  accidisset,  cum  ipse  eum  locum  amicitise  apud  eum  teneret, 
neminem  existimaturum  non  sua  voluntate  factuin ;  qua  ex  re 
futurum,  uti  totius  Gallic  animi  a  se  averterentur.'  (68)  Haec  cum 
pluribus  verbis  flens  a  Caesare  peteret,  Caesar  ejus  dextram  prendit; 
5  consolatus  rogat,  finein  orandi  faciat ;  tanti  ejus  apud  se  gratiam 
esse  ostendit,  uti  et  reipublicae  injuriam  et  suum  dolorem  ejus  vol- 
untati  ac  precibus  condonet.  Dumnorigem  ad  se  vocat,  fratrem 
adhibet ;  quae  in  eo  repreheudat,  ostendit,  quae  ipse  intellegat,  quae 
civitas  queratur,  proponit  ;  nionet  ut  in  reliquutn  tempus  omnes 
10  suspitiones  vitet ;  praeterita  se  Divitiaco  fratri  condonare  dicit. 
DLiinuorigi  custodes  ponit,  ut  quae  agat,  quibuscum  loquatur,  scire 
possit.1 


plans  to  attack  the  enemy  in  front  and  rear  ;  his  plan  ix  defeated 
by  the  mistake  of  Considius. 

21.  Eodem  die  ab  exploratoribus  certior  faotus  hostes  sub  monte 
cousedisse  milia  passuum  ab  ipsius  castris  octo,  qualis  esset  natura 

15  montis  et  qualis  in  circuitu  ascensus,  qui  cognoscerent  inisit. 
Renuntiatum  est  facileiu  esse.  De  tertia  vigilia  T.  Labiemun, 
legatum  pro  praetore,  eum  duabus  legionibus  et  iis  ducibus  qui  iter 
cognoverant,  summum  jnguin  montis  asceudere  jubet ;  quid  sui 
consilii  sit  ostendit.  Ipse  de  quarta  vigilia  eodem  itinere,  quo 

20  hostes  ierant,  ad  eos  couteudit,  equitatumque  omnem  ante  se  mittit. 
P.  Considius,  qui  rei  militaris  peritissimus  habebatur,  et  in  exer- 
citu  L.  Sullae  et  postea  in  M.  Crassi  fuerat,  cum  exploratoribus 
prae  mittit ur. 

22.  Prima  luce,  cum  summus  mons  a  Labieno  teneretur,  ipse  ab 
25  hostium  castris  non  longius  mille  et  quingentis  passibus  abesset, 

neque,  ut  postea  ex  captivis  comperit,  aut  ipsius  adventus  ant 
Labieni  cognitus  esset,  Considius  equo  admisso  ad  eum  accurrit ; 
dicit  montem,  quein  a  Labieno  occupari  voluerit,  ab  hostibus  teneri ; 
id  se  a  Gallicis  armis  atque  insignibus  cognovisse.  Caesar  suas 
30  copias  in  proximum  collem  subducit,  aciem  instruit.  Labienus,  ut 
erat  ei  praeceptutn  a  Caesare,  ne  prcelium  committeret,  nisi  ipsius 

1  The  Lessons  cease  at  this  point.     Notes  on  the  following  Chapters  will 
be  found  in  Appendix  B,  and  all  new  words  in  the  General  Vocabulary. 


THE  HELVETIAN  WAR.  267 

copise  prope  liostium  castra  visre  essent,  ut  undique  uno  tempore  in 
hostes  impetus  fieret,  monte  occupato  nostros  exspectabat,  proe- 
lioque  abstinebat.  Multo  denique  die  per  exploratores  Caesar 
cognovit  et  inontem  a  suis  teneri,  et  Helvetios  castra  movisse,  et 
Considiura,  timore  perterritum,  quod  TIOII  vidisset  pro  viso  sibi  5 
renuntiasse.  Eo  die,  quo  cousuerat  intervallo,  hostes  sequitur,  et 
milia  passuum  tria  ab  eorum  castris  castra  pouit. 


The  Romans,  having  turned  aside  to  go  to  Bibracte,  are  followed  by 
the  Heloetii. 

23.  Postridie  ejus  diei,  quod  omnino  biduum  supererat,  rum 
exercitui  frumentum  metiri  oporteret,  et  quod  a  Bibracte,  oppido 
Hieduorum  longe  maximo  et  copiosissimo,  non  amplius  milibus  10 
passuum  xvm  aberat,  rei  fmmentefriae  prospiciendum  existimavit : 
iter  ab  Helvetiis  avertit,  ac  Bibracte  ire  coritendit.  Ea  res  per 
fugitivos  L.  Aeinilii,  decurionis  equitum  Gallorum,  hostibus  nuntia- 
tur.  Helvetii,  sen  quod  timore  perterritos  Romanos  discedere  a  se 
existirnarent,  eo  magis  quod  pridie,  superioribus  locis  occupatis,  15 
proelium  non  commisissent,  sive  eo  quod  re  frumentaria  intercludi 
posse  confiderent,  commutato  corisilio  atque  itinere  converse,  nos- 
tros a  novissimo  agmine  inscqui  ac  lacessere  coeperurit. 


A  pitched  battle  is  fought ;  the  Helnetii  are  utterly  defeated  after  a 
desperate  struggle. 

24.  Postquam  id  animum  advertit,  copias  suas  Csesar  in  proxi- 
mum  collem  subducit,  equitatumque,  qui  sustineret  liostium  impetum,  20 
misit.  Ipse  interim  in  colle  medio  triplicem  aciem  instruxit 
legionum  quattuor  veteranarum  [ita  uti  supra]  ;  sed  in  summo 
jugo  duas  legiones,  quas  in  Gallia  citeriore  proxime  conscripserat 
et  omnia  auxilia  conlocari,  ac  totum  montem  hominibus  compleri, 
et  interea  sarcinas  in  unum  locum  conferri,  et  eum  ab  his  qui  in  25 
superiore  acie  coustiterant  muniri  jussit.  Helvetii  cum  omnibus 
suis  carris  secuti,  impedimenta  in  unum  locum  contulerunt ;  ipsi 
confertissima  acie,  rejecto  nostro  equitatu,  phalange  facta,  sub 
primam  nostram  aciem  successerunt. 


268  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

25.  Caesar  primum  suo,  delude  omnium   ex  conspectu  remotis 
equis,  ut  seqiuto  omnium  periculo  spem  fugae  tolleret,  cohortatus 
suos   proelium   commisit.      Milites  e    loco   snperiore,   pilis   missis, 
facile   liostium   phalangem   perf'regerunt.      Ea   disjecta,   gladiis  de- 

5  strictis  in  eos  impetum  t'ecerunt.  Gallis  magno  ad  pugnam  erat 
impedimento,  quod  pluribus  eoruin  scutis  uuo  ictu  pilorum  trans- 
fixis  et  conligatis,  cii;n  ferrum  s^  inttexisset,  neque  evellere  neque 
sinistra  impedita  sitis  commode  pugnare  poterant,  inulti  ut,  din 
jactato  biMchio,  prdeoptarent  scutum  manu  emittere,  et  nudo  corpora 

10  pugnare.  Tandem  vuln^ribus  det'essi,  et  pedem  referre  et,  quod 
mons  suberat  circiter  mille  passuum,  eo  se  recipere  coeperunt. 
Capto  monte  et  succedentibus  nostris,  Boii  et  Tulingi,  qui  hominum 
milibus  circiter  xv  agmen  hostium  claudebant,  et  novissirnis  prae- 
sidio  erant,  ex  itineiv  nostros  latere  aperto  adgressi  circumvenire ; 

15  et  id  conspicati  Helvetii,  qui  in  montem  sese  receperant,  rursus 
instare  et  prrelium  redintegrare  ccepmint.  Romani  conversa  signa 
bipartite  intulerunt  :  prima  et  secunda  acies,  ut  victis  ac  summotis 
resisteret;  tertia,  ut  venientes  sustineret. 

26.  Ita  ancipiti  proelio  din  atque  acriter  pugnatum  est.      Diutius 
20  cum  sustinere  nostrorum  impetus  non  possent,  alteri  se,  ut  coepe- 

rant,  in  montem  receperunt,  alteri  ad  impedimenta  et  carros  suos  se 
contulenmt.  Nam  hoc  toto  proelio,  cum  ab  hora  septima  ad  ves- 
perum  pugnatum  sit,  aversum  hostem  videre  nemo  pouiit.  Ad 
multam  noctein  etiam  ad  impedimenta  pugnatum  est,  propterea 

25  quod  pro  vallo  carros  objecerant,  et  e  loco  superiore  in  nostros 
venientes  tela  coniciebant,  et  no:inulli  inter  carros  rotisi^ue  mataras 
ac  tragulas  subiciebint,  nostrosque  vulnerabant.  Diu  cum  esset 
pugnatum,  impediments  castriscpie  nostri  potiti  sunt.  Ibi  Orge- 
torigis  filia  atque  umis  e  filiis  captus  est.  Ex  eo  proelio  circiter 

30  hominum  milia  cxxx  superfuerunt,  eaqne  tota  nocte  continenter 
ierunt  :  nullam  partem  noctis  itinere  intermisso,  in  fines  Lingonum 
die  quarto  pervenerunt,  cum  et  propter  vulnera  militum,  et  propter 
sepulturam  occisorum,  nostri  triduum  morati  eos  sequi  non  potuis- 
sent.  Caasar  ad  Lingonas  litteras  nuntiosque  misit,  ne  eos  frumento 

35  neve  alia  re  juvarent :  qui  si  juvissent,  se  eodem  loco  quo  Hel- 
vetios  habiturum.  Ipse,  triduo  intermisso,  cum  omnibus  copiis 
eos  sequi  coepit. 


THE   HELVETIAN   WAR.  269 


The  Heloetii  surrender  ;   Gcesar  sends  them  back  home,  to  keep  out  the 
Germans. 

27.  Helvetii,  omnium  rerum  iuopia  adducti,  legatos  de  deditione 
ad  eum  miserunt.     Qui  cum  eum  in  itinere  convenissent,  seque  ad 
pedes    projecissent,   suppliciterque    locuti  flentes    pacein   petissent, 
atque  eos   in   eo  loco,  quo  turn  essent,  suum  adventum  exspectare 
jussisset,  paruerunt.     Eo  postquam  Caesar  pervenit,  obsides,  anna,    5 
servos,  qui  ad  eos  perfugissent,  poposcit.     Dum  ea  coiiquiruntur  et 
conferuntur,  nocte  intermissa,  eirciter  hominum  milia  vi  ejus  pagi 
qui   Verbigenus  appellatur,  sive  tiinore  perterriti,  ne  armis  traditis 
supplicio  adh'cerentur,  sive  spe  salutis  inducti,  quod  in  tanta  inulti- 
tudine  dediticiorum  suam  fug-am  aut  occultari  aut  omnino  ignorari  10 
posse  existimareut,  priiua  nocte  e  castris  Helvetiorum  egressi,  ad 
Rherium  h'uesque  Germanorum  contenderunt. 

28.  Quod  ubi  Caesar   resciit,  quorum  per  fines  ierant,  his,  uti 
conquirerent  et  reducerent,  si  sibi  purgati  esse  vellent,  imperavit  : 
reductos  in   hostium   nuinero   liabuit  ;   reliquos  omues,   obsidibus,  15 
armis,  perfugis  traditis,  in  deditioiiem  accepit.     Helvetios,  Tulingos, 
Latobrigos    in   fines   suos,  unde   erant  profecti,   reverti  jussit  ;    et 
quod,  omnibus  fructibus  amissis,  domi  nihil  erat  quo  famem  tolera- 
rent,  Allobrogibus  imperavit.  ut  iis  fnunenti  copiam  facerent ;  ipsos 
oppida  vicosque,  quos  inoenderant,  restituere  jussit.     Id  ea  maxime  20 
ratione  fecit,  quod  no! nit   eum  locum,  unde  Helvetii   discesserant, 
vacare,  ne  propter  bonitatem  ngrorum   Germani,  qui  trans  Rbenum 
incolunt,  e  suis  finibus  in  Helvetiorum  fines  transirent,  et  finitimi 
Galliae  provincire  Allobrogibusqne  essent.     Boios,  potentibus  Hse- 
duis,  quod  egregia  virtute  erant  cogriiti,  ut  in  finibus  suis  collo- 25 
carent,   concessit ;   quibus   illi  agros   dederunt,   quosqne   postea   in 
parern  juris  libertatisque  condicionem  atque  ipsi  erant  receperunt. 


The  numbers  of  the  Helvetian  host. 

29.    In  castris  Helvetiorum  tabulae  repertae  sunt  litteris  Grascis 
confectse  et  ad  Csesarem  relatRe,  quibus  in  tabulis  nominatim  ratio 
confecta  erat,   qui  numerus  domo   exisset  eorum   qui   arma   ferre  30 
possent,   et   item    separatim    pueri,   seues    mulieresque.      Quarum 


270  INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 

omnium  rerum  summa  erat  capitum  Helvetiorum  milia  CCLXIII, 
Tulingorum  milia  xxxvr,  Latobrigoruin  xnu,  Hauracorum  xxni, 
Boiorum  xxxri;  ex  his  qui  anna  ferre  possent,  ad  milia  xcn. 
Summa  omnium  fuerunt  ad  milia  CCCLXVIII.  Eorum  qui  doinum 
5  retlierunt,  censu  habito,  ut  Caesar  imperaverat,  repertus  est  numerus 
milium  c  et  x. 


WORD  FOR  WORD  TRANSLATION  OF  B.  G.  I.  1-4  IN  THE 
ORDER  OF  THE  ORIGINAL. 

NOTE.  —  The  figures  within  parentheses  indicate  the  Lessons  of  this  book  in 
which  the  text,  corresponding  to  this  translation,  is  treated. 

1.  (1)  Gaul  is  as-a-\vhole  divided  into  parts  three;  (2)  of-wliich 
one   inhabit    the-Belgse,    another   the-Aquitarii,    (3)    the-third    (part 
those  inhabit)  who  of-themselves  in-the-language  Kelts,  in-ours  Gauls, 
are-called.     (4)  These  all   in-language,  customs,  laws,  among  them- 
selves differ.     (5)  The  Gauls  from  the  Aquitani  the  Garumna  river, 
from  the  Belgse  the  Matrona  and  the  Seine  divide(s).     (6)  Of  these 
(of)  all  the  bravest  are  the  Belggp,  on-account-of-this  because  from  the 
civilization  and  also    the   refinement    of-the-province  very  far   they- 
are-distant,  (7)  least  also    to   them    merchants    often   go-to-and-fro, 
and  those  (things)   which  to  enervate  minds  tend   (they)  bring  in ; 
(8)  nearest   also   they  are   to-the-Germans,  who   across    the    Rhine 
dwell,    with    whom    continually    war   they-wage.      (9)    Which   from 
cause  the  Helvetii  also  the-rest-of  the  Gauls  in-valor  surpass,  because 
almost  (in)  daily  battles  with  the  Germans  they-contend,  when  either 
from  their-own  boundaries   them  they-keep-away,  or  themselves  in 
their  boundaries  war  wage.     (10)  Of-these  one  part,  which  the  Gauls 
to-hold  it  has  been  said,  beginning  takes  from  the  river  Rhone ;  it-is- 
bounded  by-the-Garumna  river,  by-the-ocean,  by-the-territory  of-the- 
Belgae ;  it-reaches  also  on-the-side-of  the  Sequani  and  the  Helvetii  the 
river  Rhine;  it-slopes  toward  the  north.     (11)  The  Belgse  from  the 
remotest  of-Gaul  boundaries  take-their-rise,  they-extend  to  the  lower 
part  of-the-river  Rhine,  they-look  into  the  north  and  the  rising  sun. 
Aquitania  from  the  Garumna  river  to  the  Pyrenean  mountains  and 
that  part  of-the-ocean  which  is  near  Spain  extends,  it-looks  between 
the  setting  of-the-stin  and  the  north. 

2.  (13)  Among  the  Helvetii  by-far  the  highest-born  was  and  the 
richest  Orgetorix.      He,  Marcus  Messala  and  Marcus  Piso  (being) 


272  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

consuls,  of  the  royal-power  by  a  desire  being-led,  a  conspiracy  of  the 
nobility  made,  and  upon-the-citizens  prevailed  that  from  territory  their 
with  all  forces  tliey-might-go-out :  (14)  very-easy  to  be,  since  in 
valor  all  they  stood -before,  of  entire  Gaul  the  supreme-power  to  ob- 
tain. This  on-this-account  more  easily  to-thein  he  persuaded,  because 
on-all-sides  of  the  place  by  the  nature  the  Helvetii  are-hem med-in  : 
(15)  one  on  side  by  the  river  Rhine  very-broad  and  very-deep,  which 
the  country  Helvetian  from  the  Germans  divides  ;  the  second  on  side 
by  the  mountain  Jura  very-high,  which  is  between  the  Sequarii  and 
the  Helvetii  ;  on  the  thirll  (side)  by  the  lake  Geneva  and  by  the  river 
Rhone,  which  province  our  from  the  Helvetii  divides.  (16)  On 
account  of  these  things  it-came-to-pass  that  both  less  widely  they 
wandered  and  less  easily  (upon  their)  neighbors  war  to  bear-in  they 
were  able ;  which  in  respect  men  of  warring  fond  with  great  grief 
were-atfected.  (17)  In-proportion-to  the-great-n umber  moreover  of 
men,  and  in-proportion-to  the  glory  of  war  and  of  bravery,  narrow 
themselves  territory  to  have  they  thought,  which  in  (into)  length 
thousands  of  paces  two-hundred  and  forty,  in  (into)  width  a  hundred 
and  eighty  extended. 

3.  (18)  By  these  things  led,  and  by  the  advice  of  Orgetorix 
deeply-moved,  they  determined  t hose-things  which  to  departure  per- 
tained to  prepare,  of  beasts-of-burden  and  of  carts  as-much-as  the 
greatest  number  to  buy-up,  sowings  as-much-as  the  greatest  to  make,  in- 
order-that  on  the  journey  plenty  of  grain  might-be-on-hand,  (19)  with 
the  nearest  states  peace  and  friendship  to  establish.  For  these  things 
to  be  accomplished  two-years  for-them  enough  to  be  they  thought,  for 
the  third  year  the  departure  by  law  they  fix.  For  these  things  to  be 
accomplished  Orgetorix  is  chosen.  This  man  (upon)  himself  an 
embassy  to  the  states  took.  (20)  In  this  journey  he  persuades 
Casticus,  of  Catamantaloedes  son,  a  Sequanian,  whose  father  the  kingly- 
power  among  the  Sequani  many  years  had-held,  and  by  the  senate  of 
the  people  Roman  friend  had  been  called,  that  the  kingly-power  in 
state  his  he  seize,  which  (his)  father  before  had  had;  (21)  and  also 
Dumnorix  the  Haeduan,  brother  of  Divitiacus,  who  at  that  time  the- 
chief-place  in  the  state  was  holding  and  especially  to  the  common- 
people  acceptable  was,  that  the  same  (thing)  he  try  he  persuades,  and 
to-him  daughter  his  in  (into)  marriage  he  gives.  (22)  Very-easy  to 
do  it  is  (to  be)  to-them  he  proves  undertakings  to  accomplish,  (on- 


WORD   FOR   WORD   TRANSLATION.  273 

account-of-this)  because  he-himself  of  his-own  state  the  government 
about-to-hold  was  :  not  it  is  (to  be)  doubtful  that  of  the-vvhole-of 
Gaul  most  the  Helvetii  could;  (23)  he-himself  with  his  forces  and 
with  his  army  for  them  the  kingdoms  about-to-win  (is)  he  affirms. 
By  this  argument  influenced,  among  themselves  a  pledge  and  an  oatli 
they  give,  and,  the  kingly-power  havirig-been-seized,  through  three 
very-powerful  and  very-strong  peoples  of  entire  Gaul  themselves 
to-be-masters  to  be  able  they  hope. 

4.  (24)   This    conspiracy    (thing)    is  to-the-Helvetii   through    in- 
formers    (information)     made-known.        In-accordance-with-customs 
their,  Orgetorix  out-of  chains  (his)   cause  to  plead  they  compelled. 
Condemned  the  punishment  to  follow  it-was-fitting,  (namely)  that  by 
fire  he  be  burned.      On  the  day  appointed  of  the  cause  for  (of)  the 
pleading,  Orgetorix  to  the  trial  all  his  retinue,  about  (to)  of  men 
thousands  ten,  fro  in-all-sides  collected,  and  all  clients  and  debtors  his, 
of   whom    a   great   number    he    had,  to-the-same-place   he   brought- 
together;  (25)  through  these,  so-that  lie  might  not  (his)  cause  plead, 
himself  he  rescued  (snatched  away).     When  the  state  on-account-of 
this  act  (thing)  roused-up  by  arms  right  its  to  enforce  was  trying,  and 
a  multitude  of  men  out-of  the  fields  the  magistrates  were  collecting, 
Orgetorix  died ;    and  not  absent-is  suspicion,  as  the  Helvetii  think, 
that  he-hiinself  to-himself  death  decreed. 

FREE  TRANSLATION  OF  B.  G.   I.  5-9. 

5.  (27)  After  his  death  the  Helvetii,  nevertheless,  attempt  to  go 
forth  as  they  had  determined  to  do.     When  at  length  they  thought 
they  were  ready  for  this  expedition,  they  set  fire  to  all  their  towns, 
about  twelve  in  number,  to  about  four  hundred   villages  and  to  the 
remaining  private  buildings;  they  burned  up  all  the  corn  except  whalA 
they  were  about  to  carry  with  them,  that,  by  taking  away  the  hope  of 
returning  home,  they  might  be  more  ready  to  encounter  all  perils  ; 
(28)  they  ordered  every  man  to  carry  from  home  for  himself  meal 
enough  for  three  months.     They  persuade  the  Rauraci,  the  Tulingi, 
and  the  Latobrigi,  their  neighbors,  to  adopt  the  same  plan,  burn  up 
all  their  towns  and  villages,  and  set  out  together  with  them;  and  the 
Boii,  who  formerly  lived  across  the  Rhine  arid  had  stormed  Noreia 

18 


274  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

after  crossing  into  the  Noric  territory,  were  received  and  joined  to 
them. 

6.  (29)  There  were  only  two  ways  by  which  they  could  go  out 
from  home  :  one  through  the  country  of  the  Sequani,  narrow  and  diffi- 
cult, between  mount  Jura  and  the  river  Rhone,  where  with  difficulty 
carts  were  drawn  one  by  one ;  moreover,  a  very  high  mountain  was 
overhanging,  so   that  a  very  few   could  easily  keep  them   out :    the 
second  way  through  our  province,  much  more  easy  and  open  because 
between  the  territory  of  the  Ilelvetii  and  the  Allobroges,  the  latter  of 
whom  had  recently  been  subdued,  the  Rhone  flows  and  this  is  crossed 
in  several  places  by  a  ford.     (30)   The  last  town  of  the  Allobroges 
and    the   nearest  town   to  the  territory   of  the   Helvetii  is   Geneva. 
Prom  this  town   a  bridge  extends   to  the  territory  of  the   Helvetii. 
They  thought  they  would  either  persuade  the  Allobroges  (because  they 
did  not  yet  seem  well-disposed  toward  the  Roman  people),  or  would 
compel  them  by  force  to  allow  them  to  go  through  their  territory. 
When  all  things  are  prepared  for  departure,  they  appoint  a  day  for 
all  to  come  together  at  the  bank  of  the  Rhone.     This  day  was  the 
28th  of  March,  in  the  consulship  of  Lucius  Piso  and  Aulus  Gabinms. 

7.  (31)  When  it  was  reported  to  Caesur  that  they  were  trying  to 
make  their  journey  through  our  province,  he  hastened  to  set  out  from 
the  city,  and  by  the  longest  possible  marches  hurried  into  farther  Gtml 
and  arrived  near  Geneva.     He  levies  upon  the  whole  province  as  many 
soldiers  as  he  can  —  there  was,  in  all,  one  legion  in  farther  Gaul  —  and 
orders  the  bridge  which  reached  to  Geneva  to  be  cut  down.     (32)  When 
the  Helvetii  were  informed  of  his  arrival,  they  sent  to  him  as  am- 
bassadors the  highest  born  of  the  state.     Of  this  embassy  Nammeius 
and  Verudoctius  held  the  highest  place.     They  sent  the  ambassadors 
to  say  that  they  intended  to  make  their  journey  through  the  province, 
because  they  had  no  other  way,  and  to  make  it  without  any  wrong- 
doing ;    they  ask  his  permission  to  do  this.      (33)  Cassar,    because 
he  remembered   that  Lucius  Cassius  had  been  killed  and  his  army 
defeated  and  sent  under  the  yoke  by  the  Helvetii,  thought  he  ought 
not  to  grant    this  permission  ;    and  he  did  not  think  that  men  of 
hostile  feelings,  if  the  opportunity  should  he  given  them  of  making 
the  journey  would  refrain  from  harm  and  wrong-doing.     Yet,  in  order 
that  time  might  intervene  for  the  soldiers,  whom  he  had  ordered,  to 


FREE  TRANSLATION.  275 

come  together,  he  replied  to  the  legates  that  he  would  take  time  to 
think  it  over;  they  may  return  on  the  13th  of  April  if  they  want 
anything. 

8.  (34)  In  the  meantime  with  that  legion  which  he  had  with  him 
and  with  the  soldiers  who  had  come  together  out  of  the  province,  he 
built  a  wall   sixteen  feet  high    and   dug  a  ditch   for  nineteen  miles 
from  lake  Geneva  which  flows  into  the  river  Rhone  to  mount  Jura, 
which  divides  the  territory  of  the  Sequani  from  that  of  the  Helvetii. 
After  completing  this  work,  he  places  garrisons  here  and  there  and 
fortifies  redoubts,  so  that  he  can  more  easily  keep  them  out,  if  they 
attempt  to  cross  against  his  will.      (35)  When  that  day  which  he  had 
appointed  with  the  legates  has  come,  and  the  legates  have  returned 
to  him,  he  says  he  cannot,  consistently  with  the  custom  and  precedent 
of  the  Roman  people,  grant  to  any  one  a  way  through  the  province; 
and   he  declares  that  if  they  attempt  to  force  their  way  lie  Avill  keep 
them  out.     The  Helvetii,  disappointed  in  this  hope,  by  joining  boats 
and  rafts  which  they  had  made,  or,  in  some  cases,  by  the  fords  of  the 
Rhone  where  the  depth  of  the  river  was  least,  tried,  sometimes  by  day 
more  frequently  by  night,  to  see  if  they  could  breaj^fi rough  ;   but 
when  they  were  repelled  by  the  fortified  work^iHTa  by  the  running 
together  of  the  soldiers,  they  desisted  from  this  attempt. 

9.  (36)  There  was  left  the  one  way  through   the  country  of  the 
Sequani,  where,  if  the   Sequani  were  unwilling,  they  could  not  go  on 
account  of  the  narrow  pass.     When  they  could  not  persuade  these 
through  their  own  efforts,  they  sent  ambassadors  to  Dumnorix,  the 
Haeduan,  that  by  his  mediation  they  might  obtain  their  request  from 
the   Sequani.      Dumnorix   was    very  influential    among  the   Sequani 
because  of  his  kindness  and   liberality,  and   he  was  a  friend  to  the 
Helvetii  because  he  had  married  the  daughter  of  Orgetorix  from  that 
state ;  influenced  by  the  desire  for  kingly  power  he  favored  revolution, 
and  also  wished  to  have  as  many  states  as  possible  bound  to  him  by 
his  favors.      (37)  Therefore  he  takes  upon  himself  this  commission, 
and  obtains  his  request  from  the  Sequani,  that  they  allow  the  Helvetii 
to  go  through  their  territory  :  and  he  has  them  give  hostages  to  each 
other;  the  Sequani,  that  they  will  not  keep  the  Helvetii  from  their 
journey  ;  the  Helvetii,  that  they  will  cross  without  wrong-doing  and 
harm. 


276 


INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


WORD  FOR  WORD  TRANSLATION  OF  (LESAR,  B.  G.  I.  13, 14. 

13,  This  battle  having-  been  made,  the  remaining  forces  of  the 
Helvetii  in  order  that  to  follow  up  he  might  be  able,  a  bridge  on  the 
Arar  to  be  made  he  cares  for,  and  so  (his)  army  he  leads  across. 
The  Helvetii,  by  sudden  his  arrival  deeply  moved,  when  that  which 
they  themselves  in  twenty  days  with-the-greatest-difficulty  had  done, 
(namely)  that  the  river  they  crossed,  that  man  in  one  day  had  done 
they  knew,  legates  to  him  they  send  ;  of  which  embassy  Divico  chief 
was,  who  in  the  war  Cassian  leader  of  the  Helvetii  had  been.  (46)  This 
man  thus  with  Ciesar  discussed  : 


direct  form. 

"If  peace  the  people  Roman  with 
the  Helvetii  will  make,  into  that 
part  they  will  yo  and  there 
will  be  the  Helvetii,  where 
them  you  shall  hace  placed  and 
to  bs  shall  have  wished ;  but  if 
in  war  to  follow  up  you  shall 
continue,  remember  both 
the  former  misfortune  of  the 
people  Roman  and  Ihe  former 
valor  of  the  Helvetii. 

(4-7)  Because  unexpectedly  one  can- 
ton you  ha }oe a '(lacked,  when  those, 
who  the  river  had  crossed,  to 
their  own  aid  to  bear  not  they 
were  able,  {do}  not  on  account 
of  that  act  (thing)  either  (to) 
your  greatly  valor  ascribe  (it), 
or  us  despise ;  we  so  from 
fathers  and  ancestors  our  have 
learned,  that  more  by  valor  than 
by  craft  we  contend  or  by  am- 
buscades we  strive. 

(48)  Wherefore  (do}  not  allow,  that 
that  place,  where  we  shall  have 
taken  our  stand  from  the  disaster 
of  the  people  Roman  and  the  ex- 
termination of  the  army  a  name 
take,  or  the  memorv  hand  down." 


Quoted  forrii. 

'  If  peace  the  people  Roman  with 
the  Helvetii  would  make,  into  that 
part  they  would  go  and  there 
would  be  the  Helvetii,  where 
them  Ctfsar  should  place  and 
to  be  should  wish ;  but  if 
in  war  to  follow  up  he  should 
continue,  let  him  remember  both 
the  former  misfortune  of  the 
people  Roman  and  the  former 
valor  of  the  Helvetii. 

(47)  Because  unexpectedly  one  can- 
ton he  had  attacked,  when  those, 
who  the   river   had  crossed,  to 
their  own  aid  to  bear  not  they 
were  able,  let  him  not  on  account 
of  that  act  (thing)  either  (to) 
his  own  greatly  valor  ascribe  (it), 
or  them   despise;    they  so  from 
fathers  and  ancestors  their  had 
learned,  that  more  by  valor  than 
by  craft  they  contended  or  by  am- 
buscades they  strove. 

(48)  Wherefore  let  him  not  allow,  that 
that    place   where    they   should 
take  their  stand  from  the  disaster 
of  the  p'eople  Roman  and  the  ex- 
termination of  the  army  a  name 
take,  or  the  memory  hand  down-' 


WORD   FOR  WORD   TRANSLATION. 


277 


14.  (49)  To  these  Csesar  thus  replied  : 


"Oil  this  account  to  me  less  of 
doubt  is  ginen,  because  those 
things  which  you 

have  called  to  mind  by 
the  memory  I  hold,  and  by  this 
the  more  heavily  /  bear  (them) 
by  which  the  less  because  of  the 
desert  of  the  people  Roman  they 
happened-;  who  if  of  any 
wrong  to  themselves  conscious 
had  been,  not  it  was  difficult  to 
be  on  guard  ; 

(50)  but    by   this    thry   were    de- 
ceived, because  neither  (a  thing) 
committed     by   themselves    did 
they  know  wherefore  they  should 
fear,  nor  without  a  cause  (it)  to 
be   feared  was    did  they  think. 
As  to  which   if  of  the    former 
insult,  to  be  unmindful  lam  will- 
ing, also  of  recent  wrongs,  be- 
cause /  {being)  unwilling  a  way 
through    the    province    through 
forcefyo#  have  attempted,  because 
the  Hsedui,  because  the  Ambarri, 
because  the  Allobroges  you  have 
annoyed,  the  memory  to  lay  aside 
am  I  able? 

(51)  Because  in  your  victory  so  in- 
solently you  glory,  and  because 
that  so  long  you  with  impunity 
injuries  have  carried  you  wonder, 
to  the  same    place  tends.     Are 
wont  for  the  gods  immortal,  that 
by  this   more   heavily  the   men 
from    the    change     of    fortune 
(things)  may  sorrow,  whom  on 
account  of  crime  their  to  punish 
they  wish,  to  these  nrore  prosper- 
ous sometimes  fortune  (things) 
and  a  longer  impunity  to  grant. 


'  On  this  account  to  him  less  of 
doubt  wux  yicen,  because  those 
things  which  the  Helvetian  am- 
bassadors had  called  to  mind  by 
the  memory  he  held,  and  by  this 
the  more  heavily  he  bore  (them) 
by  which  the  less^beeause  of  the 
desert  of  the  people  RomanV/^y 
had  happened ;  who  if  of  any 
wrong  to  themselves  conscious 
had  been,  not  it  was  difficult  to 
be  on  guard  ; 

(50)  but   by  this  they  had  been  de- 
ceived, because  neither  (a  thing) 
committed    by    themselves    did 
they  know  wherefore  they  should 
fear,  nor  without  a  cause  (it)  to 
be   feared   was    did   they   think. 
As    to  which    if  of  the   former 
insult  to  be  unmindful  he  was  will- 
ing, also  of  recent  wrongs,  be- 
cause he  (being}  unwilling  a  way 
through    the    province   through 
force  they  had  attempted,  because 
the  Hsedui,  because  the  Ambarri, 
because  the  Allobroges  they  had 
annoyed,  the  memory  to  lay  aside 
was  he  able  ? 

(51)  Because  in  their  victory  so  in- 
solently they  glory,  and  because 
that  so  long  they  with  impunity 
injuries  have  carried  they  wonder, 
to  the  same  place  tends.      Are 
wont  for  the  gods  immortal,  that 
by  this   more    heavily  the   men 
from    the     change     of    fortune 
(things)  may  sorrow,  whom  on 
account  of  crime  their  to  punish 
they  wish,  to  these  more  prosper- 
ous sometimes  fortune  (things) 
and  a  longer  impunity  to  grant. 


278 


INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


(52)  Although  these  things  are  so, 
yet  if  hostages  by  you  to  me 
shall  be  given,  in  order  that  those 
things  which  you,  promise  (you) 
will  do  /  may  know,  and  it'  to 
the  Hsedui  for  the  wrongs  which 
upon  them  and  allies  their  you 
have  inflicted,  also  if  to  th;- 
Allobroges  satisfaction  you  will 
give  (make),  I  with  you,  peace 
will  make." 


(52)  Although  these  things  are  so, 
yet  if  hostages  by  them  to  him 
should  bey icen,  in  order  that  those 
things  which  they  promise  (they) 
will  do  he  may  know,  and  if  to 
the  Haidui  for  the  wrongs  which 
upon  them  and  allies  their  they 
have  inflicted,  also  if  to  the 
Allohroges  satisfaction  they  would 
gice  (make),  he  with  them  peace 
would  make' 


Divico  replied : 


So  the  Helcetii  by  ancestors  their 
haoe  been  taught,  that  hostages 
to  receive,  not  to  give;  they  are 
wont,  of  this  thing  the  people 
Roman  are  witnesses." 


So  the  Heloetii  by  ancestors  their 
hace  been  taught,  that  hostages 
to  receive,  not  to  give  they  are 
wont,  of  this  thing  the  people 
Roman  are  witnesses.' 


This  reply  having  been  given,  he  departed. 


APPENDIX   A. 


METHOD   OF   READING   LATIN. 

THE  teaclier  should  see  to  it  that  the  text  is  mastered  in  the  order  of  the 
original,  and  not  by  finding  first  predicate,  then  subject,  etc.  To  accom- 
plish this,  the  following  method  is  recommended: 

When  Lesson  XIX.  is  reached,  and  before  the  Text  is  studied  at  all,  let  all 
the  class  close  their  books  and  give  exclusive  attention  to  the  teacher.  He 
will  write  upon  the  board  the  first  word  of  the  Text,  constituerunt,  and  a 
colloquy  something  like  what  follows  will  ensue :  "  What  do  you  know 
about  constituerunt?"  Ans.,  "It  is  the  pf.  ind.  act.,  3d  plur.,  and 
means  they  arranged  or  have  arranged,  they  determined  or  hace  determined." 
"  What  may  we  expect  after  it?"  Ans.,  "A  noun  in  the  accus.  case,  or 
an  inf.  as  in  the  preceding  lesson." 

Now  add  the  next  word,  and  the  Text  will  stand : 
constituerunt  cum  .  .  . 

"  What  may  cum  be  ?  "  Ans.,  "  Either  a  prep,  or  a  conj."  "  If  it  is  a 
prep.,  what  may  we  expect  after  it  ?  "  Ans.,  "  An  abl. ;  cf.  cum  omni- 
bus copiis  XIII."  "If  a  conj  ,  what?"  Ans.,  "The  ind.  or  snbj.;  cf. 
cum  prohibent  IX..  cum  praestareiit  XIV. 

constituerunt  cum  proximis  .   .   . 

"  What  possibilities  for  proximis  ?  "  Ans.,  "  Dat.  or  abl.  plur. ;  prob- 
ably an  adj.,  but  perhaps  a  noun  ;  cf.  omnibus  XIV.,  finitimis  XVI.  " 

constituerunt  cum  proximis  civitatibus  .  .  . 

"  What  possibilities  for  civitatibus?"  Ans.,  "Dat.  or  abl.  plur." 
"What  construction  for  proximis  is  probable?"  Ans.,  "Adj.  limiting 
civitatibus."  "If  civitatibus  is  an  abl.,  will  it  certainly  show  that 
cum  is  a  prep.  ?*  Ans.,  "  No  ;  cf.  cum  virtute  XIV.,  where  cum  is  a 
conj.,  and  virtute  an  abl.  of  respect,  which  does  not  admit  a  prep." 

1  In  the  first  book  of  Cresar's  Gallic  War,  the  conj.  cum  is  immediately  followed,  in  the 
order  of  the  text,  eight  times  by  an  abl.  which  might  be  an  abl.  governed  by  a  prep.  The 
lesson  of  this  fact  for  the  beginner  is :  Be  cautious,  and  wait  for  the  Latin  to  develop  its  own 
meaning. 


280  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

constituerunt  cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  .  .  . 

"  What  are  the  possibilities  for  pacem  ?  "  Ans.,  "  It  is  an  accus.  sing, 
and  may  be  the  obj.  of  a  verb,  cf.  numerum  XV  III. ;  the  subj.  of  an  inf., 
cf.  Gallos  X. ;  the  pred.  of  an  inf.,  cf.  perfacile  XIV.  ;  or  an  apposi- 
tive,  cf.  Rhenum  X."  "  May  it  be  the  obj.  of  constituerunt  ?  "  Ans., 
"  Yes."  "  Arc  we  sure  that  it  is  !J  "  Ans.,  "  No." 

amicitiam,  which  follows,  after  et,  lias  the  same  possibilities  as  pacem. 

constituerunt    cum    proximis    civitatibus    pacem    et    amicitiam 
confirmare. 

Here  the  sentence  ends.  "  How  may  we  now  determine  the  force  of 
cum  ?  "  Ans.,  "  It  must  be  a  prep.,  as  no  ind.  or  subjv.  —  one  of  which 
modes  is  necessary  after  the  conj.  cum  —  is  now  possible  in  this  sentence.5' 
"May  pacem  et  amicitiam  be  the  obj.  of  constituerunt?"  Ans., 
"  No,  for  that  would  complete  the  sentence  without  bringing  in  confir- 
mare at  all."  "May  pacem  et  amicitiam  be  the  subj.  of  confir- 
mare ?  "  Ans.,  "  No,  for  the  verb  confirmare  requires  an  obj.,  and  the 
use  of  these  nouns  as  subj.  would  leave  it  without  any."  "  What,  then, 
is  the  construction  of  confirmare?"  Ans.,  "It  is  the  complementary 
inf.  after  constituerunt,  with  pacem  et  amicitiam  as  its  objects." 

This  method  should  be  continued  through  this  Lesson  and  through  every 
Lesson  for  several  weeks.  It  is  slow  at  first,  but  will  rapidly  grow  easier, 
and  will  secure  alertness  of  thought  and  a  ready  command  of  the  language. 
Occasionally  written  exercises  should  be  substituted  for  the  oral,  to  test 
the  progress  of  the  class,  and  constant  translation  by  hearing  as  well  as 
sight  should  be  required.  The  Notes  of  these  Lessons  will  be  adapted  to 
this  method.  The  writer  is  very  greatly  indebted  1o  Professor  W.  G.  Hale, 
of  Cornell  University,  who  has  explained  the  method  very  fully  in  a  little 
pamphlet  called  "  The  Art  of  Reading  Latin,"  published  by  Ginn  &  Co., 
Boston.  Every  Latin  teacher  should  read  it. 


APPENDIX  B. 

Notes  on  B.  G.  I.  21-29. 

CHAPTER  21. 

certior  factus  .  .  .  consedisse  ;  cf.  certior  factus  traduxisse 
XLIII.  —  milia  ;  XVII.  N.  7  (ti)  —  misit ;  its  obj.  understood  would  be 
some  such  word  as  milites  ;  this  obj.  is  the  antec.  of  qui,  and  qui  cog- 
nSscerent  expresses  purpose;  the  clauses  quails  esset  natura  and 
qualis  (esset)  ascensus  are  indir.  questions  and  the  obj.  of  cognosce- 
rent ;  cf.  XLIII.  N.  2  (V)  ;  qualis  is  an  interrogative  adj.,  not  an  adv. 
With  what  does  it  agree  ?  —  facilem  ;  limits  ascensum  understood.  — 
de  tertia  vigilia;  cf.  XLIII.  Vocab.  —  ducibus  ;*n  apposition  witli  iis. 
cognoverant;  for  form  and  meaning,  cf.  cognoscerent  above,  LXVI. 
N.  8,  Obs  2,  and  LXIV.  Vocab. — jugum  -.  strictly  a  yoke,  but  here  a 
{yoke-shaped)  ridge  —  ascendere  ;  cf.  ascensus  above,  and  LX.  N.  5. 
—  sit;  the  preceding  quid  is  a  substantive  interrogative  pron.  ;  cf.  the 
adj.  pron.  qui  LIV.  v.  6  (V)  ;  quid  is  declined  like  the  indefinite  quis ; 
see  A.  &  G.  104.  II .  188,  I.  ;  consilii  is  a  predicate  gen.,  what  is  of  his 
plan,  what  belonrjs  to  his  plan,  what  his  plan  is  ;  cf.  tanti  LXVTII.  and  A. 
&  G.  214,  c.  H.  401;  explain  mode  and  tense  of  sit.  — ierant,  for  ive- 
rant,  from  ire.  — habebatur;  for  meaning,  cf.  LV.  N.  7  (ft) ;  peritissi- 
mus  ;  rei  mllitaris  depends  upon  it,  very  experienced  of  military  science, 
where  we  should  say  in  Eng.  very  experienced  in  military  science  ;  see  A.  & 
G.  218,  a.  H.  399,  I.  2.  —  Sullae  ;  nom.  Sulla,  though  a  masculine 
noun ;  cf.  III.  N.  5.  —  Crass!  depends  on  exercitu,  supplied  from  what 
goes  before ;  see  II.  398,  1  and  N.  1. 


CHAPTER  22. 

luce  ;  for  form  of  nom.  cf.  XVIII.  N.  2,  Obs.  2 ;  for  const,  cf.  XXI.  N. 
2.  — summus  mons,  the  top  of  the  mountain,  not  the  highest  mountain  ; 
cf.  IX.  N.  5  (/;) .  —  passibus ;  for  const.,  cf.  LV.  N.  10  (c) ;  limited  by 
preceding  mille,  which  is  here  an  indecl.  adj. ;  see  A.  &  G.  94,  e.  H.  178. 


282  INDUCTIVE  LATIN  METHOD. 

—  Labieni ;  cf.  CrassI,  Chap.  21.     What  pron.  is  used  in  such  cases  in 
Eng.,  to  supply  the  place  of  the  omitted  noun?  —  equo  admisso,  (his) 
horse  having  been  let  go,  with  loose  reins,  at  full  speed ;  the  root  meaning  of 
mittere  is  to  let  go  ;  distinguish  equus  from  eques,  equitatus,  eques- 
ter. — voluerit;  review  the  conjug.  of  this  verb,  A.  &  G.  138.  H.  293; 
explain  mode  and  tense.  —  cognovisse  ;  give  the  exact  words  which  Con- 
sidius  addressed  to  Caesar ;  insignibus,  here  from  the  noun  insigne,  a 
distinguishing  mark,  decoration,  uniform.  —  praeceptum  erat :  for  mode, 
cf.    XXV.    N.     6,    Obs.    4.  —  ne  .  .  .  committeret,   nisi  .  .  .  visae 
essent.     What  were  the  exact  words  of  Caesar  to  Labienus?  XLVII.  N. 
6,  XL VI.  N.  3.  — fieret;  voice?  cf.  fiebat  XVI.  Vocab.;  why  subjv.  ? 

—  abstinebat ;  for  const,  of  preceding  prcelio,  cf.  IX.  N.  15.  —  multo 
die,  in  the  much  day,  late  in  the  day  ;  why  abl.?  —  perterritum  ;  force  of 
per?  XVIII.  N.  3,  (b). —  pro  viso,  in  place  of  (a  thine/)  seen,  as  seen ; 
viso,  in  form  a  partic.,  is  liere  a  noun.  —  quo  consuerat  intervallo — 
intervallo  qu5  consuerat,  at  the  interval  at  ichich  he  was  accustomed; 
cf.  quae  civitas  est  for  ci vitas  quse  est  XXXVII. ;  for  impf.  force  of 
the  plpf.  consuerat,  cf.  LI.  N.  4  (e). 

9 

CHAPTER  23. 

diSi ;  a  gen.  depending  on  postridie,  which  is  an  adv.,  but  was  origi- 
nallv  a  noun,  being  contracted  from  postero  dig,  on  the  day  after ;  see  A. 
&  G.  214,  ff.  H.  398,  5.  —  cum  .  .  .  oporteret;  cf.  quo  oporteret 
LVII.  N.  2.  —  Bibracte  ;  nom.  same  as  abl. ;  see  A.  &  G.  57,  d.  H.  63, 
2.  —  copiosissimo  ;  the  nom.  masc.  of  the  positive  copiosus  is  formed 
from  copia  with  the  ending  -6sus ;  for  force  of  this  ending,  cf.  bellico- 
sus  XXXVIII.,  seditiosus  LVILL,  and  A.  &  G.  164,  k.  H.  328.— 
aberat ;  for  preceding  milibus,  cf.  passibus,  Chap.  22 ;  for  passuum, 
cf.  XVII.  N.  8. — existimavit ;  for  preceding  prospiciendum,  cf. 
XXXIII.  N.  3  (/;)  ;  rei  frumentariae,  for  the  grain  supply ;  dat.  with 
prospiciendum  (esse) ;  cf.  respublica,  res  familiaris,  res  militaris, 
novee  res.  —  contendit ;  like  the  preceding  avertit  hns  the  same  form 
in  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.  as  in  pf.  ind. ;  cf.  LXVII.  N.  6;  here  probably  pf. 
like  preceding  existimavit.  — seu  for  sive.  —  eo  magis  quod  ;  magis 
is  used  as  tlie  com  p.  of  magnopere  XLVII. :  for  whole  expression,  cf. 
h5c  facilius  .  .  .  quod  XIV.,  eo  .  .  .  minus  .  .  .  quod  XLIX. — 
sive;  cf.  preceding  seu.  —  re;  const.?  —  a  novissimo  agmine;  for 
use  of  same  expression  without  a,  cf.  LV.  ;  for  meaning  of  a,  cf.  X.  N. 
14.  —  ccepgrunt ;  for  translation  of  preceding  abl.  absolutes,  cf.  XXVIII. 
N.  7  (,). 


APPENDIX  B.  283 


CHAPTER  24. 

id  animum  advertit ;  the  last  two  words  are  usually  written  as  one ; 
cf.  LXIV.  and  note  also  the  difference  in  Lat.  between  the  expressions 
meaning  to  notice  and  to  punish  ;  for  two  accus.  id  and  animum,  cf. 
XLIII.  N.  5  (£),  Gram.  Less.  —  qui  sustineret  .  .  .  misit ;  cf.  other 
examples  of  the  rel.  clause  of  purpose  in  XXXII.,  LIV.,  and  Chap.  21, 
and  note  that  in  all  these  instances  the  antec.  of  the  rel.  is  the  obj.  of  the 
verb  on  which  the  purpose  clause  depends.  —  in  medio  colle  ;  in  the 
middle  of  the  hill,  i.  e.  half  way  up,  not  in  the  middle  of  the  summit ;  cf. 
multo  die,  Chap.  22.  What  important  difference  between  the  way  of 
expressing  the  time  in  which  and  the  place  in  which  ?  —  [ita  utl  supra] ; 
in  brackets  because  it  is  doubtful  whether  these  words  belong  in  the  text; 
omit  in  translation.  —  compleri ;  voice  ?  for  parts,  cf.  flens  LXVIII.  — 
eum ;  antec.  ?  —  impedimenta ;  from  impedire,  means  that  which 
hinders,  (i.  e.  makes  the  march  slow?)  the  baggage  train,  including  the  beasts 
of  burden,  while  sarcinas,  above,  refers  to  the  personal  baggage  of  each 
soldier,  something  like  the  modern  knapsacks,  though  not  carried  on  the 
back.  —  confertissima  acie,  in  a  very  crowded  line  of  battle  ;  why  abl.  ? 
difference  in  meaning  between  acies  and  agmen  ? 


CHAPTER  25. 

equis  :  What  does  this  word  suggest  as  to  the  noun  with  which  preced. 
ing  suo  agrees,  and  what  const,  for  this  noun  is  suggested  by  remotis  ? 
—  aequato  periculS,  lit.  the  danger  having  been  made  equal,  freely,  by 
making  the  danger  equal;  cf.  spe  sublata  XXVII. — perfregerunt ; 
from  perfringere. — fecerunt :  How  does  this  verb  show  that  the  first 
word  in  the  sentence  is  not  a  nom.  sing.  ?  What  word  shows  that  it  is  not 
an  accus.  plur.  ?  Why  may  it  not  be  a  nom.  plur.  neut.  1  What,  then,  must 
be  its  case,  antec.,  and  const.?  —  Gallis  .  .  .  impediments  ;  for  const. 
cf.  LXIII.  N.  7. — se  inflexisset,  had  bent  itself,  had  become  bent ;  note 
that  the  shields  of  soldiers  standing  next  to  one  another  were  overlapped  in 
forming  the  phalanx,  and  that  these  shields,  which  were  carried  on  the  left 
arm,  were  pinned  and  held  together  by  the  Roman  javelins ;  for  mode  of  in- 
flexisset, cf.  XL.  N.  2  (/>).  —  sinistra;  cf.  dextram  LXVIII.  —  emit- 
tere  ;  for  meaning,  cf.  admisso,  Chap.  22  ;  praeoptarent,  preceding,  is  a 
subjv.  of  result;  manu  ;  fern,  by  exception  ;  why  abl.?  —  mille  passu- 
um ;  mille  is  here  a  noun  like  milia,  but  cf.  mille,  Chap.  22.  —  eo  ;  here 
an  adv.  meaning  to  that  place,  thither,  not  the  demonstrative  pron.  — 


284  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

succedentibus ;  on  the  use  of  this  pres.  partic.,  cf.  LX.  N.  12,  Obs.  2.  — 
novissimis  praesidio  ;  cf.  Gallis  impediments,  above  ;  novissimis 

means  to  those  at  the  rear,  or  simply  to  the  rear  ;  the  best  Eng.  for  the 
whole  expression  !J  —  latere  aperto  ;  for  omission  of  prep.,  cf.  novis- 
simo  agmine  LV.  —  cceperunt;  followed  by  circumvenire  as  well  as 
instare.  —  conversa  signa  .  .  .  intulerunt,  they  bore  in  the  turned 
about  standards.,  (hey  wheeled  about  and  adcanced.  Make  a  list  of  the  mili- 
tary names  and  expressions  in  this  and  the  preceding  Chap.  —  resiste- 
ret;  used  with  the  dat. ;  victis,  from  vincere,  means  those  conquered,  the 
conquered ;  cf.  novissimis,  above.  Of  what  is  the  preceding  acies  the 
subj.?  —  venientes;  cf.  succedentibus.  Note  the  large  number  of 
partic.  in  this  Chap.,  and  that  in  many  cases  the  Eng.  would  have  clauses 
instead.  Make  these  partic.  a  special  study,  noting  the  difference  in 
meaning  between  those  of  dep.  verbs  and  the  others,  and  the  variety  of 
Eng.  translation  required  in  rendering  them  idiomatically. 

CHAPTER  26. 

pugnatum  est ;  used  impersonally,  lit.  translated  it  teas  fought,  freely 
there  was  fighting ;  the  preceding  adv.  may  then  be  freely  translated  like  an 
adj. ;  the  preceding  ancipiti  prcelio  is  an  abl.  of  manner ;  ancipiti  is  from 
nom.  anceps.  —  diutius  is  a  comp.  from  diu.  —  alter!  .  .  .  alteri,  the 
one  party  .  .  .  the  other  ;  cf.  XV.  N.  7,  Gram.  Less.  —  ab  hora  septima  ; 
the  day  from  sunrise  to  sunset,  whatever  its  length,  was  divided  into  twelve 
equal  hours,  which  must,  of  course,  have  varied  in  length  with  the  seasons ; 
cf.,  for  the  night,  XLIII.,  Vocab.  —  pugnatum  sit;  for  const.,  cf.  LII. 
N.  2,  Obs.  3.  —  ad  multam  noctem  ;  cf.  multo  die,  Chap.  22.  —  pro 
vail  6  ;  for,  in  place  of,  as,  a  rampart.  —  objecerant ;  for  force  of  ob  in 
composition,  cf.  X.  N.  4,  Obs.  8.  — coniciebant  for  conjiciebant ;  see 
A.  &  G.  10,  d.  H.  36,  4,  and  foot-note  1,  also  XX.  N.  1.  —  potiti  sunt ; 
for  case  used  with  it,  cf.  XIV  N.  7.  —  unus  e  filiis,  one  out  of  the  sons, 
one  of  the  son* ;  see  A.  &  G.  216,  c.  II.  397,  3,  N.  3,  and  foot-note  1.  — 
ierunt  for  iverunt  —  pervenerunt ;  partem  (noctis)  in  this  sentence 
is  the  accus.  of  duration  of  time,  and  die  the  abl.  of  time  at  which  ;  with 
these  regular  uses  contrast  nocte  in  the  preceding  clause  and  prcelio,  near 
the  beginning  of  the  Chap.,  both  of  which  are  exceptionally  used  in  the  abl. 
to  express  duration  of  time  ;  see  A.  &  G.  256,  b.  H.  379,  1.  —  Lingonas  ; 
cf.  L.  N.  8  (<;). —  juvarent;  for  dir.  form,  cf.  ne  .  .  .  tribueret 
XLVIL  — qui  .  .  .  habiturum;  cf.  si  ...  accidisset  .  .  .  existima- 
turum  LXVII. ;  force  of  the  position  of  qui  ?  for  omission  of  prep,  with 
loco,  cf.  XXIX.  N.  9  ;  Helvetios  is  the  obj.  of  haberet,  to  be  supplied ; 


APPENDIX  B.  285 

eos,  referring  to  Lingonas,  is  the  obj.  of  habiturum  (esse);  if  the 
Lingones  harbored  the  enemies  of  the  Romans,  they  would  be  regarded  as 
enemies  by  Caesar. 

CHAPTER  27. 

convenissent :  here  transitive ;  for  position  and  translation  of  its 
subj.,  qui,  ,/.  IX.  N.  1  (d),  Obs.  1;  XXXVI.  N.  2  (b},  Gram.  Less.  — 
jussisset ;  note  the  four  subjv.  after  one  conj.,  viz.  cum;  why  subjv.  ? 
essent,  preceding,  is  subjv.  in  a  subordinate  clause  of  indir.  disc.,  jussis- 
set being  a  verb  of  saying.  —  eo  .  .  .  pervgnit;  cf.  eo,  Chap.  25. — 
perfugissent ;  for  mode,  cf.  essent,  above.  —  ea  conquiruntur ;  ea, 
referring  to  obsides,  arma,  servos,  in  preceding  sentence,  is  neut. 
because  the  hostages  and  slaves  are  here  regarded  as  things  rather  than 
men;  cf.  H.  439,  2,  and  N.  —  hominum  milia  .  .  .  pagi  ;  note  the 
possessive  and  partitive  gen.  depending  on  the  same  noun.  —  Verbigeiius 
appellatur;  for  case  of  Verbigenus,  cf.  XX.  N.  4  (d). — perterriti; 
limits  milia  ;  for  gender,  see  A.  &  G.  187,  d.  H.  438,  6.  —  aducerentur  ; 
for  const.,  cf.  LXV.  N.  3,  Obs.  2.  —  quod  .  .  .  existimarent ;  subjv. 
in  indir.  disc. ;  Caesar  is  here  quoting  two  reports  or  perhaps  two  conjec- 
tures of  his  own  in  regard  to  the  departure  of  the  Helvetii.  —  prima 
nocte  ;  in  thejirst  of  the  night.,  in  the  early  part  of  the  night.  What  other 
adj.  have  been  used,  like  prima,  to  designate  a  part  of  a  thing,  and  in  what 
phrases  ? 

CHAPTER  28. 

resciit  for  rescivit,  from  resciscere  ;  cf.  LXVI.  N.  8,  Obs.  2 ;  for 
tense,  cf.  LVII.  N.  1  (a}.  —  imperavit ;  takes  what  case?  LXII.  N.  1, 
Obs.  1;  for  quorum,  preceding  its  antec.  his,  cf.  quae  pars  .  .  .  ea 
XLIV.  ;  dir.  obj.  of  imperavit?  XX.  N.  5  (b}  ;  purgatl ;  nom.,  agree- 
ing with  subj.  of  vellent ;  see  A.  &  G.  272,  b.  H.  536,  2,  1) ;  sibi,  to 
him,  in  his  sight;  vellent;  form  in  dir.  disc.?  —  in  numero  hostium, 
lit.  in,  the  number  of  enemies,  freely  as  enemies  ;  cf.  pro  valid,  Chap.  26. — 
unde,  from  which  place,  whence  ;  cf.  ubi,  ichere,  ibi,  there,  e6,  thither, 
inde,  thence.  —  revert!  ;  What  means  they  returned?  cf.  reverterentur 
XXXIII.,  reverterunt  XXXV.  — domi;  cf.  LXI.  N.  4.  —  tolerarent 
is  here  a  result  clause ;  the  preceding  quo  =  ut  e5,  and  has  nihil  as 
its  antec.,  lit.  there  was  nothing  (of  such  a  sorf)  that  they  would  by  means 
of  it  endure  hunger.  —  ipsos  ;  the  antec.  are  Helvetios,  Tulingos,  Lato- 
brlgos  — ne  ,  .  .  translrent ;  a  subjv.  after  the  idea  of  fearing  sug- 


286  INDUCTIVE   LATIN   METHOD. 

gested  in  noluit;  cf.  LXV.  N.  3,  Obs.  2.  —  Gallise  provinciae ;  which 
of  these  two  words  is  a  dat.  ?  —  concessit ;  note  the  emphatic  position 
of  Boios;  it  is  the  obj.  of  collocarent,  of  which  the  subj.  is  Haedui 
understood ;  Haeduls  is  the  dat.  of  indir.  obj.  after  concessit ;  for  col- 
locarent, cf.  conquirerent,  above;  for  virtute,  cf.  XXX.  N.  2;  dede 
runt,  pf.  of  dare ;  antec.  of  preceding  quibus  and  ill!  !J  for  force  of 
atque,  see  A.  &  G.  156,  a.  H.  554  I.  2,  N.  ;  translated  lit.  into  an  equal 
condition  and  they  themselves  were,  freely,  into  the  same  condition  as 
themselves. 

CHAPTER  29. 

Utterae  ;  this  word  in  the  plur.  may  mean  either  letters  of  the  alphabet, 
a  letter  (epistle),  or  literature  ;  it  is  here  used  in  the  first  sense.  —  quibus 
in  tabulls ;  for  repetition  of  antec.,  cf.  quibus  itineribus  XXIX.  — 
exisset ;  for  form,  cf.  XLIV.  5  ;  it  is  the  verb  of  an  indir.  question,  the 
preceding  qul  being  an  interrogative  adj. ;  cf.  quas  in  partes  LIV.  ;  for 
domo  cf.  XX VII L.  N.  1  (/;).  —  qui  .  .  .  possent ;  the  clause  describes 
eorum  like  an  adj.,  emphasizing  a  characteristic  or  condition  rather  than  a 
fact ;  see  A.  &  G.  320.  II.  503,  I.  —  separatim  ;  for  the  adv.  ending  -tim, 
cf.  nominating  privatim,  preesertim.  —  pueri ;  stem  and  nom.  ?  how 
different  from  stem  and  nom.  of  agri?  —  seiies  ;  see  A.  &  G.  61.  H.  66. 
—  summa,  sum,  here  a  noun;  the  preceding  rgrurn  may  be  translated 
items.  —  erat  .  .  .  CCLXIII ;  capitum,  souls,  rather  than  heads  ;  a  par- 
titive gen.  depending  on  mllia  ;  review  in  this  connection  the  numerals, 
A.  &  G.  94.  H.  174.  —  possent ;  cf  possent,  above.  —  ad  mllia ;  ad  is 
here  an  adv.  meaning  about ;  note  that  fuerunt  agrees  with  predicate 
noun  rather  than  subj. ;  see  A.  &  G.  204,  b.  H.  462  ;  cf.,  however,  summa 
erat  mllia,  above.  —  eorum  qui  ,  .  .  redierunt ;  why  ind.  here,  but 
subjv.  in  eorum  qui  ,  .  .  possent,  above? 


APPENDIX  C. 


WORD-LISTS. 


Words  occurring  five  or  more  times  in  the  First  Book  of  Csesar's  "  Gallic  W7ar. 


amicitia 

Belgse 

causa 


-A  NOUNS. 


copia 

fortuna 

Gallia 


gratia 
injuria 
memoria 


provincia 
summa 


-O  NOUNS. 


ager 

concilium 

Labieuus 

pi'celium 

amicus 

colloquium 

legatus 

•regimm 

animus 

cousilium 

Liscus 

Rhcnus 

annus 

Divitiacus 

locus 

Rliodauus 

Ariovistus 

equus 

Lucius 

Komfmus 

arma 

frumentum 

Marcus 

Sequani 

aux  ilium 

Gallus 

numerus 

socius 

bellum 

German! 

oppidum 

solum 

beneficium 

Hsedui 

pagus 

telura 

carrus 

Helvetii 

periculura 

Valerius 

castra 

imperium 

populus 

agmen 

Allobroges 

Caesar 

ci  vitas 

consuetudo 

consul 

dicio 

Durnuorix 

eques 

explorator 


3d  DECL.  NOUNS. 


finis 

flumen 

frater 

homo 

liostis 

iter 

jus 

legio 

miles 

mllia 


mons 

multitude 

nemo 

nihil 

nox 

obses 

oratio 

Orgetorix 

pars 

pater 


pax 
pes 

prince  ps 
ratio 
salus 
tern  pus 
timor 
virtus 

VIS 

voluntas 


288 


INDUCTIVE  LATIN   METHOD. 


-U  NOUNS. 


adventus              equitatus              impetus              passus 
domus                  exercitus              maims                seuatus 

-E  NOUNS. 

acies 

dies 

fides 

res 

spes 

VERBS. 

1st 

Conjug.  (-a  verbs). 

appellare 
arbitrari 
comparare 
confirmare 

dare 
desperare 
enuntiare 
existimare 

imperare 
impetrare 
ju  die  a  re 
mandare 

nfmtiare 
occupare 
perturbare 
postulare 

pugnare 
putare 
rogare 
superare 

%d  Conjug.  (-e  verbs). 

commovere 
continere 
debere 

liabere 
jubere 
licet 

obtiuere 
oportet 
persuade  re 

perterrere 
j)olliceri 
prohibere 

respondere 
tenere 
videre 

3c?  Conjug.  (-e  verbs). 

accidere 
accipere 
adducere 
agere 
aiiimadvertere 
capere 
cogere 
cognoscere 
colloqui 

committere 

conficere 
conjicere 
considere 
constituere 
consuescere 
contendere 
deligere 
dicere 

discedere 
dlvidere 
ducere 
face  re 
gerere 
iucolere 
Instruere 
intellegere 
intermittere 

mittere 
ostendere 
patl 
pellere 
perficere 
petere 
proficisci 
queerere 
querl 

recipere 
reducere 
reliuquere 
revert! 
sequi 
statuere 
traducere 
uti 
vincere 

4M  Conjug.  (-1  verbs). 

audlre 

convenire 

pervenlre 

reperire 

venire 

Irreg.  Verbs. 

abesse 
coepisse 
conferre 

esse 
exlre 
ferre 

Inferre 
Ire 
posse 

prseesse 
refer  re 
tollere 

tran  sire 
velle 

APPENDIX   C. 


289 


ADJECTIVES. 


Positive  degree. 


alias 
alter 

multus                     reliquus 
omnis                      Homauus 

totus 
ullus 

barbarus 

paucus                     taut  us 

unus 

maguus 

quartus                    tertius 

uter 

Comp.  degree. 

amplior 

gravior          major         minor          plus 

supei 

Stip.  degree. 
nobilissimus      novissimus      plurimus      primus     proximus      summus 


ADVERBS. 


Positive  degree. 


circiter              ita 
facile                 jam 
ibi                     neque 

non 
propterea 
quam 

satis 
tarn 
tameu 

turn 
ubi 

amplius 

Comp.  degree. 
gravius 

I 
ininus 

Sup.  degree. 


prim  urn 


19 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


A.  $-  G. 

Allen  and  Greenough's 

impers.  . 

.     .     impersonal 

Latin  Grammar 

impf.      . 

.     .     imperfect 

abl.      . 

.     .     ablative 

indef.     . 

indefinite 

accus.  . 

.     .     accusa*'1"; 

ind.  . 

Indicative 

act.      . 

.     .     active 

indir. 

.     .     indirect 

adj.      . 

adjective 

inf.    .     . 

.     .     infinitive 

ado. 

.     .     adverb 

Lat.  .     . 

.     .     Latin 

antec.  . 

antecedent 

lit.     .     . 

literal 

Bk.      . 

.     .     Book 

masc. 

.     .     masculine 

Chap.  . 

.     .     Chapter 

N 

Note 

*f.   •     . 

.     .     CONFER,  compare 

ue  ut. 

.     .     neuter 

com  p.  . 

.     .     comparative 

nom. 

nominative 

eonj.     . 

conjunction 

obj.    . 

.     .     objective 

coitjiig. 

conjugation 

Obs.       . 

.     .     Observation 

const.  , 

.     .     construction 

p.      .     . 

.     .     page 

dat.      . 

.     .     dative 

partlc.   . 

o     .     part  iciple 

dec/.     . 

declension 

pass. 

.     .     passive 

dep. 

.     .     deponent 

pers. 

.     .     person 

dtr.      . 

.     .     direct 

Pf.     •     • 

.     .     perfect 

disc. 

.     .     discourse 

plur. 

plural 

e.g.     . 

.      .       EXEMPLI     GRATIA,     for 

P/Pf.       - 

.     .     pluperfect 

example 

prep.       . 

.     .     preposition 

Eng. 

.     .     English 

•pres. 

.     .     present 

etc.       . 

.     .     ET  CETERA,  and  so  forth 

pron. 

pronoun 

fern.     . 

feminine 

ret.    .     . 

.     .     relative 

fat.       . 

.     .     future 

sing. 

.     .     singular 

gen. 

.     .     genitive 

subj. 

.     .     subject 

Gram.  . 

Grammar 

subjv. 

subjunctive 

ir.  .   . 

Harkness's       Latin 

sup.  . 

superlative 

Grammar 

viz.    .     . 

.     .     namely 

i.  e. 

.     .     ID  EST,  that  is 

Vocab.    . 

.     .     Vocabulary 

The  same   abbreviation  has  generally  been  used  for  the  singular  and  the  plural. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


NOTE.  —  The  following  Vocabulary  contains  all  the  Latin  words  found  in  th» 
first  twenty-nine  Chapters  of  Cesar's  Gallic  War. 

It  has  been  considered  not  only  unnecessary  but  hurtful  to  the  student  constantly 
to  repeat  in  the  Vocabulary  facts  which  he  should  already  know,  and  facts  which 
are  governed  by  those  simple  rules,  a  knowledge  of  which  is  essential  to  even  an  ele- 
mentary use  of  the  language.  The  repetition  of  such  facts  blinds  -the  pupil  to  the 
existence  of  the  rules  which  govern  them,  and  destroys  that  self-reliance  which  is 
necessary  to  success  in  sight  reading.  Accordingly,  the  pupil  has  not  been  told 
with  everv  recurrence  of  a  noun  in  -tas  that  its  gen.  is  -tatis,  or  with  every  recur- 
rence of  a  verb  in  -are  that  its  pf.  and  partic.  are  in  -avit  and  -atus.  Exceptions 
to  regular  rules  are  always  given.  If  the  gen.  of  a  noun  in  -us  is  not  given,  it  is  to 
be  considered  a  masc.  of  the  -o  declension. 

A  slight  divergence  from  the  usual  method  of  giving  the  parts  of  verbs  has  been 
made.  In  the  Text  of  Csesar,  B.  G.  I.  1-29,  neither  the  1st  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind. 
nor  that  of  the  pf.  ind.  is  found  at  all.  It  would,  then,  be  a  serious  departure  from 
the  inductive  method  to  use  these  forms  in  giving  the  parts  of  every  verb.  Accord- 
ingly, the  pres.  ind.  (except  that  of  verbs  in  -io  of  the  3d  conjug.)  has  been  omitted, 
and  the  3d  sing,  of  the  pf.  has  been  used  instead  of  the  1st  sing.  The  pf.  pass,  or 
fut.  act.  partic.  has  been  used  as  one  of  the  principal  parts  instead  of  the  supine. 
The  objections  to  the  use  of  the  latter  have  been  well  stated  by  Mr.  Tetlow  in  the 
Preface  to  his  Inductive  Lessons  in  Latin. 

In  this  connection  it  is  not  out  of  place  to  speak  of  the  unfortunate  convention  bv 
which  the  1st  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind.  is  used  in  naming  verbs  and  in  giving  the  prin- 
cipal parts.  It  seems  only  reasonable  that  a  principal  part  should  be  a  common 
form,  and  should  show  one  of  the  stems  of  the  verb.  The  1st  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind. 
is  almost  unknown  in  the  narrative  authors  usually  read  by  beginners;  and  in  the 
1st  and  3d  conjug.  it  does  not  show  the  pres.  stem,  and,  therefore,  in  naming  verbs 
the  1st  and  3d  conjug.  are  entirely  undistinguished. 

The  words  in  parentheses  are  merely  kindred  with  the  leading  word,  and,  in  very 
many  cases,  are  not  the  words  from  which  this  is  derived.  In  so  elementary  a  book, 
it  has  been  thought  unwise  to  discuss  or  use  roots  to  any  extent. 


a,  ab,  prep,  with  &\A.,  from,  by. 
abdere,  -didit,  -ditus,  to  put  away, 

hide. 
abdueere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to  lead 

away. 


abesse,  -fuit,  -fu.tu.rus,  to  be  away  or 

distant. 
abstinere,   -tinuit,    -tentus,   trans. 

and  in  trans.,  to  keep  from. 
ac,  another  form  for  atque  ;    it  is 

used  only  before  consonants, 
accedere,  -cessit,  -cessus,  to  go  to, 


accidere 


292 


animus 


approach,  be  added ;  accedit  quod 

or  ut,  it  is  added  that,  moreover. 
accidere,  -cidit  (ad  and  cadere,  to 
fall),  fall  upon,  fall  out,  happen  ( used 

generally    of    unfortunate    occur- 
rences, hence  Eng.  accident). 
accipere  (accipio),  -cepit,  -ceptus, 

to  take  to  one's  self,  receive,  accept. 
accurrere,  -currit  (or  -cucurrit),  to 

run  to,  run  up. 
accusare  (ad  and  causa),  to  call  to 

account,  blame,  accuse. 
acies,    -ei,    a    sharp    edge,   a    sharp 

glance,  a  battle  line  (presenting  sharp 

weapons), 
acriter,  sharply. 
adducere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to  lead 

to,  draw  to,  induce. 
adesse,  -fuit,  -futurus,  to  be  near,  be 

present,  assist. 
adficere  (adficio),  -fecit,  -fectus,  to 

do  to  (somebody),  affect. 
adfmitas   (fines),   nearness,  relation- 
ship In/  marriage. 
adgredl ;  see  aggredi. 
adhibere,  to  hold,  summon,  enip'oy. 
admirari,  to  wonder  at,  admire. 
admittere,  -misit,  -missus,  to  let  go 

to,  send  to,  allow. 

adoriri,  -ortus,  to  rise  against,  attack. 
adsciscere,  -scivit,  -scitus,  to  take  to 

one's  self,  unite. 

adventus,  -us,  a  coming  to,  approach. 
adversus  (in  form  the  pf.  partic.  of 

advertere),  turned  toward,  in  front 

of,  adverse,  unfavorable. 
advertere,  -vertit,  -versus,  to  turn 

to  or  toward. 
eedificium,  a  building, 
segerrume  or  segerrime,  adv.  in  sup., 

with  the  greatest  trouble. 
sequare,  to  make  equal. 


ager,  agri,  field,  territory. 

agere,  egit,  actus,  to  set  in  motion, 
drive,  do,  discuss. 

aggredi  (aggredior),  -gressus  (ad 
and  gradi),  to  go  towards,  to  attack. 

agmen  ( agere j,  that  which  is  set  in 
motion,  an  army  on  the  march,  a  line 
(of  inarch) ;  novissimum  agmen, 
the  newest  or  last  line,  the  rear. 

alere,  aluit,  altus,  to  nourish,  sup- 
port. 

alienus,  (alius),  belonging  to  another^ 
foreign,  unfavorable. 

aliqui,  indef.  adj.,  any. 

alius,  -a,  -ud  (gen.-ius,  dat.  -I),  adj. 
or  pron.,  one  of  any  number,  another, 

Alpes,  the  Al/>s. 

alter,  -era,  -erum  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -1), 
adj.  or  pron.,  one  of  two,  the  other. 

altitude,  height,  depth  •  cf.  altus. 

altus,  high  or  deep. 

amicitia,  friendship ;  cf.  aniicus, 
fritnd, 

amicus,  friend. 

amittere,  -misit,  -missus,  to  let  (a 
thing)  go  away,  send  away,  lose. 

amor  (amare),  love,  desire. 

amplus,  ample,  much,  great, 

anceps,  -cipitis  (ambo,  both  and 
caput,  a  head),  having  a  head  on 
both  sides,  double,  doubtful. 

angustiae,  -arum  (angustus),  nar- 
rowness, straits,  a  narrow  pass. 

angustus,  narrow. 

animadvertere  (animum,  ad,  and 
vertere),  to  turn  the  mind  or  atten- 
tion to,  notice  (in  this  sense  takes 
simple  ace  us.) ;  in  hominem  ani- 
madvertere, to  punish  a  man ;  cf. 
the  Eng.  expression  to  attend  to,  in 
sense  of  to  punish. 

animus,  soul,  mind,  feeling,  courage- 


annus 


293 


castra 


annus,  a  year. 

annuus  (annus),  annual,  for  a  year. 

ante,  adv.  and  prep  ,  before. 

antea,  adv.,  before. 

antiquus  (ante),  old,  ancient,  former. 

aperire,  -peruit,  -pertus,  to  uncover, 
open ;  the  partic.  a^ertus  is  com- 
monly used  as  a  simple  adj.  mean- 
ing uncovered,  open. 

appellare,  to  call  (by  name). 

Aprilis,  -is,  masc.  (probably  from 
aperire,  too/ten),  the  month  of  April ; 
also  very  frequently  an  adj. 

apud,  prep,  with  accus.,  among,  near, 
with. 

Aqultani,  the  Aqultani. 

Aqultania,  Aqnitania. 

Arar  or  Araris  (Ararim  accus.,  and 
Ararl  abl.,  are  found),  the  name 
of  a  Gallic  river,  the  Saone. 

arbitrarl,  to  judge,  think. 

arma,  nom.  plur.  neut.,  armor, 
arms. 

ascendere  or  adscendere,  -scendit, 
-scensus  (ad  and  scandere),  to 
climb  up,  ascend 

ascensus  or  adscensus,  -us,  a  climb- 
ing up,  ascent. 

atque,  and,  and  also. 

attingere,  -tigit,  -tactus,  to  touch 
upon,  reach. 

auctoritas,  advice,  authority,  influence. 

audacia  (audax),  boldness,  audacity. 

audacter,  boldly. 

audere,  ausus  est,  to  dare. 

augere,  auxit,  auctus,  trans.,  to  in- 
crease. 

Aulus,  a  Roman  first  or  individual 
name ;  generally  represented  in 
Lat.  authors  by  the  initial  A. 

aut,  or ;  aut  .  ,  .  aut,  either  ...  or. 

autem,  but,  moreover. 


auxilium,  help,  aid ;  in  plur.  auxiliary 

troops. 
avertere,  -vertit,  -versus,  to  turn 

away. 
avus,  grandfather. 

B. 

bellare,  to  war,  wage  war. 
bellicosus  (bellum),  warlike. 
bellum,  war. 
beneficium  (bene,  well,  and  facere), 

well-doing,  a  favor. 
biduum,  the  space  of  two  days,   tivo 

days. 
biennium  (bis  and  annus),  the  space 

of  two  years. 
bipartite,  adv.  (bis,  twice,  and  pars), 

in  two  parts. 
bonitas,  goodness. 
bonus,  good,  goodly. 
brachium,  the  fore-arm,  the  arm. 


C. 


cadere,  cecidit,  casurus,  to  fall. 
Caesar,  -is,  full  name   Caius  Julius 

Caesar,  a  great  Roman,  — writer, 

general,  statesman. 
Caius,  more  correctly  written  Gaius 

or   Gajus,   a   Roman   first   name, 

usually  represented  by  C. 
calamitas,  disaster,  calamity. 
capere  (capio),  cepit,  captus,  to  take. 
captivus,  a  captive. 
caput,  -itis,  a  head. 
carrus,  a  cart. 

Cassianus,  adj.,  pertaining  to  Cassius. 
castellum,  a  small  fort,  a  castle. 
castra,  -orum  (the  sing,  castrum,  a 

fortress,  is  not  found  in  Caesar),  a 

camp. 


casus 


294 


conari 


casus,  -us  (cadere,  to  fall),  a  fulling, 
accident,  misfortune,  chance. 

Catamantalcedes,  -is,  a  Gallic  name. 

causa,  cause,  reason. 

cavere,  cavit,  cautus,  to  take  care, 
beware  of. 

celeriter.adv.  (celerius,  celerrime), 
quickly. 

Celtse,  the  Kelts. 

census,  -us  (censere,  to  reckon),  a 
numbering  or  rating,  a  census. 

centum,  indeel.,  one  hundred. 

certus,  sure,  certain  ;  hominem  cer- 
tiorem  facere,  to  inform  a  man. 

cibarius,  pertaining  to  food  ;  cibaria, 
neut.  plur.  as  noun,  provisions. 

circiter,  adv.,  about. 

circuitus,  -us  (circum  and  Ire),  a  go- 
ing around,  a  circuit. 

circum,  prep,  with  accus.,  around, 
about. 

circumvenlre,  -venit,  -ventus,  to 
come  around,  surround,  impose  upon, 
circumvent. 

citerior,  adj.  in  comp.  (positive  not 
found),  nearer,  hither;  citerior 
Gallia,  Gaul  on  this  side  the  Alps, 
i.  e.  on  the  TComan  or  eastern  side ; 
ulterior  Gallia,  Gaul  beyond  the 
Alps. 

citra,  prep,  with  accus.,  on  this  side 

of- 

ci  vitas,  citizenship,  a  state,  the  body- 
politic. 

claudere,  clausit,  clausus,  to  close. 

cliens,  a  client,  dependent. 

coemere  (con  and  emere),  -emit, 
-emptus,  to  bin/  up. 

ccepit,  ccepisse  (he,  she,  it)  began. 

coercere,  to  enclose  on  all  sides,  re- 
strain, coerce. 

cogere,    coegit,    coaetus    (con,    to- 


gether, and  agere,  to  drive,  lead),  to 
drive  together,  colled,  coin/>el. 

cognoscere,  cognovit,  cognitus,  to 
learn  thoroughly  ;  cognovit,  he  has 
learned,  he  knows. 

cohortari,  to  urge  strongly,  encourage. 

collis,  masc.  by  exception,  a  hill. 

collocare,  to  place  together,  set  tip,  es* 
tablish. 

colloqul,  -locutus,  to  confer,  converse. 

comburere,  -bussit,  -bustus,  to  burn 
up,  consume. 

commeare,  to  go  back  and  forth. 

commemorare,  to  call  to  mind,  to 
mention. 

committere,  -misit,  -missus,  to  cause 
to  go  together,  commit,  cause;  proa- 
lium  committere,  to  join  battle. 

commode,  adv.  (con  and  mcdus, 
a  measure  —  in  due  measure),  conven- 
iently. 

commonefacere  (commonefacio), 
-fecit,  -factus,  to  put  in  mind,  re- 
mind forcibly. 

commovere,  -movit,  -motus,  to 
move  deeply. 

communlre,  to  fortify  strongly. 

commutare,  to  change  entirely. 

commutatio  (mutare,  to  change),  a 
changing,  change. 

comparare  (con,  intensive  and  pa- 
rare),  to  prepare  with  zeal. 

comperire,  -perit,  -pertus,  to  find 
out  certainly  (by  searching  or  in- 
quiry). 

complures,  complura  or  compluria 
neut.,  very  many. 

comportare,  to  bring  together. 

complectl,  -plexus,  to  embrace. 

complere,  -plevit,  -pletus,  to  fill  out, 
complete. 

conari,  to  try. 


conatum 


295 


convemre 


conatum,  a  thing  attempted,  an  at- 
tempt, undertaking. 

c5natus,  -us  (conarl),  an  attempt. 

concedere,  -cessit,  -cessus,  to  go 
awai/,  yield. 

concidere,  -cidit,  -cisus  (con,  in- 
tensive, anil  caedere,  to  cut),  to  cut 
to  pieces,  to  kill. 

conciliate,  to  bring  together,  win  over. 

concilium,  an  assembly,  conned ;  cf. 
,  consilium,  a  plan,  counsel. 

concursus,  -us  (con  and  currere,  to 
run),  a  running  together. 

condicio  and,  less  correctly,  conditio 
(condlcere),  an  agreement,  condi- 
tion. 

condonare,  to  give  up,  to  pardon. 

conducere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to  bring 
together,  hire. 

conferre,  -tulit,  collatus,  to  bring  to- 
gether, collect,  compare ;  where  con 
is  intensive,  to  bring  vigorously  or 
rapidly,  se  conferre,  to  betake  one's 
self. 

confertus  (confercire,  to  cram  to- 
gether), pressed  together,  crowded. 

conficere,  -fecit,  -fectus  (con  and 
facere),  to  accomplish,  complete. 

confidere,  -fisus  est  (with  act.  mean- 
ing), to  trustfully,  confide  in. 

confirmare,  to  strengthen,  establish, 
encourage,  affirm. 

conicere  or  conjicere  (conicio), 
-jecit,  -jectus,  to  throw  or  put  to- 
gether, to  conjecture,  to  hurl  withforce. 

conjuratio  (con  and  jurare,  to  swear, 
take  oath],  a  swearing  together,  a 
conspiracy. 

conligare  or  colligare,  to  fasten  to- 
gether. 

conquirere,  -qulsivit,  -qulsltus, 
(con  and  quaerere)  to  search  for. 


consanguineus,  adj.  or  noun   (con 

and  sanguis,  blood),  akin  by  blood. 
consciscere,     -sclvit,     -scltus,      to 

decree,    determine. 
conscius   (con,   with,   and   seire,  to 

know),  knowing  with  one's  self   or 

with  others,  conscious. 
conscribere,  -scrlpsit,  -scriptus,  to 

write  together,  enroll. 
cSnsequi,  -secutus,  to  follow  up,  to 

obtain. 
considere,  -sedit,   -sessurus,  to  sit 

down  (used  especially  of  a  large 

number),  to  hold  a  session,  to  en- 
camp. 

consilium,  a  plan. 

consistere,  -stitit,  to  take  a  stand,stop, 
consolari,  to  console,  to  comfort. 
conspectus,  -us  (conspicere,  to  see), 

sight. 

conspicari,  to  get  sight  of,  to  see. 
constituere,    -stituit,    -stitutus,   to 

set  together,  arrange,  determine. 
consuescere,    -suevit,    -suetus,    to 

accustom  one's  self;  in  pf.  to  have 

accustomed  one's  self,  to  be  wont. 
consul,  consul,  the  title  of  the  chief 

executive  officer  at  "Rome, 
consumere,     -sumpsit,     -sumptus 

(con,   intensive,   wholly,   and   su- 

mere,  to  take),  to  consume,  destroy. 
contendere,    -tendit,     -tentus,    to 

strive,  hasten. 
continenter,  continually. 
continere,  -tinuit,   -tentus,  to  hold 

together,  bound. 
contra,  adv.,  and  prep,  with  accus., 

against. 

contumelia,  effrontery,  insult. 
convemre,  -venit,  -vent us,  to  come 

together,    to   meet;    convenit,    it  is 

agreed,  it  is  fitting. 


conventus 


296 


dens 


conventus,  -us,  a  coming  together,  a 
meeting. 

convertere,  -vertit,  -versus,  to  turn 
or  wheel  about. 

convocare,  to  call  together,  summon. 

copia,  plenty  ;  in  plur.  forces,  troops. 

copiSsus,  well-supplied,  copious. 

cotldie  or  quotidie,  daily. 

creare,  to  make,  to  elect. 

cremare,  to  burn. 

crescere,  crevit,  cretus,  intrans.,  to 
grow,  increase;  cf.  the  trans,  augere. 

cultus,  -us,  culture,  way  of  living, 
civilization. 

cum,  prep,  witli  abl.,  with. 

cum  (quum),  conj  ,  when,  since,  al- 
though. 

cupere  (cupio),  cupivit  or  -lit,  cu- 
pltus,  to  long  for,  desire,  be  well- 
disposed  toward  (in  the  last  sense 
it  takes  a  dat). 

cupide,  eagerly. 

cupiditas,  desire,  cupidity. 

cupidus,  desirous,  fond. 

curare,  to  take  care. 

custos,  -odis,  a  guard. 

D. 

damnare,  to  condemn. 

dare,  dedit,  datus,  to  give. 

de,  prep,  with  abl.,yrom,  down  from, 

concerning,  for. 
debere,  debuit,  debitus  (de  and  ha- 

bere,  to  have  or  keep  from  some  one], 

to  owe,  to  be  bound  ;  debet,  he  ought. 
deoem,  indec.,  ten. 
decipere  (decipio),  -cepit,  -ceptus, 

to  catch  away,  entrap,  deceive. 
decurio  (decem),  the  commander  of 

a  company  of  ten  cavalry,  a  decu- 


dediticius,  one  who  has  surrendered,  a 

captive. 

deditio   (dedere,  to  give  up),  a  sur- 
render. 
defendere,  -fendit,  -fensus,  to  ward 

off,  to  defend. 
defessus    (partic.    of   defetisci,    to 

crack  open),  exhausted. 
deicere  or  dejicere  (deicio),  -jecit, 

-jectus,  to  cast  down. 
deinde  (de  and  inde),  from  thence, 

thereafter,  next. 
deliberate  (from  de  and  librare,  to 

weigh)  to  weigh  well,  ponder. 
deligere,   -legit,   -lectus,   to    choose 

from,  select. 
deminuere,  -minuit,   -minutus  (de 

and  minus),  to  lessen. 
demonstrate,  to  show. 
demum,  adv.,  at  last. 
denique,  adv.,  at  last,  finally. 
deponere,  -posuit,  -positus,  to  place 

aside,  lay  aside. 
depopulari,  to  lay  waste. 
deprecator  (deprecari,  to  beg  off,  to 

intercede)  an  intercessor,  mediator. 
deslgnare  (signum,  a  mark),  to  mark 

out,  point  out,  describe. 
desistere,  -stitit,  -stiturus,  to  stand 

off,  to  desist. 

desperare,  to  be  hopeless,  to  despair. 
despicere        (despicio),        -spexit, 

-spectus,    to    look    down    upon,    <o 

despise. 
destituere,  -stituit,  -sti tutus,  to  set 

away  from,  to  abandon. 
destringere,  -strinxit,  -strictus,  to 

strip  off;  of  a  sword,  to  strip  off  the 

scabbard,  unsheathe,  draw. 
deterrere,  to  frighten  away  from,  to 

deter. 
deus,  a  god. 


dexter 


297 


dexter,  -tera,  -terum,  or  more  fre- 
quently   -tra,    -trum,    the    right ; 

dextra    (manus,   fern.,   the    hand, 

being  understood),  the  right  hand. 
dicere,  dixit,  dictus,  to  say,  tell. 
dictio  (dicere),  a  saying,  pleading. 
dies,  -el,  masc.,  sometimes  fern.,  day, 

time. 
differre,    distulit,    dilatus,   to   bear 

apart,  differ. 
difficilis,  difficult. 
dimittere,  -misit,  -missus,   to  send 

apart,  dismiss. 
discedere,  -cessit,  -cessurus,  to  go 

apart,  depart. 
discere,  didicit,  to  learn. 
disicere  or  disjicere    (disicio),  -je- 

cit,  -jectus,  to  cast  apart. 
disponere,  -posuit,  -positus,  to  place 

apart,  place  here  and  there. 
ditissimus,  richest. 
diu,  adv.,   long   (used   of  time,   not 

of  space), 
diuturnus,     adj.     (diu),     long     (of 

time). 

dividere,  -visit,  -visus,  to  divide. 
dolere,  doluit,  to  feel  pain,  to  grieve 

for. 

dolor,  pain,  grief. 
dolus,  craft,  deceit. 
domus,  us,  fern,  (lias  some  forms  of 

the  -o  decl.),  a  house,  a  home. 
dubitare,  to  doubt,  to  hesitate. 
dubitatio,  doubt. 
dubius,  doubtful. 
ducentl    (duo    and    centum),    two 

hundred. 
ducere,  duxit,  ductus,  to  lead,  draw, 

consider. 

dum,  conj.,  while,  until. 
Dumnorix,  -igis,  a  man's  name, 
duo,  duse,  duo,  irreg.,  two. 


duodecim    (duo    and    decem),    in- 

decl.,  twelve. 
dux,  -cis  (ducere),  a  leader. 

E. 

educere,   -duxit,   -ductus,    to    lead 

out. 

effeminare,  to  make  effeminate,  ener- 
vate. 

efferre,  extulit,  elatus,  to  bear  out. 
ego,  / ;  see  mini,  me,  nos. 
egredi    (egredior),   -gressus,    to  go 

out. 
egregius  (e  and  grex,  -gis,  a  herd), 

out   of  the   (common)   herd,    hence, 

eminent,  excellent. 
emere,  emit,  emptus,  to  buy. 
emittere,   -misit,  -missus,   to  let  go 

forth,  to  send  oat. 
enim,  for;  placed  generally  after  the 

first  word  of  the  clause, 
enuntiare,  to  speak  out  or  openly,  make 

known. 
eo ;  see  ire. 

eo,  adv.,  to  that  place,  thither. 
eodem,  adv.,  to  the  same  place. 
eques,  equitis  (equus,  a  horse),  a 

horseman,  a  knight. 
equester,  equestris,  equestre,  adj., 

belonging  to  a  horseman,  cavalry. 
equitatus,  -us,  a  collection  of  horse- 
men, cavalry. 
equus  (same  root  as  ac-er,  sharp),  a 

horse. 
eripere    (eripio),    -ripuit,   -reptus, 

to  snatch  away. 

esse  (sum),  fuit,  futurus,  to  be. 
et,  and. 

etiam,  even,  also. 

evellere,  -vellit,  -vulsus,  to  tear  out. 
ex,  prep,  with  abl.,  out  of,  from. 


exemplum 


298 


Geuava 


exemplum,  an  example. 

exercitus,  -us,  an  exercised  and  dis- 
ciplined body,  an  army. 

exire,  -lit,  -itum,  to  go  out. 

exlstimare  (ex  and  eestimare),  to 
estimate,  think. 

exlstimatio  (exlstimare),  estimation, 
opinion. 

.expedire,  to  set  free  from  (some- 
thing) ;  the  pf.  pass,  partic.  is  com- 
monly used  like  an  adj.  in  all 
respects,  and  means  unencumbered, 
without  bdf/f/ttf/e,  open. 

explSrator  (explorare,  to  search  out), 
a  spy,  a  scout. 

expugnare  (to  fight  successfully),  to 
take  bi/  storm. 

exspectare,  to  wait  for,  to  expect. 

extremus,  outermost,  extreme,  the  end 
of;  cf.  reliquus,  the  rest  of. 


F. 


facere  (facio),  fecit,  factus,  to  make 

or  do. 

facile,  adv.,  easi/y. 
facilis,  easy, 
facultas,  opportunity. 
fames,  -is,  hunger. 
familia,  a  body  of  slaves,  household, 

retinue. 
familiaris  (familia),  belonging  to  the 

household,  private,  intimate ;  as  noun, 

a  friend. 
favere,   favit,   fauturus,   to  favor; 

takes  dat.  of  person, 
fere,  adv.,  almost. 
ferre,  tulit,  latus,  irreg  ,  to  bear. 
ferrum,  iron. 
fides,  el,  faith,  a  promise,  a  promise  of 

protection,  protection. 
fieri,  factus,  to  be  made,  to  be  done,  to 


happen;  used  as  pass,  of  simple 
verb  facere,  but  not  when  it  is 
compounded  with  a  prep. 

filia,  daughter. 

filius,  son. 

finis,  masc.  by  exception,  the  end;  in 
plur.  limits,  confines,  territory. 

finitimus  (fines,  borders,  boundaries], 
bordering  upon,  neighboring;  in  plur. 
masc.  usually  a  noun  meaning 
neighbors. 

firmus,  firm,  strong. 

flagitare,  to  ask  repeated! '//  or  earnestly. 

flere,  flevit,  fletus,  to  weep. 

nuere,  fluxit,  fluxus,  loflow. 

flumen,  a  river. 

fortis,  brave. 

fortitude  (fortis),  bravery. 

fortuna,  fortune  (either  good  or  bad) ; 
in  plur.  goods,  possessions. 

fossa,  that  which  has  been  dug,  a 
ditch. 

frater,  -tris,  brother. 

fraternus,  of  a  brother,  brotherly,  fra- 
ternal. 

frigus,  -oris,  cold,  coldness. 

fructus,  -us  (frui,  to  enjoy),  enjoyment, 
what  one  enjoys,  fruit. 

frumentarius  (frumentum),  belong- 
ing to  grain,  fruitful. 

frumentum,  grain. 

fuga,  flight. 

fugitivus,  a  runaway,  deserter. 

G. 

Gallus,  a  Gaul. 
Gallia,  Gaul. 
Gallicus,  Gallic. 
Garumna,  the  Garumna. 
Genava  or  Genua,   Geneva,  a  town 
in  Switzerland. 


gerere 


299 


incitare 


gerere,  gessit,  gestus,  to  earn/  on, 
wage. 

Germanl,  the  Germans. 

gladius,  a  sword. 

gloria,  a  glory. 

gloriari,  to  boast,  glory. 

Graecl,  the  Greeks. 

Grsecus,  adj.,  Greek. 

gratia,  favor  either  shown  or  re- 
ceived, hence,  either  kindness  or 
popularity,. 

graviter,  heavily,  severely  ;  graviter 
ferre,  to  be  annoyed  at,  be  angry  at. 

H. 

habere,  to  have,  hold. 

Haeduus,  a  Hceduan,  one  of  the  ffcedui. 

Hellenes,  the  Hellenes. 

Helvetia,  the  country   of  the   Hel- 

vetii,  now  Switzerland. 
Helvetius,  Helvetian,  of  the  Helvetii. 
Helvetil,  the  Helvetii. 
hibernus  (hiems,    winter],    belonging 

to  winter;   hiberna,   -orum   (with 

castra  understood),  winter  quarters. 
hie,  hasc,  hoc,  this. 
hiemare,  to  pass  the  winter,  to  winter. 
Hispania,  Spain. 
homo,  -inis,  a  human  being,  man. 
honor,  honor,  office. 
hora,  an  hour. 
hortari,  to  urge. 
hostis,  a  stranger,  an  enemy ;  in  plur. 

f/t>j  enemy. 
humanitas,  refinement. 


ibi,  there ;  cf.  ubi,  where,  ivhen. 
ictus,  -us,  (icere,  to  strikf),  a  blow. 
idem,  eadem,  idem,  the  same. 


Idus,  -uum,  fern,  by  exception,  the. 
Ides,  the  13th  of  the  month,  except 
in  March,  May,  July,  and  Oct., 
when  they  came  on  the  15th. 

ignorare  (in  neg.  and  root  of  (g)nos- 
cere),  not  to  know,  to  be  ignorant. 

ille,  ilia,  illud,  that,  used  of  what 
is  remote  in  contrast  to  what  if 
near. 

illic  (ille),  in  that  place,  there,  yonder. 

immortalis  (in  neg.  and  mors),  un- 
dying, immortal. 

impedimentum,  that  which  impedes, 
a  hindrance,'  in  plur.  the  heavy 
baggage  of  an  army  (including  the 
beasts  which  drew  it) ;  cf.  sar- 
cinse. 

impedire,  -pedivit,  -peditus  (in, 
against,  and  pes,  foot],  to  impede, 
to  place  at  a  disadvantage. 

impendere,  no  pf.  nor  pf.  partic., 
intrans.,  to  overhang. 

imperare,  to  command;  provincise 
milites  imperare,  to  give  orders  to 
the  province  for  soldiers. 

imperium,  supreme  power. 

impetrare,  to  obtain  one's  request. 

impetus,  -us  (in  prep,  and  petere), 
an  attack. 

importare,  they  bring  in,  import. 

improbus,  above  or  below  the  proper 
standard,  base,  excessive,  wicked, 

improviso,  adv.  (in  neg., pro,  before, 
fore,  visus,  seen),  unexpectedly. 

impune,  adv.,  without  punishment,  with 
impunity. 

impunitas,  impunity, 

in,  prep.,  into,  with  accus. ;  in,  with 
abi. 

incendere,  -cendit,  -census,  to  set 
fire  to;  cf.  comburere. 

incitare,  to  urge  on,  incite. 


incolere 


300 


ita 


incolere,  -coluit  (in  prep,  and  co- 
lere,  to  cultivate),  to  inhabit. 

incommodus,  inconvenient ;  as  a  noun 
in  the  neut.,  an  inconvenience,  a  mild 
term  for  misfortune. 

lucre dibilis,  not  to  be  believed,  incred- 
ible, remarkable. 

inde,  from  that  place,  thence ;  cf.  ibi, 
there. 

indicium,  information. 

inducere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to  lead 
into,  induce. 

inferior,  /W  r. 

inferre,  intulit,  illatus,  to  bear  into 
or  upon,  to  icage  upon. 

Snflectere,  -fiexit,  -flectus,  to  bend. 

influere,  -fluxit,  -fluxurus,  loflow,  or 
flow  into. 

inimicus  (in  neg  and  amlcus),  un- 
friendly. 

initium,  beginning. 

injuria,  injustice,  wrong. 

injussu,  found  only  in  abl.,  without 
command. 

inopia  (in  neg.  and  ops,  help ;  cf. 
copia,  from  con  and  ops),  want, 
scarcity,  helplessness. 

inopmans,  adj.,  unexpecting,  una- 
ware. 

Insciens  (in  neg.  and  scire,  to  know), 
simple  adj.,  though  pres.  partic.  in 
form,  not  knowing,  unaware. 

Insequi,  -secutus,  to  follow  up. 

Insidise,  nom.  plur.  (in,  in,  and  se- 
dere,  to  sit),  an  ambush,  treachery. 

inslgnis  (in,  upon,  and  signum,  a 
mark),  marked,  remarkable ;  insig- 
ne,  neut.  as  noun,  a  mark,  badge 
of  office,  uniform. 

Insolenter  (in  neg  and  solere,  to  be 
accustomed),  strangely,  insolently. 

Instare,  -stitit,  -staturus,  to   stand 


upon,  to  approach,  to  be  near  at 
hand,  to  press  upon. 

instituere,  -stituit,  -stitutus,  to  ar- 
range, construct,  instruct. 

institutum,  custom,  institution. 

instruere,  -struxit,  -structus,  to 
build  into,  set  in  order,  draw  up. 

intellegere  or  -ligere,  -lexit,  -lectus 
(inter,  between,  and  legere,  to 
choose),  to  understand,  to  know. 

inter,  prep,  with  accus.,  between, 
among. 

intercedere,  -cessit,  -cessurus,  to  go 
between,  to  intfrrene. 

intercludere,  -clusit,  -clusus  (inter, 
between  and  claudere,  to  shut),  to 
shut  off,  cut  off'. 

interdiu,  adv.,  by  day. 

interdum,  adv.,  sometimes. 

interea,  adv.,  meanwhile. 

interesse,  -fuit,  -futurus,  to  be  be- 
tween or  among,  to  take  part  in; 
interest,  it  makes  a  difference,  it 
interests. 

interficere  (interficio),  -fecit,  -fec- 
tus,  to  kill. 

interim,  meanwhile. 

intermittere,  -misit,  -missus,  to 
cause  to  go  between,  leave  off,  in- 
terrupt. 

internecio,  destruction,  extermination. 

interpres,  -etis,  an  interpreter. 

intervallum  (inter,  between,  and 
vallum,  the  breastwork  of  a  camp), 
a  distance  between,  an  interval. 

invitus,  unwilling. 

ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  intensive  or  em- 
phatic pron.,  self. 

ire  (eo),  ivit,  itum,  to  go. 

is,  ea,  id,  dem.  pron  ,  this,  that ;  he, 
she,  it. 

ita,  adv.,  so. 


itaque 


301 


Httera 


itaque,  and  so,  therefore. 
item,  adv.,  likewise,  also. 
iter,  itineris,  neut.,  journey,   route, 
march. 


J. 


jactare,  to  throw  about ;  when  used  of 
words,  to  discuss. 

jam,  adv.,  at  tltis  time  (as  contrasted 
with  the  past  or  future),  at  last, 
already. 

jubere,  jussit,  jussus,  to  order. 

judicare,  to  judge. 

judicium,  a  judgment,  a  trial,  a  court 
of  justice. 

jugum,  that  which  joins,  a  yoke  (con- 
quered armies,  in  token  of  sub- 
mission, were  often  compelled  to 
pass  under  a  yoke  consisting  of  a 
spear  set  on  two  uprights,  cf.  Eng. 
subjugate)  a  (ijoke- shaped)  hill,  a 
ridge. 

jumentum,  a  yoke  or  draught  animal, 
beast  of  burden. 

jungere,  junxit,  junctus,  to  join. 

Jura,  a  mountain  chain  extending 
from  the  Rhone  to  the  Rhine. 

jus,  juris,  right,  law,  justice. 

jusjurandum  (really  two  words,  jus 
and  jurandum,  and  declined  as 
two),  an  oath. 

justitia  (Justus,  just),  justice,  sense  of 
justice,  uprightness. 

juvare,  juvit,  jutus,  to  help ;  juvat, 
impers.,  it  pleases. 

K. 

Kalendse,  -arum,  the  Calends,  the  first 
day  of  a  month. 


L. 


lacessere,  lacesslvit  or  lacessiit, 
lacessitus,  to  provoke,  assail. 

lacrima,  a  tear. 

lacus,  -us,  a  lake. 

largiri,  largitus,  to  give  bountifully, 
yive  bribes. 

largiter,  largely,  bountifully. 

largitio,  lavish  giving,  bribery,  liber- 
ality. 

late,  widely. 

latus,  wide,  broad. 

latitude,  width. 

latus,  -eris,  the  side. 

legatio,  embassy ;  cf.  legatus,  am- 
bassador. 

legatus,  lieutenant,  ambassador. 

legio,  a  legion  ;  the  Roman  legion  was 
a  body  of  soldiers,  numbering  in 
the  army  of  CaBsar  about  3600  men. 

Lemannus,  the  name  of  a  lake, 
Leman  or  Geneva. 

lenitas  (lenis,  smooth),  smoothness, 
gentleness. 

lex,  -gis,  la uo. 

liberalitas  ( liber, /ree),  the  quality  of 
a  freeman,  generosity. 

libere  (from  adj.  liber) ,  freely. 

Ifberl  (the  sing.,  meaning  child,  not 
found),  children. 

libertas,  freedom,  liberty. 

liceri,  to  bid  (at  an  auction). 

licet,  it  is  permitted;  el  licet,  it  is 
permitted  to  him,  he  may. 

Lingeries,  the  Line/ones. 

lingua,  the  tongue,  language. 

linter,  -tris,  fern,  by  exception,  a 
boat. 

littera  or  litera,  a  written  sign,  a 
letter  of  the  alphabet ;  in  plur.  letters, 
a  letter  (epistle),  literature. 


locus 


302 


multitude 


locus,  a  place ;  loca,  nom.  plur.  (as 
if  from  nom.  sing,  locum). 

longe,  adv.,  far. 

longitude,  length. 

loqul,  locutus,  to  speak. 

Lucius,  a  Roman  first  name,  usually 
represented  by  L. 

lux,  -cis,  light. 

M. 

magis  (comp.  of  magnopere),  more. 

magistratus,  -us,  a  civil  office,  a  civil 
officer,  magistrate. 

magnopere,  adv.  (magno  and 
opere),  with  great  toil,  greatly; 
magis,  comp.,  more  ;  maxime,  sup., 
very  f/reatly,  most,  especially. 

magnus,  great,  large. 

major  (comp  of  magmis),  greater; 
majores  natu  or  simply  maj5res, 
those  greater  by  birth,  ancestors,  elders. 

maleficium  (male,  adv.,  badly,  and 
facere),  wrong-doing,  an  evil  deed. 

mandare  (manus,  the  hand,  and 
dare) ,  to  give  into  one's  hand,  commit. 

manus,  -us,  fern,  by  exception,  a 
hand,  an  armed  force  (as  the  instru- 
ment by  which  war  is  waged). 

matara, a  javelin  used  by  the  Gauls. 

mater,  -tris,  mother. 

matrimonium,  marriage. 

Matrona,  the  Matrona. 

maturare,  to  hasten. 

maturus,  ripe,  early. 

maxime,  very  greatly,  most,  especially 

maximus,  irregular  sup.  of  magnus, 
greatest. 

me,  accus.,  me  ;  see  ego. 

medius,  adj.,  the  middle  of;  cf.  the 
meaning  of  summus  and  ex- 
tremus. 


memoria,  memory. 

mensis,  -is,  masc.  by  exception,  a 

month. 

mercator,  merchant. 
mererl,   meritus,   to   merit,   deserve, 

earn. 

meritum  (mererl),  desert,  merit. 
metirl,  mensus,  to  measure. 
meus,  mi/,  mine. 
mihi,  dat,  me  ;  see  ego. 
militaris     (miles),     belonging     to     a 

soldier,  m  Hilary. 
miles,  -itis,  soldier. 
mllle  (in  sing,  usually  an  inclecl.  adj. ; 

in  plur.  a  noun  decl.  like  mare),  a 

thousand. 
minime,   adv.   in  sup.,   least,   by   no 

means ;  cf.  minus, 
minimus    (irreg.    sup.   of    parvus), 

least,  very  small. 

minor  (comp.  of  parvus),  smaller,  less. 
minuere,  minuit,  minutus  (minus), 

to  lessen. 
minus,  adv.  in  comp.,  less;  minime, 

sup  ,  least. 
mittere,   mlsit,   missus,   to    let  go, 

send. 

modo,  adv.,  only. 
molere,  moluit,  molitus,  to  grind. 
monere,  to  remind,  warn,  advise. 
mons,  masc.  by  exception,  a  moun- 
tain. 
morarl,  trans,  or  intrans.,  to  delay ; 

distinguish  mori,  to  die. 
mori  (rarely  moriri),  mortuus,  to 

die. 

mors,  death. 
mos,  moris,  custom  ;  in  plur.  customs, 

manners,  character. 
movere,  movit,  motus,  to  move. 
mulier,  -is,  a  woman. 
multitudo,  a  great  number,  multitude. 


multus 


303 


oblivisci 


multus,    much ;    plur.   many ;    plus, 

comp.  neut. ;  plurimus,  sup. 
munlre   (moenia,  walls),  to   wall,   to 

fortify- 

munitio,  a  fortifying,  a  fortification. 
murus,  a  wall. 

N. 

nam,  conj.,for. 

natura,  nature,  disposition. 

navis,  a  ship,  a  boat. 

ne,  conj.,  that  .  .  .  not,  not  to,  lest; 

after  words  of  fearing,  that. 
nee ;  see  neque. 
necessario,      adv.,      necessarily,     of 

necessity. 
necessarius,  necessary ;   as  noun,  a 

dose  friend  or  near  relative. 
negare,  to  say  .  .  .  not,  to  deny. 
nemo,  nemini  dat.  (ne  and  homo), 

no  man,  no  one ;  the  gen.  and  abl. 

sing,  of  this  word  are  supplied  by 

nullius  and  nullo. 
neque  or  nee,  adv.  and  conj.,  and 

not ;   neque    .    .   .   neque,  neither 

.  .  .  nor. 
nervus,  a  sinew,  tendon,  nerve ;  in  plur. 

power,  strength. 
neve   or   neu  (ne  and   ve,   or),  or 

not. 
nex,  necis,  death,  especially  a  violent 

death. 
nihilum,  nothing;  nihil,  the  indecl. 

form,  is  more  common, 
nisi,  if  not,  unless. 
nitl,  nisus,  or  nixus,  to  rest  upon, 

rely  upon,  strive. 

nobilis,  well-krown,  noble  bi/  birth. 
nobilitas,  nobility;  cf.  nobilis,  high- 
born. 
noctu,  adv.,  by  night. 


nolle,  noluit  (ne  and  velle),  to  be 

unwilling. 
nomen,  a  name. 
nominating  adv.,  by  name. 
non,  adv.,  not. 
nonaginta,  ninety. 
nondum,  not  yet. 
nonnullus,  not  none,  some. 
nonnunquam,   not   never,  sometimes ; 

cf.  nonnullus. 

Noricus,  of  the  Nor  id,  Noric. 
nos,  noiu.  or  accus.  plur.,  we  or  us. 
noster,  -tra,  -trum,  our. 
novem,  indecl.,  nine. 
novus,  new ;  novae  res,  new  things, 

revolution. 
nox,  -ctis,  night. 
nubere,  nupsit,  nuptus,  to  veil  one's 

self,  hence,  to   marry  (said  of  the 

woman) ;  hominl  nubere,  to  veil 

one's  self  for  a  man,  marry  a  man. 
nudus,  naked,  unprotected. 
nullus  (gen.-Ius,  dat.  -i),adj.(ne,nof, 

and  ulluSj  am/),  not  any,  no,  none. 
num,  interrogative  particle  ;  in  direct 

questions  expects  a  neg.  answer, 
numerus,  a  number. 
nuntiare,  to  announce. 
nuntius    (perhaps   akin    to    novus, 

new],  a   bearer  of  news,  messenger, 

news. 
nuper,  recently. 

O. 

ob,  prep,  with  accus.,  on  account  of;  in 
composition,  in  the  way  of,  against. 

obseratus,  one  bound  to  service  for  debt, 
a  debtor. 

obicereor-jicere(obicio),-jecit,-jec- 
tus,  to  throw  in  the  ivay  or  against. 

oblivisci,  -Htus,  to  forget. 


obsecrare 


304 


perfringere 


obsecrare  (ob  and  sacrum,  sacred), 

to  ask  on  religious  grounds,  io  beseech. 
obses,  obsidis,  a  hostage ;  hostages 

were  human  beings  given  by  on<; 

person   or   nation    to   another,    in 

order  to  guarantee  the  fulfilment 

of  an  agreement ;  if  the  agreement 

was  broken,  the  hostages  might  be 

killed, 
obstringere,  -,strinxit,  -strictus,  to 

bind. 
obtinere,   -tinuit,   -tentus,   to  hold, 

possess,  OCCUJH/. 

occasus,  -us,  a  falling,  setting. 
occldere,     -cldit,    -clsus    (ob    and 

caedere,  to  cut),  to  cut  down,  kill. 
occultare,  to  conceal. 
occupare,  to  seize,  take,  possession  of. 
Oceanus,  the  ocean. 
Ocelum,  a  town  in  Cisalpine  Gaul, 
octo,  eight. 
octodecim,  eighteen. 
octoginta,  indecl.  adj.,  eighty. 
oculus,  an  eye. 
odisse,  odit,  to  hate ;  found  only  in 

the  pf.  system,  and  in  the  pf.  is 

pres.  in  sense, 
offendere,    -fendit,    -fensus,    to  hit 

against,  stumble,  blunder,  ojfend. 
offensio      (ofiendere),      a      striking 

against,  a  stumbling,  offence. 
omnino,  adv.,  altogether,  in  all. 
omnis,  all,  every. 
oportet,  impers.  verb,  it  is  necessary, 

it  behooves. 

oppidum,  a  stronghold,  a  town,    [siege. 
oppugnare,  to  fight  against,  storm,  be~ 
ops,  ability  ;  in  plur.  means,  resources. 
opus,  -eris,  a  work,  a  piece  of  work. 
orare,  to  entreat,  bey. 
oratio,  a  speech,  oration. 
Orgetorix,  -igis,  an  Helvetian  chief. 


oriens,  adj.,  rising. 

oriri,  ortus,  to  rise. 

ostendere,  ostendit,  ostentus  (oba 
for  ob,  and  tendere,  to  stretch), 
to  stretch  in  the  way  of,  show. 


P. 

pabulatio    (pabular!),    a    getting   of 

food,  a  foraging. 
pabulum  (pascere,  to  feed,  pasture), 

that  which  feeds,  food,  especially  for 

animals,/orfe/er. 
pacare,  to  pacify,  to  subdue. 
paene,  almost. 
pagus,  canton,  district. 
par,  paris,  adj.,  equal. 
parare,  to  make  ready,  prepare. 
paratus  (pf.  pass,  partic.  of  parare), 

prepared,  ready. 

parere,  to  appear  at  call  (as  a  serv- 
ant), to  obey  ;  takes  dative, 
pars,  part,  direction. 
parvus,  minor,  minimus,  little,  small. 
passus,  -us,  a  pace ;  the  lloman  mile 

was   a   thousand    paces,   and   the 

Roman  (double)  pace  was  a  little 

less  than  five  feet, 
pater,  -tris,  father. 
patere,  patuit,  to  lie  open,  extend, 
pati,  passus,  to  endure,  permit. 
pauci  (sing,  very  rare), /CM?. 
pax,  pacis,  peace. 
pellere,  pepuli,  pulsus,  to  drive. 
per,  prep,  with  accus.,  through. 
perducere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to  lead 

through. 
perficere  (perficio),  -fecit,  -fectus, 

to  accomplish,  finish. 
perfringere  (per   and   frangere,  to 

break],  -fregit,   -fractus,   to   break 

through . 


perfuga 


305 


praeficere 


perfuga,  masc.  by  meaning,  a  run- 
away, deserter. 
perfugere  (perfugio),  -fugit,  to  run 

away,  desert. 

periculum,  that  which  tests,  a  peril. 
peritus    (perlrl,  to  try),  experienced, 

skilled. 
permovere,  -movit,  -motus,  to  move 

thoroughly    or    deeply,    to    influence 

strongly. 

pernicies,  -el  (nex),  destruction. 
perpaucus,  very  little;  in  plur.  very 

fetv. 
perrumpere,    -rupit,     -ruptus,     to 

break  through. 

persequi,  -secutus,  to  follow  up,  pur- 
sue. 

perseverare,  to  continue,  persist. 
persolvere,  -solvit,  -solutus,  to  loose 

thoroughly,  to  pay  in  full. 
persuadere,  persuasit,  persuasum, 

to  persuade. 

perterrere,  to  frighten  thoroughly. 
pertinere,   -tinuit,  stretch  oat,   tend, 

pertain. 
pervenlre,  -venit,  -ventum,  to  come 

through,  arrive. 
pes,  pedis,  a  foot  of  man  or  beast, 

and  also  the  measure  of  length, 
petere,  petivit,  petitus,  to  aim  at, 

seek. 
phalanx,  -gis,  a  close  battle  array,  a 

phalanx. 

pllum,  a  heavy  javelin. 
plebs,  -bis,  plebeians,  common  people. 
plurimus,  irreg.  sup.  of  multus,  very 

much,  most ;  in  plur.,  very  many. 
plus,pluris  (neut.comp.  of  multus), 

more. 

poena,  punishment,  penalty. 
polliceri,  pollicitus,  to  promise. 
ponere,  posuit,  positus,  to  place. 


p5ns,  masc.  by  exception,  a  bridge. 

popular!,  to  lay  waste. 

populatio  (popularl),  a  laying  waste, 
ravaging. 

populus,  people. 

portare,  to  carry. 

port5rium  (portare),  a  tax,  espe- 
cially a  tax  paid  on  goods  im- 
ported. 

poscere,  poposcit,  to*  ask  urgently, 
demand. 

posse,  potuit  (potis,  able,  and  esse, 
to  be),  to  be  able. 

possessio,  a  possession. 

post,  prep,  with  accus.,  after,  behind. 

postea,  adv.,  after  that,  ajlerwards. 

posterus  (post),  coming  after,  Jollow- 
ing. 

postquam,  conj.,  later  than,  after,  as 
soon  as. 

postrldie,  adv.  (posterus  and  dies ; 
cf.  pridie) ,  on  the  day  after ;  postrl- 
die ejus  diei,  on  the  day  after  this 
day,  on  the  following  day. 

potens,  being  able,  powei'ful. 

potentia  (potens),  power. 

potestas  (posse),  power,  lawful  au- 
thority. 

potirl,  potitus,  to  obtain;  takes  abl. 

praecedere,  -cessit,  -cessus,  to  pre- 
cede, surpass. 

praecipere  (praecipio),  -cepit,  -cep- 
tus,  to  take  beforehand,  to  anticipate, 
to  give  rules,  instruct.,  direct. 

prseesse,  -fuit,  to  be  over,  to  com' 
mand;  cf.  praeficere,  tn  put  in  com- 
mand. 

praeferre,  -tulit,  -latus,  to  bear  before, 
prefer,  choose. 

prseflcere  (praeficio),  -fecit,  -fectus, 
to  put  before,  set  over,  put  in  com' 
mand. 


20 


praemitteie 


306 


Fyrenseus 


praemittere,  -misit,  -missus,  to  send 
before. 

praeoptare,  to  choose  rather,  prefer. 

praesens  (in  form,  a  partic.  from 
prseesse),  present,  immediate. 

praesentia  (prae  and  esse),  a  being 
present,  presence ;  in  praesentia,  at 
present. 

praesertim,  especially. 

praesidium,  a  sitting  before,  a  guard. 

praestare,  -stitit,  -status,  to  stand  be- 
fore, excel,  furnish  ;  praestat,  it  is 
better. 

praeter,  prep,  with  accus.,  along  by, 
beyond,  except. 

praeterire,  -lit,  -itus,  to  <jo  by,  pass 
by;  praeterita,  things  gone  bij,  the 
past. 

praeterquam,  adv.,  further  than,  be- 
yond, besides. 

praetor  (praB  and  ire),  a  leader,  com- 
mander, judge,  governor. 

preces,  prayers. 

prendere  (also  written  prehendere), 
prendit,  prensus,  to  grasp. 

pretium,  a  price. 

pridie,  adv.  (primus  and  dies;  cf. 
postridie),  on  the  day  before ;  pridie 
ej  as  diei,  on  the  day  before  this  day, 
on  the  preceding  day. 

primum,  adv.,  in  the  first  place, 
first. 

primus,  first. 

princeps,  -cipis,  adj.  or  noun,  chief. 

principatus,  -us,  leadership. 

pristinus,  former. 

prius,  adv.  in  comp.,  sooner;  prius 
quam  or  priusquam,  conj.,  sooner 
than,  before. 

privatim,  privately,  as  private  citizens. 

prlvatus,  belonging  to  an  individual, 
private. 


pro,  prep,  with  abl.,  in  front  of,  in 
behalf  of ,  instead  of ,  for,  in  propor- 
tion to. 

probare,  to  test,  prove,  approve. 

prodere,  -didit,  -ditus,  to  put  forth, 
transmit,  hand  down. 

proelium,  battle. 

profectio,  a  setting  out,  departure. 

proficisci,  -fectus  (pro  and  facere, 
to  make  forward,  make  headway),  set 
out,  depart. 

prohibere,  to  keep  away,  prevent. 

proicere  or  -jicere  (proicio),  -jecit, 
-jectus,  to  throw  before  or  forth,  fi 'ing 
aicay. 

prope,  adv.  and  prep,  with  accus., 
near;  sup.  proxime. 

propellere,  -pulit,  -pulsus,  to  drive 
before. 

propinquus,  near;  as  noun,  a  rela- 
tive. 

proponere,  -posuit,  -positus,  to  put 
or  set  forth,  dtclare. 

propter,  prep,  with  accus.,  on  account 

°f- 

propterea,  adv.,  for  this  reason. 
prospicere      (prospicio),      -spexit, 

-spectus,  to  look  forward,  look  out 

for. 

provincia,  province. 
proxime,  adv.,  latest,  last,  next. 
proximus,  nearest. 
publice,  publicly,  by  public  authority. 
publicus,  public. 
Publius,  a  Roman  first  name,  usually 

represented  by  the  initial  P. 
puer,  -I,  a  child,  boy. 
pugna,  a  fight. 
pugnare,  to  fight. 
purgare,  to  make  clear,  clear. 
putare,  to  think. 
Pyrenaeus,  Pyrenean,ofthe  Pyrenees. 


qua 


307 


repellere 


Q. 

qua,  where, 

quadraginta,  indecl.  adj.,  forty. 

quadringenti,  adj.,  /our  hundred;  cf. 

quadraginta,  indecl.,  forty. 
quserere,  quaeslvit  or  -lit,  quaesitus, 

to  seek  ;  cf.  queri,  to  complain. 
qualis,  adj.,  of  what  sort. 
quam,  adv.  and  conj.,  how,  as,  than; 

with  sup.  denotes  the  highest  pos- 

sible degree. 
quantus,    adj.     (quam,    how),   how 

great,   as   much    as;    after   tantus 

(.so  great),  quantus  maybe  trans- 

lated as. 
quare   (qua  and  re),  on  account  of 

which  thing,  wherefore. 
quartus,  fourth. 
quattuor,  indecl.,  four. 
-que,  conj.,  and  ;  enclitic. 
queri,  questus,  to  complain. 
qui,  quae,   quod,   who,  which,  what; 

also  used  as  interrogative  adj. 
quidem,  indeed  ;  in  Cresar  mostly  in 

the  phrase  ne  .   .   .   quidem,  en- 

closing the   emphatic   word,   thus 

ne  Caesar  quidem,  not  even  C&sar. 
quin,  conj.,  when  used  with  the  ind., 

but,  nay  more,  in  fact  ;  when   used 

with  the  su\)jv.,that,  but  that,  that  not. 
quindecim"(quinque  and   decem), 

fifteen. 

quingenti,  fice  hundred. 
quini,  distributive,  five  to  each,  five 

at  a  time. 


qulntus,  fifth. 

quis,  quae,   quid,   indefinite   pron., 

any  one,  anything. 
quis,  quae,  quid,  interrogative  pron., 

who  ?  which  ?  what  ? 


quisquam,  quaequam,  quidquam, 
any  one,  anything;  used  in  neg. 
clauses. 

quisque,quaeque,quidque  or  quod- 
que,  each  one,  every  one. 

quod,  conj.,  because. 

quoque,  conj.,  also. 

quotldianus,  daily. 

quotidie,  adv.,  daily. 

quum,  conj  ;  see  cum. 

R. 

rapina  (rapere,  to  seize),  plundering. 
ratio,  a  reckoning,  account,  considera- 
tion, plan,  reason. 
ratis,  a  raft, 
recens,  fresh,  recent. 
recipere  (recipio),  -cepit,  -ceptus, 

to  take  back,  receive ;  se  recipere, 

to  betake  oneself,  to  retreat. 
redimere,    -emit,   -emptus,   to    buy 

back,  buy  up. 
redintegrare,  to   make   whole  again, 

renew. 

redire,  -il,  -itiirus,  to  go  back. 
reditio,  a  going  back,  return. 
reducere,    -duxit,    -ductus,  to  lead 

back,  withdraw. 
referre,  -tulit,  -latus,  to  bring  back, 

report. 

regnum,  royal  poirer,  kingdom. 
reicere  or  rejicere  (reicio),  -jecit, 

-jectus,  to  throw  back. 
relinquere,  -liquit,  -lictus,  to  leave. 
reliquus,  adj.,  the  rest  of,  remaining. 
reminisci,  to  remember. 
removere,  -movit,  -motus,  to  move 

back,  remove.  [  port. 

renuntiare,   to   bring  back   word,   re- 
repellere,   -pulit,  -pulsus,  to   drive 

back. 


r  T? 


repentmus 


308 


silva 


repentmus,  sudden. 

reperire,  repperit,  repertus,  to  find 

out. 
reprehendere,  -hendit,  -hensus,  to 

hold  back,  blame. 

repugnare,  to  fight  back,  be  opposed. 
res,  rel,  a  thing  (in  the  widest  sense) ; 

its    translation    will   vary    widely 

with  the  context, 
rescindere,  -scidit,  -scissus,  to  cut 

away,  break  i/oicti. 
resciscere,  -scivit  or  -sciit,  -scltus, 

to  find  out. 
resistere,  -stitit,  to  stand  back,  stop, 

resist. 
respondere,  -spondit,   -sponsus,   to 

answer^ 

responsum,  the  thing  answered,  a  reply. 
respublica (also  written  as  two  words, 

res  publica,  and   always  decl.   as 

two),  the  commonweal,  state,  republic. 
restituere,  -stituit,  -stitutus,  to  set 

up  again,  restore. 

retinere,  -tinuit,  -tentus,  to  holdback. 
reverti,  -versus,  dep.,  to  return  ;  in 

the   pf.    tenses,   the   stem   of  act. 

form  revertit  was  used  by  Caesar. 
Rhenus,  the  Rhine. 
Rhodanus,  the.  Rhone. 
ripa,  the  bank  of  a  river. 
rogare,  to  ask. 

Roman!,  Romanorum,  the  Romans. 
Romanus,  adj.,  Roman. 
rota,  a  wheel. 
rursus,  adv.  (for  reversus,  from  re- 

vertere),  turned  back,  back,  again. 


S. 


saepe,  adv.,  often. 

salus,  -utis,  a  sound  condition,  health, 
welfare,  safety. 


sarcinse,  sacks,  bundles,  especially 
soldiers'  packs  (carried  by  each 
soldier)  ;  cf.  impedimenta. 

satis,  adv.  or  adj.,  sufficiently,  enough. 

satisfacere  (satisfacio),  -iecit,  -fac- 
turus.to  do  enough,  satisfy,  apologize. 

scelus,  -eris,  a  crime. 

scire,  scivit,  scitus,  to  know. 

scutum,  a  shield,  oblong,  wooden  and 
covered  with  leather. 

secrete,  separately,  in  private. 

secundus,  following,  second,  favorable 
(a  wind  following  or  right  astern 
would  be  a.  favorable  wind). 

sed,  conj  ,  but. 

sedecim  (sex  and  decem),  indecl. 
numeral,  six  and  ten,  sixteen. 

seditiosus,  seditious. 

sementis,  a  sowing,  planting. 

semper,  always. 

senatus,  -us,  a  bodi/  of  old  men,  a 
senate. 

senex,  senis,  an  old  man. 

seni  (sex),  distributive,  six  to  each, 
six  at  a  time. 

sentlre,  sensit,  sensus,  to  feel,  per- 
ceive, think. 

separatim,  separately. 

septentrio  or  septentriones,  the 
Great  Bear,  the  north. 

Septimus,  seventh. 

sepultura,  a  burying,  burial. 

Sequana,  fern.,  the  Seine. 

Sequani,  the  Sequani. 

sequi,  secutus,  to  follow. 

servitus,  -utis  (servus,  a  slave), 
servitude. 

seu ;  see  sive. 

sex,  six. 

sexaginta,  sixty. 

si,  conj.,  if. 

silva,  a  forest. 


simul 


309 


suscipere 


simul,  adv  ,  at  the  same  time,  at  once. 
sin  (si  and  ne,  not),  but  if. 
sine,  prep,  with  abl.,  without. 
singuli,  one  to  each,  one  at  a  time. 
sinister,  -tra,  -trum,  on  the  left  side, 

left;    sinistra    (manus),    the    left, 

hand;  cf.  dextra. 
sive,  conj.  (si  and  vel),  or  if;  sive 

.   .   .  sive,    whether   .  .   .   or,  eithtr 

.   .  .  or. 

socer,  father-in-law. 
socius,  an  ally. 

sol,  masc.  by  exception,  the  sun. 
solum,  adv.,  only;  non  solum,  .  .  . 

sed  etiam,  not  only,  .  .  .  but  also. 
solum,  the  soil,  the  around. 
solus  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -I),  adj.,  alone. 
soror,  sister. 
spatium,  extent,  either  of   space  or 

time. 

spectare,  to  look,  face. 
sperare,  to  hope,  expect. 
spes,  -el,  hope. 
spontis  gen.,   sponte  abl.,  wanting 

in  other  cases  ;  in  abl.,  with  sua, 

it  means   of  one's   own   accord,  by 

one's  self. 
statuere,  statuit,  statutus,  to  cause 

to  stand,  establish,  decide. 
studere,    studuit,   to    be    eager  for, 

desire. 

studium,  zeal,  devotion,  a  pursuit. 
sub,  prep,  with  accus.  or  abl..  under. 
subducere,  -duxit,  -ductus,  to  draw 

from  below,  draw  up,  withdraiv. 
subesse,  -fuit,  -futurus,  to  be  under, 

be  near. 
subicere     or    subjicere     (subicio), 

-jecit,  -jectus,  to  throw  under,  place 

beneath. 
subire,  -lit,  -itus,  irreg.,  to  go  under 

or  near,  to  undergo. 


sublevare,   to  lift  up  from   beneath, 

a  id. 

submovere ;  see  summovere. 
subsistere,  -stitit,  to   make  a  stand, 

resist. 
subvehere,  -vexit,  -vectus,  to  carry 

from  below,  i.  e.  to  carry  up. 
succedere,  -cessit,  -cessurus,  to  go 

under,    march    up,    take    the    place 

of- 
sui,   gen.   sing,  or  plur.,  of  himself, 

herself,  itself,  themselves. 
sum ;  see  esse. 
sumere,  sumpsit,  sumptus,  to  take 

up,  assume. 
summa  [the  fem.  of   summus  as  a 

noun,  the  highest  (part),  the  top],  the 

sum. 
summus   (irreg.   sup.   of   superus), 

highest. 
summovere  or  submovere,  -movit, 

-motus,  to  remove,  dislodge. 
sumptus,  -us  (sumere),  expense. 
superare,  to  overcome,  surpass. 
superesse,    -fuit,    -futurus,    to    be 

over  (i.  e.  left  over),  to  survive;  cf. 

praeesse. 
superus,    superior,    supremus    or 

summus,  h igh,  higher,  highest;  su- 
perior, when  used  of  time,  means 

former. 
suppetere,  -petivit,  -petiturus  (sub 

and  petere),  to  be  on  hand,  be  in 

store. 
suppliciter  (supplex),  suppliantly,  as 

a  suppliant. 
supplicium  (sub  and  plicare,  to  fold, 

bend,  as  the  knees  in  kneeling),  a 

kneeling,  supplication,  punishment. 
supra,  adv.,  above,  before. 
suscipere  (suscipio),  -cepit, -ceptus 

(subs   for   sub,  from   under,   and 


suspitio 


310 


urbs 


capere)  to  take  from  under,  take  up 

or  upon,  undertake. 
suspitio  or  suspicio,  suspicion. 
sustinere,    -tinuit,    -tentus     (subs 

for  sub,  from  under,  and  tenere), 

to  hold  up,  hold  out  against,  support, 

sustain. 
suus,  possessive  adj.  pron.,  his,  her, 

its,  their. 


T. 


tabula,  a  board;  bence,  from  the 
practice  of  using  for  records 
boards  covered  with  wax,  a  writing- 
tablet,  or  the  icriting  on  a  tablet. 

tacere,  to  be  silent ;  also  sometimes 
transitive,  to  be  silent  about,  pass 
over  in  silence. 

tarn,  adv.,  .so  (used  mostly  before  adv. 
and  adj.). 

tamen,  adv.,  yet,  nevertheless. 

tandem  [tarn,  .so,  and  termination 
-dem  (cf.  idem),  just  so  far,  so  long], 
at  last ;  in  a  question,  pray. 

tantus,  adj.,  so  much,  so  great. 

telum,  a  weapon  used  for  fighting  at 
a  distance,  a  missile. 

temperantia  (temperare),  self-con- 
trol, moderation.  [  frain. 

temperare,  to  govern   one's   self,  re- 

temptare  or  tentare  ("tenere),  to 
handle,  try. 

tempus,  -oris,  time. 

tenere,  tenuit,  tentus,  to  hold. 

terra,  the  earth,  a  country. 

tertius,  third. 

testis,  masc.  or  fern.,  a  witness. 

timere,  timuit,  to  fear. 

timor  (timere), year,  alarm. 

Titus,  a  Roman  first  name,  usually 
represented  by  initial  T. 


tolerare,  to  bear,  endure,  maintain. 
tollere,  sustulit,  sublatus,  irreg.,  to 

lift  tip,  remove,  destroy. 
totus  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -1),  the  whoje,  the 

whole  of,  entire. 
tradere,  -didit,  -ditus,  to  hand  over, 

hand  down,  surrender. 
traducere  or  transducere,  -duxit, 

-ductus,  to  lead  across ;  cf.  transire. 
tragula,  a  heavy,  Gallic  javelin. 
trans,  prep,  with  accus.,  across. 
transfigere,  -fixit,  -fixus,  to  pierce 

through,  transfix. 
transire,  -iit,  -itus,  to  go  across. 
trecenti,  adj.,  three  hundred. 
tres,  three. 
tribuere,  tribuit,  tributus,  to  assign, 

ascribe. 
triduum,  the  space  of  three  days ;  cf, 

biduum. 

triginta,  indecl.  adj.,  thirty. 
triplex,   -icis   (tres  and  plicare,  to 

fold),  threefold,  triple. 
turn,  adv.  of  time,  then. 
tuus,  thy,  thine,  your  ;  cf.  suus. 

u. 

ubi,  when,  where. 
ulciscl,  ultus,  to  avenge,  punish. 
ullus  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -I),  adj.,  any. 
ulterior,     adj.     (positive     wanting, 

ultimus,  sup.),  farther. 
una,  adv.,  together, 
unde,fro7n  which  place,  ivhence. 
undique,  adv.,  from  all  sides,  on  all 

sides. 

unus  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -I),  adj.,  one. 
urbs,  a  city ;  to  a  Roman,  often  the 

city  of  Rome,  just  as  "  the  city  " 

means  Boston  to  one  living  in  the 

suburbs  of  that  city. 


lit 


311 


vulnus 


ut  or  uti,  conj.,  that,  in  order  that,  so 
that ;  if  followed  J>y  the  ind.,  as  or 
when. 

uter,  -tra,  -trum  (gen.  -lus,  dat.  -1), 
adj.,  which  (of  two)  ? 

uti,  usus,  to  use  ;  takes  abl. 

uxor,  wife. 

V. 

vacare,  to  be  empty,  vacant. 

vadum,  n  ford,  a  shalloiv. 

vagarl,  to  wander, 

valere,  valuit,  valiturus,  to  be  strong 

or  powerful,  to  avail. 
vallum  (vallus,  a  stake),  a  line  of 

stakes,  a  palisade,  generally   with 

earth  behind  it,  a  wall  of  earth,  a 

rampart. 
vastare     (vastus,    empty),  to    make 

empty,  to  lay  waste. 
veetigal,  tax,  revenue. 
vel,  or ;  vel  .  .  .  vel,  either  .  .  .  or. 
velle,  voluit,  irreg.,  to  wish. 
venire,  venit,  ventum,  to  come. 
verbum,  a  word. 
vereri,  to  feel  awe  of,  fear. 
vergere,  to  slope,  verge,  be  situated. 
vergobretus,  the  title  of   the  chief 

magistrate  among  the  Haedui. 
verus,  true,  right. 
vesper,  -I,  the  evening. 
vester,  -tra,  -trum,  your,  plur. ;  cf. 

tuus,  thy  or  your,  sing, 
veteranus,  old,  veteran ;   as  noun,  a 

tried  soldier,  a  veteran. 
vetus,  -eris,  old,  former. 


vexare,  to  annoy,  vex. 

via,  ivay. 

victoria,  victory. 

vicus  (cf.  -wich  in  Norwich),  a  group 
of  houses,  a  village,  street. 

videre,  vldit,  visus,  to  see  ;  in  pass., 
often,  to  seem. 

vigilia,  watchful  ness,  a  watch  of  the 
nig/it ;  the  Romans  divided  the 
night  from  sunset  to  sunrise,  what- 
ever its  length,  into  four  equal 
watches. 

viginti,  indecl.,  twenty. 

vincere,  vicit,  victus,  to  conquer. 

vinculum  or  vinclum,  that  which 
binds,  hence,  a  rope,  chain,  fetter. 

virtus,  -utis,  virtue,  valor. 

vis,  gen.  vis,  force,  violence;  in  plur. 
vires,  strength. 

vita,  life. 

vitare,  to  shun. 

vix,  adv.,  with  effort,  with  difficultly, 
scarcely. 

vocare,  to  call,  summon. 

volebat;  see  velle. 

voluntas  (volent(i)-,  stem  of  pres. 
pnrtic.  of  velle,  to  wish,  and  -tas), 
willingness,  will,  desire. 

vos,  nom.  and  accus.  plur.,  you;  cf. 
poss.  adj.  vester. 

vulgus  or  volgus  (of  the  -o  decl., 
neut.  by  exception,  and  hence  hav- 
ing nom.  and  accus.  alike  ;  wanting 
in  plur.),  the  public,  the  crowd,  the 
mob. 

vulnerare  or  volnerare,  to  wound. 

vulnus  or  volnus,  a  wound. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


NOTE.  —  The  following  Vocabulary  contains  the  most  common  meanings  of  the 
Latin  words  used  in  the  first  twenty  Chapters  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  Where  proper 
names  have  the  same  form  in  English  as  in  Latin,  it  has  been  thought  unnecessary 
to  give  them. 

The  Vocabulary  is  intended  to  be  merely  suggestive.  Fuller  particulars  in 
regard  to  all  these  words  will  be  found  in  the  Latin-English  Vocabulary.  The  pupil 
who  thoroughly  masters  the  words  as  they  occur  in  the  Lessons  will  need  to  con- 
sult this  Vocabulary  very  little.  In  all  cases,  before  looking  up  a  word  the  Latin  for 
which  seems  unfamiliar,  stop  and  think  where  that  word  has  occurred  in  the  text. 
Then  look  up  the  passage,  and  note  the  construction  and  any  peculiarity  in  the  use 
of  the  word.  Only  thus  can  skill  in  Latin  composition  be  gained.  Study  the  text 
and  base  your  own  Latin  upon  it. 

If  you  fail  to  find  the  word  you  are  looking  for,  turn  to  its  simplest  synonym. 
The  number  of  Latin  words  in  common  use  is  more  limited  than  in  English,  and 
many  simple  Latin  words  have  a  great  variety  of  English  meaning.  The  dash  has 
been  used  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  an  English  word  just  used  ;  thus,  not,  non ; 
and  — ,  neque. 


able,  to  be  — ,  posse. 

about,  circiter. 

accept,  accipere. 

accident,  casus. 

accomplish,  perficere. 

accord,  of  one's  own  — ,  sua  sponte. 

account,  on  —  of,  propter,  ob. 

accuse,  accusare. 

accustom  one's  self,  consuescere. 

across,  trans. 

add,  to  be  added,  accedere. 

admire,  admirarl. 

adverse,  adversus. 

advice,  auctoritas. 

advise,  monere. 


ajfc.ct,  afficere. 

affirm,  confirmare. 

against,  contra;  in  composition,  ob. 

agreed,  it  is  — ,  convenit. 

aid,  auxilium. 

akin  by  blood,  consanguineus. 

all,  omnis ;  in  — ,  omnino. 

ally,  socius. 

almost,  fere. 

alone,  solus. 

Alps,  Alpes. 

already,  jam. 

also,  quoque,  etiam,  item. 

altogether,  omnino. 

always,  semper. 

ambassador,  legatus. 

ambush,  insidiae. 


among 


313 


brother 


among,  inter,  apud. 

ample,  amplus. 

and,  et,  -que,  atque. 

angry,  to  be  —  at,  graviter  ferre. 

animal,  a  yoke  or  draught  — ,  jumen- 

tum. 

announce,  nuntiare. 
annoy,  vexare  ;  to  be  annoyed  at,  gravi- 
ter ferre. 
annual,  annuus. 
another,     alius;      belonging     to     — , 

alienus. 
answer,  responsum ;   to  — ,  respon- 

dere. 
any,  ullus,  aliqui ;  — one,  quisquam ; 

if —  one,  si  quis. 
approach,  adventus  ;  to  — ,  Instare, 

accedere. 
April,  Aprilis. 
arms,  arma. 
army,  exercitus ;    —  on    the   march, 

agmen;  —  in  line  of  battle,  acies. 
arrange,  constituere,  instituere. 
arrive,  pervemre. 
as,  ut  or  uti,  quam,  or  appositive. 
ask,  rogare. 
assign,  tribuere. 
assume,  sumere. 
at  last,  demum. 
attack,  aggredl,  adoriri. 
attempt,  conatum,  conatus. 
audacity,  audacia. 
authority,  auctoritas. 
avenge,  ulcisci. 

B. 

baggage,  without  — ,  expedltus. 
bank  (of  a  river),  rlpa. 
battle,  prcelium. 

be,  esse ;  —  near,  adesse  ;  —  distant, 
abesse  ;  —  in  command,  praeesse  ; 


—  of  interest,  interesse  ;  —  unwill- 
ing, nolle ;  —  well-disposed,  esse 
bono  animo,  cupere  ;  —  annoyed 
at,  graviter  ferre  ;  —  at  hand,  in- 
stare ;  —  on  hand,  suppetere. 

bear,  ferre  ;  —  into,  Inferre  ;  —  out, 
efferre. 

because,  quod. 

before,  ante,  prep.  ;  antea,  adv. ; 
priusquam,  conj. 

bey,  orare. 

began,  ccepit. 

beginning,  initium. 

behind,  post. 

beseech,  obsecrare. 

besides,  praeterquam. 

betake  one's  self,  se  recipere,  se  con- 
ferre. 

bflu-een,  inter. 

beware  of,  cavere. 

beyond,  extra. 

bid,  licerl. 

bind,  obstringere. 

blame,  reprehendere. 

boast,  gloriarl. 

boat,  linter. 

boldly,  audacter. 

boldness,  audacia. 

bordering  upon,  finitimus. 

bound,  continere. 

bountifully,  largiter. 

brave,  fortis. 

bravery,  fortitude. 

break  down,  rescindere ;  —  through, 
perrumpere. 

bribe,  largiri. 

bribery,  largitio. 

bridge,  pons. 

bring  together,  conducere,  conferre ; 
—  in,  importare  ;  —  back  word, 
renuntiare. 

brother,  frater. 


brotherly 


314 


departure 


brotherly,  fraternus. 
building,  sedificium. 
burn,  cremare ;  —  up,  comburere, 

exurere. 

but,  sed,  autem ;  —  if,  sin. 
but/,  emere,  coemere ;  —  back,  re- 

dimere. 
by,  a  or  ab. 

C. 

Calends,.  Kalendae. 

call  (summon)  vocare  ;  —  (by  name) 

appellare ;     —     together,   convo- 

care. 

camp,  castra. 
canton,  pagus. 

care,  to  take  — ,  curare,  cavere. 
carry,  portare  ;  —  together,  compor- 

tare ;    —  up,  subvehere ;   —  on, 

gerere. 

Cassias,  pertaining  to  — ,  Cassianus. 
cart,  carrus. 
cast  down,  dejicere. 
castle,  castellum. 
cause,  causa  ;  to  — ,  committere. 
cavalry,  equitatus  ;  adj.  equester. 
chain,  vinculum  or  vinclum. 
chance,  casus. 
change,  commutatio. 
character,  mores. 
chief,  princeps. 
children,  llberi. 
choose,  deligere. 
city,  urbs. 
civilization,  cultus. 
client,  cliens. 
cold,  frlgus. 

collect,  cogere,  conferre. 
come,    venire ;     —    together,    conve- 

nire  ;  —  through,  pervenire. 
comfort,  consolari. 


command,   imperare,   jubere,   prse- 

esse  ;  without  — ,  injussu. 
commit,  committere,  mandare. 
compel,  cogere. 
complain,  querl. 
concerning,  de. 
condemn,  damnare. 
confer  wi'h,  colloqul. 
conscious,  conscius. 
conspiracy,  conjuratio. 
consul,  consul. 
consume,  consumere. 
continue,  perseverare. 
continually,  continenter. 
converse  with,  colloqul. 
council,  concilium. 
country,  terra,  fines. 
courage,  animus. 
crime,  scelus. 
crowd,  vulgus. 
custom,  Institutum,  mos. 
cut  to  pieces,  concldere. 

D. 

daily,  quotidianus,  adj. ;  quotidie, 

adv. 

danger,  periculum, 
dare,  audere. 
daughter,  filia. 
day,  dies  ;  by  — ,  interdiu. 
death,  mors,  nex. 
debtor,  obaeratus. 
deceit,  dolus. 
deceive,  deoipere. 
decide,  statuere. 
declare,  proponere. 
decree,  consclscere. 
deep,  altus. 
defend,  defendere. 
depart,  proficiscl,  discedere. 
departure,  profectio. 


depth 


315 


feelingg 


depth,  altitude. 

describe,  designare. 

desert,  meritum. 

deserve,  mereri. 

desire,   voluntas,    cupiditas;    to  — , 

studere,  cupere. 
desist,  desistere. 
despair,  desperare. 
despise,  despicere. 
destroy,  toller e. 

destruction,  internecio,  perniciis. 
deter,  deterrere. 
determine,  constituere. 
devotion,  studium. 
die,  mori. 
differ,  differre. 
difficult,  difficilis. 
difficulty,  with  — ,  vix. 
disaster,  calamitas. 
discuss,  agere,  jactare. 
dismiss,  dimittere. 
disposition,  natura. 
distant,  to  be  — ,  abesse. 
district,  pagus. 
ditch,  fossa. 
divide,  dividere. 
do,  agere,  facere. 
doubt,  dubitatio  ;  to  — ,  dubitare. 
doubtful,  dubius. 
draw,  ducere  ;  —  up,  instruere. 
drive,  pellere,   agere ;    —  back,  re- 

pellere  ;  —  before,  propellere. 

E. 

eagerly,  cupide. 

early,  maturus. 

earth,  terra. 

easily,  facile. 

easy,  facilis. 

effeminate,  to  make  — ,  eflfe"minare. 

eighty,  octoginta. 


either  .  .  .  or,  aut  .  .  .  aut,  vel  .  .  . 

veL 

elect,  creare. 
elders,  majores. 
embassy,  legatio. 
embrace,  complectl. 
encourage,  confirmare. 
end,  finis ;  the  —  of,  extremus,  adj. 
enemy,  hostis. 
enervate,  eflfeminare. 
enforce,  exsequi. 
enough,  satis. 
enroll,  conscribere. 
especially,  maxime,  praesertim. 
establish,  confirmare,  statuere. 
even,  etiam  ;  not  — ,  ne  .  .  .  quidem. 
every,  omnis ;  —  one,  quisque- 
example,  exemplum. 
excel,  prsestare. 
excellent,  egregius. 
except,  prseter. 
expect,  exspectare. 
expense,  sumptus. 
extend,  patere. 
extent,  spatium. 
extreme,  extremus. 
eye,  oculus. 


F. 


face,  spectare. 

faith,  fides. 

fall,  cadere. 

far,  longe. 

farther,  ulterior,  adj. 

father,  pater  ;  father-in-law,  socer. 

favor,    beneficium,    gratia ;    to   — , 

favere. 

favorable,  secundus. 
fear,  timere,  vereri. 
feel,  sentire. 
feelings,  animus. 


few 


316 


hate 


few,  paucT  ;  a  very  — ,  perpauci. 

field,  ager. 

fifteen,  quindecim. 

fifth,  quintus. 

fight  back,  repugnare. 

find  out,  reperlre. 

finish,  perficere. 

fire,  to  set  —  to,  incendere. 

firm,  firmus. 

first,  primus. 

five,  quinque  ;  —  to  each,  quini ;  — 
hundred,  quingentl. 

flow,  fluere  ;  —  info,  influere. 

fi'tyht,  fuga. 

fodder,  pabulum. 

follow,  sequi;  —  up*  exsequl,  In- 
sequi. 

following,  posterus. 

fond,  cupidus. 

food,  pabulum. 

foot,  pes. 

for,  pro,  prep. ;  nam,  enim,  con- 
junctions. 

foraging,  pabulatio. 

force,  vis. 

forces,  copiae. 

ford,  vadum. 

foreign,  alienus. 

forest,  silva. 

forget,  oblivisci. 

former,  vetus,  pristinus,  superior. 

fortification,  munltio. 

fortify  strongly,  communire. 

fortune,  fortuna. 

forty,  quadraginta. 

four,  quattuor ;  —  hundred,  qua- 
dringenti. 

fourth,  quartus. 

fraternal,  fraternus. 

freedom,  llbertas. 

freely,  libere. 

fresh,  recens. 


friend,   amicus,    familiaris,    neces- 

sarius. 

friendship,  amlcitia. 
frighten  thoroughly,  perterrere. 
from,  a  or  ab,  e  or  ex. 
front,  in  — ,  adversus,  adj. 
fruitful,  frumentarius. 
furnish,  prsestare. 

G. 

Gaul,  Gallia. 
generosity,  liberalitas. 
Geneva,  Lake  — t  Lemannus. 
gentleness,  lenitas. 
Germans,  German!. 
give,  dare  ;  —  bountifully,  largiri. 
glory,  gloria  ;  to  — ,  gloriari. 
go,  Ire ;    —   out,   exlre ;    —   across, 

translre  ;  —  to,  accedere  ;  —  back 

and  forth,  commeare. 
god,  deus. 
good,  bonus. 
grain,  frumentum. 
grandfather,  avus. 
grasp,  prendere  or  prehendere. 
great ;  magnus  ;  so  — ,  tantus. 
greatly,  magnopere. 
Greeks,  Graeei. 
grief,  dolor. 
grieve  for,  dolere. 
grind,  molere. 
grow,  crescere. 
guard,  custos,  praesidium. 

H. 

hand,  right  — ,  dextra;   to  —  down, 

prodere. 
happen,  accidere. 
hasten,  contendere,  maturare. 
hate,  odisse. 


have 


317 


last 


have,  habere. 

he,  is. 

heavily,  graviter. 

height,  altitude. 

help,  auxilium. 

Helvetian,  Helvetius,  adj.  and  noun. 

her,  suus,  ejus. 

hesitate,  dubitare. 

hide,  abdere. 

high,  altus,  superus ;   high-born,  no- 

bilis. 

himself,  ipse. 
hire,  conducere. 
his,  suus,  ejus. 
hither,  citerior,  adj. 
hold,  tenere  ;  —  back,  retinere. 
home,  domus. 
honor,  honor. 

hopet  spes ;  to  — ,  sperare. 
horseman,  eques. 
hostage,  obses. 
house,  domus. 
household,  familia. 
how,  quam  ;  —  great,  quantus. 
hundred,    centum ;    four    — ,    qua- 

dringenti ;  Jive  — ,  qulngenti. 


I. 

/,  ego. 

Ides,  Idus. 

if,  si ;  but  — ,  sin. 

immortal,  tmmortalis. 

impede,  impedire. 

import,  importare. 

impunity,   impunitas ;    with  — ,   im- 

pune. 
in,  in. 

inconvenient,  incommodus.    . 
increase,   augere,  trans. ;    creseere, 

intrans. 
incredible,  incredibilis. 


induce,  inducere. 
influence,  auctoritas. 
information,  indicium. 
inhabit,  incolere. 
injustice,  injuria. 
insolently,  insolenter. 
instruct,  Instruere. 
insult,  contumelia» 
intercessor,  deprecator. 
Interest,  to  be  of — ,  interesse. 
interpreter,  interpres. 
intervene,  intercedere. 
intimate,  familiaris. 
into,  in. 
it,  is,  ea,  id. 
its,  suus,  ejus. 

J. 

join,   jungere ;    —   battle,   proelium 

committere. 
journey,  iter. 
judge,  judicare. 
justice,  justitia. 

K. 

keep  away,  prohibere. 

Kelts,  Celtse. 

kill,     interficere,     occidere,     con- 

ctdere. 

kindness,  gratia. 
kingdom,  regnum. 

know,  scire,  intellegere,  cognovisse. 
knight,  eques. 
known,  make  — ,  enuntiare. 


lake,  lacus. 
language,  lingua. 
last,  at  — ,  demum. 


law 


318 


nobility 


law,  lex. 

Jay,  —  icaste,  vastare,  popular!, 
depopularl ;  a  la //ing  waste,  popu- 
latio. 

lead,  ducere ;  —  into,  inducere ; 
—  to,  adducere  ;  —  through,  per- 
ducere  ;  —  out,  educere  ;  — across, 
traducere  ;  —  away,  abducere. 

leader,  dux,  princeps. 

leadership,  principatus. 

learn,  discere,  cognoscere. 

least,  minime. 

leave,  relinquere. 

length,  longitudo. 

less,  minus. 

lessen,  minuere,  deminuere. 

lest,  ne. 

liberty,  libertas. 

lieutenant,  legatus. 

life,  vita. 

lift  up,  sublevare,  tollere. 

line  (of  march),  agmen. 

little,  parvus. 

long  (of  time),  diu,  adv. ;  diuturnus, 
adj. 

look,  spectare. 

hose  thoroughly,  persolvere. 

love,  amor. 

lower,  Inferior,  adj. 

M. 

magistrate,  magistratus. 

make,  facere  ;  —  known,  enuntiare. 

man,  homo. 

many,  multus,  in  plur. ;     very    — , 

complures. 

march,  iter  ;  to  — ,  iter  facere. 
marriage,  matrimonium. 
marry,  nubere. 
may,  licet. 
means,  opes. 


meanwhile,  interea,  interim. 

measure,  metiri. 

meet,  convenire. 

meeting,  conventus. 

memory,  memoria. 

mention,  commemorare. 

merchant,  mercator. 

merit,  meritum  ;  to  — ,  mereri. 

mind,  animus. 

mine,  meus. 

misfortune,  incommodum. 

moderation,  temperantia. 

month,  mensis. 

moreover,  autem,  accedit  ut  or  quod. 

mother,  mater. 

mountain,  mons. 

move,  movere  ;  — deeply,  permovere, 

commovere. 
much,  multus. 
multitude,  multitude. 

N. 

name,  nomen. 

narrow,  angustus. 

narrowness,  angustise. 

nature,  natura. 

nay  more,  quln. 

near,  propinquus. 

nearest,  proximus. 

necessary,  necessarius  ;  it  is  — ,  opor- 

tet. 

necessarily,  necessario. 
neither  .  .  .  nor,  neque  .  .  .  neque. 
nevertheless,  tamen. 
new,  novus. 
next,  proximus. 
night,  by  — ,  noctu. 
nine,  novem. 
no  man,  no  one,  nemo. 
noble  (by  birth),  nobilis. 
nobility,  nobilitas. 


none 


319 


property 


none,  nullus. 

Noric,  Noricus. 

north,  septentrio. 

not,  non,  ne;  and  — ,  neque  (nee)  ; 
—  yet,  n5ndum;  —  even,  ne  .  .  . 
quidem. 

nothing,  nihil. 

notice,  animadvertere. 

nourish,  alere. 

number,  numerus ;  a  great  — ,  multi- 
tude. 

O. 

oath,  jusjurandum. 

obtain,  potirl,  consequi ;  —  one's  re- 
quest, impetrare. 

ocean,  Oceanus. 

of,  de. 

offence,  oflRmsio. 

offend,  offendere. 

often,  saepe. 

old,  antiquus,  vetus. 

one,  unus  ;  —  hundred,  centum ;  no 
— ,jiemo ;  —  at  a  time,  singuli. 

only,  solum,  modo. 

opinion,  existimatio. 

opportunity,  facultas. 

oppose,  to  be  opposed,  repugnare. 

or,  aut,  vel ;  —  if,  slve. 

order,  jubere. 

other,  alius,  alter. 

ought,  debere. 

our,  noster. 

out  of,  e  or  ex. 

overcome,  superare. 

overhang,  impendere. 

owe,  debere. 


P. 

pace,  passus. 
pardon,  condonare. 


part,  pars. 

pass  by,  prseterlre. 

past,  praeterita,  plur. 

pay  in  full,  persolvere. 

peace,  pax. 

people,  populus;  common  — ,  plebs, 

vulgus. 

peril,  periculum. 
permit,  patl;  it  is  permitted,  licet. 
persuade,  persuadere. 
pertain,  pertinere. 
place,  locus ;  to  the  same  — ,  eodem ; 

to  — ,  ponere ;  —  here  and  there, 

disponere  ;    —  aside,  deponere  ; 
—  at  a  disadvantage ,  impedlre. 
plan,  consilium. 
planting,  sementis. 
pleading,  dictio. 
plenty,  copia. 
plunder,  raplna. 
point  out,  designare. 
ponder,  deliberare. 
popularity,  gratia. 
possess,  obtinere. 
possession,  possessio. 
power,    potestas,    potentia,    nervi ; 

royal    — ,    regnum ;    supreme    — , 

imperium. 
powerful,  potens. 
pray,  orare. 
prayers,  preces. 
prefer,  prseferre. 
prepare,  comparare. 
press  upon,  instare. 
present,  praesens  ;  at  — ,  in  praesen- 

tia;  to  be  — ,  adesse. 
prevent,  prohibere. 
price,  pretium. 
private,  privatus. 
privately,  privatim. 
promise,  fides  ;  to  — ,  polliceri. 
property,  res  familiaris. 


proportion 


320 


proportion,  in  —  to,  pro. 
prove,  probare. 
province,  provincia. 
provisions,  cibaria. 
provoke,  lacessere. 
public,  publicus. 
puhlicly,  publice. 

punish,  ulcisci,  animadvertere  in. 
punishment,  supplicium,  pcena  ;  with- 
out — ,  impune. 
pursue,  persequi. 
pursuit,  studium. 
put  in  command,  prseficere. 
Purenean,  Pyrenaeus. 


Q- 


quickly,  celeriter. 

R. 

raft,  ratis. 

ravaging,  populatio. 

reach,  attingere. 

ready,  paratus. 

rear,  novissimum  agmen. 

reason,  causa. 

receive,  recipere. 

recent,  recens. 

recently,  nuper. 

reckless,  improbus. 

refinement,  humanitas. 

refrain,  temperare. 

relationship  (by  marriage),  adfinitas. 

relative,    propinquus,   necessarius, 

nouns. 

rely  upon,  niti. 
remaining,  reliquus. 
remarkable,  inslgnis,  incredibilis. 
remember,  reminisci. 
remind,  monere  ;  — forcibly,  commo- 

nefacere. 


remove,  removere. 

reply,  responsum ;  to  — ,  respondere. 

report,  renuntiare. 

republic,  respublica. 

resist,  subsistere. 

rest,  the  —  of,  reliquus. 

restore,  restituere. 

restrain,  coercere. 

retinue,  familia. 

retreat,  se  recipere. 

return,  reditio  ;  to  — ,  redlre,  revert! 

revolution,  novae  res. 

Rhine,  Hhenus. 

Rhone,  Rhodanus. 

richest,  ditissimus. 

ridge,  jugum. 

right,  jus. 

ripe,  maturus. 

rise,  orirl. 

river,  flumen. 

route,  iter. 

royal  power,  regnum. 

running  together,  concursus. 


S. 


same,  idem  ;  to. the  — place,  eodem. 

satisfy,  satisfacere. 

say,  dicere  ;  —  .  .  .  not,  negare. 

scarcely,  vix. 

scout,  explorator. 

second,  secundus. 

seditious,  seditiosus. 

see,  videre. 

seek,  peterej  quaerere. 

seem,  videre,  in  pass. 

Seine,  Sequana. 

seize,  occupare. 

self,  ipse. 

senate,  senatus. 

send,  mittere  ;  —  before,  praemittere. 


separately 


321 


through 


separately,  secreto,  separatim. 

servitude,  servitus. 

set  out,  proficisci ;  —  up,  collocare  ; 

—  forth,  proponere  ;   —  Jire  tot 

incendere. 
setting,  occasus. 
seventh,  septimus. 
severely,  graviter. 
ship,  navis. 

show,  ostendere,  demSnstrare. 
shun,  vitare. 
side,  on  this  —  of,  citra ;  from  all  sides, 

on  all  sides,  undique. 
sight,  conspectus. 
silent,  be  — ,  tacere. 
since,  cum. 
sinew,  nervus. 
sister,  soror. 
situated,  be  — ,  vergere. 
six  to  each,  seni. 
sixteen,  sedecim. 
slope,  vergere. 
small,  parvus. 
smoothness,  lenitas. 
snatch  away,  eripere. 
so,  ita,  tarn  ;  —  great,  tantus. 
soil,  solum. 
soldier,  miles. 
some,  nonnullus. 

sometimes,  nonnunquam,  interdum. 
son,  filius. 
sooner,     prius  ;      —     than,     prius- 

quam. 

sowing,  sementis. 
Spain,  Hispania. 
speak,  loqui. 
speech,  oratio. 
spy,  explorator. 
stand,  take  a  — ,  consistere. 
state,  civitas. 
storm,  oppugnare. 
strength,  vires. 


stretch  out,  pertinere. 
strive,  nitl,  contendere. 
strong,  firmus ;  be  — ,  valere. 
subdue,  pacare. 
sudden,  repentinus. 
sufficiently,  satis. 
summon,  convocare,  adhibere. 
sun,  sol. 
sure,  certus. 
surpass,  praecedere. 
suspicion,  suspicio  or  suspitio. 
Switzerland,  Helvetia. 


T. 


take,  capere  ;    —  upon,   suscipere  ; 

—  back,  recipere  ;  —  up,  sumere  ; 

—  bif  storm,  expugnare  ;  —  care, 
curare,  cavere  ;  —  a  stand,  con- 
sistere. 

tar,  vectigal,  portorium. 


ten,  decem. 

tend,  pertinere. 

territory,  fines. 

than,  quam. 

that,  ille,  is,  pronouns  ;  —  or  so  —  , 

ut,  utl  ;  —  or  but  —  ,  quin  ;  —  ,  — 

jzof  or  lest,  ne. 
their,  suus,  eorum. 
then,  turn. 
thence,  inde. 
there,  ibi,  illic. 
therefore,  itaque. 
thing,  res. 

think,  putare,  existimare,  arbitrari. 
third,  tertius. 
this,  hie,  is. 
thousand,  mille. 
three,  tres. 
through,  per. 


throw 


322 


wish 


throw,  jacere ;  to  keep  throwing,  jac- 

tare. 
thy,  tuus. 

time,  tempus  ;  at  the  same  — ,  simul. 
together,  una. 
touch  upon,  attingere. 
town,  oppidum. 
treachery,  insidise. 
trial,  judicium. 
troops,  copiee. 

trouble,  with  the  greatest  — ,  segerrime. 
true,  verus. 
try,  conari. 
turn  away,  avertere. 
twelve,  duodecim. 
twenty,  viginti 
two,  duo,  —  hundred,  ducentl. 


U. 

"unaware,  insciens. 

under,  sub. 

undergo,  subire. 

understand,  intellegere. 

undertake,  suscipere,  conari. 

undertaking,  conatum. 

unexpectedly,  improvlso. 

unexpecting,  inopinans. 

unfavorable,  adversus. 

unfriendly,  inimlcus. 

unite.,  adsciscere. 

until,  dum. 

unwilling,  invitus  ;  fo  be  — ,  nolle. 

urge,  hortarl,  incitare. 

use,  utl. 


V. 


valor,  virtus. 
vex,  vexare. 


victory,  victoria. 
village,  vicus. 
virtue,  virtus. 
visit,  commeare  ad. 


W. 

wage,  gerere  ;  —  upon,  inferre  ;  — 
war,  bellare. 

wait  for,  exspectare. 

wall,  murus. 

wander,  vagarl. 

war,  bellum. 

warlike,  bellicosus. 

warn,  monere. 

waste,  lay  — ,  vastare,  popular!. 

watch  (of  the  night),  vigilia. 

way,  via,  iter. 

we,  nos. 

weapon,  telum. 

weep,  flere. 

well-disposed,    to    be  — ,   esse    bond 
animo,  cupere. 

well-known,  nobilis. 

when,  ubi,  cum,  ut. 

where,  ubi,  qua. 

wherefore,  quare. 

whether  ...  or,  sive  .  .  .  sive. 

which,  qui;  —  (of  two),  uter. 

while,  dum. 

who,  qui. 

whole,  totus. 

wicked,  improbus. 

wide,  latus. 

widely,  late. 

width,  latitudo. 

wife,  uxor. 

win  over,  conciliate. 

winter  quarters,  hiberna ;  to  winter, 

hiemare. 
wish,  voluntas ;  to  — ,  velle. 


with 


323 


your 


•with,  cum. 

without,  sine  ;  —  command,  injiissu. 

witness,  testis. 

wonder  at,  admirari. 

wont,  be  — ,  consuevisse. 

word,  verbum. 

work,  opus. 

wrong,  injuria. 

wrong-doing,  maleficium. 


Y. 

year,  annus ;  two  years,  biennium. 

yearly,  annuus. 

yet,  tamen  ;  not  — ,  nondum. 

yield,  concedere. 

yoke,  jugum. 

yon,  vos,  tu. 

your,  vester,  tuus. 


£N 


Language  and  Grammar. 

Text-books  representing  the  best  established  usage 
and  the  most  progressive  thought  and  methods  in  lan- 
guage instruction. 

CLARK'S  GRAMMARS. 

By  S.  W.  CLARK,  A.M. 

Clark's  Easy  Lessons  in  Language  .        .        .    25  cents 
Clark's  Normal  Grammar 70  cents 

Clark's  method  of  presenting  the  subject  of  grammar  has  been  for 
many  years  very  popular  and  successful,  and  still  retains  a  large 
share  of  public  favor. 

CONKLIN'S      ENGLISH      GRAMMAR      AND 

COMPOSITION.         ....  .    65  cents 

By  B.  Y.  CONKLIN. 

A  complete  graded  course,  compassing  the  entire  range  of  the  usual 
two-book  course. 

HARVEY'S  REVISED  GRAMMARS. 

Harvey's  Revised  Elementary  Grammar  .        .    42  cents 
Harvey's  Revised  Practical  English  Grammar    05  cents 
Harvey's  Revised  Grammars  include  the  most  valuable  features  of  the 
"language  lesson"  system,  while  retaining  all  that  is  insepa- 
rable from  a  thorough  knowledge  of  technical  grammar. 

HOLBROOK'S  NEW  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

By  ALFRED  HOLBROOK,  President  National  Normal 

University 65  cents 

A  complete  course  in  grammar,  based  on  the  objective  method  of 
teaching. 

KERL'S  GRAMMARS. 

Kerl's  Language  Lessons 32  cents 

KerTs  Common-School  Grammar       .        .        .     72  cents 

These  two  books  form  a  practical  course  in  English  grammar.  In 
arrangement  of  subjects,  clearness  and  brevity  of  definitions, 
and  system  of  analysis,  Kerl's  Grammars  have  few  superiors. 

LYTE'S  GRAMMAR   AND  COMPOSITION.    .    65  cents 

By  E.  O.  LYTE. 

Designed  for  common-school  grades  or  for  pupils  who  have  received 
some  elementary  instruction  in  the  use  and  form  of  language. 
Prominence  is  given  to  composition  and  letter-writing. 


LANGUAGE   AND   GRAMMAR  — CONTINUED. 


MAXWELL'S  LANGUAGE  SERIES. 

Maxwell's     Primary    Lessons    in    Language 

and  Composition    ......    30  cents 

Maxwell's    Introductory   Lessons   in   English 

Grammar          .......    40  cents 

Maxwell's  Complete  Grammar  (in  press). 

Designed  to  train  young  children  in  the  proper  use  of  the  words  that 
belong  to  a  child's  vocabulary,  and  to  give  them  facility  in  the 
use  of  such  sentence  forms  as  they  can  readily  imitate  and 
employ. 

QUACKENBOS'S  LANGUAGE  SERIES. 

Quackenbos's  Illustrated  Lessons  in  our  Lan- 
guage        42  cents 

Quackenbos's  English   Grammar        .        .        .63  cents 
These  two  books  form  a  popular  course  in  language.     They  are  in- 
tended to  impart  a  practical  knowledge  of  English  grammar  in 
as  easy  and  attractive  a  manner  as  possible. 

SWINTON'S  LANGUAGE  SERIES. 

Swinton's  Language  Primer  .  .  .  .28  cents 
Swinton's  Language  Lessons  .  .  .  .38  cents 
Swinton's  New  English  Grammar  ...  56  cents 

Swinton's  Language  Series  takes  the  pupil  from  the  primary  grades 
through  the  advanced  grades  in  high  school-s,  academies,  etc. 
In  these  books  the  inductive  method  is  skillfully  applied  and 
the  correct  use  of  language  simply  and  practically  developed. 

WELLS'S  SHORTER  COURSE  IN  ENGLISH 

GRAMMAR  AND  COMPOSITION        .        .    36  cents 

By  W.   H.  WELLS,  A.M. 

This  is  a  complete  common-school  course  in  language  lessons,  gram- 
mar, composition  and  letter-writing.  It  is  a  book  of  progressive 
exercises  in  speaking  and  writing  English,  accompanied  by  a 
constant  application  of  principles  and  rules. 


Copies  of  the  above  books  will  be  mailed  to  any  address,  postpaid, 
on  receipt  of  price.  Full  catalogue  sent  on  application.  Correspond- 
ence in  reference  to  the  introduction  of  our  books  is  cordially  invited. 


AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY, 

NEW   YORK         .-.         CINCINNATI         .'.  CHICAGO 


American  History  for  Schools. 

BARNES'S  SERIES; 

Barnes's  Primary  History  of  the  United  States.     By  T.  F.  DONNELLY. 

For  Intermediate  Classes.     Fully  illustrated.     A  fitting  introduction  to 

Barnes's  Historical  Series.     60  cents. 
Barnes's  Brief  History  of  the  United  States.     Revised  to  the  present 

Administration.     The  page  has  been  enlarged  and  reset  in  larger  and 

clearer  type,  and   the  work  is  embellished   with  many  new  cuts  and 

maps.     $1.00. 

ECLECTIC   SERIES: 

Eclectic  Primary  History  of  the  United  States.    By  EDWARD  S.  ELLIS. 

A  book  for  younger  classes,  or  those  who  have  not  the  time  to  devote 

to  a  more  complete  history.     50  cents. 
New  Eclectic  History  of  the  United  States.     T>y  M.  E.  THALHEIMER. 

A  revised,  enlarged,  and  improved  edition  of  the  "  Eclectic  History  of 

the  United  States."     Fully  illustrated  with  engravings,  colored  plates, 

etc.     fi.oo. 

EGGLESTON'S   SERIES: 

Eggleston's  First  Book  in  American  History.  By  EDWARD  EGGLES- 
TON.  With  Special  Reference  to  the  Lives  and  Deeds  of  Great 
Americans.  Beautifully  illustrated.  A  history  for  beginners  on  a  new 
plan.  60  cents. 

Eggleston's  History  of  the  United  States  and  its  People.  By 
EDWARD  EGGLESTON.  For  the  Use  of  Schools.  Fully  illustrated  with 
engravings,  maps,  and  colored  plates.  $1.05. 

NILES'S  SCHOOL   HISTORY; 

Niles's  School  History  of  the  United  States.  By  SANFORD  NILES.  A 
comprehensive  book,  attractively  written  and  illustrated.  Adapted 
for  use  in  Grammar  Grades.  75  cents. 

QUACKENBOS   SERIES: 

Quackenbos's  Elementary  History  of  the  United  States.  Revised 
and  corrected  by  J.  D.  QUACKENBOS,  A.M.,  M.D.  Fully  illustrated 
with  maps  and  engravings.  60  cents. 

Quackenbos's  School  History  of  the  United  States.  From  the 
Earliest  Discoveries  to  the  Present  Time.  Illustrated.  $1.05. 

SWINTON'S   SERIES: 

Swinton's  First  Lessons  in  Our  Country's  History.  Admirably 
adapted  for  use  either  as  a  text-book  for  beginners  or  as  a  supplemen- 
tary reader.  48  cents. 

Swinton's  Condensed  History  of  the  United  States.  Revised  edition. 
Illustrated  with  colored  maps,  portraits,  etc.  90  cents. 


Any  of  the  above    books    will  be  mailed,  postpaid,   on  receipt  of  price. 
Complete  price-list  sent  on  application. 


AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY,  Publishers, 

NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI  •  .'   •  CHICAGO 

[*8] 


GEOGRAPHY. 


STANDARD  TWO-BOOK    SERIES. 


All  of  these  geographies  have  been  edited  with  great  care  to  present  the  latest 
information  regarding  the  geography  of  the  world  and  the  results  of  the  most 
recent  researches  and  discoveries.  They  also  have  special  editions  for  some 
or  all  of  the  States. 

APPLETONS'   STANDARD   GEOGRAPHIES. 

Appletons'  Elementary  Geography     .  .  .  -55  cents 

Appletons'  Higher  Geography  ....  $1.25 

The  elementary  book  is  objective  in  method.  In  the  advanced,  special  promi- 
nence is  given  to  industrial,  commercial,  and  practical  features. 

BARNES'S    NEW  GEOGRAPHIES.    By  JAMES  MONTEITH. 

Barnes's  Elementary  Geography         .  .  .  .55  cents 

Barnes's  Complete  Geography  ....  $1.25 

A  special  feature  of  these  books  is  the  plan  of  teaching  by  comparison,  or 
association  of  ideas.  The  advanced  book  includes  Physical,  Descrip- 
tive, Commercial,  and  Industrial  Geography. 

CORNELL'S   GEOGRAPHIES.     Revised  Series. 

Cornell's  Primary  Geography  (New  Edition)         .  .     42  cents 

Cornell's  Intermediate    Geography  (New  Edition)  .     86  cents 

These  popular  books  have  been  entirely  revised,  yet  the  distinctive  features 
of  the  series  remain  unchanged. 

ECLECTIC   GEOGRAPHIES.    New  Two-Book  Series. 

Eclectic  Elementary  Geography          .  .  .  .55  cents 

Eclectic  Complete  Geography  ....  $1.20 

The  text  of  the  Eclectic  Geographies  is  comprehensive  and  simply  worded. 

The  maps  show  physical  features  of  the  earth's  surface  fully  and 

accurately. 

HARPER'S    GEOGRAPHIES. 

Harper's  Introductory  Geography      .  .  .  .48  cents 

Harper's  School  Geography      .....  $1.08 

The  introductory  book  is  written  in  pleasing  narrative  style.  The  advanced 
book  presents  physical  and  political  elements  in  proper  order  of  se- 
quence, showing  relations  of  industries  and  wealth  to  physical  charac- 
teristics. 

NILES'S   GEOGRAPHIES. 

Niles's  Elementary  Geography  .  .  .  .44  cents 

Niles's  Advanced  Geography    .  ,  .  .  .  $1.00 

The  elementary  book  consists  of  interesting  reading  lessons,  cultivating  ob- 
servation and  exciting  the  imagination.  The  advanced  book  includes 
Mathematical,  Physical,  and  Political  Geography. 

SWINTON'S    GEOGRAPHIES. 

Swinton's  Introductory  Geography    .  .  .  .55  cents 

In  Readings  and  Recitations. 
Swinton's  Grammar-School  Geography         .  .  .  $1.25 

Physical,  Political,  and  Commercial. 

The  text  of  these  books  is  carefully  graded  so  that  the  Introductory  connects 
with  the  Grammar  School  without  the  need  of  any  intermediate  manual. 

Any  of  the  above  books  will  be  sent,  postpaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of 
price.  Correspondence  in  reference  to  the  introduction  of  these  books  is  cord- 
ially invited.  Special  allowances  made  when  books  are  exchanged. 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 

NEW  YORK  .'.  CINCINNATI  .'.  CHICAGO 

[*i4] 


Physical   Geography. 


In  addition  to  the  series  of  Political  Geographies  published  by 
the  American  Book  Company,  their  list  includes  the  following  standard 
and  popular  text-books  on  Physical  Geography  : 

APPLETONS'  PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 

Large  4to $1.60 

Prepared  by  a  corps  of  scientific  experts  with  richly-illustrated  engravings, 
diagrams,  and  maps  in  color,  and  including  a  separate  chapter  on  the 
geological  history  and  the  physical  features  of  the  United  States. 

CORNELL'S   PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY. 

Large  4to $1.12 

Revised  edition,  with  such  alterations  and  additions  as  were  found  necessary 
to  bring  the  work  in  all  respects  up  to  date. 

ECLECTIC   PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY. 

I2mo $1.00 

By  RUSSELL  HINMAN.  A  new  work  in  a  new  and  convenient  form.  All 
irrelevant  matter  is  omitted  and  the  pages  devoted  exclusively  to 
Physical  Geography  clearly  treated  in  the  light  of  recent  investiga- 
tions. The  numerous  charts,  cuts,  and  diagrams  are  drawn  with 
accuracy,  fully  illustrating  the  text. 

GUYOTS   PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY. 

Large  4to $1.60 

By  ARNOLD  GUYOT.  Revised,  with  new  plates  and  newly-engraved  maps.  A 
standard  work  by  one  of  the  ablest  of  modern  geographers.  All  parts 
of  the  subject  are  presented  in  their  true  relations  and  in  their  proper 
subordination. 

MONTEITH'S  NEW  PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 

4to       ?i.oo 

A  new  and  comprehensive  work,  embracing  the  results  of  recent  research  in 
this  field,  including  Physiography,  Hydrography,  Meteorology,  Ter- 
restial  Magnetism,  and  Vulcanology  The  topical  arrangement  of 
subjects  adapts  the  work  for  use  in  grammar  grades  as  well  as  for  high 
and  normal  schools. 


A  ny  of  the  above  books  will  be  mailed,  postpaid,  on  receipt  of  price.     Full 
price-list  of  books  on  all  subjects  for  all  grades  will  be  sent  on  application. 

AMERICAN   BOOK  COMPANY, 

NEW  YORK          .-.          CINCINNATI  .-.  CHICAGO 

[*i5] 


Standard  Two-Book  Series  in  Arithmetic, 

Popular  Books,  Freshly  Written,  Attractive,  Carefully  Graded. 

APPLETONS'     STANDARD    ARITHMETICS. 

Appletons'  Numbers  Illustrated       ....      36  cents 
Appletons'  Numbers  Applied 75  cents 

These  books  embody  many  new  and  practical  features.  The  primary 
book  is  objective  in  method  ;  the  advanced  book  inductive. 

FICKLIN'S    NEW    ARITHMETICS. 

Ficklin's  Elementary  Arithmetic     ....      40  cents 
Ficklin's  National  Arithmetic 70  cents 

A  complete  arithmetical  course,  designed  to  teach  arithmetic  by  the 
smallest  expenditure  of  time,  labor  and  money. 

FISH'S     NEW    ARITHMETICS. 

Fish's  Arithmetic,  Number  One       ....      30  cents 
Fish's  Arithmetic,  Number  Two     ....     60  cents 

The  latest  and  best  result  of  Mr.  Fish's  life-long  studies  in  this  de- 
partment of  text-book  authorship.  The  books  are  fresh  and 
bright  in  methods  of  treatment  and  present  many  novel  features. 

HARPER'S  GRADED  ARITHMETICS. 

Harper's  First  Book  in  Arithmetic        ...      30  cents 
Harper's  Second  Book  in  Arithmetic    ...     60  cents 

A  common-school  series,  complete  in  two  books,  combining  oral  and 
written  work.  The  minimum  of  theory  and  maximum  of 
practice. 

MILNE'S    ARITHMETICS. 

Milne's  First  Lessons  in  Arithmetic     ...      22  cents 
Milne's  Practical  Arithmetic 50  cents 

A  complete  course  prepared  on  the  inductive  method,  including  oral 
and  written  exercises. 

WHITE'S     NEW    ARITHMETICS. 

White's  First  Book  of  Arithmetic ....      30  cents 
White's  New  Complete  Arithmetic       ...      65  cents 

White's  New  Arithmetics  constitute  one  of  the  strongest  and  most  at- 
tractive two-book  series  published. 

Any  of  the  above  books  ivill  be  sent,  postpaid,  to  any  address  on 
receipt  of  price.  Our  complete  list  embraces  standard  and  popular 
books  for  all  grades.  Correspondence  is  cordially  invited. 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY, 

NEW  YORK       _V>*^      CINCINNATI          .'.          CHICAGO 

[*4l 


OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


30w-6,'14 


U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


